HGTV User Guide

User Guide
HGTV HOME DESIGN SOFTWARE USER GUIDE
License
PLEASE READ CAREFULLY!
1. Grant of License. Nova Development (Nova Development) hereby grants you (either an individual person or a single legal entity) a non-exclusive license to use the HGTV home design software and related documentation (collectively, the Software) solely in accordance with the terms and conditions of this license agreement (License). This License sets forth your rights and responsibilities and other terms and conditions that relate to your use of the Software. Before you use the Software, please read this License as carefully as you would read any other legal document. If you do not agree with all of the terms and conditions of this License, do not use the Software and return it within 90 days of purchase in accordance with the procedure set forth in the Money Back Guarantee section below for a full refund. Your installation or use of the Software means that you have read and agree to all of the terms and conditions of this License. 2. Reservation of Rights. Nova Development hereby reserves all rights not expressly granted by this License. Nothing in this License constitutes a sale or grant of any ownership rights in or to the Software. 3. Permitted Use. You may install and/or use one copy of the Software on a single computer. You may make a second copy of the Software to install and/or use on a portable computer for the exclusive use of the primary user of the first copy of the Software. If the original media is required to use the Software, you may make one copy of the Software for archival or back up purposes. The Software may not be shared or used concurrently on different computers. You should contact Nova Development to obtain a site license if you need to use the Software simultaneously on multiple computers or a network. 4. Prohibited Use. You may not use the Software except as expressly permitted by this License. For example, you may not: (i) copy or reproduce any part of the Software, except as permitted by law or Section 3 of this License; (ii) sublicense, copy, lend, lease, rent, transfer or otherwise make any part of the Software available to any third party, except in accordance with Section 10 this License; (iii) decompile, reverse-engineer or disassemble the Software or otherwise attempt to obtain the source code of the Software; (iv) alter, translate, adapt or modify the Software in any way; or (v) remove or alter the copyright or trademark notices on the Software. 5. Use of Content. You may use the clip art, video clips and all other content (Content) included in the Software only to create presentations, publications, pages for the World Wide Web and Intranets, and products (collectively, Works). You may not use the Content for any other purpose whatsoever. For example and without limitation, you may not: (i) permit any third party to use any Content unless it is used in a Work; (ii) sell or distribute (commercially or otherwise) the Content as standalone images, clip art or video clips, or in graphics catalogs, design books, compilations, collections, templates, designs, stock engravings or the like; or (iii) distribute or make available electronic copies of the Content to third parties in any manner, including without limitation, via the Internet, on any tangible media or by broadcast, that is intended or designed to enable a third party to copy the Content for its own use. Portions of the Content may be governed by separate license agreements as provided by the Content's publishers. Please refer to the additional license agreements provided with those sets of Content to determine your rights. 6. Responsibility For Use Of Content. You are completely responsible for your use of the Content. You may only use the Content responsibly, in a manner consistent with the exercise of good judgment. For example, and without limitation, you may not use the Content in any manner that: (i) infringes the copyright, trademark, patent, trade secret, right of publicity or any other right of a third party; (ii) is or may be libelous, defamatory or slanderous; (iii) denigrates or offends any ethnic, racial, sexual or religious group, or persons who are physically or mentally challenged; (iv) is designed to or will harass, threaten, defame or abuse others; (v) exploits images or the likeness of individuals under 18 years of age; or (vi) characterizes any other unlawful activity as acceptable, glamorous or desirable. 7. Third-Party Intellectual Property. Certain portions of the Content may consist of the copyrights, trademarks, service marks, trade names or other intellectual property of third parties. These portions of the Content are provided for the convenience of certain users of the Software who are expressly authorized to use them by their owners. You may not use any third-party intellectual property without their express authorization. 8. U.S. Government Restricted Rights. The Software is licensed to the U.S. Government with RESTRICTED RIGHTS. Use, duplication or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 and the Commercial Computer Software clause at 48 CFR 52.227-19, as applicable. Contractor/manufacturer is Nova Development, 23801 Calabasas Road, Suite 2005, Calabasas, California 91302. 9. Export Restrictions. You are responsible for complying with all foreign and domestic laws and trade regulations. The Software and its underlying information and technology may be not downloaded or otherwise exported or re-exported: (i) into Cuba, Libya, Sudan, North Korea, Iran, Syria, or any other country subject to a U.S. embargo, or to any national or resident of any of these countries or (ii) to any person or entity on the U.S. Treasury Department's list of Specially Designated Nationals or the U.S. Commerce Department's Denied Persons List or Entities List. By using the Software you agree to the foregoing and represent and warrant that: (i) no U.S. federal agency has suspended, revoked or denied your export privileges; (ii) you are not located in any such country or under the control of a national or resident of any such country or on any such list; and (iii) you will not export or re-export the Software to any prohibited county or to any prohibited person, entity or end-user as specified by U.S. export controls.
END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT
10. Assignment. You may only assign the Software to another party if that party takes the Software subject to all of the terms and conditions of this License. If you assign the Software, you may not use the Software or retain any copies of it in any format whatsoever and all of your rights under this License will immediately terminate. 11. Term. The term of this License with you will continue until you assign the Software in accordance with Section 10 or you breach any term of this License. 12. Money-Back Guarantee. Without limiting any of the provisions of Sections 13 through 16, if for any reason you are not satisfied with the Software you may return it in its original condition within 90 days of purchase for a full refund. If the store where you purchased the Software does not support this money-back guarantee, you may return the Software directly to Nova Development. Call Nova Development at the phone number listed on the back cover of your User Manual to obtain a return authorization number. Then send the Software, along with the original store receipt, to the address you are given when you call Nova Development. Nova Development cannot accept returns without prior authorization. 13. LIMITED WARRANTY. NOVA DEVELOPMENT ONLY WARRANTS THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL BE FREE FROM MATERIAL DEFECTS FOR A PERIOD OF 90 DAYS FOLLOWING ITS PURCHASE. IF A MATERIAL DEFECT OCCURS WITHIN 90 DAYS, YOU MAY RETURN THE SOFTWARE TO NOVA DEVELOPMENT FOR A FREE REPLACEMENT. EXCEPT FOR ANY ADDITIONAL RIGHTS THAT MAY EXIST IN YOUR JURISDICTION, THE FOREGOING REMEDY IS YOUR SOLE REMEDY FOR NOVA DEVELOPMENTS BREACH OF THIS WARRANTY. 14. DISCLAIMER. WITH THE EXCEPTION OF THE FOREGOING EXPRESS WARRANTY, THE SOFTWARE IS LICENSED TO YOU AS IS. NOVA DEVELOPMENT DOES NOT REPRESENT OR WARRANT THAT THE SOFTWARE, ITS USE OR THE WORK PRODUCT PRODUCED USING THE SOFTWARE: (i) WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR FREE OF INACCURACIES OR ERRORS; (ii) WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS; OR (iii) WILL OPERATE IN THE CONFIGURATION OR WITH THE HARDWARE OR OTHER SOFTWARE YOU MAY SELECT. NOVA DEVELOPMENT HEREBY DISCLAIMS ANY AND ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, MERCHANTABILITY AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT NOVA AND ITS AFFILIATES ARE NOT ARCHITECTS AND ARE NOT RENDERING ARCHITECTURAL ADVICE OR SERVICES. YOU FURTHER ACKNOWLEDGE THAT THE SOFTWARE IS NOT A SUBSTITUTE FOR THE ADVICE OF AN ARCHITECT AND THAT THE PLANS, DIAGRAMS, DRAWINGS AND OTHER MATERIALS CREATED BY USING THE SOFTWARE ARE NOT ARCHITECTURAL PLANS, AND THAT YOU SHOULD CONSULT AN ARCHITECT BEFORE COMMENCING ANY WORK THAT WOULD REQUIRE LICENSES OR PERMITS. 15. EXCLUSION. NOVA DEVELOPMENT WILL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANYONE ELSE FOR CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT, PUNITIVE OR SPECIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING DAMAGES RELATING TO LOST PROFITS, LOST DATA OR LOSS OF GOODWILL) ARISING OUT OF, RELATING TO OR CONNECTED WITH THE USE OF THE SOFTWARE, REGARDLESS OF THE NATURE OF THE CLAIM, AND EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. 16. LIMITATION. IN NO EVENT WILL NOVA DEVELOPMENT'S TOTAL LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES ARISING FROM, RELATING TO OR CONNECTED WITH THIS LICENSE OR THE SOFTWARE EVER EXCEED THE PRICE YOU HAVE PAID FOR THE SOFTWARE, REGARDLESS OF THE NATURE OF THE CLAIM. 17. APPLICABILITY OF EXCLUSIONS AND LIMITATIONS. SOME JURISDICTIONS MAY NOT PERMIT CERTAIN OF THE EXCLUSIONS AND LIMITATIONS SET FORTH IN THIS LICENSE, IN WHICH CASE THEY MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. 18. Miscellaneous. This License is governed by the law of California applicable to contracts entered into and performed entirely within California irrespective of its conflict of laws principles. Any action arising under, relating to or connected with this License or the use of the Software will be filed only in an appropriate court located in Los Angeles County, California, and the parties irrevocably consent and submit to the exclusive personal jurisdiction of such courts for such purposes. The Section titles in this License are for convenience only and will not be deemed to affect the provisions of the Sections. No waiver, amendment, supplementation or modification of any provision of this License will be effective, except pursuant to a written instrument signed by both parties. Any valid waiver made hereunder will only apply to the subject matter expressly set forth in such waiver. In the event that any portion of this License is held invalid or unenforceable, such portion will be deemed modified so as to make it valid and enforceable, consistent with the parties' intentions or if it cannot be so modified, will be deemed stricken, with the remaining portions of this License to remain in full force and effect. This License constitutes the entire understanding and agreement, and supersedes any and all prior or contemporaneous representations, understandings and agreements, between the parties with respect to the subject matter of this License. Nothing contained in this License will be deemed to create a joint venture or partnership between you and Nova Development, or to create any third party rights. This License is binding on and made for the benefit of the parties and their successors and permitted assigns. The prevailing party in any action or proceeding arising under, relating to or connected with this License shall be entitled to recover from the other party the reasonable attorneys fees and costs incurred in such action or proceeding.
Copyright
Copyright 2008 Scripps Networks, LLC. Software Copyright 2008 Cadsoft. Portions Copyright 2008 Nova Development and its licensors. Portions Copyright 2008 CBN Systems. All rights reserved. Portions of this product were created using LEADTOOLS 19911997 LEAD Technologies, Inc.; Helios32 Radiosity Renderer 19942008 Heart Consultants Ltd.; 3D Studio File Format Library 19962001 J.E. Hoffmann; DWGDirect 2005 Open Design Alliance Inc.; Plant Encyclopedia 19942008 DiComp. Portions of content 19912008 Cad Easy Corporation; 2001 Corbis Images; 19892006 Imagetects. The Nova logo is a registered trademark of Nova Development. HGTV, HGTV Pro, and the HGTV and HGTV Pro logos are trademarks of Scripps Networks, LLC. CBN Systems is a trademark of CBN Systems. The PERFECT PALETTE Color System and all rights therein is property of Dunn Edwards Corporation, used under license by California Products Corporation. Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista and the Windows Vista Start button are trademarks and/or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries. Intel and Pentium are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. ImageCELs is a registered trademark of IMAGETECTS. Other product names used herein are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders and are used for identification purposes only.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Table of Contents
THE BASICS 1
CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION .......................................................... 3

Introducing HGTV Home Design Software.................................................... 4 HGTV Home Design Software Features ........................................................ 5 Registering HGTV Home Design Software.................................................... 8 Contacting Technical Support ....................................................................... 8 Using Help for HGTV Home Design Software ............................................... 9 Conventions for This User Guide ................................................................ 10
CHAPTER 2: INSTALLING HGTV HOME DESIGN SOFTWARE ... 11

System Requirements................................................................................... 12 Preparing Your Computer............................................................................. 12 Installing Your HGTV Home Design Software............................................. 13 Uninstalling Your HGTV Home Design Software ........................................ 15
CHAPTER 3: USING HGTV HOME DESIGN SOFTWARE ............. 17

Starting HGTV Home Design Software ........................................................ 18 Starting a New Home Design Project .......................................................... 18 The HGTV Software Workspace ................................................................... 19 Customizing HGTV Software ........................................................................ 23 Changing Views............................................................................................. 24 Saving Projects ............................................................................................. 26 Opening Saved Projects ............................................................................... 27 Changing Your Mind ..................................................................................... 28 Exiting HGTV Home Design Software ......................................................... 28
CHAPTER 4: LEARNING HGTV HOME DESIGN SOFTWARE ...... 29

Getting Started............................................................................................... 30 Building a House ........................................................................................... 30 Adding Walls, Doors, Windows, and Openings.......................................... 34 Finishing the House Design ......................................................................... 42 Viewing the Model ......................................................................................... 44 Creating Landscaping................................................................................... 47 Working with the Plan ................................................................................... 55 Adding Text to the Plan ................................................................................ 57 3D Real View Rendering ............................................................................... 62 Congratulations............................................................................................. 64
CHAPTER 5: BUILDING LOCATIONS............................................. 65

Defining Building Locations......................................................................... 66 Adding a Building Location.......................................................................... 67 Editing a Building Location.......................................................................... 68 Deleting a Building Location........................................................................ 69 Making a Building Location Current............................................................ 69 Allowing a Different Current Location Per View Window .......................... 70 Adjusting Location Dimming ....................................................................... 70
CHAPTER 6: DRAWING AND EDITING BASICS............................ 71

Inserting Elements ........................................................................................ 72 Going into Selection Mode for Editing ........................................................ 72 Selecting Elements for Editing .................................................................... 73 Deselecting Elements ................................................................................... 74 Accessing Edit Tools .................................................................................... 74
CONTROLLING THE VIEW
75
CHAPTER 7: 2D AND 3D VIEWING................................................. 77

Two Dimensional Viewing............................................................................. 78 Three Dimensional Viewing.......................................................................... 79 Selecting a Background for 3D Views ......................................................... 83 Navigating in 3D ............................................................................................ 88 Creating Dynamic Cutaway Views ............................................................... 92 Changing the Display Mode ......................................................................... 93
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER 8: ELEVATIONS AND SECTIONS................................. 97

Viewing Elevations........................................................................................ 98 Creating a Section View.............................................................................. 104
CHAPTER 9: ZOOMING AND PANNING ...................................... 109

Zooming In ................................................................................................... 110 Zooming Out ................................................................................................ 110 Zooming in Realtime ................................................................................... 110 Zooming With a Scroll Wheel Mouse .........................................................111 Zooming a Selected Area ............................................................................111 Zooming to Fit the Drawing Area............................................................... 112 Panning Across a Drawing......................................................................... 112 Zooming Back to the Previous View ......................................................... 113
CHAPTER 10: FRAMING ............................................................... 115

Displaying Framing ..................................................................................... 116 Specifying Framing Members for Walls .................................................... 116 Specifying Framing Members for Floors .................................................. 117 Specifying Framing Members for Ceilings ............................................... 118 Specifying Framing Members for Roofs ................................................... 119
CHAPTER 11: VIEW FILTER ......................................................... 121

Using the View Filter ................................................................................... 122 Filtering Elements ....................................................................................... 124 Displaying and Hiding Building Locations ............................................... 126 Displaying and Hiding Elements on the Terrain ....................................... 127 Displaying and Hiding Other Items ........................................................... 128 Making Items Selectable or Non-Selectable ............................................. 129
CHAPTER 12: VIEW MANAGEMENT............................................ 131

Managing View Windows............................................................................ 132 Managing View Window Groups ................................................................ 138 Displaying and Hiding the View Tabs........................................................ 139
BUILDING YOUR HOME
141
CHAPTER 13: HOUSE BUILDER WIZARD................................... 143

Using the House Builder Wizard................................................................ 144
CHAPTER 14: WALLS ................................................................... 149

Drawing Walls .............................................................................................. 150 Adding a Story............................................................................................. 153 Replacing Walls ........................................................................................... 155 Editing the Properties of a Wall ................................................................. 156 Changing the Length of Walls.................................................................... 163 Raising or Lowering a Wall......................................................................... 163 Rotating a Wall............................................................................................. 163 Curving a Wall.............................................................................................. 164 Breaking a Wall............................................................................................ 164 Applying Different Materials to Walls ........................................................ 165 Solid Filling Walls........................................................................................ 166 Creating a Basement or Crawlspace Foundation..................................... 167
CHAPTER 15: COLUMNS AND FOOTINGS ................................. 169

Inserting Columns....................................................................................... 170 Attaching Strip Footings to Walls .............................................................. 172 Attaching Mono Footings to Columns ...................................................... 176
CHAPTER 16: DOORS, WINDOWS, AND OPENINGS ................. 179

Inserting Doors............................................................................................ 180 Inserting Windows ...................................................................................... 181 Inserting Wall Openings ............................................................................. 184 Setting Options for Inserting Doors, Windows and Wall Openings ....... 186 Creating a Niche .......................................................................................... 186 Moving a Door, Window, or Wall Opening ................................................ 189 Flipping a Door, Window, or Wall Opening ............................................... 190 Flipping a Door Swing ................................................................................ 190 Editing Door Properties .............................................................................. 192 Editing Window Properties......................................................................... 199 Editing Wall Opening Properties................................................................ 206 Deleting a Door, Window, or Opening ....................................................... 208
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER 17: FLOORS ................................................................. 209

Inserting Floors ........................................................................................... 210 Dividing an Automatic Floor ...................................................................... 213 Moving a Floor............................................................................................. 214 Resizing or Reshaping a Floor .................................................................. 215 Curving a Floor Edge .................................................................................. 216 Raising or Lowering a Floor....................................................................... 216 Editing the Thickness of a Floor................................................................ 217 Applying Different Materials to Floors ...................................................... 217 Cutting Openings in Floors ........................................................................ 217 Deleting a Floor ........................................................................................... 220
CHAPTER 18: CEILINGS ............................................................... 221

Inserting Ceilings ........................................................................................ 222 Creating a Tray Ceiling ............................................................................... 224 Creating a Cathedral Ceiling ...................................................................... 226 Moving a Ceiling.......................................................................................... 227 Resizing or Reshaping a Ceiling ............................................................... 228 Curving a Ceiling Edge ............................................................................... 228 Raising or Lowering a Ceiling.................................................................... 229 Applying Different Colors and Materials to Ceilings ............................... 229 Cutting Openings in Ceilings ..................................................................... 230 Deleting a Ceiling ........................................................................................ 232
CHAPTER 19: STAIRS, RAMPS, AND RAILINGS........................ 233

Inserting Stairs and Ramps ........................................................................ 234 Moving a Staircase or Ramp ...................................................................... 235 Rotating a Staircase or Ramp .................................................................... 235 Editing Stair Properties .............................................................................. 236 Editing Ramp Properties ............................................................................ 244 Deleting a Staircase or Ramp..................................................................... 248 Inserting Railings on Staircases and Ramps............................................ 248 Editing Railing Properties .......................................................................... 251 Changing the Length of a Railing .............................................................. 254 Stretching a Railing..................................................................................... 254 Rotating a Railing........................................................................................ 254 Deleting a Railing ........................................................................................ 255
CHAPTER 20: ROOFS ................................................................... 257

Inserting a Roof ........................................................................................... 258 Selecting a Roof for Editing ....................................................................... 261 Converting a Hip Roof to a Gable Roof..................................................... 262 Moving a Roof.............................................................................................. 265 Rotating a Roof............................................................................................ 265 Stretching a Roof ........................................................................................ 265 Reshaping a Roof........................................................................................ 266 Breaking a Roof Surface............................................................................. 266 Editing Roof Properties .............................................................................. 266 Applying a Different Roofing Material ....................................................... 269 Inserting an Opening in a Roof .................................................................. 270 Inserting Dormers ....................................................................................... 271 Deleting a Roof ............................................................................................ 274
DESIGNING THE INTERIOR
275
CHAPTER 21: KITCHEN BUILDER WIZARD................................ 277

Creating a Kitchen with the Kitchen Builder Wizard................................ 278
CHAPTER 22: CABINETS.............................................................. 283

Inserting Cabinets ....................................................................................... 284 Moving a Cabinet......................................................................................... 284 Rotating a Cabinet....................................................................................... 285 Raising or Lowering a Cabinet................................................................... 285 Editing Cabinet Properties ......................................................................... 286 Applying Different Finishes to Cabinets ................................................... 289 Inserting a Sink into a Cabinet................................................................... 290 Deleting a Cabinet ....................................................................................... 290
CHAPTER 23: APPLIANCES ......................................................... 291

Inserting Appliances ................................................................................... 292 Moving Appliances...................................................................................... 293 Rotating Appliances.................................................................................... 293 Raising or Lowering Appliances................................................................ 294 Editing Appliance Properties ..................................................................... 295 Applying Colors and Materials to Appliances .......................................... 296 Deleting an Appliance................................................................................. 296
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER 24: INTERIOR FURNITURE, ELECTRONICS, AND OTHER ACCESSORIES.......................................................... 297

Inserting Interior Furniture ......................................................................... 298 Inserting Electronics................................................................................... 298 Inserting Interior Accessories ................................................................... 299 Moving Furnishing Elements ..................................................................... 299 Rotating Furnishing Elements ................................................................... 300 Raising or Lowering Furnishing Elements ............................................... 300 Editing the Properties of Furnishing Elements ........................................ 301 Applying Different Colors, Fabrics, and Finishes to Furnishing Elements........................................................................... 302 Deleting Furnishing Elements.................................................................... 302
CHAPTER 25: INTERIOR EQUIPMENT ........................................ 303

Inserting Equipment ................................................................................... 304 Moving Equipment ...................................................................................... 304 Rotating Equipment .................................................................................... 305 Raising or Lowering Equipment ................................................................ 305 Editing the Properties of Equipment ......................................................... 306 Applying Different Colors or Materials to Equipment.............................. 307 Deleting Equipment .................................................................................... 307
UTILITIES
309
CHAPTER 26: INTERIOR LIGHTING............................................. 311

Inserting Interior Light Fixtures ................................................................. 312 Moving a Light Fixture ................................................................................ 313 Rotating a Light Fixture .............................................................................. 313 Raising or Lowering a Light Fixture .......................................................... 314 Editing Light Fixture Properties ................................................................ 314 Applying Different Materials to Light Fixtures ......................................... 319 Deleting a Light Fixture .............................................................................. 319 Changing the Quality Level of Interactive Lighting ................................. 320
CHAPTER 27: ELECTRICAL ......................................................... 321

Inserting Outlets and Switches .................................................................. 322 Inserting Thermostats and Smoke Detectors ........................................... 322 Raising or Lowering an Electrical Element............................................... 323 Moving an Electrical Element..................................................................... 323 Editing the Properties of an Electrical Element ....................................... 324 Applying a Different Color or Material to an Electrical Element ............. 325 Deleting an Electrical Element ................................................................... 325 Inserting Electrical Wiring .......................................................................... 326
CHAPTER 28: PLUMBING ............................................................. 329

Inserting Plumbing Fixtures....................................................................... 330 Moving a Plumbing Fixture ........................................................................ 331 Rotating a Plumbing Fixture ...................................................................... 331 Raising or Lowering a Plumbing Fixture .................................................. 332 Editing Plumbing Fixture Properties ......................................................... 332 Applying a Different Color or Finish to a Plumbing Fixture.................... 334 Deleting Plumbing Fixtures........................................................................ 334
CHAPTER 29: HVAC ...................................................................... 335

Inserting Heating and Cooling Elements .................................................. 336 Inserting Floor Registers and Cold Air Returns....................................... 336 Inserting a Chimney .................................................................................... 337 Moving HVAC Elements .............................................................................. 338 Rotating HVAC Elements ............................................................................ 339 Raising or Lowering HVAC Elements ........................................................ 339 Editing the Properties of an HVAC Element ............................................. 340
TERRAIN MODELING
341
CHAPTER 30: TERRAIN MODELING............................................ 343

Defining the Basic Terrain .......................................................................... 344 Creating Hills and Valleys........................................................................... 346 Creating Berms and Trenches ................................................................... 348 Creating Plateaus ........................................................................................ 353 Creating Slopes ........................................................................................... 356
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER 31: SITE BOUNDARIES............................................... 359

Defining Your Building Lot ......................................................................... 360 Creating a Site Boundary ........................................................................... 361 Moving a Site Boundary ............................................................................. 366 Stretching a Site Boundary ........................................................................ 367 Editing Site Boundary Edge Properties .................................................... 367 Curving a Site Boundary Edge .................................................................. 369 Editing a Site Boundarys Line, Text, and Peg Styles.............................. 370 Selecting a Method of Measurement When Drawing a Site Boundary... 372 Deleting a Site Boundary............................................................................ 372
ADDING EXTERIOR DESIGN ELEMENTS
373
CHAPTER 32: FENCES AND GATES ........................................... 375

Inserting a Fence......................................................................................... 376 Inserting a Gate ........................................................................................... 381
CHAPTER 33: DECKS ................................................................... 385

Using the Deck Builder Wizard .................................................................. 386 Building a Deck with the Deck Tool........................................................... 390 Moving a Deck ............................................................................................. 391 Rotating a Deck ........................................................................................... 392 Stretching a Deck ........................................................................................ 392 Reshaping a Deck ....................................................................................... 392 Curving a Deck Edge .................................................................................. 393 Changing the Direction of Deck Boards ................................................... 393 Editing Deck Properties.............................................................................. 394 Controlling the Display of Deck Railings and Skirting ............................ 398 Inserting an Opening in a Deck ................................................................. 400 Adding Stairs to a Deck .............................................................................. 402 Moving Deck Stairs ..................................................................................... 402 Editing the Properties of Deck Stairs ........................................................ 403 Deleting Deck Stairs.................................................................................... 406 Deleting a Deck ........................................................................................... 406
CHAPTER 34: PATIOS................................................................... 407

Creating a Patio ........................................................................................... 408 Moving a Patio ............................................................................................. 409 Rotating a Patio ........................................................................................... 409 Resizing a Patio........................................................................................... 409 Reshaping a Patio ....................................................................................... 410 Curving a Patio ............................................................................................ 410 Editing Patio Properties.............................................................................. 411 Applying a Different Material to a Patio .................................................... 412 Deleting a Patio ........................................................................................... 412
CHAPTER 35: SHED BUILDER WIZARD...................................... 413

Building a Shed with the Shed Builder Wizard......................................... 414 Moving a Shed ............................................................................................. 418 Rotating a Shed ........................................................................................... 418 Editing a Shed ............................................................................................. 419 Deleting a Shed ........................................................................................... 419
CHAPTER 36: RETAINING WALLS............................................... 421

Drawing Retaining Walls............................................................................. 422 Changing the Length of Retaining Walls .................................................. 423 Curving a Retaining Wall ............................................................................ 423 Breaking a Retaining Wall .......................................................................... 424 Editing the Properties of a Retaining Wall ................................................ 424 Applying Different Materials to Retaining Walls....................................... 425 Deleting a Retaining Wall............................................................................ 425
CHAPTER 37: SIDEWALKS, PATHWAYS, AND DRIVEWAYS ... 427

Drawing Sidewalks, Pathways, and Driveways ........................................ 428 Moving a Sidewalk, Pathway, or Driveway................................................ 429 Stretching a Sidewalk, Pathway, or Driveway........................................... 429 Curving a Path Element .............................................................................. 430 Editing Path Element Properties................................................................ 431 Applying Different Materials to Sidewalks, Pathways, and Driveways .. 432 Deleting a Sidewalk, Pathway, or Driveway .............................................. 432
TABLE OF CONTENTS
LANDSCAPING
433
CHAPTER 38: GARDEN BEDS, PONDS, AND OTHER FILLED AREAS..................................................................................... 435
Creating Filled Areas .................................................................................. 436 Moving a Filled Area ................................................................................... 437 Rotating a Filled Area ................................................................................. 437 Resizing a Filled Area ................................................................................. 437 Reshaping a Filled Area ............................................................................. 438 Curving a Filled Area .................................................................................. 439 Changing the Fill Material .......................................................................... 439 Deleting a Filled Area.................................................................................. 440
CHAPTER 39: EDGING.................................................................. 441

Inserting Edging .......................................................................................... 442 Cleaning Up the Corners of Edging .......................................................... 443 Moving Edging ............................................................................................ 443 Rotating Edging........................................................................................... 444 Changing the Length of Edging................................................................. 444 Breaking Edging.......................................................................................... 445 Curving Edging ........................................................................................... 445 Editing Edging Properties .......................................................................... 446 Changing the Edging Material ................................................................... 446 Deleting Edging ........................................................................................... 447
CHAPTER 40: TREES, SHRUBS, AND PLANTS.......................... 449

Inserting Plants ........................................................................................... 450 Moving a Plant ............................................................................................. 451 Editing Plant Properties ............................................................................. 451 Seeing Plant Growth Over Time................................................................. 454 Applying Seasonal Changes to Plants...................................................... 455 Deleting a Plant ........................................................................................... 455 Using the Plant Encyclopedia .................................................................... 456 Adding Plants to the Catalog from the Encyclopedia.............................. 462
CHAPTER 41: EXTERIOR FURNITURE ........................................ 463

Inserting Exterior Furniture........................................................................ 464 Moving Exterior Furniture .......................................................................... 465 Rotating Exterior Furniture ........................................................................ 465 Editing the Properties of Exterior Furniture ............................................. 466 Applying Different Materials to Exterior Furniture................................... 467 Deleting Exterior Furniture......................................................................... 467
CHAPTER 42: EXTERIOR STRUCTURES .................................... 469

Inserting Exterior Structures...................................................................... 470 Inserting a House Template........................................................................ 470 Moving Exterior Structures ........................................................................ 472 Rotating Exterior Structures ...................................................................... 472 Editing the Properties of an Exterior Structure ........................................ 473 Applying Different Materials to Exterior Structures................................. 474 Deleting an Exterior Structure ................................................................... 474
CHAPTER 43: EXTERIOR LIGHTING............................................ 475

Inserting Exterior Lighting ......................................................................... 476 Moving an Exterior Light Fixture ............................................................... 477 Editing the Properties of an Exterior Light Fixture .................................. 477 Applying Different Materials to Exterior Light Fixtures........................... 478 Deleting an Exterior Light Fixture.............................................................. 479
CHAPTER 44: EXTERIOR ACCESSORIES................................... 481

Inserting Exterior Accessories .................................................................. 482 Moving Exterior Accessories ..................................................................... 483 Rotating Exterior Accessories ................................................................... 483 Raising or Lowering an Exterior Accessory............................................. 483 Editing the Properties of an Exterior Accessory...................................... 484 Applying Different Materials to Exterior Accessories ............................. 485 Deleting an Exterior Accessory ................................................................. 485
CHAPTER 45: IRRIGATION ........................................................... 487

Inserting Irrigation....................................................................................... 488 Moving Sprinklers ....................................................................................... 488 Rotating Sprinklers ..................................................................................... 489 Editing Sprinkler Properties....................................................................... 489 Deleting a Sprinkler..................................................................................... 490
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DRAWING AND EDITING TOOLS
491
CHAPTER 46: DRAWING AIDS..................................................... 493

Setting Up a Drawing Grid.......................................................................... 494 Turning the Drawing Grid On and Off........................................................ 494 Using the Grid Snap.................................................................................... 495 Turning the Grid Snap On and Off ............................................................. 495 Using the Object Snap ................................................................................ 496 Using Ortho ................................................................................................. 497 Using Angle Snap ....................................................................................... 497 Turning Collision Control On or Off .......................................................... 498
CHAPTER 47: MEASUREMENT.................................................... 499

Changing the Unit of Measure ................................................................... 500 Suppressing Metric Units ........................................................................... 502 Measuring Distances .................................................................................. 502 Calculating Area and Perimeter ................................................................. 503
CHAPTER 48: COMMANDER........................................................ 505

Turning the Commander On or Off ............................................................ 506 Using the Commander ................................................................................ 506 Displaying the Coordinate Icon ................................................................. 507 Specifying the Insertion Height of an Element Before Inserting It ......... 507 Selecting a Reference Point When Inserting and Editing Elements ...... 508 Entering Values in the Commander........................................................... 508 Specifying Distance and Direction ............................................................ 509 Defining X and Y Coordinates.................................................................... 509 Rotating Elements Using the Commander................................................ 510 Curving Elements Using the Commander ................................................ 510
CHAPTER 49: EDITING ELEMENTS ............................................. 511

Accessing Edit Commands ........................................................................ 512 Viewing Element Properties ....................................................................... 512 Simplifying an Element............................................................................... 513 Undoing the Previous Action ..................................................................... 514 Reapplying an Action.................................................................................. 514 Moving Elements ......................................................................................... 514 Nudging an Element.................................................................................... 515 Raising or Lowering an Element................................................................ 516 Rotating Elements ....................................................................................... 517 Changing an Elements Orientation........................................................... 520 Copying Elements ....................................................................................... 521 Arraying Elements....................................................................................... 522 Mirroring Elements...................................................................................... 523 Replacing Elements .................................................................................... 523 Editing an Elements Properties ................................................................ 524 Applying Materials and Colors with the Materials Paintbrush................ 536 Deleting Elements ....................................................................................... 538
DESIGN TOOLS
539
CHAPTER 50: TEXT ....................................................................... 541

Adding Text.................................................................................................. 542 Adding Text with a Leader.......................................................................... 547 Deleting Text ................................................................................................ 552
CHAPTER 51: DIMENSIONS ......................................................... 553

Setting the Current Dimension Style ......................................................... 554 Creating Automatic Exterior Dimensions ................................................. 554 Creating Automatic Interior Dimensions .................................................. 558 Creating Linear Dimensions....................................................................... 560 Creating Aligned Dimensions .................................................................... 561 Moving a Dimension Line ........................................................................... 562 Stretching Dimensions ............................................................................... 563 Changing the Style of a Dimension ........................................................... 564 Updating a Dimension Style Globally........................................................ 565 Turning Dimensions Off.............................................................................. 567 Deleting a Dimension.................................................................................. 567
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER 52: LAYOUT TOOLS.................................................... 569

Drawing Lines.............................................................................................. 570 Drawing Arcs ............................................................................................... 574 Drawing Circles ........................................................................................... 580 Drawing Rectangles .................................................................................... 583 Converting Drafting Objects to 3D Building Elements ............................ 585 Editing Line Styles ...................................................................................... 585
POWER TOOLS
587
CHAPTER 53: PHOTO BOARDS................................................... 589

Importing a Photo Board ............................................................................ 590 Saving Imported Photo Boards to the Catalog......................................... 593 Inserting a Photo Board from the Catalog ................................................ 594 Moving a Photo Board ................................................................................ 594 Rotating a Photo Board in 2D .................................................................... 595 Changing the Elevation of a Photo Board ................................................ 595 Editing Photo Board Properties................................................................. 596 Deleting a Photo Board .............................................................................. 597 Creating Transparency in Photo Board Images ....................................... 597
CHAPTER 54: PROJECT ESTIMATE............................................ 599

Generating a Project Estimate ................................................................... 600 Selecting a Project Estimate Report Template ......................................... 602 Filtering Locations from a Project Estimate ............................................. 602 Saving a Project Estimate .......................................................................... 604 Opening a Quantity Report File in an External Editor ............................. 605 Opening a Cut List in an External Editor .................................................. 606 Printing a Project Estimate ........................................................................ 607 Editing Material Pricing .............................................................................. 608 Specifying Cut Lengths for Members........................................................ 610
CHAPTER 55: 3D REAL VIEW....................................................... 615

How 3D Real View Rendering Works......................................................... 616 Setting the Scene ........................................................................................ 617 Defining the Location and Time of Day ..................................................... 618 Creating a Basic 3D Real View Rendering ................................................ 620 Creating an Advanced 3D Real View Rendering ...................................... 621 Editing 3D Real View Settings.................................................................... 624 Saving a 3D Real View Rendering to a File............................................... 629 Creating Multiple 3D Real View Renderings in the Same Project........... 631
CHAPTER 56: ANIMATION............................................................ 633

Drawing an Animation Path........................................................................ 634 Drawing Separate Camera and Target Paths ............................................ 639 Previewing the Animation .......................................................................... 641 Adding Sounds to an Animation................................................................ 642 Editing Path and Animation Properties..................................................... 643 Saving an Animation to a File .................................................................... 648
MANAGING PROJECTS
651
CHAPTER 57: IMPORTING............................................................ 653

Importing an Image to Trace ...................................................................... 654 Matching the Floor Plans Drawing Scale ................................................. 655 Displaying and Hiding Project Trace Images............................................ 656 Deleting a Project Trace Image .................................................................. 656 Importing Custom Objects into Your Drawing.......................................... 657
CHAPTER 58: OPENING, SAVING, AND PRINTING.................... 663

Opening a Saved Project ............................................................................ 664 Changing the Number of Files on the Recently Used File List ............... 664 Repairing Damaged Projects...................................................................... 665 Saving Projects ........................................................................................... 665 Saving a Project as a Template.................................................................. 669 Editing the Print Scale ................................................................................ 672 Printing Drawings........................................................................................ 673 Closing Projects .......................................................................................... 678
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER 59: EXPORTING........................................................... 679

Exporting the Current View to a 2D Image File ........................................ 680 Exporting the 2D Drawing to a DXF File ................................................... 681 Exporting the 3D Model .............................................................................. 681
INDEX
683
Part 1
THE BASICS
Introduction ............................................................3 Installing HGTV Home Design Software............. 11 Using HGTV Home Design Software ..................17 Learning HGTV Home Design Software .............29 Building Locations...............................................65 Drawing and Editing Basics................................71
1
INTRODUCTION
Welcome to the innovative new home design software from HGTV. With titles including HGTV Home & Landscape Platinum Suite and HGTV Home Design & Remodeling Suite, you can create home designs, plan remodeling projects, design landscapes, and much more. You can start with sample plans or build designs from scratch using a number of easy-to-use wizards. With HGTV home design software you can: Define building locations. Draw and edit designs. View your work in 2D or 3D. Build and furnish your dream home or design and plant your garden. Estimate costs and manage the project to realize your dreams. View included videos from HGTV.
This chapter provides an overview of the tools and features included in HGTV Home & Landscape Platinum Suite and covers other important introductory information.
Chapter 1 at a glance:
Introducing HGTV Home Design Software............................................................ 4 HGTV Home Design Software Features ............................................................... 5 Registering HGTV Home Design Software ........................................................... 8 Contacting Technical Support................................................................................ 8 Using Help for HGTV Home Design Software ....................................................... 9 Conventions for This User Guide ........................................................................ 10
Introducing HGTV Home Design Software

Thank you for purchasing this HGTV home design software product. HGTV home design software is for anyone who wants to design, renovate, decorate, or landscape a home. It is easy to use and delivers the results you wantcompletely and accurately. The features included in the software provide you the freedom to be creative and help bring your ideas to life. Whether you are trying different design ideas or preparing drawings for a building or landscaping professional, HGTV home design software makes it fun and simple to use. Depending on the HGTV home design software you have, you can design: Homes Interior designs (including room make overs) Exterior designs Remodeling projects Decks Landscaping projects Gardens Video tips from HGTV Thousands of sample plans Thousands of 3D appliances, furnishings, lighting, and more A materials library for flooring (woods, tiles, carpets), paints, countertops, and more A comprehensive plant encyclopedia, complete with climate, water, and light requirements Wizards that automate the process Photorealistic 3D visualization Powerful editing tools Floor plans Budget and materials lists Working drawings
While developing your design, you can use:
After finalizing a design, you can prepare:
CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION
HGTV Home Design Software Features

From framing to furnishing, designing your dream home is easier than you imagined. HGTV home design software provides the innovative tools and inspiration you need to plan a remodel, build a new home, or design additions to transform an existing space. Using HGTV home design software, you can refinish cabinets, lay new floors, replace countertops with granite and marble surfaces, and explore new fabric and upholstery options for sofas and chairs. With a variety of interior, exterior, and landscape tools, as well as photorealistic 3D visualization, you get it all with HGTV home design software. You can create interiors, exteriors, or landscapes, as separate designs or part of one home project. With HGTV home design software you get expert help to get the job done right.
HGTV Software Basics

Planning your space is easy. Before you begin a design project, you need to define a building location. Locations are the key to organizing elements and placing them correctly in your model. For details about defining building locations, see Building Locations on page 65. You can then insert the provided elements, such as doors, windows, or furnishings, directly into the design. The software also allows you to customize your space by moving or editing existing elements, so you can be as creative as you like. All elements in a design know where they are in relation to other elements. For example, a door can be inserted only in a wall. Youll see dimensions as you draw, making it easy to create accurate drawings right from the start. To develop your designs, see Drawing and Editing Basics on page 71. You have many viewing options while you work on your design. When you start, your design appears in 2D plan view. You can switch to a pre-defined 3D viewas well as create your own views to suit your needs. You can zoom in or out on a design, change the display mode to see different visual interpretations of a design (such as wireframe), or filter the view to only show certain elements. For more information about viewing your designs, see the chapters in Controlling the View on page 75.
HGTV Home Design Concepts

When designing your dream home or landscaping your current home, you can start with one of the thousands of available sample plans, or start from scratch using one of the easy-to-use wizards. For details on using the House Builder wizard or for designing a home from scratch, see the chapters in Building Your Home, starting on page 141. There are chapters where you learn how to work with walls, doors, stairs, floors, and roofs. After you have designed the exterior of your home, you can also design its interior. The chapters in Designing the Interior on page 275 give you the information to design various rooms. Using this software you can add, adjust, or move cabinets, appliances, furniture, electronic equipment, and other items. In Utilities on page 309, you'll learn how to add and adjust interior lighting, electricity, plumbing, and heating, ventilation, and cooling throughout your home.
HGTV Landscape Concepts

As with designing your home, you can apply the same techniques to set up a site and start landscaping the area around your home. In Terrain Modeling on page 341, you learn how to set up a site for your home. You can add hills, berms, plateaus, and slopes to your terrain to create a realistic-looking building site. Depending on your lot, you might need to specify property lines and setbacks. After youve set up the lot, you can add exterior elements such as fences and gates; decks and patios; sheds; retaining walls; and sidewalks, pathways, and driveways. Youll find information about all of these elements in Adding Exterior Design Elements on page 373. With these elements in place, you can begin work on the landscape itself. In Landscaping on page 433, you learn how to work with garden beds, ponds, edging elements, plants, trees, and shrubs. Additionally, this section covers exterior furniture, structures, lighting, and other accessories. It also includes a chapter on irrigation.
Professional Tools for Developing Your Designs

Youre not limited to the provided elements or sample plans. You can be as creative as you wish with HGTV home design softwares extensive tools, which you'll find in Drawing and Editing Tools on page 491, in Design Tools on page 539, and in Power Tools on page 587. In the chapters about power tools you see how to use photo boards, estimate projects, and work with 3D navigation and viewing. With HGTV home design software, you can manage your own project using the features explained in Managing Projects on page 651.
Additional Software and Features

HGTV home design software includes several bonus features: HGTV Home & Interior Painter: With this house paint visualization software you can import photographs of home exteriors or interiors and apply different paints to defined regions in the photograph. You can also download additional paint fandecks to expand your selection of available colors. For more information, see the Home & Interior Painter help. To start the program, Click the Windows Start menu and select All Programs. Then, click HGTV > HGTV Home & Interior Painter > HGTV Home & Interior Painter. Sample Home Plans: You can access an online database of home plans for a fast start to designing your home. To view the sample plans, insert the program disc and click Browse Sample Plans, or go to http://www.novadevelopment.com/hgtv in your web browser. HGTV Video Tutorials: Get started fast with HGTV home design software with step-by-step video tutorials. To view the videos, go to http://www.novadevelopment.com/hgtvtutorials. Show off your work: Get home makeover tips and share photos or videos of your finished project with HGTVs RateMySpace. To share your ideas, go to http://www.ratemyspace.hgtv.com. HGTV How-To Video Tips: Receive tips and inspiration for transforming your living space from the experts at HGTV. Insert the HGTV Videos disc, and then select Play using Windows Media Player.
Registering HGTV Home Design Software

Before you start your first project, please take a moment to register. After you do, youll be entitled to: Free Technical Support: Were committed to making HGTV home design software work for you. If you have any questions, please contact our support staff. Immediate Notification of Upgrades: Youll hear about new versions of HGTV home design software as soon as theyre available. Registered User Discounts: As a registered user, youre eligible for special prices on many new products and bonus offers on our other best-selling software products.
Contacting Technical Support

If youre having difficulty using the program, our trained technical support staff is ready to help. For answers to frequently asked questions (FAQs), troubleshooting tips, and information about your technical support options, go to the support section of our web site: www.novadevelopment.com/Support/ You can also look in the user guide and program help in the Help menu of your program to find answers to your questions.
Note: Some features mentioned in this user guide might not be present in all versions of the software.
Using Help for HGTV Home Design Software

HGTV home design software features online help including program help, ToolTips, and context-sensitive help. Youll be able to view help for your program by opening the Help menu and selecting Program Help.
The Help Menu

Program Help has general information and step-by-step instructions for tasks. You can also press F1 or click the Program Help button on the standard toolbar, if its showing. Users Guide opens a PDF version of the manual. Glossary of Terms shows useful home design and landscaping terms that you might not be familiar with. These are from program help. Register Product Now lets you register your product with Nova Development. About HGTV Home & Landscape Platinum Suite shows a dialog with version and registration information.
Accessing Context-Sensitive Help

Context-sensitive help is available for specific dialogs and element in your project. To get help for a specific part of your drawing: 1. 2. Click an element to select it. Right-click and select the Tool Help option for that element. For example, if you selected a wall, then select Walls Help. A list of topics related to the element is displayed. Click the topic you want to learn more about. You can also open the Tool Help by opening the Edit menu and selecting Modify Elements. To get help in a dialog: When you have a dialog or wizard open, you can get help by clicking the ? button. A help window opens, describing the content of the dialog.
ToolTips
When you move the pointer over a toolbar button, a ToolTip message appears giving you the buttons functionality or its name.
10
Conventions for This User Guide

Bold text is used for keys, buttons, check boxes, options, menus or menu items, and text that you are directed to type. Italicized text is used for names for folders, files, disks or discs, windows, and dialogs. Its also used for new terms and important ideas. Hierarchical submenus are noted as Submenu > Submenu Item. For example, the Wireframe command on the Display Mode submenu would be described as Open the View menu and select Choose Display Mode > Wireframe. Ctrl, Shift, or Alt followed by a letter means hold down that key while pressing the letter. For example, Ctrl+S means hold down the Ctrl key while pressing the S key. Click means click the left mouse button. Double-click means click the left mouse button twice in quick succession. Right-click means to click the right mouse button. Shift-click means hold down the Shift key while clicking the left mouse button. A shortcut menu is the menu that appears when you click the right mouse button when the pointer is over an object. Instructions for interacting with the Microsoft Windows operating system are given for Windows Vista. Adjust the instructions as necessary if you have a different version of Windows. Warnings, notes, and tips look like this:
Note: You should always make backups of your work.
2
INSTALLING HGTV HOME DESIGN SOFTWARE
This chapter lists the minimum system requirements for using your HGTV home design software on your computer. It also covers installation and uninstallation procedures.
System Requirements ......................................................................................... 12 Installing Your HGTV Home Design Software ..................................................... 13 Uninstalling Your HGTV Home Design Software ................................................. 15
12
System Requirements
To run HGTV home design software, youll need a personal computer running Windows Vista or Windows XP (SP2) with: Intel Pentium III-compatible processor at 500 MHz (or faster) 512 MB RAM (1 GB recommended) 750 MB free hard drive space (minimum) CD-ROM drive Video Card with an OpenGL driver and a minimum of 32MB RAM (64MB recommended) Color monitor with 1024x768 resolution or higher
Note: To install the program, your user account must be set to Administrator (not Limited). Some features, such as online registration require Internet access.
Preparing Your Computer

Before using your HGTV home design software, we highly recommend that you check for any updates to your Windows operating system, and to your video card drivers. Many problems people experience are alleviated by updating Windows DirectX and Internet Explorer components. To check for Windows system updates, connect to http://windowsupdate.microsoft.com. Most video card drivers are available for download from the manufacturers web site on the Internet.
CHAPTER 2: INSTALLING HGTV HOME DESIGN SOFTWARE
13
Installing Your HGTV Home Design Software

The HGTV software Installer guides you through the process to install all necessary HGTV program files, including sample plans and design elements (such as doors, windows, and plantsdepending on the specific product). To install your HGTV home design software on Windows Vista: 1. Insert the HGTV Installer disc into your CD drive. If the AutoPlay dialog appears, click Run setup.exe and then click Continue in the User Account Control dialog. If you have AutoPlay on, then in the User Account Control dialog click Continue. If you have AutoPlay off, then open the Microsoft Windows Start menu and select Computer. Double-click the icon for your CD drive and click Continue in the User Account Control dialog.
The startup screen for installing your software appears. 2. 3. 1. Click Install. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the installation. Insert the HGTV Installer disc into your CD drive. The startup screen for installing your software appears. If the startup screen doesnt appear, double-click the My Computer icon on your desktop. Open your CD drive and doubleclick setup.exe. 2. 3. Click Install. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the installation.
To install your HGTV home design software on Windows XP:
After installing your HGTV home design software, take a moment to register online. Becoming a registered user entitles you to product updates, as well as technical support if you encounter any problems. When the Online Registration dialog appears, click OK. Alternatively, you can open the Help menu and select Register Product Now.
14
Adjusting Your Display Settings

You can control program performance by ensuring your Windows display settings are set correctly. To adjust your display settings on Windows Vista: 1. 2. 3. Open the Windows Start menu and select Control Panel to open the Control Panel window. Under the Appearance and Personalization heading, click the Adjust screen resolution link to open the Display Settings dialog. From the Colors list, select Highest (32-bit).
Note: If 32-bit is unavailable, select 24-bit.
4. 5. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Drag the Resolution slider to 1024 x 768, or higher. Click OK. Open the Windows Start menu and select Settings > Control Panel to open the Control Panel window. Double-click Display to open the Display Properties dialog. Click the Settings tab. From the Color drop-down list, select True Color (32 bit). In the Screen area section, move the slider to display at least 1024 x 768 pixels. Click OK.
To adjust your display settings on Windows XP:
Graphics Glitches or Crashes

If you are experiencing crashes or are seeing unexpected graphics issues, first make sure your system software and video card drivers are up-to-date. If that doesnt help, you might need to turn off Hardware Acceleration in the program. Turning off Hardware Acceleration eliminates most problems related to your systems video card, but will result in slower graphics performance. To turn off Hardware Acceleration in the program: 1. 2. Open the Settings menu and select Program Settings to open the Program Settings dialog. Click Graphics in the column on the left.
CHAPTER 2: INSTALLING HGTV HOME DESIGN SOFTWARE
15
3. 4. 5.
Clear the check box next to Hardware Acceleration. Click OK. Close and restart the program.
If you continue to have crashes, the issue might be related to corruptions in your project. The HGTV home design software has a feature that scans your file and corrects or removes problematic elements. To use this feature, open the file that is crashing, Then, open the File menu and select Repair Project.
Uninstalling Your HGTV Home Design Software

To uninstall your HGTV home design software, you should use its uninstall program. The Uninstaller will properly remove all HGTV software files and settings. If you want to uninstall your HGTV home design software from your computer, follow the steps listed below for your operating system. To uninstall your HGTV home design software in Windows Vista: 1. 2. 3. 4. Make sure your HGTV home design program is closed. Open the Windows Start menu and select Control Panel. Under the Programs heading, click the Uninstall a program link. Select your HGTV home design program from the list, such as: 5. HGTV Home & Landscape Platinum Suite HGTV Home Design & Remodeling Suite
Click the Uninstall button at the top of the list and follow the instructions. Make sure your HGTV home design program is closed. Open the Windows Start menu and choose Settings > Control Panel > Add/Remove Programs. Select your HGTV home design program from the list, such as: HGTV Home & Landscape Platinum Suite HGTV Home Design & Remodeling Suite
To uninstall your HGTV home design software in Windows XP: 1. 2. 3.
4.
Click Remove and follow the instructions.
16
3
USING HGTV HOME DESIGN SOFTWARE
When you start a new project or open a previously saved project, the project appears in the HGTV home design software workspace. This chapter introduces you to the important areas of the HGTV home design software workspace and basic HGTV home design software features.
Starting HGTV Home Design Software ............................................................... 18 Starting a New Home Design Project .................................................................. 18 The HGTV Software Workspace ......................................................................... 19 Customizing HGTV Software............................................................................... 23 Changing Views .................................................................................................. 24 Saving Projects ................................................................................................... 26 Opening Saved Projects...................................................................................... 27 Changing Your Mind ............................................................................................ 28 Exiting HGTV Home Design Software ................................................................. 28
18
Starting HGTV Home Design Software

After youve installed the program, you can start using it. To start HGTV home design software: Click the Windows Start menu and select All Programs. Then, click HGTV and select your HGTV home design program, such as: HGTV Home & Landscape Platinum Suite HGTV Home Design & Remodeling Suite
You can also start the program by double-clicking the programs icon on your Windows desktop.
Starting a New Home Design Project

When you first start your HGTV home design program, it opens a new design project for you. If your program is already running, you can start a new design project by opening the File menu and selecting New. If youre using HGTV Home & Landscape Platinum Suite or HGTV Home Design & Remodeling Suite, the House Builder Wizard appears. One of the quickest and easiest ways to build a house design is to use the House Builder Wizard. In a few clicks youll have a basic structure containing exterior walls, a floor, and a roof. You can then save the beginning design, edit the design, and add more to it later. To use the wizard to begin your house design, click Next. For information about using the wizard, see House Builder Wizard on page 143. To close the wizard and go directly to the program workspace, click Cancel.
CHAPTER 3: USING HGTV HOME DESIGN SOFTWARE
19
Viewing Sample Projects

To give you an idea of the things you can do with HGTV Home & Landscape, you might want to view some sample projects. These projects are located in the programs Samples folder. To view sample projects: 1. 2. 3. Open the File menu and select Open Samples to open the Open dialog. Select the sample project you would like to view. Click Open.
The HGTV Software Workspace

In the project workspace, you create and adjust your designs in HGTV home design software. Each project that you open has its own window.
In addition to the menus at the top of the program window, the workspace contains tabbed toolbars underneath the menus that have buttons for the most common options relevant to a specific design aspect (such as the Building tab). Below the tabbed toolbars is the drawing area where you build, edit, and view your model. Underneath the drawing area are the general toolbars for controlling the view, for zooming in and out of the model in the drawing area, and for working with 3D navigation features. To the right of the drawing area is the Catalog panel, which has elements you can add to your model. At the very bottom of the window is a status bar that shows hints as you work and also has certain drawing-aid options.
20
Using the Toolbars

Many often-used features are available as buttons on the toolbars. HGTV Home & Landscape Platinum Suite has a full set of tabbed toolbars: Building, Interior, Landscape, and Terrain. Other versions of HGTV home design software products display relevant tabs.
Tabbed Toolbars
The Building tab toolbar has the tools you need to build a home or any architectural structure. It has buttons for adding elements such as walls, doors, windows, and roofs.
Walls Doors Windows Openings Room Division Floors
Footings Columns Railings Stairs/Ramps Roofs Ceilings
The Interiors tab toolbar has the tools you need to furnish, decorate, and equip the interior of your home. It has buttons for adding elements such as cabinets, appliances, furniture, lighting, and plumbing fixtures.
Cabinets Appliances Electronics Interior Furniture Interior Accessories
Equipment HVAC Elements Plumbing Fixtures Interior Lighting Electrical
21
The Landscape tab toolbar has the tools you need to create a complete landscape plan for the exterior of your home. It has buttons for adding elements such as plants, fences, gates, decks, and irrigation.
Plants Fills Edging Fences/Gates Decks
Exterior Structures Exterior Accessories Exterior Furniture Exterior Lighting Irrigation
The Terrain tab toolbar has the tools you need to design a realistic terrain for your model, which is especially important in 3D views. It has buttons for adding elements such as hills, valleys, slopes, paths, retaining walls, and site boundary.
Hills/Valleys Berms/Trenches Plateaus Slopes
Site Boundary Retaining Walls Pads Paths
Standard Toolbar
You can optionally show the standard toolbar below the tabbed toolbars to access program options such as New, Open, Save, Undo, and Redo.
New Open Open Samples Close Save Save All
Program Help Print Redo Undo Catalog Options
To view the standard toolbar, open the Settings menu and select Toolbars to open the Toolbars dialog. Then, set the Standard toolbar to Normal and click OK.
22
Viewing Toolbars
The View Control toolbar has essential view-related buttons. The toolbars building location list displays the current building location, which is important when inserting elements in your drawing. You can quickly switch between 2D view and 3D view, and view and create elevations and sections using these buttons. Additionally, you can click the Display Mode button to specify the current display type for the view (such as wireframe or hidden line) or filter your view.
Building Locations 2D Plan View 2D Designers View 3D Camera Views Dynamic Cutaway Elevation Views
View Manager Display Mode On/Off View Filter Section Views
With the buttons on the Zoom and Navigate toolbar you can change the view shown in the drawing area immediately by clicking your mouse.
Zoom In Zoom Out Zoom Realtime Zoom Window Zoom Previous Zoom to Fit
Reset Camera Slide Look Around Fly Around Walk Around Pan
The zoom-related buttons include Zoom In, Zoom Out, Zoom Realtime, Zoom Window, Zoom Previous, Zoom to Fit, and Pan. The navigation features on the toolbar (Walk Around, Fly Around, Look Around, Slide, and Reset Camera) are active only when you are in a 3D view.
23
Customizing HGTV Software

You can use the Program Settings dialog to customize your copy of HGTV home design software to suit your needs. To open the Program Settings dialog, open the Settings menu and select Program Settings. To learn details about the various options in the Program Settings dialog, click the ? button in the dialog.
Click General to specify auto save settings and startup options. You can also adjust the file paths for various program directories. Click Toolbars to show or hide toolbars in the workspace. You can designate a shown toolbar to be a normal or a tabbed toolbar. Click Workspace to customize options for the workspace, such as the color of the drawing area or showing and hiding other items such as the scroll bars and status bar. Click Drawing Aids to snap elements to an underlying grid, to adjust the grid, and adjust how elements are inserted. Click Building Aids to specify options to help you draw, to view window openings, and to place elements. Click Unit of Measure to change to Imperial or metric units and to specify units of precision. Click Site Boundaries to specify the bearing format and to specify the distances, angles, lines, pegs, and text. Click Graphics to turn video card acceleration on or off and to adjust lighting options.
24
Click Background to select a new day or night scene. Click Terrain to specify the level for the terrain and to adjust the mesh, material, or contours.
To adjust the settings for the 3D Real View rendering, click Global Settings to adjust the location settings. You can specify the country, city, date, and time to get realistic daylight. You can also click Rendering to specify the settings for a 3D Real View rendering, such as quality level, image brightness, and output options.
Changing Views
You can use the zoom-related options or buttons on the toolbar to adjust the view of your model. To zoom in: Open the View menu and select Zoom and Navigate > Zoom In. Click the Zoom In button on the Zoom and Navigate toolbar. Open the View menu and select Zoom and Navigate > Zoom Realtime. Then, click in the drawing area and drag toward the top. Click the Zoom Realtime button on the Zoom and Navigate toolbar. Then, click in the drawing area and drag toward the top. Open the View menu and select Zoom and Navigate > Zoom Out. Click the Zoom Out button on the Zoom and Navigate toolbar. Open the View menu and select Zoom and Navigate > Zoom Realtime. Then, click in the drawing area and drag toward the bottom. Click the Zoom Realtime button on the Zoom and Navigate toolbar. Then, click in the drawing area and drag toward the bottom.
To zoom out:
25
You can also filter your view to limit what you see in the drawing area by using the View Filter dialog.
To filter the current view: 1. Open the View menu and select View Filter or click the View Filter button in the View Control toolbar to open the View Filter dialog. In the Elements on Location tab, specify the location of interest. Click the Open Eye next to an element to hide it or click the Closed Eye next to an element to show it. Element is turned on Element is turned off On the Elements on Location tab, this icon indicates that some of an elements components are turned on, and some are turned off. To show or hide all elements, click a button under the location list. 4. 5. 6. To adjust elements on the terrain, click the Elements on Terrain tab and show or hide elements as needed. To adjust text, dimensions, drafting objects, wiring, and schedules, click the Notations tab and show or hide elements as needed. Click OK.
2. 3.
26
Saving Projects
To reuse a project, youll want to save it. Even if you plan to make a onetime-only quick project, you might want to save it while youre designing it in case something goes wrong or you want to refer to it at a later time. To save a new project: 1. 2. 3. 4. Open the File menu and select Save or click the Save button on the standard toolbar to open the Save As dialog. Locate and open the folder where you want to save the project. Type a name for the project file. Click Save.
Note: If you have more than one project open, you can save all of the project at once by opening the File menu and selecting Save All or clicking the Save All button on the standard toolbar.
You should periodically save your project as you work. That way, a recent version of the project is saved if your computer has problems or if you make a mistake.
Note: HGTV home design software products have an autosave feature. To
adjust the autosave settings, open the Settings menu and select Program Settings. The autosave features are on the General page. To periodically save a project: Open the File menu and select Save. Click the Save button on the standard toolbar. Click the Save All button on the standard toolbar to save all open projects
The project is saved in its original location and with the same name.
27
At times, you might want to save a project with a different name or in a different location. For example, might want to save a plan for a future renovation of your design project. To save a project with a new name or new location: 1. 2. 3. 4. Open the File menu and select Save As to open the Save As dialog. To save the file in a new location, locate and open the folder where the project should go. To rename the file, type a new name for the project file. Click Save.
Opening Saved Projects

You can open previously saved projects. To open existing project files: 1. 2. 3. 4. Open the File menu and select Open or click the Open button on the standard toolbar to open the Open dialog. Locate and open the folder where the project file is. Select the file to open. Click Open.
A list of recently opened projects appears at the bottom of the File menu. If the project has been recently opened, you can select it from the list to open it again.
28
Changing Your Mind

You can back up, prevent errors, or alter what you have done. You can press the Esc key on the keyboard to exit from a dialog or end a task without changing anything. You can open the Edit menu and select Undo or click the Undo button on the toolbar to reverse an insertion, editing action, or command. You can use undo more than once to cycle through previous steps. You can also use undo by pressing Ctrl+Z on your keyboard. You can open the Edit menu and select Redo or click the Redo button on the toolbar to restore an insertion, editing action, or command after you used undo to reverse it. You can also use redo by pressing Ctrl+Y on your keyboard.
Note: If you havent performed any actions, then Undo isnt available. If you havent used Undo, then Redo isnt available.
Exiting HGTV Home Design Software

When youre through with your HGTV home design software session, youll want to exit the program. HGTV home design software helps you exit safely by prompting you to save changes and close your open project before exiting. To exit HGTV software: 1. Open the File menu and select Exit. If you have unsaved changes in any project, the program prompts you to save them. 2. Click Yes to save any open projects or No to discard any changes. To return to the workspace, click Cancel. After all projects are closed, the HGTV home design software exits.
4
LEARNING HGTV HOME DESIGN SOFTWARE
This tutorial shows you how to use HGTV Home & Landscape Platinum Suite to create a model for a simple house, view the design in 3D, add landscaping and a deck, create photorealistic renderings, and generate an estimate. If you have a different edition of HGTV home design software, then you might not be able to work through some of the steps of the tutorial. For more information on each of the tools used, read the related section in the users guide or view the program help. You can also get tips and inspiration from the experts at HGTV. For more building and remodeling ideas, see the HGTV Videos CD.
Note: To clarify point and element selections, this tutorial includes diagrams and screen captures throughout. In diagrams containing multiple selection points, the points have been enhanced to help you make the correct selection by adding a number. For example, P1 indicates the first point to select and P2 is the second point.
Getting Started .................................................................................................... 30 Building a House ................................................................................................. 30 Adding Walls, Doors, Windows, and Openings ................................................... 34 Finishing the House Design ................................................................................ 42 Viewing the Model ............................................................................................... 44 Creating Landscaping ......................................................................................... 47 Working with the Plan.......................................................................................... 55 Adding Text to the Plan ....................................................................................... 57 3D Real View Rendering ..................................................................................... 62 Congratulations ................................................................................................... 64
30
Getting Started
After installing the program, you can start using it to create a preliminary design using the House Builder Wizard. For detailed information about using the wizard, see House Builder Wizard on page 143. To start HGTV home design software: Click the Windows Start menu and select All Programs. Then, click HGTV and select your HGTV home design program, such as: HGTV Home & Landscape Platinum Suite HGTV Home Design & Remodeling Suite
You can also start the program by double-clicking the programs icon on your Windows desktop. If the program is already running, you should save any work youve done and then start a new project by opening the File menu and selecting New. If youre using HGTV Home & Landscape Platinum Suite or HGTV Home Design & Remodeling Suite, the House Builder Wizard appears.
Building a House
One of the quickest and easiest ways to build a house design is to use the House Builder Wizard. In a few clicks youll have a basic structure containing exterior walls, a floor, and a roof. You can then save the beginning design, edit the design, and add more to it later. Each time you start HGTV Home & Landscape Platinum Suite or HGTV Home Design & Remodeling Suite, or start a new project, the House Builder Wizard appears.
1.
Click Next to start using the wizard.
CHAPTER 4: LEARNING HGTV HOME DESIGN SOFTWARE
31
2. 3.
Make sure that the Number of Floors is set to 1, and that the Concrete Slab option is selected in the Foundation Type area. Click Next.
4. 5.
Make sure the basic rectangular shape (with no garage) is selected, since youre creating a very simple home. Click Next.
32
6.
Define the overall dimensions of our model. In the Length box, type 50'. In the Width box, type 25'.
Make sure that you type the ' mark to indicate feet. 7. Click Next.
8.
Click the Building Configuration drop-down list and select Traditional. You will keep the Traditional material settings, but you can select different materials for each of the buildings elements in your own design.
9.
Click Next.
33
10. Click Finish. The model is created in the center of your drawing area.
11. In the Next Steps help topic, click the red close button.
Close Button
34
Adding Walls, Doors, Windows, and Openings

In the next section, youre going to add walls, doors, windows, and openings to your design. To make that easier, you can hide the roof using the View Filter and zoom in on your model. To hide the roof: 1. Open the View menu and select View Filter or click the View Filter button on the View Control toolbar to open the View Filter dialog. Click the open eye next to the Roofs item to close the eye.
2.
Click the open eye to close it.
3. 1.
Click OK. Open the View menu and select Zoom and Navigate > Zoom In or click the Zoom In button on the Zoom and Navigate toolbar.
To zoom in on the design:
2.
Zoom in a few more times to maximize the view.
35
Adding Walls
Now, youre going to add three interior walls to the design.
Wall A Wall B Wall C P2 P1
1.
Open the Insert menu and select Walls or click the Walls button on the Building toolbar to display the Walls catalog on the right side of the window. In the Groups list, select Interior Walls. In the Walls list, select 2x4 Wood Framed Wall. The first wall (Wall A) is a vertical wall positioned 12' from the left exterior wall as shown in the following example.
2. 3.
4.
Hover your pointer over the bottom exterior wall until the left onscreen dimension reads approximately 12'. Then, click inside the bottom exterior wall to specify the start point of the first interior wall (P1). Move your pointer toward the top exterior wall, and then click inside that wall to specify the walls endpoint (P2) to insert the wall.
5.
36
To insert the second wall (Wall B), youll enter a precise offset. 6. Right-click in the drawing area and select Enter insertion offset to open the Enter Insertion Offset dialog.
7. 8.
Enter 15' and then press Enter or click OK. Make sure that you type the ' mark to indicate feet. Position your pointer in the bottom exterior wall, to the right of the first wall (Wall A). The dimension automatically locks itself at 15'.
P2 Wall A
P1
9.
Click to select the walls start point, and then click in the top exterior wall to select the end point and insert the wall.
10. To insert the third wall (Wall C), right-click and select Enter insertion offset again and then specify an offset of 10'. 11. Position your pointer in the lower half of the left exterior wall. 12. When you see the 10' dimension, click to select the start point and then click inside the second wall (Wall B) to specify the end point.
Wall B P1 P2
37
13. Right-click and select Finish. Your walls are complete.

Wall A Wall B Wall C
Tip: If you are drawing a model from scratch, one of the easiest ways to create a second story is to duplicate walls from the ground floor to the second floor. To do this, select the ground floor walls that you want to copy and then right-click and select Duplicate to Locations to open the Duplicate to Locations dialog. Then, select the Second Floor location to copy the walls from the ground floor to the second floor.
Saving the Project

Its a good idea to save your project frequently while working on it. 1. 2. 3. Open the File menu and select Save to open the Save As dialog. Type Quick Start Tutorial in the File name box. Click Save.
38
Inserting Doors
Now that you have the walls in place, you can add doors in the walls. Because doors are intelligent elements, they fit themselves into walls and become part of them automatically. However, you can edit doors separately from the walls that contain them. The following example illustrates the doors you will be inserting:
A B C
1.
Open the Insert menu and select Doors, or click the Doors button on the Building toolbar to display the Doors catalog on the right side of the window. In the Group list, select Hinged. In the Doors list, select 30" Hinged Door. The door attaches to your pointer. Position the first door (Door A) in the wall where it is to be inserted (Wall A). When the door is approximately 3 above the horizontal interior wall (Wall C), click to insert the door. The door will have its hinge on the opposite side from the door shown in the example. Youll change this after youve inserted all three doors.
2. 3. 4.
5. 6. 7.
Right-click and select Enter insertion offset to open the Enter Insertion Offset dialog. Enter 3 and then press Enter or click OK. Insert the second door (Door B) in the same wall (Wall A), but on the below the horizontal wall (Wall C). The door snaps into place 3" below the horizontal wall.
39
8. 9.
In the catalog, select the Entry from the Group list. Select the 32 Solid Wood Door w/ Sidelite for the entrance door (Door C).
10. Insert the door in the approximate center of the exterior wall that is between the two vertical interior walls (Wall A and Wall B). When you position the door, you might need to pull upward slightly to get the door to swing to the inside of the model. 11. Right-click and select Finish.
Flipping Door Swings

The Flip Swing feature lets you instantly flip a doors hinge side. 1. 2. 3. Click the door that needs its swing to be flipped (Door A). Right-click in the drawing area and select Flip Swing to flip the swing of the door. Save the drawing by opening the File menu and selecting Save.
A B C
40
Inserting Windows
Youre going to insert six windows in the model.
W W W
W W W
1.
Open the Insert menu and select Windows, or click the Windows button on the Building toolbar to display the Windows catalog on the right side of the window. From the Group list, select Double Casement and then select the 4'-9" x 4' Double Casement Window. Insert two windows in the vertical exterior wall on the right, so that each window is 3' from the horizontal exterior walls. This leaves a large portion in the center of the vertical wall available for you to insert a fireplace later.
2. 3.
4.
Right-click and select Center on Wall so that the remaining windows can be placed in the center of the rooms. The Center on Wall options is also available for doors and openings.
5.
Insert the remaining four windows in the horizontal exterior walls as shown in the example. The Center on Wall option automatically centers each window in the receiving wall.
6. 7.
Right-click and select Finish. Save the drawing.
41
Inserting Openings
An opening is a cutout in a wall, or a pass-through. You insert openings in the same way that you insert doors and windows. For this model, youll insert two openings using the Center on Wall option. 1. Open the Insert menu and select Openings, or click the Openings button on the Building toolbar to display the Openings catalog on the right side of the window. In the Groups list, select Arched (Doorways) and then select the 6' Arched top Doorway. Move your pointer into the drawing area and then right-click and select Center on wall. Insert the two openings in the interior vertical wall in the center of the model (Wall B) so that they are automatically centered on the wall.
2. 3. 4.
5.
Right-click and select Finish.
42
Finishing the House Design

Now that you have walls, doors, windows, and openings, you can finish the design by adding a fireplace and a ceiling.
Adding a Fireplace
Your HGTV home design software contains thousands of elements for your designs. Many of them, you can insert with a single mouse click. Furnishings, cabinets, and plumbing fixtures automatically attach themselves to walls and other elements if you bring them into close to existing elements in your design, and Collision Control is on. To learn how to add a design element, youll insert a fireplace into your drawing. 1. Open the Insert menu and select Interiors > HVAC Elements, or click the Interiors toolbar tab and then click the HVAC Elements button to display the HVAC Elements catalog on the right side of the window. In the Groups list, select Heating and then select Mantel Fireplace 2. The fireplace attaches to your pointer. 3. Position the fireplace at the center of the right exterior wall and then click to insert it.
2.
Since it is an intelligent element, it aligns itself with a wall, either completely inside the model or half-way inside the wall. 4. 5. Right-click and select Finish. Save the drawing.
43
Inserting a Ceiling
Youll quickly insert a ceiling throughout the model. 1. Open the Insert menu and select Ceilings > Ceiling by Perimeter, or click the Ceilings button on the Building toolbar and select Ceiling by Perimeter to display the Ceilings catalog on the right side of the window. In the Group list, select Standard and then select Stucco Ceiling 3. Click anywhere inside the model to insert the ceiling.
2. 3.
Restoring the View of the Roof

Now that youve completed the house design, you can view the roof again. 1. Open the View menu and select View Filter or click the View Filter button on the View Control toolbar to open the View Filter dialog. Click the closed eye next to the Roofs item to change it to an open eye. Click OK. Save the project.
2. 3. 4.
The model is now complete.
44
Viewing the Model

Now that the basic model is complete, you can view the model from different angles. For complete information about 2D and 3D views and elevations, see Controlling the View on page 75.
Viewing in 3D
The 3D Camera View tool displays a 3D perspective view of your model which you can adjust by controlling the views camera. 1. Open the View menu and select 3D Camera View > 3D Perspective, or click the 3D Camera View button on the View Control toolbar and select 3D Perspective.
In a 3D Perspective view, the scale of an element decreases according to its distance from the viewer, creating a more realistic view.
45
Navigating in 3D
Not only can you view in 3D, but you can also move around in 3D using a variety of realtime navigation tools.
Walking Around
With the Walk Around tool, you can walk forward, backward, left, or right while in a 3D camera view. You can even walk inside the model. 1. 2. Make sure you are still in the 3D Perspective camera view. Open the View menu and select Zoom and Navigate > Walk Around, or click the Walk Around button on the Zoom and Navigate toolbar. Click and drag to walk around. To walk forward, click and drag upward. To walk backward, click and drag downward. To walk left or right, click and drag left or right.
3.
Flying Around
The Fly Around tool revolves the camera around the target, which by default is at the center of the model. This creates a spinning effect. 1. Open the View menu and select Zoom and Navigate > Fly Around, or click the Fly Around button on the Zoom and Navigate toolbar. After selecting Fly Around, you can do the following: To rotate the model clockwise, click and drag to the right. To rotate the model counterclockwise, click and drag to the left. To make your model tilt downward (like a boat coming off a wave), click and drag toward the top of the screen. To make your model tilt up (like a boat riding onto a wave), click and drag toward the bottom of the screen.
2.
46
Resetting the Camera

If you have moved the camera or lost your orientation in your 3D view, you can use the Reset Camera tool to move the camera back to the position it was in before you started navigating around. To reset the camera, open the View menu and select Zoom and Navigate > Reset Camera, or click the Reset Camera button on the Zoom and Navigate toolbar.
Changing the Display Mode

By default, your design is displayed in Wireframe mode when you are in 2D plan view. When you switch to a 3D view, the default display mode is Rendered mode, which displays textures and colors. To change the display mode of the current view, open the View menu and select Display Mode, or click the Display Mode button on the View Control toolbar. Then, select one of the five view modes. Wireframe provides a skeletal representation of elements, creating a see-through view. Hidden Line hides lines that you wouldnt normally see, creating a solid, non-color view. Rendered applies textures and colors to element surfaces, creating a realistic view. Rendered Outline is the same as the Rendered display mode, except surface edges are also outlined with a single, black line for high definition. Patterned applies hatch patterns to element surfaces.
47
Viewing Elevations
You can view front, back, and side elevations of your model with a couple of mouse clicks. There are four default elevations available. You can modify the properties of these elevations, or create new ones. As you edit your model in other views, elevation views update automatically. To view a front elevation of the model open the View menu and select Elevation Views > Front Elevation, or click the Elevation Views button on the View Control toolbar and select Front Elevation.
Switching Back to 2D Plan View

When you are using a 3D view or elevation view, you can switch back to 2D plan view at any time using the 2D Plan View tool. There are three available methods for switching back to 2D plan view: Click the 2D Plan View button on the View Control toolbar. Open the View menu and select 2D Plan View. Right-click in the drawing area and select 2D Plan View.
Creating Landscaping
HGTV Home & Landscape Platinum Suite offers a wide variety of landscaping tools to help you recreate your lots topography and design all of your outdoor living areas. In this tutorial, youll add some trees, a hill, and a deck to your plan.
Note: If you have a different edition of HGTV home design software, then you might not be able to work through some of the steps of the tutorial.
48
Inserting Trees
Youll insert three birch trees in front of the model. 1. Zoom out a bit if necessary to bring the front yard into view by opening the View menu and selecting Zoom and Navigate > Zoom Out, or by clicking the Zoom Out button on the Zoom and Navigate toolbar.
2.
Open the Insert menu and select Landscape > Plants or click the Landscape toolbar tab and then click the Plants button to display the Plants catalog on the right side of the window. From the Groups list, select Deciduous Trees and then select the Dwarf Birch tree. Insert a tree to the right of the front door. Insert another tree to the right of the first tree. Insert another tree in front of the first two trees.
3. 4. 5. 6.
7. 8.
Right-click and select Finish. Save your drawing.
49
Inserting a Hill
When you insert a hill you can control the height of the hill as well as its peak shape. Typically, the diameter of the hill base is the same as the hill height. You can insert multiple hills together to create one larger hill. To insert a hill on the terrain: 1. Open the Insert menu and select Terrain > Hills/Valleys or click the Terrain toolbar tab and then click the Hills/ Valleys button to open the Hills/Valleys dialog. Click in the Height box and specify a height of 2'. Make sure that you type the ' mark to indicate feet.
2.
3. 4.
Slide the Zenith slider to the far right to create a gentle slope. Click OK. The + on the Hills/Valleys pointer represents the center point of the hill, not the whole hill itself. When you hover over an object on the design, the pointer changes to a circle.
5.
Click in the middle of the front tree.

Click Here
50
The hill is inserted, creating a gentle slope around the model.
6. 7.
Right-click and select Finish. Save your drawing.
51
Creating a Deck
You can use the Deck Builder Wizard to add a ground-level deck to the backyard. 1. Open the Tools menu and select Design Wizards > Deck Builder to start the Deck Builder Wizard.
2.
Click Next.
3. 4. 5.
In the Groups list, select Ground Level Construction. In the Decks list, select the 2" x 6" Pressure Treated deck. Click Next.
52
6.
With the square shape selected in the Shape area, change the a value to 12', and the b value to 8' to create an 8' x 12' rectangular deck. Make sure that you type the ' mark to indicate feet. Click Next.
7.
8.
Keep the default Deck Rotation and Decking Direction by clicking Next.
53
9.
Click Finish. The deck attaches to your pointer.
10. Position the deck at the back of the model (the top exterior wall) and then click to insert it.
54
11. Click the deck to select it. 12. Right-click and select Properties to open the Decks dialog.
13. In the Height above current location box, type 6 to raise the deck up 6 inches. 14. Click OK. 15. Save your drawing.
Tip: You can use the Decks tool instead of the Deck Builder Wizard to create a custom deck of any shape or size. Open the Insert menu and select Landscape > Decks > Decks, and then point and click to define the outline you want.
For more information about adding exterior elements such as decks, patios, and sheds, see Landscaping on page 433.
55
Working with the Plan

Now that youve created the design and added landscaping, you can use other tools to get information about the building and make a usable plan and an estimate for building the house.
Calculating Square Footage

You can use the Area/Perimeter tool to instantly view the square footage and perimeter measurements of your home. 1. Open the Tools menu and select Calculate/Estimate > Area/ Perimeter to open the Area/Perimeter Calculator dialog.
2.
View the measurements. To view the square footage, click the Area tab. To view perimeter measurements, click the Perimeter tab.
3.
Print these measurements by click the Print button at the bottom of the dialog. Then, adjust any settings in the Print dialog and click OK. Click OK to close the Area/Perimeter Calculator dialog.
4.
56
Viewing a Project Estimate

Now that youve done all the modeling and design work, you can see how much the project will cost. 1. Open the Tools menu and select Calculate/Estimate > Generate Project Estimate to open the Generate Project Estimate dialog displaying your project estimate.
The project estimate, or bill of materials, lists all of the materials used to create your model. It lists information like the quantity, unit price, and total cost of each material, as well as the total cost of the project. You can specify custom material pricing by editing element properties. To generate a different report file type, you can select a different report template from the report drop-down list. Some templates generate files that can be opened in an external estimating program. To limit the list to certain parts of the model, click the Filter Report(s) button to open the Current Model Filter dialog. Then, click the Filter button next to the parts of the model to remove from the report and click OK. 2. Print the estimate by clicking the Print Report(s) button. Then, adjust any settings in the Print dialog and click Print.
57
3.
Save the estimate by clicking the Change Filename button next to the Quantity Report File box at the bottom of the dialog to open the Report Filename dialog. Then, specify the location and name for the file and click Save. In the Generate Project Estimate dialog click Save and Close. If you dont want to save the information, click Exit.
For complete information about creating a project estimate, see Project Estimate on page 599.
Adding Text to the Plan

Now youre ready to annotate the drawing by adding text and dimensions to the plan. For complete information about working with text, see Text on page 541. Before adding text, youll want to hide everything except for the house.
Filtering the View

Use the View Filter to hide the roof, deck, terrain, and landscaping elements. 1. Open the View menu and select View Filter or click the View Filter button on the View Control toolbar to open the View Filter dialog. Click the open eye next to the Roofs item and next to the Decks item to close the eyes. Click the Elements on Terrain tab. Click Display None to close the eyes next to the Plants and Terrain items. Click OK.
2. 3. 4. 5.
58
Adding Text
Now you can label the rooms in the design. 1. 2. Open the Tools menu and select Text > Text to open the Text dialog. Type Family Room in the text editing window.
3.
Select the Multiple text insert check box at the bottom of the dialog so that youll return to the Text dialog after youve inserted the text. Click OK. The text attaches to your pointer. Insert the Family Room text in the center of the largest room. In the Text dialog, select Foyer in the list of pre-defined labels on the right side of the dialog. Click the Insert label into editing window button below the list. Click OK. Insert the Foyer text in the center of the room with the exterior door.
4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
59
10. Insert the remaining labels as shown in the following example.
The text shown in the example has been enlarged for legibility. 11. After youve inserted the last label, click Cancel in the Text dialog.
Editing Text
You can edit the style or content of text after it has been inserted. 1. 2. 3. Click the Family Room text to select it. Right-click and select Properties to open the Text dialog. In the editing window, change Family Room to Living Room. If you want to change how the text looks, click the Text Style button to open the Text Styles dialog. Then, change the text style and click OK. For more information, see Editing Text on page 544. 4. Click OK in the Text dialog to update the text in the drawing.
60
Adding Dimensions
You can add accurate exterior and interior dimensions to your design automatically.
Auto Exterior Dimensions

You can dimension the exterior walls to give you an idea of the size of the house. 1. Open the Tools menu and select Dimensions > Apply Auto Exterior Dimensions. Dimensions automatically appear around the exterior of the model. There are two dimension strings for each wall. One includes dimensions for the openings, and the other shows the overall length of the wall.
61
Auto Interior Dimensions

Now youll dimension some of the interior walls. 1. 2. Open the Tools menu and select Dimensions > Apply Interior Dimensions. Click a point outside the left exterior wall (P1) and then click a point outside the foyers right wall (P2).
P1
P2
Dimensions are automatically created for the two horizontal walls above your base line. 3. Click points outside the front wall (P1) and the back wall (P2) to create vertical dimensions in the foyer and kitchen.
P2
P1
4.
Save your drawing.
For more information about adding dimensions, see Dimensions on page 553.
62
3D Real View Rendering

3D Real View rendering involves generating a photo-realistic 3D view complete with textures, light, reflection, and shadows. You can render any interior or exterior 3D camera view with a simple mouse click. 3D Real View renderings are saved to a BMP or JPG file that can be opened in most graphic editing programs.
Creating a New Camera View

To create a new 3D camera view, you insert a camera in your drawing. 1. Open the View menu and select 3D Camera View > Place New Camera or click the 3D Camera View button on the View Control toolbar and select Place New Camera. A camera is attached to your pointer. 2. Click in the lower-left corner of the living room to insert the camera, and then click a point in front of the fireplace to define the target. For more information about 3D Camera View, see 2D and 3D Viewing on page 77. The 3D image appears after you define the camera and the target.
Target
Camera
63
Painting the Walls

Before rendering the design, youll change the color of the walls. You can use the Materials Paintbrush to apply different textures and colors to just about any element in your design. 1. Open the Edit menu and select Materials Paintbrush or click the Materials Paintbrush button on any tabbed toolbar to display the Materials catalog on the right side of the window. Click the Filter drop-down list and select Paint. From the Groups list, select Paint - Benjamin Moore Sample Colors. Scroll down in the list of colors and select WALES GREEN-202850, or select another color that you like. Click each wall in your 3D view. Right-click and select Finish. Save your drawing.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
With the walls painted, youre ready to render the project. For more information about using the Materials Paintbrush, see Drawing and Editing Tools on page 491.
64
Rendering a Scene
By rendering a scene, you add light and shadow to a textured 3D view to view a photo-realistic images of this design. 1. 2. With the new 3D view displayed, open the View menu and select Render 3D Real View to open the 3D Real View dialog. Click the Render button to render the scene in a few of seconds.
You can see the reflection of the windows and fireplace on the hardwood floor, and the light being cast onto the wall from the window.
Tip: If you want to add more light to the scene, insert some light fixtures in the room and then render again.
3. 4.
Click Close. Save the project.
Congratulations
By successfully completing this tutorial you have learned the basics of: Model building Zooming and view control 3D viewing and navigation Elevations Estimating Annotation Landscaping Materials Paintbrush 3D Real View rendering
With your new basic skill set you can start creating your own designs in HGTV Home & Landscape Platinum Suite.
5
BUILDING LOCATIONS
When you insert a building element in your drawing, such as a wall, door or window, it is inserted on the current building location. It is important to define your building locations before inserting building elements, since locations are the key to organizing elements and inserting them at the correct height in your model. If you are drawing from scratch, the programs default drawing templates have three pre-defined building locations: Foundation, Ground Floor, and Second Floor. You can change the settings for existing building locations as well as add and delete locations. If you use the House Builder Wizard to start your project, your main building locations are set up for you when you run the House Builder Wizard. This chapter describes how to define your building locations, and identify the current building location when adding building elements to your design.
Note: Most landscaping elements are inserted on the terrain and not on a building location. The exceptions are decks, and exterior furnishings and accessories inserted with the Insert on Location option.
Defining Building Locations ................................................................................. 66 Adding a Building Location.................................................................................. 67 Editing a Building Location .................................................................................. 68 Deleting a Building Location................................................................................ 69 Making a Building Location Current .................................................................... 69 Allowing a Different Current Location Per View Window..................................... 70 Adjusting Location Dimming................................................................................ 70
66
Defining Building Locations

When you define building locations, you are basically doing two things: Setting the wall height for each floor (level) in your model Specifying where each floor is positioned relative to the ground (zero)
To view building location settings: Open the Settings menu and select Building Locations, or click the Building Locations button on the View Control toolbar.
Below is a brief description of each building location property: Number is a reference number for the location. Name is the locations name (such as, Ground Floor). Floor Level is the height of floor base above ground level (0). Head Height is the height of tops of windows and wall openings relative to the floor level. Ceiling Height is the height of underside of ceiling surface relative to the floor level. Wall Height is the physical height of the walls on the location.
CHAPTER 5: BUILDING LOCATIONS
67
By default, if you are drawing from scratch, the Foundation location has a Floor Level of 8, meaning the base of the foundation is positioned 8 below ground level. (In other words, it is a full basement.) The Wall Height of the Foundation location is 8. Therefore, the top of the foundation wall will be situated at ground level. By default, the Ground Floor and Second Floor locations each have their Wall Height set to 8. The Floor Level of the Ground Floor is set to 1. This means that the floor will be situated 1 above the ground. To handle the 1 gap between the Ground Floor and Foundation, the exterior faces of the walls on the Ground Floor are dropped 1.
Note: Most landscaping elements are inserted the terrain and not on a building location. The exceptions are decks, and exterior furnishings and accessories inserted with the Insert ... on Location option.
Adding a Building Location

You can set up all building locations before starting a drawing, or you can add locations as needed. To add a new building location: 1. Open the Settings menu and select Building Locations or click the Building Locations button on the View Control toolbar to open the Building Locations dialog. Click the Add Location button to add a new location to the bottom of the list.
Note: By default the new location will adopt the numerical settings of the currently selected location.
2.
3.
Specify the locations properties by clicking the current value, typing the new value, then pressing Enter.
Note: When you add a location to your list, it does not become the current location unless you select it in the list or edit its properties.
4.
Click OK to close the Building Locations dialog.
68
Editing a Building Location

You can edit a building locations settings even if there are elements already inserted on it. The elements will be updated to reflect your changes. To edit a building location: You can edit a building locations settings even if there are elements already inserted on it. The elements are updated to reflect your changes. 1. Open the Settings menu and select Building Locations or click the Building Locations button on the View Control toolbar to open the Building Locations dialog. Click the property you want to change. You can change location names or any of the numerical settings. 3. 4. 5. 1. Number. A reference number for the location. Name. The locations name (such as, Ground Floor). Floor Level. Height of floor base above ground level (0). Head Height. Height of tops of windows and wall openings relative to the floor level. Ceiling Height. Height of underside of ceiling surface relative to the floor level. Wall Height. Physical height of the walls on the location.
2.
Type the value you want. Press Enter. Click OK to close the Building Locations dialog. Open the Settings menu and select Building Locations or click the Building Locations button on the View Control toolbar to open the Building Locations dialog. Click the property you want to change. You can change location names or any of the numerical settings. Type the value you want. Press Enter. Click OK to close the Building Locations dialog.
To change the properties of a building location:
2. 3. 4. 5.
CHAPTER 5: BUILDING LOCATIONS
69
Deleting a Building Location

To delete a building location: 1. Open the Settings menu and select Building Locations or click the Building Locations button on the View Control toolbar to open the Building Locations dialog. Click one of the locations fields to make it the current location. Click Delete Location.
Note: You cannot delete a location if it contains any elements. Also, you cannot delete a location if it is the only one in the list.
2. 3.
4.
Click OK to close the Building Locations dialog.
Making a Building Location Current

Before inserting a building element in your drawing, make sure that the building location where you want to insert the element is the current building location. To make a building location current: Click the building locations drop-down list on the View Control toolbar and select the desired location.
In the Building Locations dialog, click to the left of the location you want to make current to place a check mark that indicates the location is current.
The current location is identified with a check mark. Tip: When a building location is current, elements on other locations are still visible, but dimmed. This can help you position elements on the current location.
70
Allowing a Different Current Location Per View Window

By default, the location you select in one view window will be the one displayed when you switch to other view windows. By changing your program settings you can allow a different location to be current in each view window. To allow a different current location per view window: 1. Open the Settings menu and select Program Settings or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar to open the Program Settings dialog. Click Workspace in the left column. In the Model View Behavior area, clear the Maintain Current Location per View check box. Click OK.
2. 3. 4.
Adjusting Location Dimming

When a location is current, elements on all other visible locations are dimmed. This makes it easier to insert and edit elements on the current location because it is more obvious which elements are part of the current location. By default, elements on other locations are dimmed by 90%. You can adjust the dimming so that it is lighter or darker according to your preference. To change the dimming percentage: 1. Open the Settings menu and select Settings > Program Settings or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar to open the Program Settings dialog. Click Workspace in the left column. Type the desired dimming percentage in the Dimming Percentage box, or use the arrows to scroll up or down through a list of values. Click OK.
2. 3. 4.
6
DRAWING AND EDITING BASICS
Everything is point-and-click in HGTV Home & Landscape, making it extremely simple to use and leaving you free to be as creative as you like. All elements are intelligent and know what they are in relation to other elements. For example, a door can only be inserted in a wall. HGTV Home & Landscape automatically displays dimensions as you draw, making it even easier to create accurate drawings right from the start. While working on your project, you will probably want to edit it as you go. You can select elements by clicking them, or by drawing a selection window around them. This chapter describes the basics of inserting elements, and selecting them for editing.
Inserting Elements............................................................................................... 72 Going into Selection Mode for Editing ................................................................. 72 Selecting Elements for Editing ............................................................................ 73 Deselecting Elements.......................................................................................... 74 Accessing Edit Tools ........................................................................................... 74
72
Inserting Elements
When you select a tool from the Insert menu or one of the toolbars, you are in Insertion mode. To insert an element, you select it in the catalog panel, and then click in your drawing area. Many elements can be inserted with a single mouse click. Single-click elements include doors, windows, stairs, columns, cabinets, furniture, appliances, light fixtures, electrical elements, plumbing fixtures, and plants. Line-drawn elements, like walls, railings, edging, and fences, require that you select two points to define the elements start point and end point. The points you pick determine the elements length and angle. Areadrawn elements, such as pads, fills, and plateaus, are drawn by picking a series of points to define their outline. In many cases, on-screen dimensions are displayed as you draw, making it easy to create line-drawn and area-drawn elements at the correct length or size, and insert elements like doors and windows precisely where you want them in a wall. After you insert an element in your drawing area, you can: Continue inserting the same element Select a different element in the catalog to insert Right-click and select Finish to end the command and return to Selection mode
Tip: When an Insert tool is active, double-clicking inserts the element and finishes the command at the same time. Note, however, that double-clicking after youve already inserted an element will, in most cases, insert another element. Tip: If you are in Selection mode, you can insert any element currently accessible in the catalog by simply selecting the element in the catalog, then moving your pointer into the drawing area.
Going into Selection Mode for Editing

When you have finished using an insertion tool, either by double-clicking or selecting Finish from the right-click menu, you automatically go into Selection mode. When in Selection mode, you can select elements in your drawing area and edit them.
CHAPTER 6: DRAWING AND EDITING BASICS
73
You can also go into Selection mode by clicking the Select/Edit button on any insertion toolbar, or by opening the Edit menu and selecting Select/Edit.
Selecting Elements for Editing

When in Selection Mode, you can select elements for editing. You can select individual elements, a group of elements, or all elements. When an element is selected, it is highlighted in a different color (typically light green). One or more handles are also displayed on the element. When you are in 3D view, all elements on all locations are selectable. When you are in 2D plan view, only elements on the current building location are selectable by default. If you are having trouble selecting the element you want, you might want to use the View Filter to make other elements non-selectable. This makes selection of the element much easier. See View Filter on page 121.
Note: Automatic floors cannot be selected in 2D. They can only be selected in 3D.
To select a single element: 1. 2. Click the element. Click the first element you want to select. Hold down the Shift key and click the rest of the elements you want to select. The most recent selection is green and prior selections are blue. To select a group of elements by creating a selection window: 3. Going from either left to right or right to left, drag a selection window around the elements you want to select. Any elements touching the selection window will be selected (they do not need to be totally enclosed). To select all elements on the current location: Open the Edit menu and select Select All. Open the Edit menu and select Select Previous. To re-select the elements you last selected: To select multiple elements by clicking:
74
Deselecting Elements
When you select elements, you can remove individual elements from your selection set. You can also deselect everything that is currently selected. To deselect individual elements: 1. 2. Hold down the Shift key. Click the element you want to deselect. Open the Edit menu and select Deselect All. Right-click in the drawing area and select Deselect All. Click in a blank spot somewhere else in the drawing area.
To deselect everything in your selection set:
Accessing Edit Tools

Most elements can be moved after they are selected by simply clicking and dragging them. Some can also be stretched or rotated. You can access a full menu of edit tools by right-clicking in the drawing area, or by opening the Edit menu and selecting Modify Elements. Menu options vary depending on the element selected. Typical tools are Properties, Move, Rotate, Duplicate, and Delete. If two types of elements are selected (such as a floor and a wall), only tools that are common to both element types are available. Each chapter includes editing instructions specific to the contents of that chapter. For information about general editing, see Editing Elements on page 511.
Part 2
CONTROLLING THE VIEW
2D and 3D Viewing ...............................................77 Elevations and Sections......................................97 Zooming and Panning .......................................109 Framing............................................................... 115 View Filter ...........................................................121 View Management ..............................................131
76
7
2D AND 3D VIEWING
HGTV Home & Landscape offers a variety of options for viewing your design in 2D and 3D. When you begin working, your design is displayed in 2D Plan View. You can use the 2D Designers View button to instantly view a rendered version of your 2D plan. You can instantly switch to 3D view by choosing one of the predefined 3D Camera Views3D Perspective or 3D Overviewas well as creating new views to suit your needs. By default a sky background is displayed, but you can select a different background if you choose. In 2D Plan View, your drawing is displayed in Wireframe mode by default. In 3D view, it is displayed in Rendered mode. You can switch to other display modes such as Hidden Line and Patterned at any time.
Two Dimensional Viewing ................................................................................... 78 Three Dimensional Viewing................................................................................. 79 Selecting a Background for 3D Views ................................................................. 83 Navigating in 3D .................................................................................................. 88 Creating Dynamic Cutaway Views ...................................................................... 92 Changing the Display Mode ................................................................................ 93
78
This chapter describes some of the basic 2D and 3D viewing features. For information about 3D Real View rendering, see 3D Real View on page 615. For information about creating animations, see Animation on page 633.
Two Dimensional Viewing

There are two options for viewing plans in 2DPlan View and Designers View. The 2D Plan View is useful for beginning a project editing the major elements in a project. The 2D Designers View is useful for putting details and finishing touches on a project.
Viewing the 2D Plan

When you start a drawing, the default view is 2D Plan View, which is a flat, overhead view. 2D Plan View is ideal for creating a floor plan.
To display your model in 2D Plan View: Open the View menu and select 2D Plan View. Click the 2D Plan View button on the View Control toolbar. Right-click in the drawing area and select 2D Plan View.
By default, all locations are visible at the same time. However, any locations other than the current location are dimmed. You can control which elements and locations are displayed by using the View Filter see Using the View Filter on page 122). While in 2D Plan View you can zoom in and out, and pan your drawing.
CHAPTER 7: 2D AND 3D VIEWING
79
Viewing a 2D Designers View

By default, your design is displayed in a wireframe 2D Plan View. You can use the 2D Designers View button to quickly display a rendered version of the 2D Plan View. In a rendered view, materials such as concrete, roof shingles and carpet are applied to the elements and terrain, creating a more realistic view.
To view a 2D Designers View: Open the View menu and select 2D Designers View Click the 2D Designers View button on the View Control toolbar.
Note: To see inside the model, you can use the View Filter to hide elements like the roof or ceilings. See Using the View Filter on
page 122.
Three Dimensional Viewing

There are two views to choose from when viewing projects in 3D Perspective View and Camera View. Using 3D Perspective View, you can view your design from a Southwest viewpoint. Using 3D Overview, you can look at your design from an elevated position, from overhead. You can change each 3D view by editing camera properties, and you can create new views.
80
Displaying 3D Camera Views

A camera view is a 3D perspective view. In a perspective view, the scale of an element decreases according to its distance from the viewer, creating a more real-world view.
3D Perspective View
To view a 3D camera view: Open the View menu and select 3D Camera Views. Then, select the camera view you want to display. Click the 3D Camera Views button on the View Control toolbar and select the camera view to display.
You can change the view interactively by changing the settings or the camera and target positions in the Camera Properties panel on the right side of the screen. To close the Camera Properties panel and display the catalog panel, click the panels Close Properties button.
Tip: If you have your cameras turned on in 2D, you can switch to a 3D view by selecting a camera, right-clicking it, then selecting Activate View. Note: By default, 3D views are displayed in Rendered mode. For information about changing the display mode, see Changing the Display Mode on page 93.
81
Creating a New 3D Camera View

You can create a new 3D camera view by placing a new camera in your 2D Plan View. After youve inserted the camera, you specify the camera angle and viewing field angle by rotating and clicking your mouse. To create a new 3D camera view: 1. While in 2D Plan View, Open the View menu and select 3D Camera Views > Place New Camera, or click the 3D Camera Views button on the View Control toolbar and select Place New Camera. A camera is attached to the pointer, ready to be inserted. 2. 3. Click in or near the model to insert the camera. Move the pointer in the direction that you want to view. Moving the pointer back and forth changes the camera angle. 4. After you have the desired direction and angle in place, click to select a location for the target.
When youve defined the position and angle of your camera, the 3D view instantly appears. By default, the first view you create is called Camera1. The view appears on the 3D Camera Views menu and toolbar menus for easy access.
82
Changing a 3D Camera View

You can change a 3D camera view using the Camera Properties panel. The Camera Properties panel appears when you switch to a 3D camera view.
Enter values in the boxes to change the height and width of the viewing angle.
Click and drag the camera or target to move them interactively
The position of the camera determines the point from which you view your design while in a 3D camera view. By moving your camera you can change your viewpoint. If you are currently in a 3D camera view, you can use navigation tools such as Walk Around and Fly Around to move the camera dynamically. For more information about navigating in 3D, see Navigating in 3D on page 88. You can change what youre focused on in a 3D camera view by moving the target and you can change the target height.
83
Selecting a Background for 3D Views

By default, a sky image is displayed behind your model when you are in a 3D view. You can select a different image to display, including custom bitmaps that you have imported, or switch to a night scene. To select a background for the view: 1. Open the Settings menu and select Program Settings or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar to open the Program Settings dialog. Click Background in the left column. Select either the Day Scene or Night Scene option. You can switch to a night scene if you are doing a nighttime 3D Real View rendering of your model. 4. 5. 6. 7. Click the Select button below the current background preview to open the Materials dialog. Select a background from the materials list. Click OK in the Materials dialog. Click OK in the Program Settings dialog.
2. 3.
Turning Cameras On and Off

Every 3D camera view is controlled by a virtual camera. The Cameras On/ Off button displays a camera icon on the screen. This shows you where your viewpoint is. If you click on a camera, the target and viewing field angle become highlighted to show what the camera is focused on, and how much of your design is included in the view. When displaying cameras in 2D Plan View, you can move cameras and targets to adjust the associated 3D views. Moving cameras in 2D Plan View is an alternative to adjusting 3D views interactively with the Camera Properties panel. To turn cameras on: Select View > Viewing Aids > Cameras On/Off Click the Viewing Aids button on the View Control toolbar and select Cameras On/Off.
In 2D Plan View, all cameras for all 3D camera views are visible. By default there are two 3D camera views: one for the 3D Perspective, and one for the 3D Overview. You may need to zoom out to see them.
84
Changing Your Viewpoint

Moving a camera changes the angle you are viewing from in a 3D camera view. You can change the position of a camera by clicking and dragging the camera grip in the Camera Properties panel. You can also move a camera while in 2D Plan View if cameras are turned on. To change your viewpoint in a 3D camera view: 1. Display the 3D camera view, and make sure the Camera Properties panel is displayed. If it isnt, right-click in the view window and select Camera Properties. In the view map window of the Camera Properties panel, click and drag the camera grip, then release your mouse button. The 3D view updates automatically. Make sure you are in 2D Plan View. Turn your cameras on, as explained in Turning Cameras On and Off on page 83. By default, the camera for the 3D Perspective view is located to the left of the model. The camera for the 3D Overview is located towards the right side of the model. Click the camera you want to move. Hover your pointer over the cameras blue grip to display the Move pointer. Or, right-click in the project workspace and select Move Camera. Click and drag the camera to move it. To see the resulting view, right-click and select Activate View, or double-click the camera.
2.
To change your viewpoint from 2D Plan View: 1. 2. 3.
4.
5. 6.
85
Changing the Camera Height

The height of the camera determines the height from which you view your model in a 3D camera view. Using positive camera height, you can look down on your model. Using a negative camera height, you can look up at your model. To change the camera height: 1. Display a 3D camera view, and make sure the Camera Properties panel is displayed. If it isnt, right-click in the project workspace and select Camera Properties. In the Camera Properties panel, type the desired height in the Camera Height edit box, or use the arrows to increase or decrease the height.
2.
Changing the Target of a 3D Camera View

The target of a 3D camera view is the focus point. You can change the position of a target by clicking and dragging the target grip in the Camera Properties panel. You can also move a target while in 2D Plan View. To change the target in a 3D camera view: 1. Display a 3D camera view, and make sure the Camera Properties panel is displayed. If it isnt, right-click in the project workspace and select Camera Properties. In the Map area of the Camera Properties panel, click and drag the target grip, then release your mouse button. The 3D view is updated automatically.
2.
86
To change a target from 2D Plan View: 1. In 2D Plan View, turn the cameras on. By default, the camera used for the 3D Perspective view is located to the left of the model. The camera used for the 3D Overview is located towards the right side of the model. 2. Click on the camera to move its target. The target is usually inside or near your model. It is marked with a blue grip. Hover your pointer over the targets grip to display the Move cursor. Or, right-click in the drawing area and select Move Target. Click and drag the target to move it. To see the resulting view, right-click in the project workspace and select Activate View, or double-click the camera.
3.
4. 5.
Changing the Target Height

Raising or lowering a target can increase or decrease the steepness of the angle from which you are viewing when looking through the camera. To change the target height: 1. Display the 3D camera view, and make sure the Camera Properties panel is displayed. If it isnt, right-click in the project workspace and select Camera Properties. In the Camera Properties panel, type the desired height in the Target Height edit box, or use the arrows to increase or decrease the height.
2.
87
Changing the Viewing Field Angle

In a 3D camera view, the viewing field is your field of vision. It works like a camera lenshigher values produce a wide-angle view, while lower values produce a close-up view. Sometimes changing the viewing field angle seems to zoom in or out on your model. This happens because the image must be reduced for wideangle views to provide enough screen space to contain the view. Conversely, the image is enlarged to fill the screen at smaller view angles, creating a close-up view. To change the viewing field angle in a 3D camera view: 1. Display the 3D camera view, and make sure the Camera Properties panel is displayed. If it isnt, right-click in the project workspace and select Camera Properties. In the Camera Properties panel, type the desired angle in the View Angle edit box, or use the slider to increase or decrease the angle.
2.
This image shows a room at a 45 degree angle.
This image shows a room at a 120 degree angle.
88
Navigating in 3D
While in 3D view you can use a variety of navigation tools to move around in your design in real time. These include Walk Around, Fly Around, Look Around, and Slide.
Walking Around in a 3D Camera View

When you are in a 3D camera view, you can use the Walk Around button to walk around your model, or even go right inside it. You can walk forward, backward, left, or right. To walk around in a 3D camera view: 1. Open the View menu and select Zoom and Navigate > Walk Around, or right-click in the drawing area and select Walk Around, or click the Walk Around button on the Zoom and Navigate toolbar. In the Camera Properties panel, click and drag the target in the direction you want to move. To move forward, click and drag upward. To move backward, click and drag downward. To walk left or right, click and drag left or right. If you click and drag up to the left, your path of motion will curve upward to the left, and so forth.
2.
89
Flying Around Your 3D Model

In a 3D camera view, the Fly Around button revolves the camera around the target. To fly around your model in a 3D camera view: 1. Open the View menu and select Zoom and Navigate > Fly Around, or right-click in the project workspace and select Fly Around, or click the Fly Around button on the Zoom and Navigate toolbar. Use your mouse button to move the camera. Click and hold the mouse button to slowly rotate the camera around the target on a level plane. Drag toward the top of the screen to tilt your model downward like a boat coming off a wave. Drag toward the bottom of the screen to tilt your model up like a boat riding onto a wave. Drag to the right to rotate the model in a clockwise direction. Drag to the left to rotate the model in a counterclockwise direction.
2.
Note: Model direction is the opposite of camera direction. For example, if the model appears to be moving clockwise, the camera is actually moving counterclockwise.
90
Sliding in a 3D Camera View

In a 3D camera view, the Slide button moves both the camera and target at the same time. To slide in a 3D camera view: 1. Open the View menu and select Zoom and Navigate > Slide, or right-click in the project workspace and select Slide, or click the Slide button on the Zoom and Navigate toolbar. When Slide is selected, you can do the following: Drag right to move your model view to the left. Drag left to move your model view to the right. Drag up toward the top of the screen to move your model view down toward the bottom of the screen. Drag down toward the bottom of the screen to move your model view up toward the top of the screen.
2.
Note: Model direction is the opposite of camera and target direction. For example, if the model appears to be moving to the right, the camera and target are actually moving to the left.
91
Spinning the View Using the Look Around Feature

In a 3D camera view, the Look Around button revolves the target around the camera. To spin the view in a 3D camera view: 1. Open the View menu and select Zoom and Navigate > Look Around, or right-click in the project workspace and select Look Around, or click the Look Around button on the Zoom and Navigate toolbar. When Look Around is selected, if the target is located inside or near the model, you can do the following: Drag right to move the target in a counterclockwise direction. Your model orbits around you in a clockwise direction. Drag left to move the target in a clockwise direction. Your model orbits around you in a counterclockwise direction. Drag up to lower the height and shorten the distance of the target. Your view becomes high-angle, and your model moves toward the top of the screen. Drag down to raise the height and lengthen the distance of the target. Your view becomes low-angle, and your model moves toward the bottom of the screen.
2.
Note: Be careful when using the Look Around button. It is very easy to lose sight of your model since the cameras eye is fixed in one direction only. It does not move to follow the orbiting target. Therefore, your field of vision is limited, and your model can quickly get above, below, or behind you.
Resetting the Camera in a 3D View

If you have moved the camera of a 3D camera view, either by dragging it in 2D Plan View or using a navigation feature like Walk Around or Slide, you can use the Reset Camera button to move the camera back into its original position. To reset the camera to its original position: Open the View menu and select Zoom and Navigate > Reset Camera, or click the Reset Camera button on the Zoom and Navigate toolbar.
92
Creating Dynamic Cutaway Views

With the Dynamic Cutaway button, you can strip away a portion of your 3D model so that you can see inside it. By sliding a selected clipping plane back and forth, you can create a moving cross-section of your design.
To create a dynamic cutaway view: 1. Go into 3D view. 2. Open the View menu and select Cutaway View, or click the Dynamic Cutaway button on the View Control toolbar to open the Dynamic Cutaway dialog. 3. Click the clipping plane you would like to use. For example, if you want to strip away the front of your house, click Front. 4. Click and drag the slider in the Dynamic Cutaway dialog to move the clipping plane back and forth. As you move the clipping plane, your design is stripped away. 5. To change the angle of the clipping plane, click and drag inside the dialogs clipping plane graphic to rotate the clipping plane. 6. When youve created the desired view, click OK. The 3D view will remain a cutaway view after you close the Dynamic Cutaway dialog. If you want to return to the original view, click None in the Dynamic Cutaway dialog before clicking OK.
93
Changing the Display Mode

By default, your design is displayed in Wireframe mode when you are in 2D Plan View. When you switch to a 3D view, the default display mode is Rendered mode. There are five display modes from which to choose, and all of them can be used in both 2D and 3D views. To change the display mode: 1. 2. Select View > Display Mode, or click the Display Mode button on the View Control toolbar. Select the desired display mode.
Wireframe
In Wireframe display mode, each line in your design is visible, creating a see-through view.
Hidden Line
In Hidden Line display mode, all lines that are normally hidden are added to the view, creating an opaque view.
94
Rendered
In Rendered display mode, textures and colors are applied to the elements and terrain, creating a realistic view.
Note: The Rendered display mode is not the same as 3D Real View.
Rendered Outline
In Rendered Outline display mode, textures and colors are applied to the elements and terrain, and surface edges are outlined in a single, dark line for increased surface definition.
95
Patterned
In Patterned display mode, patterns of lines (hatching) are applied to the surfaces of elements. Patterns are part of a materials definition. So, the materials applied to your elements determine what patterns you will see.
96
8
ELEVATIONS AND SECTIONS
You can view elevations of your design, and create cross-sections to view. Elevations show 2D representations of your model, from whatever angle you select. You can create elevation views to see each room individually, to see the backyard, the front yard, and so on. Section views show cross-sections of your model, so you can view the interior. You can create section views for each portion of your model, to see items that you would not see from the outside.
Viewing Elevations .............................................................................................. 98 Creating a Section View .................................................................................... 104
98
Viewing Elevations
Elevations are 2D views that show a particular side of your house (front, rear, left, or right) as if you were looking at it face on. While in an elevation view, you can zoom in and out as well as change the display type.
To view an elevation: 1. 2. Open the View menu and select Elevation Views, or click the Elevation Views button on the View Control toolbar. Select the elevation you want to view: Front Elevation, Back Elevation, Right Elevation, or Left Elevation.
Tip: If you have elevation marks turned on in 2D Plan View, you can switch to an elevation view by selecting an elevation mark, right-clicking it, then selecting Activate View. Or, you can double-click the elevation mark.
Turning Elevation Marks On and Off

You can use the Elevation Marks On/Off feature to display elevation marks in 2D Plan View. An elevation mark contains the elevations label and a target arrow that identifies the direction of the elevation view. By default, four marks are displayed, one for each of the default elevations on the Elevation View menu. If you have created a custom elevation, a mark is displayed for that elevation as well. To turn elevation marks on or off: Open the View menu and select Viewing Aids > Elevation Marks On/Off, or Click the On/Off button on the View Control toolbar and select Elevation Marks On/Off.
The marks are located at the boundaries of your drawing, so you must zoom out to see them.
CHAPTER 8: ELEVATIONS AND SECTIONS
99
If you select and right-click an elevation mark, you open a menu that includes options to move the elevation mark, move the elevation view target, and activate an elevation view.
Creating a Custom Elevation

You can create a custom elevation by inserting an elevation mark in 2D Plan View. Once youve inserted the mark, which represents the viewpoint, you can rotate it using your mouse to define the view direction. To create a custom elevation: 1. 2. Make sure you are in 2D Plan View. Turn elevation marks on, as explained in Turning Elevation Marks On and Off on page 98. By viewing elevation marks, you can see where other elevation marks are located. The default elevation marks are located at the boundaries of the terrain, so you must zoom out to see them. 3. Open the View menu and select Elevation Views > Create New Elevation, or click the Elevation Views button on the View Control toolbar and select Create New Elevation. An elevation mark is attached to the mouse pointer, ready to be inserted. Insert the elevation mark in front of the part of your model that you want to see. 4. 5. 6. Click to insert the new elevation mark. Move the pointer to rotate the arrow on the elevation mark and define the view direction. Click the mark to finish.
Once youve positioned the elevation mark, the resulting elevation is opened. It is also added to the Elevation Views menu and Elevation Views toolbar button menu for easy access. By default, the first view you create is named Elevation1.
100
Displaying and Hiding the Elevation Properties Panel

When you switch to elevation view, the Elevation Properties panel is displayed on the right side of the window. You can use this panel to adjust the elevation and its settings. If you close the panel, you can open it again when you need it. To hide the Elevation Properties panel: Click the Close Properties button at the bottom of the Elevation Properties panel. With the elevation view displayed, right-click in the project workspace and select Elevation Properties.
To display the Elevation Properties panel:
Zooming and Panning in the Elevation Properties Panel

When the Elevation Properties panel is displayed, you can zoom and pan the view using the panels interactive view map pane. For example, you might need to zoom out to be able to see the entire model or the elevation marks
CHAPTER 8: ELEVATIONS AND SECTIONS 101
Moving Elevation Marks

By default, elevation marks are centered on your model, meaning that model is centered on the screen when you see the elevation view. If you move an elevation mark in 2D Plan View, the model can be moved left or right when you see the elevation view. You can move an elevation mark while in elevation view using the Elevation Properties panel. You can also move an elevation mark while in 2D Plan View, and then open the resulting view. To move an elevation mark while in elevation view: 1. 2. Display the elevation view, making sure that the Elevation Properties panel is displayed. In the view map pane of the Elevation Properties panel, click and drag the yellow and black elevation mark grip. The elevation view updates instantly. For front and rear elevations, move the mark left or right. For left or right elevations, move the mark up or down. Moving a mark closer to or farther away from the model has no effect on the elevation view. To move an elevation mark while in 2D Plan View: 1. 2. Select the elevation mark in 2D plan view. Hover the mouse pointer over the marks blue grip to display the Move pointer. Or, right-click in the project workspace and select Move. Click and drag the mark to move it where you want it. Right-click and select Activate View to see the elevation view, or double-click the elevation mark.
3. 4.
102
Changing the Target of an Elevation

By default, elevation marks point straight at your model, resulting in a completely face-on view when you display an elevation view. When you rotate an elevation mark, you change the target of the elevation view, focusing the view on a different part of your model. To change the target while in elevation view: 1. 2. Display the elevation view, and make sure the Elevation Properties panel is displayed. In the view map window of the Elevation Properties panel, click and drag the round red and yellow target grip to rotate the mark. The elevation view updates. In 2D Plan View, and make sure elevation marks are turned on, as explained in Turning Elevation Marks On and Off on page 98. Click the elevation mark to select it. Right-click and select Move Target. Click and drag to rotate the mark so it is pointing in a different direction. Right-click and select Activate View to see the elevation view, or double-click the elevation mark.
To change the target from 2D Plan View: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Editing Elevation Properties

You can edit the name of an elevation, and edit the mark text and mark text style. To edit elevation properties: 1. 2. 3. 4. Display the elevation view and make sure the Elevation Properties panel is displayed. To edit the name of the elevation as it appears on the Elevation Views menu, change the text in the Name box. To edit the text that appears on the elevation mark, change the text in the Mark Text box. To apply a different text style to the elevation mark, click the Text Style button to open the Text Styles dialog. You can add and edit text styles. For more information about text styles, see Changing the Text Style on page 545.
Deleting an Elevation
You can delete an elevation from the Elevation Views menu by deleting the corresponding elevation mark in 2D Plan View. To delete an elevation: 1. 2. 3. In 2D Plan View, and make sure elevation marks are turned on, as explained in Turning Elevation Marks On and Off on page 98. Click the mark to select it. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete.
104
Creating a Section View

You can cut through any portion of your model to create a section view. Section views are a great way to see the interior features of your model, which you cant see from the outside.
To create a section view, draw a section line through your model in 2D Plan View, then click to define the view direction and depth. To create a section view: 1. 2. Make sure you are in 2D Plan View. Open the View menu and select Section Views > Create New Section, or click the Section Views button on the View Control toolbar and select Create New Section. Select two points to draw a line that cuts through your model. This is the line you will be viewing from. 4. Move your pointer in the direction you want to view. The more you move away from the section line, the deeper the view becomes. 5. When the bounding box is the desired distance and direction from the section line, click to finish.
3.
After youve defined the section mark, the resulting section view opens. It is also added to the Section Views menu and toolbar menus. By default, the first view you create is called Section1. When you are in section view, the Section Properties panel appears on the right side of the screen. You can use this panel to adjust the section and its settings.
Turning Section Marks On and Off

When you create a section view, a section mark is displayed in the 2D Plan View. The section mark contains markers at each end of the section line, indicating the direction of the section view. You can turn section marks on and off using the Section Marks On/Off feature. To turn section marks on or off: Open the View menu and select Viewing Aids > Section Marks On/Off, or Click the On/Off button on the View Control toolbar and select Section Marks On/Off.
Viewing Section Views

After you create section views, you can display them at any time. To view a section view: 1. 2. Open the View menu and select Section Views, or click the Section Views button on the View Control toolbar. Select the section view you want to display.
Tip: If you have section marks turned on in 2D Plan View, you can display a section view by right-clicking a section mark, and then selecting Activate View.
Displaying and Hiding the Section Properties Panel

When you switch to section view, the Section Properties panel automatically appears on the right side of the screen. You can use this panel to adjust the section view and its settings. You can close the panel at any time to display the Catalog panel. If you have closed the panel, you can open it again. To close the Section Properties panel: In the Section Properties panel, click the Close Properties button. In a section view, right-click in the project workspace and select Section Properties. To display the Section Properties panel:
106
Zooming and Panning in the Section Properties Panel

When the Section Properties panel is displayed, you can zoom and pan the view using the view map pane. For example, you might need to zoom out to be able to see the entire model or the section marks. The zoom and pan tools are located below the view map pane.
Changing Your Viewpoint in a Section View

You can change your viewpoint in a section view by moving a section mark. You can use the Section Properties panel to move the section mark, or, you can move the section mark in 2D Plan View, and then open the section view. To change your viewpoint in a section view: 1. 2. Display the section view, and make sure the Section Properties panel is displayed. In the view map pane of the Section Properties panel, click and drag the square grip at the center of the section mark line, then release your mouse button. The section view updates. In 2D Plan View, make sure section marks are turned on. Click the section mark to select it. Hover the mouse pointer over the blue grip on the section line to display the Move pointer. Or, right-click in the project workspace and select Move. Click and drag the section mark to move it. Right-click the section mark and select Activate View to see the result.
To change your viewpoint from 2D plan view: 1. 2. 3.
4. 5.
Changing the Depth of a Section View

You can change the depth of a section view by stretching the section line bounding box. You can change the depth using the Section Properties panel, or in 2D Plan View, then open the resulting view. To change the depth of a section view: 1. 2. In section view, make sure the Section Properties panel is displayed. In the view map pane of the Section Properties panel, click and drag the round red and yellow grip, then release your mouse button. The section view updates. In 2D Plan View, make sure section marks are turned on. Click the section mark to select it. Hover the mouse pointer over the blue grip on the bounding box line to display the Stretch pointer. Or, right-click in the project workspace and select Stretch. Click and drag to make the bounding box smaller or bigger. The bigger the box, the deeper the view. Right-click and select Activate View to see the result.
To change the depth of a section view from 2D Plan View: 1. 2. 3.
4. 5.
Editing Section View Properties

You can edit the name of a section view, and edit the section mark text and text style. To edit section properties: 1. 2. 3. 4. Display the section view and make sure the Section Properties panel is displayed. To edit the name of the section view, edit the text in the Name box. To edit the text that appears on the section mark, edit the text in the Mark Text box. To apply a different text style to the section mark, click the Text Style button and make a selection from the Text Styles dialog. You can also add and edit text styles. For more information about text styles, see Changing the Text Style on page 545.
108
Deleting a Section View

You can delete a section view by deleting the corresponding section mark in 2D Plan View. To delete a section view: 1. 2. 3. In 2D Plan View, make sure section marks are turned on. Select the mark to delete. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete.
9
ZOOMING AND PANNING
When working in 2D views, you can magnify or reduce the view of the entire model, magnify a selected area, and magnify the view to fit project workspace, creating the largest view possible. You can pan the view in any direction by clicking and dragging.
Zooming In .........................................................................................................110 Zooming Out.......................................................................................................110 Zooming in Realtime ..........................................................................................110 Zooming With a Scroll Wheel Mouse .................................................................111 Zooming a Selected Area...................................................................................111 Panning Across a Drawing .................................................................................112 Zooming Back to the Previous View...................................................................113
110
Zooming In
The Zoom In button magnifies the entire view in increments. Zooming is possible in both 2D and 3D views. To zoom in: 1. Open the View menu and select Zoom and Navigate > Zoom In, or click the Zoom In button on the Zoom and Navigate toolbar. To zoom in more, select the Zoom In button repeatedly until the view is sufficiently magnified.
2.
Zooming Out
The Zoom Out button reduces the size of the current view in increments. To zoom out: 1. Open the View menu and select Zoom and Navigate > Zoom Out, or click the Zoom Out button on the Zoom and Navigate toolbar. To zoom out more, select the Zoom Out button repeatedly until the desired zoom level is achieved.
2.
Zooming in Realtime
The Zoom Realtime button continuously magnifies or shrinks the view as you click and drag with your mouse. You can zoom in and out in 2D Plan View or in any 3D view. To zoom in and out: 1. Open the View menu and select Zoom and Navigate > Zoom Realtime, or click the Zoom Realtime button on the Zoom and Navigate toolbar. To zoom in, click and drag toward the top of the screen. To zoom out, click and drag toward the bottom of the screen. When the view is the desired size, release your mouse button.
2. 3.
CHAPTER 9: ZOOMING AND PANNING 111
Zooming With a Scroll Wheel Mouse

If you have a mouse with a scroll wheel, you can zoom in and out in real time by rolling the wheel. The position of the mouse pointer in the project workspace determines the center of the zoom. To zoom with a scroll wheel mouse: 1. 2. 3. Position the pointer over the center of the area you want to zoom. To zoom in, roll the wheel forward. To zoom out, roll the wheel backward.
Zooming a Selected Area

Using the Zoom Window button you can magnify a particular area of your design by drawing a selection window around it. To zoom a selected area: 1. Open the View menu and select Zoom and Navigate > Zoom Window, or click the Zoom Window button on the Zoom and Navigate toolbar. Your pointer becomes a magnifying glass. 2. Click and drag a selection window around the area you want to magnify.
Note: The Zoom Window button is not available in 3D camera views.
112
Zooming to Fit the Drawing Area

The Zoom to Fit button instantly extends your model to the edges of the project workspace. This ensures that your entire model is visible at the most maximized view possible, and makes full use of the project workspace. To zoom the drawing to fit the drawing area: Open the View menu and select Zoom and Navigate > Zoom to Fit, or click the Zoom to Fit button on the Zoom and Navigate toolbar.
The terrain is considered part of your drawing. To zoom your model to fit the drawing area, you must turn the terrain off before using Zoom to Fit.
Note: The Zoom to Fit button is not available in 3D Camera Views.
Panning Across a Drawing

Using the Pan button, you can move the current model view to bring a particular part of the model into view. This is especially useful when the area you want to view is currently not visible because you have zoomed in on your drawing. To pan the current view: 1. Open the View menu and select Zoom and Navigate > Pan, or click the Pan button on the Zoom and Navigate toolbar. Click in the project workspace. Drag the mouse in the direction you want to pan. Release the mouse button.
Note: The Pan button is not available in 3D Camera Views.
2. 3. 4.
CHAPTER 9: ZOOMING AND PANNING 113
Zooming Back to the Previous View

If you have used a zoom or pan button, you can use the Zoom Previous button to return the view to its previous state. To zoom back to the previous view: Open the View menu and select Zoom and Navigate > Zoom Previous, or click the Zoom Previous button on the Zoom and Navigate toolbar.
114
10
FRAMING
Framing is the underlying structure of a building, and includes the solid parts of construction, such as the beams and struts. Each of those solid parts is known as a member. For example, a piece of lumber in a wall is a member. When you display framing, you can see the supporting structure of your model, but you cant edit it. Displaying framing is for viewing purposes only. When you edit framing properties, the result appears only when framing is displayed.
Displaying Framing.............................................................................................116 Specifying Framing Members for Walls ..............................................................116 Specifying Framing Members for Floors.............................................................117 Specifying Framing Members for Ceilings..........................................................118 Specifying Framing Members for Roofs .............................................................119
116
Displaying Framing
Walls, floors, ceilings, and roofs each have a framing configuration assigned to them. You can view the models frame using the Display Framing button, then return to a regular view of your model at any time. To display framing: Open the View menu and select Framing Visibility > Display Framing.
Note: Framing cannot be selected for editing. It is available for viewing purposes only.
To return to a non-framed view: Open the View menu and select Framing Visibility > Display All But Framing.
Specifying Framing Members for Walls

Walls have a framing configuration assigned to them that you see when you display the framing. You can specify a custom framing configuration, consisting of a framing member selection and spacing between the members. Framing can be displayed using the Display Framing feature, and the configurations are included in the Project Estimate dialog. To specify framing members for walls: 1. 2. 3. 4. In non-framed view, select the wall you want to change. Right-click and select Properties, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Properties to open the Walls properties dialog. Click the Specify Framing button, located below the Properties list, to open the Wall Framing dialog. To select a stud member, select Stud, and then click Select to open the Catalog Access dialog. Select the desired stud material, and then click OK. To select a header member, select Header, and then click Select to open the Catalog Access dialog. Select the desired header material, and then click OK. If you do not want to specify the material for member, select the member name in the Wall Framing dialog and click Delete.
5.
6.
CHAPTER 10: FRAMING 117
7. 8.
To specify the spacing between studs, edit the value in the Stud Spacing box. Click OK.
Specifying Framing Members for Floors

Floors have a framing configuration assigned to them that you see when you display framing. You can specify a custom framing configuration, consisting of a joist and rim joist member selection, joist spacing, and joist direction. Framing can be displayed using the Display Framing feature, and the configurations are included in the Project Estimate dialog. To specify framing members for floors: 1. In a non-framed view, select the floor.
Note: If the floor was created automatically, you must select it in 3D view.
2.
Right-click and select Properties, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Properties to open the Floors properties dialog. Click the Specify Framing button, located below the Properties list, to open the Floor Framing dialog. To select a joist member, select Joist, and then click Select to open the Catalog Access dialog. Select the desired material and then click OK. To select a rim joist member, select Rim Joist, and then click Select. to open the Catalog Access dialog. Select the desired material, and then click OK. If you do not want to specify the material for member, select the member name in the Floor Framing dialog and click Delete. To specify the spacing between joists, edit the value Joist Spacing box. To specify the directions in which you want the joists to run, edit the value in the Joist Direction box. Click OK.
3. 4.
5.
6. 7. 8. 9.
118
Specifying Framing Members for Ceilings

Ceilings have a framing configuration assigned to them that you see when you display framing. You can specify a custom framing configuration, consisting of a joist and rim joist member selection, joist spacing, and joist direction. Framing can be displayed using the Display Framing tool, and is the configuration is include in the Project Estimate dialog. To specify framing members for ceilings: 1. 2. In non-framed view, select the ceiling you want to change. Right-click and select Properties, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Properties. to open the Ceilings properties dialog. Click the Specify Framing button, located below the Properties list, to open the Ceiling Framing dialog. To select a joist member, select Joist, and then click Select to open the Catalog Access dialog. Select the desired material, and then click OK. To select a rim joist member, select Rim Joist, then click Select to open the Catalog Access dialog. Select the desired material, and then click OK. If you do not want to specify the material for a member, select the member name in the Ceiling Framing dialog and click Delete. To specify the spacing between joists, edit the value Joist Spacing box. To specify the directions in which you want the joists to run, edit the value in the Joist Direction box. Click OK.
3. 4.
5.
6. 7. 8. 9.
CHAPTER 10: FRAMING 119
Specifying Framing Members for Roofs

Roofs have a framing configuration assigned to them that you see when you display framing. You can specify a custom framing configuration consisting of a framing member selection and spacing between the members. Framing can be displayed using the Display Framing feature, and the framing configuration is included in the Project Estimate dialog. To specify framing members for roofs: 1. 2. In non-framed view, select the roof you want to change. Right-click and select Properties, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Properties to open the Roofs properties dialog. Click the Specify Framing button, located below the Properties list, to open the Roof Framing dialog. Select Rafter, and then click Select to open the Catalog Access dialog. If you do not want to specify the material for a member, select the member name in the Roof Framing dialog and click Delete. In the Rafter Spacing box, specify the desired spacing between rafters. Click OK.
3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Note: Additional roof framing details are located on the Support and Details tab of the Roofs properties dialog.
120
11
VIEW FILTER
With the View Filter, you control which elements or locations are displayed at any given time. For example, you might want to hide the roof and ceilings to see inside a model. You can also make some elements non-selectable, so that you can select a particular element in your drawing, such as a floor or ceiling. You can filter: an entire location or multiple locations elements on a specific location or multiple locations elements on the terrain notation objects, such as text and dimensions
Note: Using the View Filter to control the visibility of elements does not delete the elements from your drawing. It just hides them from view.
Using the View Filter ......................................................................................... 122 Filtering Elements.............................................................................................. 124 Displaying and Hiding Building Locations ......................................................... 126 Displaying and Hiding Elements on the Terrain................................................. 127 Displaying and Hiding Other Items.................................................................... 128 Making Items Selectable or Non-Selectable ..................................................... 129
122
Using the View Filter

You can use the View Filter at any time to control the visibility or selectability of elements and locations. To open the View Filter: Open the View menu and select View Filter or click the View Filter button on the View Control toolbar to open the View Filter dialog.
Elements Tabs Locations
Display Controls
Selection Controls
CHAPTER 11: VIEW FILTER 123
The View Filter dialog contains three tabs: The Elements on Location tab lists all the elements in your model that are associated with building locations. Many elements in the list can be expanded to display a list of subcomponents for precise view control. You can display or hide elements on all locations or on specific locations. The Elements on Terrain tab lists the terrain and any landscaping elements in your drawing that are associated with the terrain. The Notation tab contains text, dimensions, drafting objects, project trace images, and electrical wiring.
The icons in the Display column indicate whether or not an element is currently displayed. Clicking an icon switches the icon to the opposite state (on or off). Element is turned on Element is turned off On the Elements on Location tab, this icon indicates that some of an elements components are turned on, and some are turned off. Clicking Display All turns on all elements displayed on the current tab. Clicking Display None turns off all elements displayed on the current tab. On the Elements on Location tab, these buttons affect elements on the currently selected location(s). If the Lock Framing check box is selected, the visibility of wall, roof, floor, and ceiling framing remains locked in its current state regardless of any element filtering you do.
124
The icons in the Selection column indicate whether or not an element is currently selectable. Clicking an icon switches the icon to the opposite state (selectable or non-selectable). Element is selectable Element is not selectable On the Elements on Location tab, this icon indicates that some of an elements components are selectable, and some are not. Clicking Select All makes all elements on the current tab selectable. Clicking Select None turns off selectability for all elements displayed on the current tab. On the Elements on Location tab, these buttons affect elements on the currently selected location(s).
Note: Framing cannot be selected.
Filtering Elements
You can use the View Filter to display or hide selected element types on all or selected building locations, or to control whether or not they can be selected. To filter elements: 1. Open the View menu and select View Filter or click the View Filter button on the View Control toolbar to open the View Filter dialog. Click the tab containing the element that you want to filter. If you are on the Elements on Location tab, elements on all locations are displayed. To control the elements on a specific location, clear the All Locations check box and then select the location where you want to do the filtering. You can Ctrl+click to select multiple locations if you want. To filter specific element components, click the plus sign (+) to the left of an element to display a list of components. For example, the Walls element can have components such as wall surfaces, trim, wall framing, doors, and windows. Each component has its own display icon.
2. 3.
4.
5.
To turn an element on or off, click the elements eye icon in the Display column to switch it on or off. Element or component is turned on Element or component is turned off
6. 7.
To display or hide all elements currently shown in the element list, click Display All or Display None. To control an elements selectability, click the elements filter icon in the Selection column to switch it on or off. Element is selectable Element is not selectable
8. 9.
To control the selectability of all elements currently shown in the element list, click Select All or Select None. After youve selected what you want to filter, click OK.
126
Displaying and Hiding Building Locations

You can turn individual locations on or off. To filter entire locations: 1. Open the View menu and select View Filter or click the View Filter button on the View Control toolbar to open the View Filter dialog. Select the Elements on Location tab. Clear the All Locations check box. In the locations list, select the items that you want to filter. You can press Ctrl and click to select multiple locations. Click Display All or Display None to turn all the elements on the selected location on or off. If the Lock Framing check box is selected, the visibility of all wall, roof, floor, and ceiling framing remains locked in its current state. For example, if Wall Framing is locked in a visible state, Wall Framing will remain visible even if you turn off the Walls element or click the Display None button. Click OK.
2. 3. 4.
5. 6.
7.
Displaying and Hiding Elements on the Terrain

You can use the View Filter to display or hide the terrain and any elements associated with the terrain, such as landscaping elements. To filter elements on the terrain: 1. Open the View menu and select View Filter, or click the View Filter button on the View Control toolbar to open the View Filter dialog. Select the Elements on Terrain tab. Click the eye icons in the Display column to turn elements on or off. You can also click the Display All or Display None button to display or hide all terrain elements simultaneously. Element or component is turned on Element or component is turned off 4. Click OK.
2. 3.
Note: The visibility of decks is controlled on the Elements on Location tab. The visibility of exterior lighting, exterior furniture, or exterior accessories that were inserted using the Insert on Location option is also controlled on the Elements on Location tab.
128
Displaying and Hiding Other Items

You can use the View Filter to control the visibility of notation objects such as text, dimensions, drafting objects, electrical wiring, and project trace images. 1. Open the View menu and select View Filter, or click the View Filter button on the View Control toolbar to open the View Filter dialog. Select the Notation tab. Click the eye icons in the Display column to turn items on or off. You can also click the Display All or Display None button to display or hide all objects simultaneously. Element or component is turned on Element or component is turned off 4. Click OK.
2. 3.
Making Items Selectable or Non-Selectable

When your model contains a number of elements, it can be difficult to select certain elements when they are too close to one another or when they overlap one another. Floors, for example, can be difficult to select in 2D views because they are placed against the walls. You can use the View Filter to set whether items can be selected. You change the selectability of individual elements, entire building locations, terrain elements, and of notation objects such as text, dimensions, drafting objects, electrical wiring, and project trace images. To make items selectable or non-selectable: 1. Open the View menu and select View Filter, or click the View Filter button on the View Control toolbar to open the View Filter dialog. Select the appropriate tab: Select the Elements on Location tab to make an entire locationfor example, the second floor of a house selectable or non-selectable. You can also make elements within a location selectable or non-selectable. Select the Elements on Terrain tab to make the terrain and any elements associated with the terrain selectable or nonselectable. Select the Notation tab to make notation objects, including text, dimensions, drafting objects, electrical wiring, and project trace images selectable or non-selectable.
2.
3.
Click the items filter icon in the Selection column to turn selectability on or off. Element is selectable Element is not selectable
4. 5.
To control the selectability of all elements currently shown in the element list, click Select All or Select None. Click OK.
130
12
VIEW MANAGEMENT
When you start a project, there is one project workspace viewthe Standard view. You can create multiple project workspace view windows, with each window having different view settings. For example, you could display a wireframe, 2D Plan View in the Standard project workspace view window, and create a new project workspace view window containing a 3D view of your model. You can display multiple view windows at the same time using the Tile Open Views and Cascade Open Views buttons. View windows can be moved, resized, and closed to create the exact arrangement you want. For more information about creating different views, see 2D and 3D Viewing on page 77, Elevations and Sections on page 97, and Framing on page 115.
Managing View Windows .................................................................................. 132 Managing View Window Groups ....................................................................... 138 Displaying and Hiding the View Tabs ................................................................ 139
132
Managing View Windows

The View Manager contains a list of project workspace view windows and enables you to open, close, create, and edit views. By default, your project contains one open view window called Standard. Using view management tools, you can create and manipulate new view windows. When you create new view windows, you can switch between open view windows using the Window menu or the View tabs if they are shown. You can edit the names and properties of views listed in the View Manager. To open the View Manager: Open the View menu and select View Manager, or click the View Manager button on the View Control toolbar.
Creating a New View Window

You can use the View Manager to create new view windows and specify different view settings for each window. For example, you can create a view window containing a front elevation view of your model. Views are stored in groups. You can add view windows to the default group, or create your own groups. For example, you can create a group for 3D views only, then add a set of 3D Camera View windows to that group.\ Before you can add create and add a new view window, you must create a new view. For more information about creating different views, see 2D and 3D Viewing on page 77, Elevations and Sections on page 97, and Framing on page 115.
CHAPTER 12: VIEW MANAGEMENT 133
To create a new view in the View Manager: 1. Open the View menu and select View Manager, or click the View Manager button on the View Control toolbar to open the View Manager dialog. Select the group to which you want to add a view. Click the New View button, or right-click and select New View. In the Name box in the View Properties dialog, type a name for the view window. Select a print scale for the view. The scale is the ratio of units on paper to real-world units. If the scale is set to 1:1 (12" = 1'- 0"), twelve inches on paper will represent one foot of your model. This would create a rather large printout. A scale of 1:12 (1" = 1'- 0"), however, results in a smallerscale view when the drawing is printed because every foot is represented by only one inch on paper. For more information about scale, see Editing the Print Scale on page 672. 6. 7. Click OK. The view is added to the View Manager dialog, and becomes the current view window. Click OK in the View Manager dialog. A new view window is created, and becomes the current view window.
2. 3. 4. 5.
134
Renaming a View Window

You can edit the name of a view window as it appears in the View Manager dialog, in the windows title bar, and on the View tabs. You can do this in the View Manager, or by editing the view windows properties. To rename a view window when it is the current view window: 1. 2. 3. 1. 2. Open the View menu and select View Properties, or right-click in the project workspace and select View Properties. In the View Properties dialog, type the new name in the Name box. Click OK. Open the View menu and select View Manager, or click the View Manager button on the View Control toolbar. Right-click the view you want to rename, then select Rename. Or, select the view to rename and click the Properties button. Type the new name in the Name box in the View Properties dialog and press ENTER. Click OK.
To rename a view window in the View Manager:
3. 4.
Opening View Windows

If you have closed a view window either through the View Manager or by clicking a view windows Close button, you can open it again using the View Managers Open View button. To open a view window: 1. Open the View menu and select View Manager, or click the View Manager button on the View Control toolbar. The View Manager dialog box opens. 2. 3. Select the view you want to open. Click Open View. The view window becomes the current view window. It appears in the Window menu and on a View tab if you have view tabs turned on.
Setting the Current View Window

If you have created a new view window, you can use the Set Current option in the View Manager to display a particular view window. To set the current view window: 1. Open the View menu and select View Manager, or click the View Manager button on the View Control toolbar. The View Manager dialog box opens. 2. 3. Select the view you want to open. Click Set Current. The selection view window is displayed and made the current window.
Switching Between View Windows

When you create and a view in the View Manager, the view is added to the Window menu. When View tabs are turned on and the view window is open, a tab for the new view window is displayed. To make a view window the current view window, select it from the Window menu, or select the View tab below the project workspace.
Allowing a Different Current Location Per Window View

By default, the location you select in one view window is the one that is displayed when you switch to other view windows. By changing the program settings, you can allow a different location to be the current location in each view window. 1. Open the Settings menu and select Program Settings, or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar to open the Program Settings dialog. Click Workspace in the left column of the Program Settings dialog. In the Model View Behavior area, clear the Maintain Current Location per View option. Click OK.
2. 3. 4.
136
Tiling View Windows

By default, only one maximized view window is displayed at a time. Using the Tile Open Views button, you can tile all open view windows in the project workspace. This is a great way to see different views of your design while you are working on it. When you make a change in one view window, the design updates automatically in all other view windows. To tile all open view windows: Open the Window menu and select Tile Open Views.
Cascading View Windows

By default, only one maximized view window is displayed at a time. Using the Cascade Open Views button, you can display all open view windows in a stacked format, with the current view window on top. Once the view windows are cascaded you can move and resize each one. To cascade all open view windows: Open the Window menu and select Cascade Open Views.
Returning to a Maximized View

If you have tiled or cascaded the open view windows, you can return to a maximized view where only one view window is visible by maximizing one of the open view windows. To maximize a view window: Click the Maximize button in the view window you want to maximize.
Maximize
Restoring the Previous Arrangement of View Windows

If you tiled, cascaded or arranged your view windows, then maximized one of them, you can use the Restore Down button to return to the view window arrangement that was displayed before you used the Maximize button. To restore the previous arrangement of view windows: Click the Restore Down button in the top right corner of the current view window.
Application window controls View Window Controls Restore Down
Closing View Windows

By default, the Standard view window is open when you start a project. Also, every time you create a new view window in the View Manager, that window is automatically opened for you. You can close individual view windows using the View Managers Close View button, or by clicking the view windows Close button. To close a view window from within the window itself: Click the Close button in the top right corner of the view window.
Program Window Controls View Window Controls Close
To close a view window using the View Manager: 1. 2. 3. Open the View menu and select View Manager, or click the View Manager button on the View Control toolbar. Select the view you want to close. Click Close View.
138
Deleting a View Window

You can delete a view window by removing it from the View Manager. To delete a view window: 1. 2. 3. 4. Open the View menu and select View Manager, or click the View Manager button on the View Control toolbar. Select the view to delete. Click the Delete button, or right-click in the View Manager dialog and select Delete. Click Yes to confirm that you want to delete the view.
Managing View Window Groups

View windows can be arranged in groups, and you can organize them accordingly. For example, you might create different views of one room in your model, and then group them to be able to see multiple views.
Adding a Group to the View Manager

Views can be arranged in groups, which can be to the View Manager dialog. To create a new group in the View Manager: 1. 2. Open the View menu and select View Manager, or click the View Manager button on the View Control toolbar. Click the Add Group button in the View Manager dialog, or right-click in the View Manager dialog and click Add Group. A group is added to the list. Right-click the new group name and select Rename. Type a name for the group, then press Enter.
3. 4.
Renaming a Group in the View Manager

To rename a group in the View Manager: 1. 2. Right-click the group and select Rename. Type the new name, then press Enter.
Deleting a Group in the View Manager

To delete a group in the View Manager: 1. 2. Make sure the group doesnt contain any groups. Select the group and click the Delete button, or right-click the group and select Delete.
Displaying and Hiding the View Tabs

View tabs show you which view windows are open. When View tabs are turned on, they are displayed below the project workspace. If you have not created any new views in the View Manager, only the Standard View tab is displayed. As you create and open new view windows, the View tab display updates automatically. You can use the View tabs to switch between view windows. To turn View tabs on or off: 1. 2. 3. 4. Open the Settings menu and select Program Settings, or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar. Click Workspace in the left column of the Program Settings dialog. In the Tool Display area, select or clear the View Tabs option. Click OK.
140
Part 3
BUILDING YOUR HOME
House Builder Wizard ........................................143 Walls....................................................................149 Columns and Footings ......................................169 Doors, Windows, and Openings .......................179 Floors ..................................................................209 Ceilings ...............................................................221 Stairs, Ramps, and Railings ..............................233 Roofs...................................................................257
142
13
HOUSE BUILDER WIZARD
Note: The House Builder Wizard is available only for HGTV Home & Landscape Platinum Suite and HGTV Home Design & Remodeling Suite.
The House Builder Wizard is the perfect way to start a project, because it builds a house for you instantly. All you need to do is specify how many stories you want to create, select a general house shape, define the building dimensions, and then select the general style for the walls, roof, floors, and foundation. In a few mouse clicks, youll have a basic structure that you can edit and add to. After your basic model is built you can add things like interior walls, doors, windows, stairs, and furnishings. If you would prefer to start your project from scratch, see Walls on page 149. You can also get tips and inspiration from the experts at HGTV. For more hints about interior features such as walls, windows, and flooring, see the HGTV Videos CD.
Using the House Builder Wizard ....................................................................... 144
144
Using the House Builder Wizard

The House Builder Wizard is a handy, easy-to-use tool that instantly builds a basic house for you based on factors that you specify while stepping through the Wizard. These factors include: Number of floors Wall height Foundation type Building shape Building dimensions Garage type and size Materials used for walls, roof, floors, etc.
The resulting house includes exterior walls, footings and foundation walls (or concrete slab), a roof, and a floor. After the house has been created in your drawing area, you can edit all aspects of it and add to it to suit your needs. To use the House Builder Wizard: 1. If the House Builder Wizard is not currently running, open the Tools menu and select Design Wizards > House Builder to open a warning message.
:
Note: Running the House Builder Wizard will delete all existing building elements in the current project. It will not, however, remove the terrain or any landscaping elements you have inserted.
2.
Click Yes in the warning dialog to start the House Builder Wizard.
CHAPTER 13: HOUSE BUILDER WIZARD 145
3.
Click Next.
4.
From the Number of Floors drop-down list, select the number of floors you would like the house to have (not including the basement level). In the Floor to Ceiling Height box, type the desired wall height for each floor level. In the Foundation Type area, select the type of foundation you want to create. Choose from Concrete Slab, Full Basement, or Foundation Walls w/ Crawl Space.
5. 6.
7.
If you selected Full Basement or Foundation Walls w/ Crawl Space, specify the elevation of the ground floor relative to the ground in the Ground Floor Height above Terrain box. Click Next.
8.
146
9.
Select the general house shape by clicking one of the graphics in the House Shape pane.
10. After selecting a house shape, make a selection in the Garage Position pane to specify where you want to put the garage. If you dont want a garage or want to add it later, select the first option. 11. Click Next.
12. In the Building Size area, specify the desired dimensions for the house by typing values in the boxes. The box labels correspond to the labels on the image on the left. 13. In the Garage area, select either Single, Double, or Triple from the Type drop-down list. Then, using the dimensioned graphic as an aid, specify the desired offset of the garage from the exterior wall corner. 14. Click Next.
CHAPTER 13: HOUSE BUILDER WIZARD 147
15. From the Building Configuration drop-down list, select the general style for your home (Country, Traditional, or Contemporary). The pre-set material selections for the elements in your house appear in the lower pane. 16. You can select different materials if you want by clicking the button of the element you want to change and selecting from the list. 17. Click Next.
18. Click Finish to build the house.
148
14
WALLS
You can draw walls by pointing and clicking. HGTV Home & Landscape automatically displays dimensions as you draw, and connects corners for you. If the Object Snap is turned on, as it is by default, interior walls snap to other existing walls and create clean intersections with them. After being inserted, any wall can be moved, rotated, lengthened, shortened, broken, curved, or deleted. This lets you create the exact wall layout that you want. The catalog contains exterior, interior, and foundation wall types. After your walls are drawn, you can add paint, wallpaper, baseboards, and other types of trim to them for a truly customized look. Walls also have a framing configuration in their properties which you can customize. For more tips about walls and finishing, the HGTV Videos CD has advice from the experts at HGTV.
Drawing Walls ................................................................................................... 150 Adding a Story ................................................................................................... 153 Replacing Walls................................................................................................. 155 Editing the Properties of a Wall ......................................................................... 156 Changing the Length of Walls ........................................................................... 163 Raising or Lowering a Wall................................................................................ 163 Rotating a Wall .................................................................................................. 163 Curving a Wall ................................................................................................... 164 Breaking a Wall ................................................................................................. 164 Applying Different Materials to Walls................................................................. 165 Solid Filling Walls .............................................................................................. 166
150
Drawing Walls
You can draw walls by pointing and clicking with your mouse. A floor is automatically inserted when you create a closed wall layout. You can change the properties of the floor after it has been inserted if you want. Walls are drawn on center in HGTV Home & Landscape, so keep this mind when you are drawing your walls as this has an effect on the measurements of your layout. To draw walls: 1. From the Location menu on the View Control toolbar, select the location where you want to draw walls.
2. 3. 4. 5.
Open the Insert menu and select Walls, or click the Walls button in the Building toolbar. In the Walls catalog, select the wall type you want to insert. In the project workspace, click to select a start point for the first wall. Release the mouse button and move your pointer in the direction that you want the wall to run. The wall length is shown as you draw it. By default, drawing is constrained to 15 angles. To change this constraint, turn off Angle Snap.
6.
Click to set the walls endpoint.
CHAPTER 14: WALLS 151
7.
To add another wall to the one you have just drawn, move the mouse in the direction that you want the new wall to run. When it is the correct length, click to set its endpoint.
8. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
When the wall layout is complete, right-click and select Finish. Click the Select/Edit button on the Building toolbar. Click the wall to select it. Hover your pointer over the walls center grip to display the Move pointer. Click and drag to move the wall. When the wall is positioned, release your mouse button.
To move a wall:
Note: Elements associated with walls, such as doors and windows, can only be moved within the wall they are currently located. You cannot move them to another wall.
To resize a wall layout by moving a wall: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click the Select/Edit button on the Building toolbar. Click the wall to select it. All attached walls will stretch along with it when you move it. Hover your pointer over the center grip to display the Move pointer. Click and drag the wall to resize the wall layout. Then, release your mouse button.
152
To resize a wall layout by editing its dimensions: 1. 2. Click the Select/Edit button on the Building toolbar. Click one of the exterior walls to select it. 3. To stretch the layout left or right, select a vertical wall. To stretch the layout up or down, select a horizontal wall.
Dimensions appear on the wall layout. Click the dimension you want to edit to open the Edit Dimension dialog.
4.
Enter the new value in the Enter Distance box, and then press Enter or click OK. The walls update automatically.
To remove the wall layout: 1. 2. Click one of the walls, and then press Shift and click to select the remaining walls. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, right-click and select Delete, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Delete.
Adding a Story
After creating walls on the ground floor, you can add more levels to your design. You can draw the layout just like you did to create the ground floor, or you can use the Duplicate to Locations tool to copy the ground floor exterior walls to the second floor location. To create a new story by drawing the walls: 1. Make sure the current location is the Second Floor location, or whatever location you have set up for the story you are creating.
Walls and other elements on the ground floor are still visible but dimmed so that you can trace over them or use them as a reference when drawing your second floor walls. 2. 3. 4. 5. Open the Insert menu and select Walls, or click the Walls button on the Building toolbar. In the catalog, select the wall type you want to insert. Draw the walls, as explained in Drawing Walls on page 150. When you are finished drawing the walls, right-click a wall and select Finish.
154
To create a new story by duplicating walls on the ground floor: 1. 2. 3. Make sure the current location is the Ground Floor, or whatever location that contains the walls to copy. Click one of the walls to copy, then press Shift+click to select the remaining walls. Right-click and select Duplicate to Locations, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Duplicate to Locations.
4. 5.
In the Duplicate to Locations dialog, select the Second Floor, or the location to which you are copying. Click OK. The walls are copied, and you now have a new story.
Note: When you copy a closed wall layout, a floor with the default material is automatically created on the location you are copying to.
Replacing Walls
You can replace a wall or multiple walls with another type using the Replace tool. For example, you might want to switch from siding to brick. To replace walls: 1. Click the wall you want to replace. You can add more walls to your selection by holding down your Shift key and clicking the walls you want to add. 2. 3. 4. Right-click and select Replace. In the Catalog Access dialog, select the replacement wall type and then click OK. The walls are instantly replaced.
Tip: You can also use the Materials Paintbrush in 3D view to apply different materials and finishes to walls. See Applying Materials and Colors with the Materials Paintbrush on page 536.
156
Editing the Properties of a Wall

Walls have many properties that you can edit to suit your needs. These include size, top and bottom shaping, trim, and materials. To edit the properties of a wall: 1. 2. 3. Click the wall to select it. Right-click and select Properties to open the Walls properties dialog. Using the Walls properties dialog, you can complete the following tasks: Edit the width of a wall Edit the height of a wall Drop the exterior face of a wall Slope a wall Step a wall Control the extension of a wall Add trim to walls
When you edit wall properties, you can see a preview of the wall in the image pane of the Walls properties dialog.
Editing the Width of a Wall

1. 2. 3. 4. To edit the width of a wall, begin on the Basic tab in the Walls properties dialog. Select Width in the Properties list. Edit the value in the Width box. Continue setting wall properties, or click OK to close the Walls properties dialog box. To edit the height of a wall, select the Top and Bottom tab in the Walls properties dialog. In the Wall Top area, select the Level option. Edit the value in the Wall Height box. Continue setting wall properties, or click OK to close the Walls properties dialog.
Editing the Height of a Wall

1. 2. 3. 4.
Dropping the Exterior Face of a Wall

You can extend the exterior face of a wall. For example, you might want to extend the exterior face of a veneer wall to cover the exposed floor structure below. 1. 2. 3. To extend the exterior face of a wall, begin on the Basic tab in the Walls properties dialog. Select Drop Exterior Face in the Properties list. Edit the value in the Drop Exterior Face box. The value you enter is the distance that the exterior wall face will be extended down below the floor level, or the terrain if the wall is a retaining wall. 4. Continue setting wall properties, or click OK to close the Walls properties dialog box.
158
Sloping a Wall
You can slope a wall by setting different heights for each end of the wall. 1. 2. To slope a wall, select the Top and Bottom tab in the Walls properties dialog. To slope the top of the wall, select the Slope option in the Wall Top area. To slope the bottom of the wall, select the Slope option in the Wall Bottom area. In the Start Point box, enter the distance from the floor to the start point of the slope. The green wall end marker on the diagram corresponds to the green wall end marker on the wall in your drawing, showing you which end is which.
3.
4.
In the Stop Point box, enter the distance from the floor to the end point of the slope. Do not enter a negative value to slope the bottom of a wall below floor level.
5.
Continue setting wall properties, or click OK to close the Walls properties dialog box.
Stepping a Wall
When you step a wall, the wall gradually rises in progression. For example, you might want to create a stepped foundation to accommodate a sloped building lot. To step a wall: 1. 2. To step a wall, select the Top and Bottom tab in the Walls properties dialog. To step the top of the wall, select the Step option in the Wall Top area. To step the bottom of the wall, select the Step option in the Wall Bottom area. In the Start Point box, enter the distance from the floor to the start point of the step. The green wall end marker on the diagram corresponds to the green wall end marker on the wall in your drawing, showing you which end is which.
3.
4.
In the Stop Point edit box, enter the distance from the floor to the end point of the slope. Do not enter a negative value to step a wall bottom below floor level.
5.
Continue setting wall properties, or click OK to close the Walls properties dialog box.
Note: If you apply strip footings to stepped wall bottoms, the footings are stepped as well.
160
Controlling the Extension of Walls Beneath Gable Ends

By default, most walls automatically extend to the roof at gable ends.You can control this behavior. To extend wall tops: 1. 2. 3. Select the Top and Bottom tab in the Walls properties dialog. In the Wall Top area, select the Auto Extend option. To rake the external side of the wall, select Exterior Wall Tops to Roof check box. To offset the wall a specific distance from the roof surface, enter a value in the Offset below roof surface box. To rake the internal side of the wall, select the Interior Wall Tops to Roof check box. To offset the wall a specific distance from the roof surface, enter a value in the Offset below roof surface box. Continue setting wall properties, or click OK to close the Walls properties dialog box. Select the Top and Bottom tab in the Walls properties dialog. In the Wall Top area, select Level. Click OK to close the Walls properties dialog. Click the roof to select it. Right-click and select Properties to open the Roofs properties dialog. Select Display Gable in the Properties list. Click OK to close the Roofs properties dialog.
4.
5.
To curtail wall tops: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
You can select the material to show below the gables. For more information about selecting materials, see Applying Different Materials to Walls on page 165.
Adding Trim to Walls

Trim types include baseboards, crown molding, chair rails, door and window trim, sills, cove molding, wainscoting, and decorative wallpaper borders. You can add as many types of trim to a wall as you want. You cab add different materials to either side of a wall. To add trim to walls: 1. 2. Select select the Trim tab in the Walls properties dialog. Select the side of the wall to add trim to from the Application dropdown list. Exterior Side is the outside of an exterior wall. Left Interior Side is one side of a wall. If a wall was drawn left to right, this is the north side of the wall, or the side closest to the top of the screen. If a wall was drawn right to left, this is the south side of the wall, or the side closer to the bottom of the screen. If a wall was drawn vertically from the top downward, the left side is the eastern side of the wall, or the side closest to the right side of the screen. If a wall was drawn vertically from the bottom up, the left side is the western side of the wall, or the side closest to the left side of the screen. Right Interior Side is one side of a wall. If a wall was drawn left to right, this is the south side of the wall, or the side closest to the bottom of the screen. If a wall was drawn right to left, this is the north side of the wall, or the side closest to the top of the screen. If a wall was drawn vertically from the top downward, the right side is the western side of the wall, or the side closest to the left side of the screen. If a wall was drawn vertically from the bottom up, the right side is the eastern side of the wall, or the side closest to the right side of the screen.
162
3.
Select a type of trim for which you will select a member. A member is a structural component. You can select Crown, Chair Rail, Baseboard, Opening, Window Sill, Door Sill, or Custom.
4. 5.
Click Select to open the Catalog Access dialog. Select the desired material, and then click OK. In the Apply to area of the Walls properties dialog box, specify how you would like the trim applied to the wall. Different variables are available depending on the trim type. Gap. For trim around door and window openings, Gap is the offset of the trim from the opening. For crown moldings, baseboards, and chair rails, Gap is the offset of the trim from the wall face. Offset. For crown moldings, Offset is the offset of the molding from the top of the wall. For baseboards and chair rails, Offset is the offset of the trim from the bottom of the wall. Offset from wall. If creating custom trim, Offset from Wall determines where the trim is offset from when an offset is specified. You can select Wall Bottom, Wall Top, Ceiling, or Floor. Trim basepoint. If creating custom trim, Trim basepoint determines which edge of the trim is used to measure the offset. You can select Top of Trim or Bottom of Trim.
6. 7.
To delete a member from the Trim list, select the member, and then click Delete. When you are finished adding trim, click OK to close the Walls properties dialog., or select another tab to continue editing properties.
Changing the Length of Walls

You can lengthen or shorten an individual wall by clicking and dragging one of the walls ends. To lengthen or shorten a wall: 1. 2. 3. 4. Select the wall. A grip appears at each wall end. Hover the mouse pointer over the wall end you want to stretch to display the Lengthen pointer. Click and drag the wall end to make it longer or shorter. Release the mouse button.
Raising or Lowering a Wall

You can raise or lower a wall using the Elevate feature. To edit the elevation of a wall: 1. 2. Click the wall to select it. Right-click and select Elevate, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Elevate to open the Elevate dialog. The value in the Elevate dialog is the walls current elevation. 3. 4. Enter the distance of the bottom of the wall above the floor in the Distance box. Click OK.
Rotating a Wall
You can use the Rotate feature to rotate a wall about a selected point. To rotate a wall: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click the wall to select it. Right-click and select Rotate, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Rotate. Position the mouse pointer over the point around which to rotate the wall. Click and drag to rotate the wall, and then release the mouse button.
164
Curving a Wall
You can curve a wall using the Curve feature. You can click and drag the wall to curve it, or select a point to which to curve the wall. To curve a wall by clicking and dragging: 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. Click the wall to select it. Right-click and select Curve, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Curve. Click and drag the wall to the curve it. Release the mouse button. Click the wall to select it. Right-click in and select Curve, or select open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Curve. In the project workspace, click a point to be the center of the curve.
To curve a wall to a selected point:
Breaking a Wall
You can break a wall into two or more segments, and those segments can then be edited individually. To break a wall: 1. 2. 3. Click the wall to select it. Right-click in the drawing area and select Break, or open the Edit menu Modify Elements > Break. Click the point where you want to break the wall. The wall is divided into two segments that can be moved, stretched, or manipulated individually.
Applying Different Materials to Walls

You can apply different finishes to walls using the Materials Paintbrush. The Materials catalog contains a selection of brick, concrete, wood, and stone finishes, as well as many other options. To apply a material to a wall: 1. 2. Display your model in 3D. Make sure the wall face to apply the material to is visible. Open the Edit menu and select Materials Paintbrush, or click the Materials Paintbrush button on any tabbed toolbar to open the Materials catalog. 3. 4. 5. To display only paint finishes, select Paint or from the Filter drop-down list. To display only interior wall finishes, select Wall Material Interior from the Filter drop-down list. To display only exterior wall finishes, select Wall Material Exterior from the Filter drop-down list.
In the Materials catalog, select a group from which to select materials, and then select the material to apply. Click the wall face to apply the material. The material is immediately applied. Right-click and select Finish.
166
Solid Filling Walls

You can apply solid fill to the walls in 2D Plan View. By default, solid fill for walls is turned off., but you can turn it on using the Program Settings dialog. To enable solid filling: 1. Open the Settings menu and select Program Settings or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar to open the Program Settings dialog. Select Building Aids in the left column of the Program Settings dialog. In the Drawing Assistance area, select the Enable Solid Filling check box. Click OK.
2. 3. 4.
Note: Solid filling will only appear on walls that have solid fill colors assigned to them and have solid fill turned on in their Appearance properties.
Editing Solid Fill Colors

Each wall type has a solid fill color assigned to it in its Appearance properties. You can edit the color assignment for walls in the Walls catalog or in your drawing. To edit solid fill colors in your drawing: 1. 2. Click the wall to select it. Right-click the wall and select Properties, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Properties to open the Walls properties dialog. Select the Appearance tab in the Walls properties dialog. In the Components list, select 2D Structure. In the Solid Fill area at the bottom of the Walls properties dialog, select the Enable check box if it isnt already selected. Click the color swatch in the Material area to open the Materials dialog. Select the solid fill color, then click OK. Click OK to close the Walls properties dialog.
3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Disabling Solid Fill for Individual Walls

If you have enabled solid filling in the program settings, you can turn solid fill off for individual walls in your drawing by editing a walls Appearance properties. To disable solid fill for an individual wall: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Click the wall to select it. Right-click and select Properties, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Properties to open the Walls properties dialog. Select the Appearance tab. In the Components list, select 2D Structure. In the Solid Fill area at the bottom of the Walls properties dialog, clear the Enable check box. Click OK.
Creating a Basement or Crawlspace Foundation

The first step in creating a basement or crawlspace foundation is drawing the foundation walls, which are typically made of poured concrete or concrete blocks. You can draw the entire perimeter by pointing and clicking. A floor is automatically inserted when you create a closed foundation wall layout. You can change the floor type after it has been inserted. To draw the foundation walls: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Check the current location in the Building Location menu to make sure you are on the appropriate level for creating the foundation. Open the Insert menu and select Walls, or click the Walls button on the Building toolbar. In the Walls catalog, select the Foundation Walls group, and then select the type of wall to insert. In the project workspace area, click to select a start point for the first wall. Move your pointer in the direction you want your wall to run. A dynamic dimension is displayed to indicate the length of the wall.
Note: By default, drawing is constrained to 15 angles. To release this constraint, turn off your Angle Snap.
168
6. 7. 8.
When the wall is positioned, click to set its endpoint. Continue drawing walls until the perimeter is complete. You can also add walls to the interior of the foundation layout. Right-click and select Finish.
15
COLUMNS AND FOOTINGS
A structures support system is an extremely important consideration during all phases of a design project. Support elements carry the load of walls, floors, and other bearing elements in your model, and can also be a factor in the interior design of your home. HGTV Home & Landscape provides the tools to accurately place footings and columns in your design. You can automatically attach strip footings to selected walls. You can also automatically insert mono (pad) footings beneath columns. Columns come in a variety of shapes and sizes, and are inserted with point-and-click simplicity. You can customize them on the fly to achieve the precise result you want. This chapter covers the insertion and editing of strip footings, mono footings, and columns.
Inserting Columns ............................................................................................. 170 Attaching Strip Footings to Walls....................................................................... 172 Attaching Mono Footings to Columns ............................................................... 176
170
Inserting Columns
Typically, any bearing members in your basement require support. For example, if you have a W-type I-beam in your basement, it might be supported by steel posts at each end. Columns are an important consideration when designing your basement, especially if you intend to finish it. When inserting columns, you can choose from a variety of wood, concrete, steel, brick, and gypsum columns in various shapes and sizes. To insert a column: 1. 2. 3. 4. Open the Insert menu and select Columns, or click the Columns button on the Building toolbar. In the Columns catalog, select the column you want to insert. Position the column where you want it, and then click to insert it. Right-click the column and select Finish.
Editing Column Properties

You can edit the dimensions of a column, including height, width, and depths. You can also edit the elevation of a column by editing the Base Offset properties. To edit a columns properties: 1. 2. Click the column to select it. Right-click the column, and select Properties, or, open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Properties to open the Column properties dialog. To change the type of column, select one of the icons in the Type area. To change the columns dimensions, enter new values in the Properties list. Different column shapes will have different dimension variables. For example, the dimensions available for a Rectangular Solid column are dy1, dx1 and Height.
3. 4.
CHAPTER 15: COLUMNS AND FOOTINGS 171
5.
To change the elevation of a column, edit enter a new value in the Base Offset box. This is the distance of the base of the column from the floor. When you are finished, click OK to close the Columns properties dialog.
6.
Moving a Column
You can move a column by clicking and dragging it. To move a column: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click the column to select it. Hover the pointer over the center grip to display the Move pointer. Click and drag the column to move it. When the column is positioned, release your mouse button.
Note: If you have a mono footing attached to the column, the footing remains attached to the column and moves with it.
Deleting a Column
You can remove a column from your project by deleting it. To delete a column: 1. 2. Click the column to select it. Press the Delete key, or right-click the column and select Delete, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Delete.
172
Attaching Strip Footings to Walls

Because foundation walls bear the weight of the exterior walls above them, you must insert footings beneath the foundation walls to transfer support for the vertical load. Strip footings are inserted by clicking a wall; the footing is automatically inserted underneath the wall. Footings automatically shape themselves to the bottom of walls, so if wall bottoms are curved or stepped, the footings will be curved or stepped as well. To insert strip footings under walls: 1. Open the Insert menu and select Footings > Strip Footings Attached to Walls, or click the Footings button on the Building toolbar and select Strip Footings Attached to Walls. In the Strip Footings catalog, select the footing you want to insert. Choose a footing that is wider than the wall to which you are attaching the footer. 3. Click the wall to which you want to attach the footing. The footing is inserted automatically. In 2D Plan View, strip footings are typically shown using a dashed line. 4. 5. Continue inserting footings underneath each exterior foundation wall. Right-click the footing and select Finish.
2.
Editing the Strip Footing Properties

Strip footing types include rectangular, tapered, and filleted. The footing type determines the footings general appearance. You can also edit the size of strip footing. To edit the footing type: 1. 2. Click the footing to select it. You can select multiple footings by pressing Shift and clicking. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties to open the Strip Footings properties dialog. Select the Basic tab. To change the strip footing type, in the Type area, select the appropriate icon. To edit the size of the strip footing, select the dimension in the Properties list. Edit the value in the corresponding box. The options in the Properties list will vary based on the type of strip footing. 6. Click OK to close the Strip Footings properties dialog.
3. 4. 5.
174
Moving and Stretching Strip Footings

When you move a strip footing, all footings attached to it move with it for a stretching effect. You can move strip footings by just clicking and dragging. To move/stretch strip footings: 1. Click the footing to select it. You may need to make walls non-selectable to be able to select the footing. For more information about changing an items selectability, see Making Items Selectable or Non-Selectable on page 129. 2. 3. 4. Position your pointer over the center grip to display the Move pointer. Click and drag the footing to move it. Release your mouse button.
Note: When you move a strip footing, it becomes detached from the wall. Therefore, if you move or stretch the wall, the footing will not go with it. If you want to re-attach a footing to a wall, you will need to delete the footing, then insert a new one.
Changing the Length of Strip Footings

You can lengthen or shorten an individual footing by clicking and dragging one of the footings ends. To lengthen or shorten a footing: 1. 2. 3. 4. Select the footing. A grip appears at each end. Hover your pointer over the end you want to stretch to display the Lengthen pointer. Click and drag the footing end to make it longer or shorter. Release your mouse button.
Breaking Strip Footings

You can break a footing into two or more segments, which can then be edited individually. To break a footing: 1. 2. 3. Click the footing to select it. Right-click in the drawing area and select Break, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Break. Double-click the point where you want to break the footing.
Curving Strip Footings

If strip footings are attached to walls, the footings curve automatically as you curve those walls. You can also curve footings independently using the Curve feature. To curve a footing by clicking and dragging: 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. Click the strip footing to select it. Right-click and select Curve, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Curve. Click and drag the strip footing to the desired curve. Release the mouse button. Click the strip footing to select it. Right-click in and select Curve, or select open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Curve. Click a point in the project workspace to be the center of the curve.
To curve a footing to a selected point:
Deleting Strip Footings

To delete strip footings: 1. 2. Click the footing to select it. You can select multiple footings by pressing Shift and clicking. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.
176
Attaching Mono Footings to Columns

Because support columns in a basement bear loads at a concentrated point, the load must be transferred to a proper footing. Using the Mono Footings Attached to Columns feature you can insert a single pad footing beneath a selected column. All you must do is select the column. To insert a footing under a column: 1. Open the Insert menu and select Footings > Mono Footings Attached to Columns, or click the Footings button on the Building toolbar and select Mono Footings Attached to Columns. In the catalog, select the footing you want to insert. Choose a footing that is wider than the column to which you are attaching it. 3. Click the column to which to attach the footing. The footing is inserted automatically. 4. Right-click the footing and select Finish.
2.
Editing Mono Footing Properties

Mono footing types include rectangular, tapered, cylinder, and cylinder tapered. The footing type determines the footings general appearance. You can also edit the dimensions of a mono footing. To edit the footing type: 1. 2. Click the mono footing to select it. You can select multiple footings by pressing Shift and clicking. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties to open the Mono Footings properties dialog. Select the Basic tab. To change the mono footing type, in the Type area, select the appropriate icon. To edit the size of the mono footing, select the dimension in the Properties list. Edit the value in the corresponding box. The options in the Properties list will vary based on the type of strip footing. 6. Click OK to close the Mono Footings properties dialog.
3. 4. 5.
Moving Mono Footings

You can move a mono footing by clicking and dragging it. To move a mono footing: 1. 2. 3. 4. Select the footing to move. Position your pointer over the center grip to display the Move pointer. Click and drag the footing to move it. Release your mouse button.
Note: When you move a mono footing, it becomes detached from the column. Similarly, if you move a column, the footing does not move with it. To re-attach a mono footing to a column, you must delete the footing, then insert a new one.
178
Rotating Mono Footings

You can rotate a mono footing by clicking and dragging it. To rotate a mono footing: 1. 2. 3. 4. Select the footing. Hover your pointer over the triangular grip to display the Rotate pointer. Click and drag to rotate the footing. When the footing is positioned, release your mouse button.
Deleting Mono Footings

To delete mono footings: 1. 2. Click the footing to select it. You can select multiple footings by pressing Shift and clicking. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.
16
DOORS, WINDOWS, AND OPENINGS
After youve drawn walls, you can insert a variety of doors, windows, and openings in walls to create the exact design you want. Like all elements in HGTV Home & Landscape, doors, windows, and openings are intelligent. They know that they can only be inserted in walls. As soon as your pointer gets close to a wall, the element snaps into place. All you need to do is position it where you want it along the wall, and then click to insert it. Dimensions are displayed as you are positioning the element so you can get the precise placement you want. Although doors, windows, and openings automatically become associated with the walls in which they are inserted, you can also edit them independently.
Inserting Doors .................................................................................................. 180 Inserting Windows ............................................................................................. 181 Inserting Wall Openings .................................................................................... 184 Setting Options for Inserting Doors, Windows and Wall Openings ................... 186 Creating a Niche................................................................................................ 186 Moving a Door, Window, or Wall Opening ......................................................... 189 Flipping a Door, Window, or Wall Opening ........................................................ 190 Flipping a Door Swing ....................................................................................... 190 Editing Door Properties ..................................................................................... 192 Editing Window Properties ................................................................................ 199 Editing Wall Opening Properties ....................................................................... 206 Deleting a Door, Window, or Opening ............................................................... 208
180
Inserting Doors
The catalog contains a wide variety of doors that you can insert, including hinged, bi-fold, pocket, sliding glass, and garage doors. You can point and click to insert a door anywhere inside a wall, automatically center the door in the wall, or offset the door a specific distance from the end of the wall. Doors are inserted at floor level. You can raise or lower a door after you have inserted it if you need to. To insert a door: 1. Check the current location in the Building Location menu to make sure youre on the appropriate level for inserting the wall opening. Open the Insert menu and select Doors, or click the Doors button on the Building toolbar. In the Doors catalog, select the door that you want to insert. Move the pointer to the wall on which you want to place the door. Right-click and select the door positioning in the wall. To automatically center a door on the wall, right-click and select Center on wall.
2.
3. 4. 5.
To offset the door a specific distance from the end of the wall, right-click and select Enter insertion offset. Then, enter the offset distance in the Enter insertion offset dialog and click OK.
6.
Right-click the door and select Finish.
CHAPTER 16: DOORS, WINDOWS, AND OPENINGS 181
Raising or Lowering a Door

You can raise or lower a door in a wall using the Elevate option. For example, you might want to lower your garage door if your ground floor sits above the ground. To raise or lower a door: 1. 2. Click the door to select it. Right-click and select Elevate, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Elevate. The value shown in the Elevate dialog is the current elevation of the door above or below the floor level. 3. In the Distance box in the Elevate dialog, enter the desired elevation. Enter a positive value to raise the door. Enter a negative value to lower the door. Click OK.
4.
Inserting Windows
You can insert a wide variety of windows including fixed, casement, double casement, hopper, awning, sliding, double-hung, single-hung, bay, bow, and louvered windows. You can point and click to insert a window anywhere in a wall, automatically center the window on the wall, or offset the window a specific distance from the end of the wall. All walls have a Head Height property, which is the height of the tops of windows and openings relative to the floor level. Windows are inserted at the Head Height defined for the wall on which you insert them. You can raise or lower a window after you have inserted it.
182
To insert a window: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Check the current location in the Building Location menu to make sure youre on the appropriate level for inserting the window. Open the Insert menu and select Windows, or click the Windows button on the Building toolbar. In the Windows catalog, select the window you want to insert. Move the pointer to the wall on which you want to place the window. Right-click and select the window positioning on the wall. To automatically center the window on the wall, right-click and select Center on wall.
To offset the window a specific distance from the end of the wall, right-click and select Enter insertion offset. Then, enter the offset distance in the Enter insertion offset dialog and click OK.
6.
Right-click the window and select Finish.
Raising or Lowering a Window

You can raise or lower a window in a wall using the Elevate tool on the windows right-click menu. To raise or lower a window: 1. 2. Click the window to select it. Right-click and select Elevate, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Elevate. The value shown in the Elevate dialog is the current distance of the window top from the floor level. 3. 4. In the Distance box in the Elevate dialog, enter the desired elevation. Click OK.
Controlling the Display of Window Opening Symbols

By default, windows that swing include symbols that indicate the swing direction. These symbols are visible in 3D and elevation views. You can choose from two methods of displaying the symbols depending on your view, or you can disable the symbols. To control the display of window opening symbols: 1. 2. 3. Open the Settings menu and select Program Settings, or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar. Click Building Aids in the left column of the Program Settings dialog. In the Window Opening Symbols area, select Type 1, Type 2, or None. 4. Type 1 shows the window opening symbol pointing away from the hinge. Type 2 shows the window opening symbol pointing towards the hinge. None disables window opening symbols.
Click OK.
184
Inserting Wall Openings

A wall opening is a cutout in a wall that is a specific shape, width, and height. Openings can be rectangular, round, arched, octagonal, or trapezoidal. You can point and click to insert an opening anywhere in a wall, automatically center the opening on the wall, or offset the opening a specific distance from the end of the wall. All walls have a Head Height property, which is the height of the tops of windows and openings relative to the floor level. Openings are inserted at the Head Height defined for the wall on which you insert the opening. You can raise or lower a wall opening after you have inserted it. To insert an opening: 1. 2. 3. 4. Check the current location in the Building Location menu to make sure youre on the appropriate level for inserting the wall opening. Open the Insert menu and select Openings, or click the Openings button on the Building toolbar. In the Openings catalog, select the opening you want to insert. Move the pointer to the wall on which you want to place the opening.
5.
Right-click and select the positioning for the opening on the wall. To automatically center the opening on the wall, right-click and select Center on wall.
To offset the opening a specific distance from the end of the wall, right-click and select Enter insertion offset. Then, enter the offset distance in the Enter insertion offset dialog and click OK.
6. 7.
With your pointer positioned where you want the opening, click to insert the opening in the wall. Right-click the wall opening and select Finish.
Raising or Lowering a Wall Opening

You can raise or lower a door in a wall using the Elevate option. To raise or lower a wall opening: 1. 2. Click the wall opening to select it. Right-click and select Elevate, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Elevate. The value shown in the Elevate dialog is the current distance of the wall opening top above the floor level. 3. 4. In the Elevate dialog, specify the desired distance of the top of the wall opening above the floor. Click OK.
186
Setting Options for Inserting Doors, Windows and Wall Openings

By default, the on-screen dimensions that appear when inserting doors, windows, and wall openings measure from the edges of the wall. When you insert doors, windows, or wall openings using an offset, the offset is calculated from the edges of a wall. You can set the Opening Placement option to measure from the center of walls when inserting doors, windows, and wall openings. To insert doors, windows and openings to center: 1. 2. 3. 4. Open the Settings menu and select Program Settings, or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar. Click Building Aids in the left column of the Program Settings dialog. In the Opening Placement area, select Dimension to Center. Click OK.
You can change the Opening Placement option back to the default, measuring from the edges of wall. To insert doors, windows and openings to the edge of the opening: 1. 2. 3. 4. Open the Settings menu and select Program Settings, or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar. Click Building Aids in the left column of the Program Settings dialog. In the Opening Placement area, select Dimension to Edge. Click OK.
Creating a Niche
A niche is a recess in a wall. You can create a niche by inserting an opening in a wall, and then specifying a niche depth in the properties of the wall opening.
To create a niche: 1. 2. 3. Check the current location in the Building Location menu to make sure youre on the appropriate level for inserting the wall opening. Open the Insert menu and select Openings, or click the Openings button on the Building toolbar. In the Openings catalog, select Rectangular Niche, Circular Niche, or Arched Niche from the Groups list. Then select the type of niche from the Openings list. Click the niche to select it. Right-click the niche and select Properties. In the Openings properties dialog, click Specify Niche Depth in the Properties list. The box to the right of the Specify Niche Depth option becomes a drop-down list. 7. Select either Distance or Percentage as the method of specifying the niche depth. Using the Distance option, you can enter a specific value for the depth. Using the Percentage option, you can specify the depth as a percentage of the wall depth. 8. Selecting Distance or Percentage adds the Depth option to the Properties list. Enter the desired depth in the Depth box and press Enter. You can specify a distance or percentage that is greater than the wall depth, causing the niche to protrude through the wall. 9. Entering the Depth adds the Include Opening Trim option to the Properties list. If you do not want any trim around the niche opening, clear the Include Opening Trim check box.
4. 5. 6.
10. Click OK.

Tip: To flip a niche to the other side of the wall, use the Flip Opening tool on the right-click menu.
188
Flipping a Niche
If you have created a niche in a wall and it appears to be on the wrong side of the wall, you can flip it. To flip a niche to the other side of the wall: 1. 2. Click the opening to select it. Right-click and select Flip Opening.
Editing the Appearance of a Niche

You can edit the 3D appearance of a niche by applying different materials to the recessed face. To edit the appearance of a niche: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click the niche to select it. Right-click the niche and select Properties. In the Openings properties dialog, select the Appearance tab. Select the item that you want to change from the Components list. Inside Niche Back is the interior face of the back of the niche. Niche Back Side is the exterior face of the niche back. This is visible in 3D only if the niche depth is greater than the wall depth, causing the niche to protrude from the wall. Header is not applicable to niches.
5. 6. 7. 8.
Click the Select button in the Material area to open the Materials dialog. Dont select any items from the Groups list. Select a material to apply to the nice component from the Materials library list. Click OK.
Moving a Door, Window, or Wall Opening

You can move a door, window, or opening by clicking and dragging it inside the wall, or by editing the dynamic dimensions on either side of it. To move the element by clicking and dragging: 1. 2. Click the door, window, or opening to select it. Click and drag the element to move it, and then release the mouse button. Click the door, window, or opening. Dimensions appear on either side of the element.
To move the element by editing dimensions: 1.
2. 3.
Click the dimension that you want to edit. In the Edit Dimension dialog, enter the new value and then press Enter or click OK.
The element position is automatically updated.
190
Flipping a Door, Window, or Wall Opening

Use the Flip Opening tool to flip a door, window, or opening around in the wall. In the case of a door that swings into a room, for example, this would make it swing out instead of in. To flip a door, window, or opening: 1. 2. Click the door to select it. Right-click in the drawing area and select Flip Opening, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Flip Opening.
Flipping a Door Swing

Use the Flip Swing tool to flip only the swing of a door. The door will be hinged on the opposite side, but it will still open in the same direction, either in or out. To flip a door swing: 1. 2. Click the door to select it. Right-click in the drawing area and select Flip Swing, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Flip Swing.
Editing Door Swing Properties

You can specify the direction and the extent of a door swing. To edit door swing properties: 1. 2. 3. Click the door to select it. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties to open the Doors properties dialog. Edit the settings in the Swing area on the Basic tab. 4. Swing Type. Choose from Left, Right or Double. A door with a left door swing will have its hinges on the right. 3D % Open. How much the door is shown swung open in 3D view. By default, doors are shown closed in 3D view. 2D % Open. How much the door is swung open in 2D plan view.
Click OK.
Tip: You can quickly flip a door swing using the Flip Swing option on the Door shortcut menu.
192
Editing Door Properties

Using the Doors properties dialog, you can edit the door type, size, shape, highlites and sidelites, trim, and other door details. To open the Doors properties dialog: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click the Select/Edit button on the Building toolbar. Click the door to select it. Right-click and select Properties. Using the Doors properties dialog, you can complete the following tasks: Edit the type of a door Edit the shape of a door Edit the size of a door Remove trim from a door opening Display and edit highlites and sidelites Edit a door leaf Edit other door details
When you edit door properties, you can see a preview of the door in the image pane of the Doors properties dialog.
Editing the Type of a Door

Door types include hinged, bi-fold, pocket, face slider, track slider, fold-up, tilt, and roller. You can edit a doors type on the doors Basic property page. To edit a door type: 1. 2. 3. To edit the type of a door, begin on the Basic tab of the Doors properties dialog. Select the icon for the type of door you want in the Type area. Continue setting door properties, or click OK to close the Doors properties dialog box.
Editing the Shape of a Door

A door can be rectangular, arched or apexed. You can only change the shape of a hinged door type. To edit the shape of a door: 1. 2. 3. 4. To edit the shape of a door, begin on the Basic tab of the Doors properties dialog. Select Shape in the Properties list. Select the shape from the Shape drop-down list. You can select Rectangular, Arched, or Apexed. Continue setting door properties, or click OK to close the Doors properties dialog box.
Editing the Size of a Door

You can edit the height or width of a door. To edit the size of a door: 1. 2. 3. 4. To edit the size of a door, begin on the Basic tab of the Doors properties dialog. Select Width in the Properties list, and enter a value in the Width box. Select Height in the Properties list, and enter a value in the Height box. Continue setting door properties, or click OK to close the Doors properties dialog box.
194
Removing Trim from a Door Opening

If a trim member is specified for openings in the wall properties, the doors on those walls will include trim. You can turn opening trim on or off for individual door openings. To remove trim from a door opening: 1. 2. 3. To remove trim from a door opening, begin on the Basic tab of the Doors properties dialog. Clear the Include Opening Trim check box in the Properties list. Continue setting door properties, or click OK to close the Doors properties dialog box.
Displaying a Highlite or Sidelites on a Door

A sidelite is a glass panel set on one or both sides of a door. Sidelites are usually found on entry doors. A highlite is a glass panel above a door. To display highlites or sidelites on a door: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. To display highlites or sidelites on a door, begin on the Basic tab of the Doors properties dialog. To display a highlite over the door, select the Display Highlite check box in the Properties list. To display a sidelite on the left side of the door, select the Display Left Sidelite check box in the Properties list. To display a sidelite on the right side of the door, select the Display Right Sidelite check box in the Properties list. Continue setting door properties, or click OK to close the Doors properties dialog box.
Editing a Doors Sidelites and Highlites

If a door has highlites or sidelites, you can edit the shape, size, height, and appearance of the highlites and sidelites. To edit sidelites and highlites: 1. 2. 3. 4. To edit sidelites and highlites, begin on the Lites tab of the Doors properties dialog. Select the highlite or sidelight that you want to edit from the Type list. To select a specific window type for the currently selected lite, select the appropriate icon in the Type area. Edit the dimensions and appearance of the highlite or sidelite in the Properties list. Selecting a dimension marked with a letter, such as a or b, highlights the corresponding dimension in the door diagram to the left of the Properties list.
5.
Select Shape to change the shape of the selected highlite or sidelite. You can select Rectangle, Arched, or Trapezoid.
196
6.
When editing highlites, select Adjust Width to change the width of the highlite. Select Opening to adjust the highlite width to match the width of the door opening. Select Door to adjust the highlite width to match the width of the door. Select User Defined to enter a specific width in the Width box.
7. 8.
Select Width to adjust the total width of the highlite or sidelite. When editing Sidelites, select Adjust Height to Door to automatically adjust the height of a sidelite to match the height of the door. Select Height to change the overall height of the highlite or sidelite.
9.
10. Select # of Horizontal Panels to change the number of panels across the highlite or sidelite. If you specify more than one panel, vertical dividers are added inside the frames. 11. Select # of Vertical Panels to change the number of panels running vertically along the highlite or sidelite. If you specify more than one panel, horizontal dividers are added inside the frames. 12. Select # of Horizontal Panes to change the number of panes of glass across each panel. 13. Continue setting door properties, or click OK to close the Doors properties dialog box.
Editing a Door Leaf

You can choose from a variety of door leaf types and change the thickness of a door leaf. To edit a doors leaf: 1. 2. 3. To edit a door leaf, begin on the Leaf tab of the Doors dialog. Select the icon for the type of leaf that you want in the Type area. To change the thickness of the leaf, enter a value in the Leaf Depth box in the Properties list. Each door leaf type has its own set of dimensions that you can define. These dimensions vary according to how many panels the leaf has. Clicking a dimension marked with a letter, such as a, b, or c, highlights the corresponding dimension in the diagram to the left of the Properties list. 4. Continue setting door properties, or click OK to close the Doors properties dialog box.
198
Editing Door Details

You can specify precise dimensions and offsets for the door frame, sash, mullions, and transoms. To edit door details: 1. 2. To edit door details, begin on the Details tab of the Doors properties dialog. Edit the frame dimensions by changing the values in the Frame area. 3. Depth. The depth of the frame members as seen from an overhead view. Width. The width of the frame members as seen from an overhead view. Offset. The offset of the door frame from the wall face. Sash Depth. The depth of sash members (sidelite/highlite frame) as seen from an overhead view. Width. The width of sash members as seen from an overhead view. Offset. The offset of the sash from the front of the door frame, i.e. how far back it sits in the door frame.
Edit the mullion dimensions by changing the values in the Mullion (for Lites) area. A mullion is the vertical piece of wood or other material that divides the panes of the highlite or sidelite windows. Vertical Separation. If a lite has two or more panels running across it, this adds vertical dividers between the panels. Horizontal Separation. If a lite has two or more stacked panels, this adds horizontal dividers between them. Depth. The front-to-back thickness of the mullion as seen from an overhead view. Width. The width (left-to-right distance) of the mullion as seen from an overhead view.
4.
Edit the transom dimensions by changing the values in the Transom (for Lites) area.
A transom is the crosspiece that separates the door from the highlite or sidelites. Depth. The front-to-back thickness of the transom member as seen from an overhead view. The transom is the member between the door and the sidelite or highlite frame. Width. The width of the transom as seen from an overhead view.
5.
Edit the sash dimensions by changing the values in the Sash (for Lites) area. A sash is the frame that holds the glass panes of the highlite or sidelites.
6.
Continue setting door properties, or click OK to close the Doors properties dialog box.
Editing Window Properties

Using the Windows properties dialog, you can edit the height and width of a window, control the number of horizontal and vertical panes in the window, define window geometry, edit trim and window details, and edit highlites, lowlites, and sidelites. To open the Windows properties dialog: 1. 2. 3. Click the Select/Edit button on the Building toolbar. Click the window to select it. Right-click and select Properties.
When you edit window properties, you can see a preview of the window in the image pane of the Windows properties dialog.
200
Editing the Size of a Window

You can edit the height, width, number of window panes, and other window geometry. To edit the size of a window: 1. 2. 3. To edit the size of a window, begin on the Basic tab of the Windows properties dialog. To change the window type, select the appropriate icon in the Type area. Edit the dimensions of the window by using the options in the Properties list. When you select a dimension marked with a letter, such as a, b, or c, the corresponding area is highlighted in the diagram to the left of the Properties list. Most windows have the common dimensions listed here. Some have additional settings to define their geometry. For example, a bay window includes the Bay Angle option 4. To edit the width of a window, select Window Width, and then enter a value in the Window Width box. The window width doesnt include the window frame. 5. 6. To edit the height of a window, select Window Height, and then enter a value in the Window Height box. To edit the number of panels in the window, select # of Horizontal Panels, and then enter a value in the # of Horizontal Panels box. Select # of Vertical Panels, and then enter a value in the # of Vertical Panels box. If you specify more than one panel, vertical or horizontal dividers are added inside the window frame. 7. To edit the number of panes in the window, select # of Horizontal Panes and then enter a value in the # of Horizontal Panes box. Select # of Vertical Panes, and then enter a value in the # of Vertical Panes box. Continue setting window properties, or click OK to close the Windows properties dialog.
8.
Removing Trim from a Window Opening

If a trim member is specified for openings in a walls properties, the windows on those walls will include trim. You can turn opening trim on or off for individual windows. To remove trim from a window opening: 1. 2. 3. To remove trim from a window open, begin on the Basic tab of the Windows properties dialog. Clear the Include Opening Trim check box in the Properties list. Continue setting window properties, or click OK to close the Windows properties dialog.
Displaying a Highlite, Lowlite, or Sidelites on a Window

A sidelite is a glass panel set on one or both sides of a window. A highlite is a glass panel above a window. A lowlite is a glass panel below a window. You can choose which lites which you want to display. To display lites on a window: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. To display highlites, lowlites, or sidelites on a window, begin on the Basic tab of the Windows properties dialog. To display a highlite over the window, select the Display Highlite check box in the Properties list. To display a lowlite under the window, select the Display Lowlite check box in the Properties list. To display a sidelite on the left side of the window, select the Display Left Sidelite check box in the Properties list. To display a sidelite on the right side of the window, select the Display Right Sidelite check box in the Properties list. Continue setting window properties, or click OK to close the Windows properties dialog.
202
Editing a Windows Highlites, Lowlites, and Sidelites

If a window has highlites, lowlites, or sidelites, you can edit the size, shape, and number of panes and panels. To edit a windows highlites, lowlites, and sidelites: 1. 2. 3. 4. To edit a windows highlites, lowlites, and sidelites, begin on the Lites tab of the Window properties dialog. Select the highlite, lowlite, or sidelite that you want to edit from the Type list. To select a specific window type for the selected highlite, lowlite, or sidelite, select the appropriate icon in the Type area. Edit the dimensions and appearance of the highlite, lowlite, or sidelite in the Properties list. Selecting a dimension marked with a letter, such as a or b, highlights the corresponding dimension in the door diagram to the left of the Properties list.
5.
Select Shape to change the shape of a highlite, lowlite, or sidelite. The selections you can make are based on the type of window you are editing.
6.
When editing highlites or lowlites, select Adjust Width in the Properties list, to change the width of the highlite or lowlite. Selecting Opening adjusts the width of the highlite to match the width of the opening, including any sidelites. Selecting Window adjusts the width of the highlite to match the width of the window, excluding any sidelites. Selecting User Defined, you can specify a precise width for the highlite in the Width box.
7. 8.
Select Width to change the total width of the selected highlite, lowlite, or sidelite. When editing sidelites, select Adjust Height to Window to automatically adjust the height of a sidelite to match the height of the window. Select Height to change the overall height of the selected highlite, lowlite, or sidelite.
9.
10. Select # of Horizontal Panels to change the number of panels across the selected highlite, lowlite, or sidelite. If you specify more than one panel, vertical dividers are added inside the frame. 11. Select # of Vertical Panels to change the number of vertical panels along the selected highlite, lowlite, or sidelite. If you specify more than one panel, horizontal dividers are added inside the frame. 12. Select # of Horizontal Panes to change the number of panes of glass across each panel. 13. Select # of Vertical Panes to change the number of panes of glass running vertically along each panel. 14. Continue setting window properties, or click OK to close the Windows properties dialog.
204
Editing Window Details

You can specify precise dimensions and offsets for the window frame, sash, mullion, and transoms. To edit window details: 1. 2. To edit window details, begin on the Details tab of the Windows properties dialog. Edit the frame dimensions by changing the values in the Frame area. 3. Depth. The depth of the frame members as seen from an overhead view. Width. The width of the frame members as seen from an overhead view. Offset. The offset of the window frame from the wall face.
Edit the sash dimensions by changing the values in the Sash area. A sash is the frame that holds the windows glass panes. Depth. The depth of sash members (sidelite/highlite/lowlite frame) as seen from an overhead view. Width. The width of sash members as seen from an overhead view. Offset. The offset of the sash from the front of the window frame, i.e. how far back it sits in the window frame.
4.
When editing bay or bow windows, edit the post dimensions in the Post (for Bays and Bows) area. A post is the top of the window that connects the bow or bay window to the wall. Depth: The thickness of posts in bay and bow windows. Width: The width of posts in bay and bow windows.
5.
Edit the mullion dimensions by changing the values in the Mullion area. A mullion is the vertical piece of wood or other material that divides the panes of the window. Vertical Separation. If a lite has two or more panels running across it, this adds vertical dividers between the panels. Horizontal Separation. If a lite has two or more stacked panels, this adds horizontal dividers between them. Depth. The front-to-back thickness of the mullion as seen from an overhead view. Width. The width (left-to-right distance) of the mullion as seen from an overhead view.
6.
Edit the transom dimensions for highlites, lowlites, and sidelites, by changing the values in the Transom (for Lites) area. A transom is the crosspiece that separates the window from the highlite or sidelites. Depth. The front-to-back thickness of the transom member as seen from an overhead view. The transom is the member between the window and the sidelite, highlite or lowlite frame. Width. The width of the transom as seen from an overhead view.
7.
Continue setting window properties, or click OK to close the Windows properties dialog.
206
Editing Wall Opening Properties

You can edit the size, shape, and appearance of a wall opening. To open the Openings properties dialog: 1. 2. 3. Click the Select/Edit button on the Building toolbar. Click the wall opening to select it. Right-click and select Properties.
Editing the Size and Shape of a Wall Opening

You can edit the size and shape of a wall opening. Openings can be rectangular, round, arched, octagonal or trapezoidal.
To edit the size of a wall opening: 1. 2. 3. To edit the size and shape of a wall opening, begin on the Basic page of the Openings properties dialog. To change the wall opening type, select the appropriate icon in the Type area. Edit the dimensions of the wall opening by using the options in the Properties list. When you select a dimension marked with a letter, such as a, b, or c, the corresponding area is highlighted in the diagram to the left of the Properties list. 4. 5. 6. To edit the width of a wall opening, select Width. and then enter a value in the Width box. To edit the Height of a wall opening, select Height, and then enter a value in the Height box. Continue setting wall opening properties, or click OK to close the Openings properties dialog.
Tip: To make the bottom of a wall opening level with the floor, change the height of opening to match the Head Height of the building location on which it is inserted. You can also lower the wall opening by using the Elevate feature.
Removing Trim from a Wall Opening

If a trim member is specified for openings in a walls properties, the opening on those walls will include trim. You can turn opening trim on or off for individual openings. To remove trim from a wall opening: 1. 2. 3. To remove trim from a wall opening, begin on the Basic tab of the Openings properties dialog. Clear the Include Opening Trim check box in the Properties list. Continue setting wall opening properties, or click OK to close the Openings properties dialog.
208
Editing the Appearance of a Wall Opening in 2D Plan View

You can change the appearance of an opening in 2D Plan View by editing the line style properties. You can apply different colors, patterns, or weights to different openings. To edit the appearance of an opening in 2D Plan View: 1. 2. To edit the appearance of a wall opening, begin on the Appearance tab of the Openings properties dialog. Select Header in the Components list, and then click Select in the Linestyle area to open the Line Styles dialog.
3. 4.
Select the desired style from the Line Styles dialog, then click OK. Continue setting wall opening properties, or click OK to close the Openings properties dialog.
Deleting a Door, Window, or Opening

You can delete a door, window, or opening. To delete a door, window, or opening: 1. 2. Click the item to select it. Press the Delete button on your keyboard, or right-click the item and select Delete, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Delete.
17
FLOORS
A floor is inserted automatically when you connect three or more walls to create a closed wall layout. When you insert interior walls, the floor is split as new rooms are created. To specify different flooring types in different rooms, you can use the Materials Paintbrush to quickly apply different types of carpet, tiles, wood flooring, vinyl flooring, linoleum, or concrete to individual floors. You can disable automatic floor insertion, because there are three additional floor tools for quick and precise floor insertion: Floor by Room, Floor by Perimeter, and Floor by Picking Points. You can also create openings in floors. For tips from the experts at HGTV, see the HGTV Videos CD. Youll find advice about selecting environmentally friendly flooring for a green home.
Inserting Floors.................................................................................................. 210 Dividing an Automatic Floor .............................................................................. 213 Moving a Floor................................................................................................... 214 Resizing or Reshaping a Floor .......................................................................... 215 Curving a Floor Edge ........................................................................................ 216 Raising or Lowering a Floor .............................................................................. 216 Editing the Thickness of a Floor ........................................................................ 217 Applying Different Materials to Floors ............................................................... 217 Cutting Openings in Floors................................................................................ 217 Deleting a Floor ................................................................................................. 220
210
Inserting Floors
A floor is automatically inserted throughout your model when you connect three or more walls to create a closed exterior wall layout. When you draw interior walls, the floor is split into individual floors as new rooms are created if the rooms walls are connected. You can also manually split automatic floors using the Room Division feature. If you have deleted a floor, or would like to insert a custom floor, you can use the Floor by Room, Floor by Perimeter, or Floor by Picking Points options to create the floor you want. Automatic floors cannot be selected in 2D Plan View. They can only be selected in 3D views. Floor edges defined using the Room Division feature can be selected and moved in 2D views. These type of floor edges are marked with a dashed line in 2D views. Floors created with one of the floor tools can be selected in both 2D and 3D. Floors are directly associated with the walls that contain them. If you stretch the wall layout, the floor stretches with it. If you open the wall layout by deleting a wall, an automatic floor will be deleted.
CHAPTER 17: FLOORS 211
Inserting a Floor Throughout a Building Location

The Floor by Perimeter feature detects the perimeter walls on the current building location and inserts a floor of your choice throughout the entire location. This option is ideal if you have deleted the automatic floor and would like to create floors quickly throughout your model. It is also a good choice if you want the same floor in every room. To insert a floor throughout a building location: 1. 2. Make sure the building location that you want to insert the floor on is the current location. Open the Insert menu and select Floors > Floor by Perimeter, or click the Floors button on the Building toolbar and select Floor by Perimeter. In the Floors catalog, select the floor type you want to insert.
3.
4.
Click anywhere inside the model. The floor is automatically inserted.

Note: The Floor by Perimeter feature is not limited by interior walls. Only one large floor surface is created. To create individual floors in each room, use the Floor by Room feature.
212
Inserting a Floor in a Room

Using the Floor by Room tool you can click inside one room to automatically insert the floor of your choice. To insert a floor in a room: 1. Open the Insert menu and select Floors > Floor by Room, or click the Floors button on the Building toolbar and select Floor by Room. In the Floors catalog, select the floor type you want to insert. Click inside the room to add the floor. The floor is automatically inserted.
2. 3.
Inserting a Floor by Picking Points

Using the Floor by Picking Points feature you can create a floor of any size or shape anywhere in your model. Pick points to form a closed shape and the floor is created instantly. To insert a floor by picking points: 1. Open the Insert menu and select Floors > Floor by Picking Points, or click the Floors button on the Building toolbar and select Floor by Picking Points. In the Floors catalog, select the floor type you want to insert. Select a start point for the surface, then continue selecting points to define the size and shape of the floor. You need not select the start point again to finish the floorthe last point picked is always connected to the start point. 4. Right-click and select Finish.
2. 3.
Disabling Automatic Floor Insertion

By default, a floor is automatically inserted throughout your model when you connect three or more walls to form a closed wall layout. You can disable automatic floor insertion. To disable automatic floor insertion: 1. Open the Settings menu and select Program Settings or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar to open the Program Settings dialog. Select Building Aids in the left column of the Program Settings dialog. Clear the Automatically Insert Floors check box in the Automatic Elements area. Click OK.
2. 3. 4.
Dividing an Automatic Floor

Using the Room Division feature you can manually split a floor that was created automatically when you inserted a wall layout. You might want to create two different floor areas in one room. You can also use the Room Division feature to define an opening in the floor. Floor edges defined with the Room Division feature can be moved to increase or decrease the size of the individual floor area. They can also be deleted.
Note: You cannot divide a floor that was created with a Floor tool.
214
To divide a floor: 1. 2. Open the Insert menu and select Room Division, or click the Room Division button on the Building toolbar. Select points to define the division line. If you are dividing a floor surface into two segments, the end points of the line must be on the floor edge, although intermediate points are permitted anywhere on the floor surface. To create floor within a floor, the split line must form a closed shape. 3. 1. 2. 3. Right-click and select Finish. Make sure you are in 2D Plan View. Click the dashed division line to select it. Blue grips are displayed along the line. Hover your mouse pointer over the center grip, then click and drag to move the line. You can also right-click the division line and select Move. Release your mouse button. To move a division line:
4.
Note: When you divide a floor, the division lines are also created on the ceiling above.
Moving a Floor
You can move a manually inserted floor using the Move feature. You cant move a floor that was created automatically when you created a wall layout. You can only move floors that were created using the Floor feature. To move a floor: 1. 2. 3. Select the floor by clicking on one of its edges. Right-click and select Move, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Move. Click and drag the floor to move it, then release your mouse button.
Moving Defined Floor Edges

If you have used the Room Division feature to define a custom floor area in your model, you can move the defined floor edge in 2D Plan View to increase or decrease the size of the defined floor area. To move a defined floor edge: 1. 2. 3. 4. Make sure you are in 2D Plan View. Click the dashed floor edge to select it. Blue grips appear along the floor. Hover your pointer over the center grip to display the Move pointer, then click and drag to move the line. Release your mouse button.
Resizing or Reshaping a Floor

You can resize or reshape a floor by clicking and dragging its edges and corners. You cant stretch a floor that was created automatically when you created wall layout. You can only stretch floors that were created by using the Floor feature. To resize or reshape a floor: 1. 2. Select the floor by clicking one of its edges. Click the edge that you want to adjust. A solid blue grip appears on the selected edge, and hollow blue grips appear at each corner of the floor surface. To resize a the floor, hover your mouse pointer over the solid blue grip, and then click and drag the floor edge to adjust the floor size. You can also right-click the floor and select Move Edge. To reshape the floor, hover your mouse pointer over one of the corner grips, and then click and drag the corner to adjust the floor shape. You can also right-click the floor and select Stretch.
3.
4.
216
Curving a Floor Edge

You can curve a floor edge using the Curve feature. When the tool is active, you can click and drag the edge to curve it, or select a point as the center of a curve. You cant curve a floor that was created automatically when you created a wall layout. You can only curve floors that were created using the Floor feature. To curve a floor edge by clicking and dragging: 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. Click the edge to select it. Right-click and select Curve, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Curve. Click and drag the floor edge to the desired curve. Release your mouse button. Click the floor edge to select it. Right-click and select Curve, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Curve. Click a point in the drawing to be the center of the curve.
To curve a floor edge to a selected point:
Raising or Lowering a Floor

You can raise or lower a floor using the Elevate feature. To raise or lower a floor: 1. Click the floor to select it. If the floor was created automatically, you must be in a 3D view to select it. 2. 3. 4. Right-click and select Elevate, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Elevate to open the Elevate dialog. Edit the value in the Distance box to specify the elevation of the floor above the floor level of this building location. Click OK.
Editing the Thickness of a Floor

You can edit the thickness of a floor by editing the floor properties. To edit the thickness of a floor: 1. Click the floor to select it. If the floor was created automatically, you must be in a 3D view to select it. 2. Right-click and select Properties, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Properties. to open the Floors properties dialog. Select Thickness in the Properties list, and edit the value in the Thickness box. Click OK.
3. 4.
Applying Different Materials to Floors

You can use the Materials Paintbrush to apply different materials to floors, such as different colors or patterns of carpet, tile, or linoleum. To apply a material to a floor: 1. 2. Display your model in 3D view. Open the Edit menu and select Materials Paintbrush, or click the Materials Paintbrush button on any tabbed toolbar. Select Flooring from the Filter drop-down list in the Materials catalog. Click the floor surface to which to apply the material. The material is immediately applied. You can continue applying the material to other floor surfaces, or select another material in the Materials catalog. 5. Right-click and select Finish.
3. 4.
Cutting Openings in Floors

You can cut an opening in any type of floor, whether it was inserted manually or automatically.
218
Cutting an Opening in an Automatic Floor

You can insert an opening of any shape and size in an automatic floor by defining the area to be cut out and then deleting it. You might need to do this to accommodate a staircase.
Note: To insert an opening in a floor that was created with a Floor tool, see Cutting an Opening in a Manually Inserted Floor on page 218.
To insert an opening in an automatic floor: 1. 2. 3. Open the Insert menu and select Room Division, or click the Room Division button on the Building toolbar. Select points to define the outline of the opening, ensuring the outline forms a closed shape. Right-click and select Finish. An outline is created on the floor surface. You can stretch, move and curve the outline if necessary to get the exact size and shape you want. 4. 5. 6. Go into 3D view and make sure the floor is visible in the view. Click inside the outline you drew to select it. Press the Delete key on the keyboard, right-click and select Delete, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Delete.
Cutting an Opening in a Manually Inserted Floor

If you have used the Floor by Room, Floor by Perimeter, or Floor by Picking Points feature to create a floor, you can use the Cut Opening feature to create an opening of any shape or size. To create an opening in a manually inserted floor: 1. 2. 3. Click the floor to select it. Right-click and select Cut Opening. Select a start point for the opening, then continue selecting points to define the size and shape of the opening. You need not select the start point again to finish the outlinethe last point picked is always connected to the start point. 4. Right-click and select Finish.
Removing an Opening from an Automatically Inserted Floor

If you have inserted an opening in an automatic floor, you can remove it by deleting all of the opening edges. To remove an opening from an automatic floor: 1. 2. 3. In 2D Plan View, click one of the openings edges to select it Press Shift and click to select the remaining edges. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Delete.
Removing an Opening from a Manually Inserted Floor

You can remove an opening from a manually inserted floor using the Remove Opening feature. You cant remove an opening from a manually inserted floor by deleting it. To remove an opening from a manually inserted floor: 1. 2. 3. Click the edge of the floor or opening to select it. Right-click and select Remove Opening, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Remove Opening. Click the edge of the opening. The opening is removed.
Resizing or Reshaping a Floor Opening

If you have created an opening in a floor, you can resize or reshape the opening by clicking and dragging its edges or corners. To resize or reshape a floor opening: 1. 2. Click the edge of the opening to select it. To resize the opening, hover your mouse pointer over the center blue grip of the edge that you want to move, and then click and drag the edge to adjust the opening size. If the opening is located in a manually inserted floor, reshape the opening by clicking and dragging a corner grip.
3.
220
Curving a Floor Opening

You can curve the edge of a floor opening using the Curve feature. When the tool is active, you can click and drag the opening edge to curve it, or select a point for the center of the curve. To curve an opening edge by clicking and dragging: 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. In 2D Plan View, click the opening edge to select it. Right-click and select Curve, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Curve. Click and drag the opening edge to the desired curve. Release your mouse button. In 2D Plan View, click the opening edge to select it. Right-click and select Curve, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Curve. Select the point for the center of the curve. The opening edge automatically curves to the point. Click a point in the drawing to be the center of the curve.
To curve an opening edge to a selected point:
Deleting a Floor
You can delete a floor. To delete a floor: 1. Click the floor to select it. If the floor was inserted automatically when you created the wall layout, you must select the floor in a 3D view. 2. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Delete.
18
CEILINGS
You can point and click to insert ceilings using one of the Ceiling tools: Ceiling by Room, Ceiling by Perimeter, and Ceiling by Picking Points. Any ceiling surface can easily be made into a tray or cathedral ceiling by simply editing the ceilings properties. You can also create openings in ceilings.
Inserting Ceilings............................................................................................... 222 Creating a Tray Ceiling...................................................................................... 224 Creating a Cathedral Ceiling ............................................................................. 226 Moving a Ceiling................................................................................................ 227 Resizing or Reshaping a Ceiling ....................................................................... 228 Curving a Ceiling Edge...................................................................................... 228 Raising or Lowering a Ceiling............................................................................ 229 Applying Different Colors and Materials to Ceilings .......................................... 229 Cutting Openings in Ceilings ............................................................................. 230 Deleting a Ceiling .............................................................................................. 232
222
Inserting Ceilings
You can insert ceilings using the Ceiling toolsCeiling by Room, Ceiling by Perimeter, or Ceiling by Picking Points. You can edit the thickness and appearance of any ceiling as well as lower it to create a suspended ceiling, regardless of how you created it. You can also use the Materials Paintbrush to apply different colors or materials to individual ceilings. As well, any ceiling can be converted into a tray or cathedral ceiling by simply editing the ceilings properties.
Tip: The underside of an upper-story floor can also serve as a ceiling. Similarly, the top side of a lower-story ceiling can serve as a floor.
Inserting a Ceiling Throughout a Building Location

The Ceiling by Perimeter tool detects the perimeter walls on the current building location and inserts a ceiling of your choice throughout the entire location. This option is ideal if you would like to create ceilings as quickly as possible throughout your model and do not have a need for different ceilings in each room. To instantly add a ceiling to the entire perimeter of a location: 1. 2. Make sure the location you want to insert the ceiling on is the current location in the building locations drop-down list. Open the Insert menu and select Ceilings > Ceiling by Perimeter, or click the Ceilings button on the Building toolbar and select Ceiling by Perimeter. In the catalog, select the ceiling type you want to insert.
3.
CHAPTER 18: CEILINGS 223
4. 5.
Click anywhere inside the perimeter of the model. The ceiling is added automatically. Right-click and select Finish.
Note: The Ceiling by Perimeter tool does not take interior walls into account. Only one large ceiling surface is created. If you would prefer individual ceilings in each room, use the Ceiling by Room tool.
Inserting a Ceiling in a Room

The Ceiling by Room option inserts a ceiling inside the perimeter of a room provided all the walls are connected. Adding ceilings by room allows you to have different ceiling types in different rooms. To insert a ceiling inside a room: 1. 2. Make sure the location you want to insert the ceiling on is the current location in the building locations drop-down list. Open the Insert menu and select Ceilings > Ceiling by Room, or click the Ceilings button on the Building toolbar and select Ceiling by Room. In the catalog, select the ceiling type you want to insert. Click inside the room that you want to add the ceiling to. The ceiling is added automatically. If you want, you can continue adding ceilings to other rooms. 5. Right-click and select Finish from the shortcut menu.
3. 4.
224
Inserting a Ceiling By Picking Points

Using the Ceiling by Picking Points tool you can insert a ceiling by picking points to define the ceilings outline. This lets you create a ceiling of any shape and size, anywhere in the drawing area. To create a ceiling by picking points: 1. 2. Make sure the location you want to insert the ceiling on is the current location in the building locations drop box. Select Insert > Ceilings > Ceiling by Picking Points, or click the Ceilings button on the Building toolbar and select Ceiling by Picking Points. In the Ceilings catalog, select the ceiling type you want to insert. Select a start point for the ceiling outline. Continue selecting points until the outline is defined. (You do not have to select the start point again because the last point you pick is always closed back to the start point.) Right-click and select Finish.
3. 4. 5.
6.
Creating a Tray Ceiling

A tray ceiling slopes upward with one or more steps prior to reaching a flat portion. This decorative ceiling treatment is often used to add volume or height to a room. You can create a tray ceiling by changing a ceilings type to Tray in its properties, then defining the tray height, skirt width and slope angle.
To create a tray ceiling: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. If one is not present, create a regular flat ceiling in the room that you want to have a tray ceiling. Select the ceiling. Right-click and select Properties. In the Ceilings dialog, click the Tray option in the Type area. In the Properties area, click the Tray Height option, then type the desired distance from the base of the ceiling to the raised flat portion. This defines the height of the tray. Click the Skirt Width option, then specify the desired distance from the outer edge of the ceiling to the edge of the tray. Click the Edge Shape option, then select either Straight, Gable or Arched. Straight. Creates straight tray edges that can be angled. Gable. Creates straight tray edges and leaves one side open on the tray so that the tray can fit up against a wall. Arched. Creates curved tray edges. 8. If you selected the Straight edge shape, specify the desired angle for the trays edges in the Slope Angle edit box. You can choose in the range of 1 to 90. If you selected the Arched edge shape, specify the following values: Start Angle. The angle of the start of the curve, measured from the base of the ceiling to the center of the starting curve. Choose a value from 1 to 90. End Angle. The angle of the upper portion of the curve, measured from the center of the ending curve to the top of the tray. Radius. The distance from the base of the ceiling to the center of the curved edge. 10. Click OK.
6. 7.
9.
226
Creating a Cathedral Ceiling

A cathedral ceiling is a high, vaulted, open ceiling that can be arched or slant upward to a point. You can create a cathedral ceiling by changing a ceilings type to Cathedral in its properties, then defining the ceilings edge conditions. To create a cathedral ceiling: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. If one is not present, create a regular flat ceiling in the room that you want to have a cathedral ceiling. Click the Edit/Select button on the Building toolbar. Select the ceiling. Right-click the ceiling and select Properties. In the Ceilings properties dialog, click the Cathedral option in the Type area.
6.
Click the Skirt Width option, and then specify the distance from the edge of the ceiling at which you want the ceiling to start sloping upward. If you want the ceiling to start sloping directly from the outer edges, specify a value of 0.
7.
Click the Edge Shape option, then select either Straight, Gable, or Arched to define the shape of the ceilings sloping edges. Straight creates straight edges that can be angled. Gable creates straight edges and leaves one side open so that the ceiling can fit up against a wall. Arched creates curved edges.
8. 9.
If you selected the Straight edge shape, specify the desired angle for the sloping edges in the Slope Angle box. If you selected the Arched edge shape, specify the following values: Start Angle for the angle of the start of the curve, measured from the base of the ceiling to the center of the starting curve. Choose a value from 1 to 90. End Angle for the angle of the upper portion of the curve, measured from the center of the ending curve to the top of the ceilings peak. Radius for the distance from the base of the ceiling to the center of the curved edge. Vert. Distance for the distance from the base of the ceiling to the peak.
10. Click OK.

Note: If you are creating a cathedral ceiling, you need to make sure your roof is steep enough to accommodate the ceiling. Otherwise, the ceiling will go through the roof.
Moving a Ceiling
You can move a ceiling using the Move tool. To move a ceiling: 1. 2. 3. Select the ceiling by clicking on one of its edges. Right-click and select Move, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Move. Click and drag the ceiling to the desired location in your drawing, then release your mouse button.
228
Resizing or Reshaping a Ceiling

You can resize or reshape a ceiling by clicking and dragging its edges and corners. To resize or reshape a ceiling: 1. Select the ceiling by clicking on one of its edges. If you want to resize the ceiling, click on the edge that you want to adjust. A solid blue grip appears on the edge you selected, and hollow blue grips appear at each corner of the ceiling surface. To resize the ceiling, hover your pointer over the solid blue grip, then click and drag the ceiling edge to adjust the ceiling size. Alternatively you can select the Move Edge tool on the right-click menu. To reshape the ceiling, hover your pointer over one of the corner grips, then click and drag the corner to adjust the ceiling shape. Alternatively you can select the Stretch tool on the right-click menu.
2.
3.
Curving a Ceiling Edge

You can curve a ceiling edge using the Curve tool. Once the tool is active, you can click and drag the edge to curve it, or select a point to curve to. To curve a ceiling edge by clicking and dragging: 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Click on the edge you want to curve. Right-click and select Curve, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Curve. Click and drag the ceiling edge to the desired curve. Release your mouse button. Click on the ceiling edge you want to curve. Right-click in and select Curve, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Curve. Select the point you want to curve to. The ceiling edge automatically curves to the point. Click to finish.
To curve a ceiling edge to a selected point:
Raising or Lowering a Ceiling

You can lower or raise a ceiling using the Elevate tool. To raise or lower a ceiling: 1. 2. Select the ceiling by clicking on the edge of it. Right-click and select Elevate, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Elevate. The current value in the Elevate dialog is the current elevation of the ceiling above the floor level. In the Elevate dialog, specify the height you want the ceiling to sit at above the floor. Click OK.
3. 4.
Applying Different Colors and Materials to Ceilings

You can use the Materials Paintbrush to quickly apply different colors or materials to ceilings. To apply a material to a ceiling: 1. 2. 3. Display your model in 3D view and make sure the ceiling is visible in the view. You may need to hide the roof. Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or click the Materials Paintbrush button on any tabbed toolbar. In the catalog panel, select the material you want to apply. You may want to select Ceiling Material from the Filter drop box to display only ceiling materials. Click on the ceiling you want to apply the material to. You can continue applying the material to other ceiling surfaces, or select another material in the catalog. Right-click and select Finish.
4.
5.
230
Cutting Openings in Ceilings

You can create an opening in a ceiling using the Cut Opening tool. You create the opening by picking points to define its size and shape. To insert an opening in a ceiling: 1. 2. 3. 4. Select the ceiling by clicking one of its edges. Right-click and select Cut Opening, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Cut Opening. Select a start point for the opening. Continue selecting points to define the opening. As you select points, the opening is created. The last point picked is always connected back to the start point to form a closed shape, so you dont have to select the start point again. 5. Right-click and select Finish.
Resizing or Reshaping a Ceiling Opening

If you have created an opening in a ceiling, you can resize or reshape the opening by clicking and dragging its edges or corners. To resize or reshape a ceiling opening: 1. 2. In 2D Plan View, click on the opening edge you want to move. To resize the opening, hover your pointer over the center blue grip of the edge that you want to move, then click and drag the edge to adjust the opening size. To reshape the opening, click and drag a corner grip.
3.
Curving a Ceiling Opening

You can curve the edge of a ceiling opening using the Curve tool. Once the tool is active, you can click and drag the opening edge to curve it, or select a point to curve to. To curve an opening edge by clicking and dragging: 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. In 2D Plan View, click on the opening edge you want to curve. Right-click and select Curve, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Curve. Click and drag the opening edge to the desired curve. Release your mouse button. In 2D Plan View, click on the opening edge you want to curve. Right-click in and select Curve, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Curve. Select the point you want to curve to. The opening edge automatically curves to the point. Click to finish.
Removing an Opening from a Ceiling

You can remove an opening from a manually inserted ceiling using the Remove Opening tool. A manually inserted ceiling is one that was inserted with either the Ceiling by Room, Ceiling by Perimeter or Ceiling by Picking Points tool. You cannot remove an opening from a manually inserted ceiling using Delete. To remove an opening from a manually inserted ceiling: 1. 2. 3. Click on the edge of the ceiling or opening to select the ceiling. Right-click and select Remove Opening, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Remove Opening. Click on the edge of the opening. The opening is removed.
232
Deleting a Ceiling
You can delete a ceiling in a couple of easy steps. To delete a ceiling: 1. 2. Select the ceiling. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.
19
STAIRS, RAMPS, AND RAILINGS
If your design has more than one floor, youll want to insert a staircase. The catalog contains a variety of stair and ramp styles, including straight, spiral, fold-back, L-shaped, and L-winder. There are even stairs specifically for decks and porches. You can edit the composition and dimensions of each component in your staircase to create the exact look you want. Stairs and ramps are inserted as solid objects with point-and-click simplicity. Just select the staircase or ramp you want to insert in the catalog, and then click to insert it in your model. The catalog also contains an excellent selection of railing types. A railing can be just a handrail, or a balustrade with posts, top and bottom rails, and newels. You can insert railings on a staircase automatically. You can choose to put it on both sides, the left side, the right side, or the center. You can also draw a horizontal railing by picking points.
Note: For information about deck stairs and railings, see Decks on page 385.
Inserting Stairs and Ramps ............................................................................... 234 Moving a Staircase or Ramp ............................................................................. 235 Rotating a Staircase or Ramp ........................................................................... 235 Editing Stair Properties...................................................................................... 236 Editing Ramp Properties ................................................................................... 244 Deleting a Staircase or Ramp............................................................................ 248 Inserting Railings on Staircases and Ramps..................................................... 248 Editing Railing Properties .................................................................................. 251 Stretching a Railing ........................................................................................... 254 Rotating a Railing .............................................................................................. 254 Deleting a Railing .............................................................................................. 255
234
Inserting Stairs and Ramps

You can insert a staircase or ramp with a single mouse click. If you place the staircase near a wall, the staircase automatically snaps to the wall. after inserting, you can edit its size, style, and geometry. To insert a staircase or ramp: 1. Check the current location in the Building Location men to make sure you are on the appropriate level for inserting a staircase or ramp. Open the Insert menu and select Stairs/Ramps, or click the Stairs/Ramps button on the Building toolbar. In the Stairs/Ramps catalog, select the staircase or ramp you want to insert.
2. 3.
4. 5.
Position the staircase or ramp and click to insert it. Right-click and select Finish.
Tip: You might need to cut an opening in the floor to accommodate the staircase. See Cutting an Opening in an Automatic Floor on page 218.
CHAPTER 19: STAIRS, RAMPS, AND RAILINGS 235
When editing staircases, it is useful to know the parts that make up a staircase. The parts of a staircase are illustrated below.
Moving a Staircase or Ramp

You can move a staircase or ramp by clicking and dragging it. To move a staircase or ramp: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click the staircase or ramp to select it. Hover your mouse pointer over the center grip to display the Move pointer. Click and drag the staircase/ramp to move it. Release your mouse button.
Rotating a Staircase or Ramp

You can rotate a staircase or ramp by clicking and dragging it. To rotate a staircase or ramp: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click the staircase or ramp to select it. Hover your pointer over the triangular grip to display the Rotate pointer. Click and drag to rotate the staircase or ramp. Release your mouse button.
236
Editing Stair Properties

You can edit the properties of a staircase including dimensions, height, width, number of steps, layout, details, and appearance. To edit the properties of a staircase or ramp: 1. 2. 3. Click the Select/Edit button on the Building toolbar. Click the staircase to select it. Right-click and select Properties, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Properties to open the Stairs/Ramps properties dialog. Using the Stairs/Ramps properties dialog, you can complete the following tasks: Edit the size of stairs and stair components. Edit stairs, treads, stringers, risers, and landings. Edit the appearance of the cut line in 2D Plan View.
4.
When you edit staircase properties, you can see a preview of the staircase in the image pane of the Stairs/Ramps properties dialog.
Editing Stair Size Properties

By default, most stairs (except porch stairs) have an overall height of 9 feet and contain 18 steps. You can edit the general dimensions of a staircase, such as height, width, and number of steps. To edit stair size properties: 1. To edit stair size properties, begin on the Basic tab of the Stairs/ Ramps properties dialog. Selecting a dimension marked with a letter, such as a or b, highlights the corresponding dimension in the staircase diagram to the left of the Properties list. 2. Select Overall Height and edit the value in the Overall Height box to edit the vertical distance from the base of the staircase to the top of the staircase. Usually, this is the distance from one floor to the next. 3. Select Total Steps and edit the value in the Total Steps box to edit the total number of steps in the staircase including all treads and landings. This value is controlled by the Overall Height and Riser Maximum options, so you can only go so high or so low when specifying the total number of steps. 4. You cannot edit the Riser Height option, which is the distance from the top of one tread to the top of the next tread. The riser height is adjusted automatically when you change the overall height or total steps. 5. Select Tread Run and edit the value in the Tread Run box to edit the width of a step from the nose of the step to the riser of the next step. Select Riser Maximum and edit the value in the Riser Maximum box to edit the maximum height allowed for risers. Select the Show Riser check box to insert vertical boards under the treads. If the Show Riser check box is cleared, the stairs are open under the treads. Continue setting staircase properties, or click OK to close the Stairs/Ramps properties dialog.
6. 7.
8.
238
Editing a Staircase Layout

You can choose from many different staircase layouts and edit the dimensions of individual staircase segments. To edit a staircase layout: 1. 2. To edit a staircase layout, begin on the Layout tab of the Stairs/ Ramps properties dialog. Select an option from the Preset Layouts drop-down list to change the layout of the staircase.
Tip: You can click icon below the Preset Layouts drop-down list to open the Preset Layouts dialog. The Preset Layouts dialog contains an icon for each layout type.
3.
To edit the dimensions of a segment, select the segment in the Layout Segments area. For example, an L-shaped staircase has three segments, Stair 1, Landing 2, and Stair 3. The Stair 1 segment is the lower flight of stairs, Landing 2 is the central landing between the two flights, and Stair 3 is the upper flight of stairs.
4.
Edit the options in the Parameters list. Different layouts offer different parameters. Selecting a dimension marked with a letter, such as a or b, highlights the corresponding dimension in the staircase diagram to the left of the Parameters list.
5.
When editing staircases or segments of staircases that include stairs, you have the following parameters available: Select Number of Steps and edit the Number of Steps box to change the number of steps in the flight. Select Position Offset and edit the Position Offset box to shift the base of the staircase left or right from the center line. A positive value shifts the base to the right, while a negative value shifts it to the left. If the Upper Offset option is set to 0, the entire staircase is moved. Select Lower Width and edit the value in the Lower Width box to set the width of the bottom step. Select Upper Width and edit the value in the Upper Width box to set the width of the top step. Select Upper Offset and edit the value in the Upper Offset box to shift the top of the stair segment to the left or right to create an angled flight of stairs. A positive value shifts the top segment to the right, a negative value shifts it to the left. Select Landing Connection and select an option in the Landing Connection drop-down list to determine how the stairs attach to the landing. You can select Front, Bottom, or Under. Select the Adjust Width check box to adjust the width of attached landings and stair flights to match the current segments width settings. Select Adjust Height and select an option from the Adjust Height drop-down list to edit the number of risers or height of a segment. The Adjust Height option determines which other segments will be adjusted to make up the overall height of all segments.
240
6.
When you are editing staircases that include landing segments, you have the following parameters available: Select Position Offset and edit the value in the Position Offset box to shift the landing left or right. A positive value moves the landing to the right. A negative value moves it to the left. Select Width and edit the value in the Width box to edit the width of the landing along the lower flight of stairs. By default, the Width setting matches the Upper Width setting of the lower stair flight. Select Depth 1 and edit the value in the Depth 1 box to edit the width of the landing along the upper flight of stairs. By default the Depth 1 setting matches the Lower Width setting of the upper stair flight. Select Depth 2 and edit the value in the Depth 2 box to edit the width of the exposed side of the landing. Select the Adjust Width check box to adjust the width of attached stair flights to match the width of the landing.
7.
To add a flight or landing to a staircase, click Add in the Layout Segments area to open the Add/Edit Segment dialog. Select the segment you want to add, and then click OK. The segment is added to the list of segments in the Layout Segments area. Defining the parameters for the new segment in the Parameters list.
8.
To change an existing segment to another type of segment, select the segment in the Layout Segments area, and then click Edit to open the Add/Edit Segment dialog. Select the new segment type, and then click OK. To delete a segment from the staircase, select the segment in the Layout Segments area, and then click Delete.
9.
10. Continue setting staircase properties, or click OK to close the Stairs/Ramps properties dialog.
Editing Stair Details

By editing stair details you can control the size and position of treads, risers, stringers, and landing platforms. A stringer is the board that covers the ends of the steps. A riser is the vertical portion of an individual step. A tread is the horizontal portion of a step. To edit stair details: 1. 2. To edit a staircase layout, begin on the Basic tab of the Stairs/ Ramps properties dialog. To change the stringer style or create a solid stair, click the appropriate icon in the Type area.
3.
To edit tread, riser, stringer and landing details, select the Details tab, and edit the values in the Properties list. Selecting a dimension marked with a letter, such as a or b, highlights the corresponding dimension in the staircase diagram to the left of the Properties list.
4. 5. 6.
Select Tread Thickness and enter a value in the Tread Thickness box to edit the thickness of each step. Select Nosing Depth and enter a value in the Nosing Depth box to edit the distance the step extends past the riser. Select Riser Angle and enter a value in the Riser Angle box to edit the tilt of the riser board. A value of 0 means the board is perpendicular to the step (straight up and down). A value above 0 tilts the riser down toward the back of the staircase. The maximum angle allowed is 20.
242
7.
Select Stringer Side Offset and enter a value in the Stringer Side Offset box to edit the distance that the side stringers are offset from the ends of the treads. Select Stringer Width and enter a value in the Stringer Width box to edit the distance from the bottom of the stringer to the underside of the tread/riser intersection. Setting the stringer waste to match the height of a staircase creates a stringer that runs from the staircase to the floor.
8.
9.
Select Stringer Thickness and enter a value in the Stringer Thickness box to edit the thickness of the stringer member.
10. Select Max Stringer Spacing and enter a value in the Max Stringer Spacing box to edit the maximum distance allowed between stringers. If you increase the width of the staircase, additional stringers will be inserted if this spacing is exceeded. 11. Select Landing Thickness and enter the thickness of the landing platform in the Landing Thickness box. 12. Continue setting staircase properties, or click OK to close the Stairs/Ramps properties dialog.
Editing the Appearance of the Cut Line

When viewing a staircase in 2D Plan View you see a cut line through the staircase. The cut line is a standard drafting symbol for stairs. You can change the position, size, angle, and style of the cut line. You can also hide it from view. To edit the appearance of the cut line: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. To edit the appearance of the cut line, begin on the Details tab in the Stairs/Ramps properties dialog. Edit the settings in the Cut Line area. Select or clear the Show Cut Lines. check box to show or hide the cut line in 2D Plan View. Edit the value in the Extension box to change the distance the cut line extends past the edge of the staircase in 2D Plan View. Edit the value in the Angle box to change the angle of the cut line in 2D Plan View. Edit the value in the Elevation box to change how high on the staircase the cut line sits. Select a cut line format from the Style drop-down list. You can select Single, Single Architectural, Double, and Double Architectural. The default is Double Architectural. 8. Edit the value in the Spacing box to change the distance between the lines when using the Double or Double Architectural cut line style. Continue setting staircase properties, or click OK to close the Stairs/Ramps properties dialog.
9.
244
Editing Ramp Properties

When editing a ramp, you can select a uniform or full style, and edit the ramp thickness and landing thickness. You can also change the layout or shape of the ramp and edit the height and slope. To edit ramp properties: 1. 2. Click the ramp to select it. Right-click and select Properties, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Properties.to open the Stairs/Ramps properties dialog. Change the type of ramp by selecting an icon in the Type area on the Basics tab. Ramp 1 is a ramp with uniform thickness, while Ramp 2 is a full, wedge-style ramp. 4. 5. 6. Select the Overall Height and edit the value of the Overall Height box in the Properties list to edit the height of the ramp. Select the Details tab. If the ramp is type Ramp 1, you can edit the Ramp Thickness and Landing Thickness properties using the Properties list. Edit the ramps thickness by selecting Ramp Thickness and entering a value Ramp Thickness box. Edit the ramps landing thickness by selecting Landing Thickness and entering a value in the Landing Thickness box.
3.
7.
If the ramp type is Ramp 2, you can edit the Ramp Thickness property by selecting Ramp Thickness and entering a value Ramp Thickness box in the Properties list. Continue setting ramp properties, or click OK to close the Stairs/ Ramps properties dialog.
8.
Editing the Layout of a Ramp

You can choose from many preset ramp layouts, and edit layout properties such as length and slope. To edit the layout of a ramp: 1. 2. Click the ramp to select it. Right-click and select Properties, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Properties.to open the Stairs/Ramps properties dialog. Select the Layout tab. Select an option from the Preset Layouts drop-down list to change the layout of the ramp.
Tip: You can click icon below the Preset Layouts drop-down list to open the Preset Layouts dialog. The Preset Layouts dialog contains an icon for each layout type.
3. 4.
5.
To edit the dimensions of a segment, select the segment in the Layout Segments area. A Straight ramp has one segment, named Ramp 1. Other ramp layouts contain more segments. For example, an L-shaped ramp has three segments, Ramp 1, Landing 2, and Ramp 3. The Ramp 1 segment is the lower section of the ramp, Landing 2 is the central landing between the two sections, and Ramp 3 is the upper section of the ramp.
6.
Edit the options in the Parameters list. Different layouts offer different parameters. Selecting a dimension marked with a letter, such as a or b, highlights the corresponding dimension in the staircase diagram to the left of the Parameters list.
246
7.
When editing Ramp segments, the following parameters are available: Slope. The angle of the ramps incline. Length. The length of the ramps surface. Position Offset. Shifts the base of the ramp left or right from the center line. A positive value shifts it right, a negative value shifts it left. If the Upper Offset is set to 0, the entire ramp is moved. Lower Width. The width of the bottom of the ramp. Upper Width. The width of the top of the ramp. Upper Offset. Shifts the top of the ramp segment left or right to create an angled ramp. A positive value shifts it right, a negative value shifts it left. Adjust Width. For ramps with multiple segments, this adjusts the width of attached landings and ramp flights to match the width settings of the current segment. Adjust Height. When editing the height of a segment in a multi-segmented ramp, this determines which other segments (or all others) are to be adjusted to make up the overall height of all segments.
8.
When editing Landing segments, the following parameters might be available, depending on the ramp layout: Position Offset. Shifts the landing left or right from the center line. A positive value moves it right, a negative value moves it left. Width. The width of the landing along the lower ramp section. By default this matches the Upper Width setting of the lower ramp section. Depth 1. The width of the landing along the upper ramp section. By default this matches the Lower Width setting of the upper ramp section. Depth 2. The width of the exposed side of the landing. Adjust Width. Adjusts the width of attached ramp segments to match the width of the landing.
9.
To add a segment or landing to your ramp, click Add in the Layout Segments area to open the Add/Edit Segment dialog. Select the segment you want to add, and then click OK. The segment is added to your list of segments in the Layout Segments area. Edit the parameters for the new segment in the Parameters list.
10. To change an existing segment to another type, select the segment in the Layout Segments area, and then click Edit to open the Add/ Edit Segment dialog. Select the new segment type, and then click OK. 11. To delete a segment from the ramp, select the segment in the Layout Segments window, then click Delete. 12. Continue setting ramp properties, or click OK to close the Stairs/ Ramps properties dialog.
248
Deleting a Staircase or Ramp

You can delete a staircase or ramp. To delete a staircase or ramp: 1. 2. Click the staircase or ramp to select it. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.
Inserting Railings on Staircases and Ramps

A railing can be just a handrail, or a balustrade with posts, top and bottom rails, and newels. You can insert railings on both sides of a staircase or ramp automatically. You can also draw one on the left side, the right side, or the center. To insert railings on both sides of a staircase or ramp automatically: 1. Open the Insert menu and select Railings > Railings on Stairs Automatically, or click the Railings button on the Building toolbar and select Railings on Stairs Automatically. In the catalog, select the railing type you want to insert. Click the staircase. The railings are inserted automatically on both sides. 4. Right-click and select Finish.
2. 3.
To insert a railing on the right side of a staircase or ramp: 1. Open the Insert menu and select Railings > Railing on Stair Right, or click the Railings button on the Building toolbar and select Railing on Stair Right. In the catalog, select the railing type you want to insert. Select a point anywhere along the bottom of the staircase (or along the tread where you want the bottom of the railing to sit) to define the level of the railings bottom post. Your pointer snaps to the right side of the staircase as you start to draw the railing. 4. Select a point anywhere along the top of the staircase (or along the tread where you want the top of the railing to sit) to define the level of the railings top post. Right-click and select Finish. Open the Insert menu and select Railings > Railing on Stair Left, or click the Railings button on the Building toolbar and select Railing on Stair Left. In the catalog, select the railing type you want to insert. Select a point anywhere along the bottom of the staircase (or along the tread where you want the bottom of the railing to sit) to define the level of the railings bottom post. Your pointer will snap to the left side of the staircase as you start to draw the railing. 4. Select a point anywhere along the top of the staircase (or along the tread where you want the top of the railing to sit) to define the level of the railings top post. Right-click and select Finish.
2. 3.
5. 1.
To insert a railing on the left side of a staircase or ramp:
2. 3.
5.
250
To insert a railing along the center of a staircase or ramp: 1. Open the Insert menu and select Railings > Railing on Stair Center, or click the Railings button on the Building toolbar and select Railing on Stair Center. In the catalog, select the railing type you want to insert. Select a point anywhere along the bottom of the staircase (or along the tread where you want the bottom of the railing to sit) to define the level of the railings bottom post. Your pointer will snap to the center of the staircase as you start to draw the railing. 4. Select a point anywhere along the top of the staircase (or along the tread where you want the top of the railing to sit) to define the level of the railings top post. Right-click and select Finish.
2. 3.
5.
Inserting a Horizontal Railing

You can use the Railing by Picking Points tool to create a horizontal railing anywhere in your model. You might, for example, want to create a railing around a stairwell, or insert a railing to separate two rooms in your house. You create the railing by picking the start point and end point of the railing. Each point you pick serves as a main post point. To insert a railing along a floor: 1. 2. Make sure the building location where you want to insert the railing is the current location. Open the Insert menu and select Railings > Railings by Picking Points, or click the Railings button on the Building toolbar and select Railings by Picking Points. In the catalog, select the railing type you want to insert. Select the start point for the railing. Select an end point for the railing. You can continue adding sections to the railing if you want. 6. Right-click and select Finish.
3. 4. 5.
Editing Railing Properties

When editing a railing, you can choose a different railing type as well as control the dimensions and settings of posts, rails, and newels. To edit railing properties: 1. 2. Click the Select/Edit button on the Building toolbar. Click the railing to select it. If the railing has multiple segments, press Shift+click to select the remaining segments. 3. Right-click and select Properties, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Properties to open the Railings properties dialog box.
When you edit railing properties, you can see a preview of the railing in the image pane of the Railings properties dialog. 4. 5. To change the type of the railing, click the appropriate icon in the Type area. Use the Properties list to edit railing properties. Different types offer different properties. Selecting a dimension marked with a letter, such as a or b, highlights the corresponding dimension in the staircase diagram to the left of the Properties list.
252
6.
You can edit the following Post properties: Include Posts. Inserts a post at the railings start point and endpoint, and at points in between defined by the Post Spacing. Include First Post. If disabled, eliminates the post at the start point of the railing. Include Last Post. If disabled, eliminates the post at the end point of the railing. Post Spacing. The distance between intermediate posts in your railing. Post Position. Choosing From Start measures the intermediate posts from the start point of the railing. Choosing Centered inserts an intermediate post at the center of the railing and measures other intermediate posts from there. Post Height. This value is determined by the handrail and bottom rail heights. Post Style. Choose either Rectangle or Round for the post shape. Post Width. The width of the post. Post Depth. The depth of the post. Post Rotation. Determines the rotation of the connecting post where two railings connect. Choosing Half Way rotates the connecting post half way between the angle. Choosing None leaves the connecting post aligned to the first railing. Handrail Height. The height of the handrail above the insertion surface. Make Continuous. Makes the handrail cut through all posts, creating a continuous, solid member. Handrail Style. Choose either a Rectangle or Round shape. Handrail Width. The width of the handrail (as seen in 2D plan view). Handrail Depth. The depth (thickness) of the handrail.
7.
You can edit the following Handrail properties:
8.
You can edit the following Bottom Rail properties: Bottom Rail Height. The height of the bottom rail from the insertion surface. Bottom Rail Style. Choose either a Rectangle or Round shape for the rail. Bottom Rail Width. The width of the bottom (as seen in 2D plan view). Bottom Rail Depth. The depth (thickness) of the bottom rail.
9.
You can edit the following Baluster properties: A baluster is the post for the handrail that supports the handrail at the top, bottom, or on a landing. Baluster Spacing. The horizontal distance between balusters. Baluster Style. Choose either Rectangle or Round for the baluster shape. Baluster Width. The width of the baluster. Baluster Depth. The depth, or thickness, of the baluster. Post Offset. The horizontal offset of the first post from the bottom of the staircase. Only a positive value can be specified, which moves the post further back along the stairs. Side Offset. Offset of railing from the sides of the treads. Connection. Determines how railings are connected to the staircase. Connection 2 maintains the distance from the nosing to the railing at all times. Connection 1 breaks this rule to create a nicer-looking railing.
10. You can edit the following Stair Insertion properties:
11. Click OK to close the Railings properties dialog.
254
Changing the Length of a Railing

You can lengthen or shorten a railing by clicking and dragging one of its end points. To stretch a railing: 1. 2. Click the railing to select it. A grip is displayed at each railing end. Hover your mouse pointer over the railing end you want to stretch. The Lengthen pointer is displayed. Click and drag to lengthen or shorten the railing, then release your mouse button.
Stretching a Railing
You can use the Stretch tool to lengthen or shorten a railing and re-position it at the same time. To stretch a railing: 1. 2. 3. Select the railing. Right-click and select Stretch. Click and drag the railing end, and then release the mouse button.
Rotating a Railing
You can rotate a railing using the Rotate feature. To rotate a railing: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click the railing to select it. Right-click and select Rotate, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Rotate. Position the mouse pointer over the point around which to rotate the railing. Click and drag to rotate the railing, and then release the mouse button.
Deleting a Railing
To delete a railing: 1. Click the railing to select it. If the railing has multiple segments, you can press Shift and click the mouse button to select the remaining segments. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.
2.
256
20
ROOFS
To complete your structural model, you want to insert a roof over it. The design of your roof can be a major factor in the overall look and feel of your home. Inserting a roof is incredibly simple. Just click inside your model and the roof is inserted. Roofs are inserted by location. Therefore, if you have a two-story house, each story might require its own roof if the levels are split. The great thing about roofs is that you can edit each roof edge individually to achieve the precise geometry, dimensions and appearance you want. This means that virtually any roof configuration is possible, including multiple pitch, multiple plate height roofs. And with a wide selection of roof styles to choose from, including hip, gable, mansard, and arched, you can be as creative as you want. To give your roof design that extra edge, you can add things like dormers and openings, all of which are completely customizable to suit your needs.
Inserting a Roof ................................................................................................. 258 Selecting a Roof for Editing............................................................................... 261 Converting a Hip Roof to a Gable Roof............................................................. 262 Moving a Roof ................................................................................................... 265 Rotating a Roof ................................................................................................. 265 Stretching a Roof............................................................................................... 265 Reshaping a Roof.............................................................................................. 266 Breaking a Roof Surface ................................................................................... 266 Editing Roof Properties ..................................................................................... 266 Applying a Different Roofing Material................................................................ 269 Inserting an Opening in a Roof.......................................................................... 270 Inserting Dormers.............................................................................................. 271 Deleting a Roof.................................................................................................. 274
258
Inserting a Roof
There are two methods you can use to create a roof. You can automatically insert a roof over an entire layout, or you can insert a roof over a specified area by picking points.
Inserting an Automatic Roof

You can use the Roof by Perimeter tool to automatically insert a roof over the perimeter wall layout of a selected building location. If you have a twostory home where the ground floor wall layout is different than the upper story wall layout, and you want each story to have its own roof, you must insert a roof on each location.
By default, the roof is inserted directly on top of the walls of the current building location. You can edit the support height as well as change the roofs style and dimensions after it has been inserted.
CHAPTER 20: ROOFS 259
To insert a roof over an entire wall layout: 1. Open the Building Locations menu on the toolbar and select the floor that the roof will cover. For example, to place a roof on the top of a 2-story house, select Second Floor. 2. Open the Insert menu and select Roofs > Roof by Perimeter, or click the Roofs button on the Building toolbar and select Roof by Perimeter. In the catalog, select the roof type you want to insert. The catalog does not contain gable roofs. To create a gable roof, insert a hip roof first, and then convert it to a gable. (See Converting a Hip Roof to a Gable Roof on page 262.) 4. Click inside the wall perimeter. The roof is inserted automatically.
Note: If a roof already exists on the current location, it will be deleted. Note: If the roof you are inserting runs up against any upper-story walls, the roof will cut around the walls. You can adjust the roof to avoid saddle situations, or to ignore the walls. For more information, see Changing the Way a Lower-Story Roof is Created.
3.
Inserting a Roof By Picking Points

You can use the Roof by Picking Points tool to create a roof of a custom size and shape by drawing the basic outline of the roof. This option is ideal when you want the roof to cover only a specific area, such as a porch. To create a roof by picking points: 1. 2. 3. Check the current location in the Building Location menu to make sure youre on the appropriate level for inserting a roof. Select Insert > Roofs > Roof by Picking Points, or click the Roofs button on the Building toolbar and select Roof by Picking Points. In the Roofs catalog, select the roof type you want to insert. The Roofs catalog does not contain gable roofs. To create a gable roof, first insert a hip roof, then convert the hip roof to a gable.
260
4.
Select a start point for the roof boundary. Typically you would select the corner of an exterior wall. Continue selecting points until the boundary is defined. You need not select the start point again because the last point you pick is always closed back to the start point.
5.
Note: If the roof you are inserting runs up against any upper-story walls, the roof will cut around the walls. You can adjust the roof to avoid saddle situations, or to ignore the walls. For more information, see Changing the Way a Lower-Story Roof is Created on page 260.
Changing the Way a Lower-Story Roof is Created

By default, a lower-story roof cuts around upper-story walls where it runs up against upper-story walls. You can adjust the roof to avoid saddle situations if you want. A saddle situation is one where rain or snow runs down the roof slope and collects in areas where the roof meets a wall. You can also have the roof ignore the upper-story walls completely. To change the way a lower-story roof is created: 1. 2. 3. Click the roof to select it. Right-click and select Properties, or open the Edit menu and select Modify > Element Properties to open the Roofs properties dialog. Click the Solution Type button at the bottom of the Basic page, immediately to the left of the image pane. The Solution Type dialog opens. Select one of the three options: 5. Cut an opening around next story (location) Avoid saddle situations on next story (location) Ignore next story (location)
4.
Click OK to close the Roofs properties dialog.
Selecting a Roof for Editing

You can select a roof by clicking one of its edges. When you select a roof, the entire roof is selected, and a number of different grips and markers appear on the roof. General editing tools like Move and Rotate affect the roof as a whole. By clicking and dragging the solid blue grips at the center of each edge you can move an edge to effectively stretch the roof. By clicking and dragging the hollow blue grips at the corners, you can stretch the corners of the roof to reshape it.
Surface Marker Stretch Corner Grip
Move Edge Grip
The red and green arrows are surface markers. The green arrow indicates the currently selected surface. Changes to most properties, such as the roof type, slope, and overhang distance, affect only the currently selected surface (which is marked by the green arrow). You can make additional surfaces current by clicking the red arrows to change them to green. This lets you apply changes to multiple surfaces simultaneously.
262
Converting a Hip Roof to a Gable Roof

To convert a hip roof to a gable roof, you need to select two hip ends, and then select the gable roof type in the roof properties. To convert a hip roof to a gable roof: 1. Click the roof edge of one of the ends you want to convert. The roof is selected, and arrows appear on each roof surface edge. The arrow on the roof edge you selected should be green to indicate that it is the currently selected roof surface. 2. Click the arrow on the opposite roof edge. That arrow turns green also. Both hip ends are now selected.
Select
Select
3. 4.
Right-click and select Properties, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Properties to open the Roofs dialog. Click the Hip button in the Roof Shape area of the Basic page to open the Roof Shape dialog.
5.
Click the Gable graphic.
6.
Click OK to close the Roofs dialog. The roof is converted.
Note: By default, most walls automatically extend to the roof at gable
ends.You can control this behavior by editing wall properties. For more information see Controlling the Extension of Walls Beneath Gable Ends on page 160
Changing the Appearance of Raked Surfaces Under Gable Ends

If you have created a gable roof, you can change the appearance of the raked surfaces beneath the pitched ends of the roof by editing the material selection for the roofs Gable End component. To change the appearance of raked surfaces under gable ends: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Click the roof to select it. Right-click and select Properties, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Properties to open the Roofs properties dialog Select the Appearance tab. Select Gable End from the Components list. Click the Select button in the Material area to open the Materials catalog. Select the material you would like to use, then click OK. Click OK to close the Roofs properties dialog.
264
Creating Gables Mid-Fascia

You can create a gable on any fascia edge by inserting two break points to create a new surface, then changing the shape of the new surface to a gable. To create a gable mid-fascia: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click the roof to select it. Right-click and select Break, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Break. Insert a break point on the fascia to define the start of the gable segment. Right-click and select Break again and insert another break point on the fascia to define the other end of the gable segment. A new surface is created between the two break points.
5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Click the arrow on the new surface to make it green. If any other arrows are green, click them to make them to red. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties to open the Roofs properties dialog. Click the icon in the Roof Shape area to open the Roof Shape dialog. Click the Gable icon. Click OK to close the Roofs properties dialog. The mid-fascia segment is converted to a gable.
Moving a Roof
You can move an entire roof using the Move tool. Note that if you move your exterior wall layout, the roof will go with it, eliminating the need to move it separately. To move an entire roof: 1. 2. 3. Click a roof edge to select the roof. Right-click and select Move, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Move. Click and drag to move the roof, then release your mouse button.
Rotating a Roof
You can rotate an entire roof about a selected point using the Rotate feature. To rotate a roof: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click a roof edge to select the roof. Right-click and select Rotate, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Rotate. Hover your pointer over the point you want to rotate around. Click and drag to rotate the roof, then release your mouse button.
Stretching a Roof
You can stretch a roof by clicking and dragging one of its edges. If you stretch the exterior wall layout, the roof stretches with it. You need not stretch the roof manually. To stretch a roof: 1. 2. Click a roof edge to select the roof. Hover your pointer over the solid blue grip at the center of the roof edge you want to move. Or, right-click the roof edge and select Move Edge. The Move pointer appears. 3. Click and drag to stretch the roof, then release your mouse button.
Note: If the roof includes dormers with walls, the dormer doesnt change if you stretch its walls.
266
Reshaping a Roof
You can stretch the corners of a roof to change the shape of its perimeter. To reshape a roof: 1. 2. Click a roof edge to select the roof. Click and drag the hollow blue grips at the corners of the roof, then release your mouse button. Or, right-click the roof edge and select Stretch.
Breaking a Roof Surface

You can insert a break on a roof surface edge, which splits the surface into two surfaces that can be edited individually. To break a roof surface: 1. 2. 3. Click a roof edge to select the roof. Right-click the roof edge and select Break, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Break. Click the edge of the surface you want to break at the point where you want to break it. A new grip appears at the break point.
Editing Roof Properties

When you edit the properties of a roof, the changes are applied to the currently selected roof surface. You can edit multiple roof surfaces simultaneously if you want. Each surface in a roof can have different settings. You can edit properties such as shape, slope, and overhang, as well as framing, fascia, soffit, and gable end settings. To edit the properties of a roof: 1. 2. Click the Select/Edit button on the Building toolbar. Click edge of the roof to select it. The arrow marker on that edge should be green. To select additional surfaces to edit, click their arrows to change them from red to green. All surfaces with green arrows will receive the changes. 3. Right-click and select Properties, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Properties to open the Roofs properties dialog.
4.
Using the Roofs properties dialog, you can complete the following tasks: Edit the height of a roof surface Edit the roof frame details.
When you edit roof properties, you can see a preview of the roof in the image pane of the Roofs properties dialog.
Editing the Height of a Roof Surface

You can raise or lower a roof surface by editing the Support Height property. To edit the height of a roof surface: 1. 2. 3. To edit the height of a roof surface, begin on the Support and Details tab of the Roofs properties dialog. Edit the value in the Support Height box in the Support area. Continue setting roof properties, or click OK to close the Roofs properties dialog box.
268
Editing a Roof's Frame Details

You can frame a roof with rafters or trusses, select the members you want to use for framing, and edit the precise dimensions of the roof framing configuration. To edit a roofs framing details: 1. 2. To edit a roofs framing details, begin on the Basic tab of the Roofs properties dialog. To select a member type for rafters or trusses, click the Specify Framing button at the bottom of the Basic tab. The Roof Framing dialog opens. Click Select to open the Catalog Access dialog. Select a framing member and then click OK to close the Catalog Access dialog. Edit the value in the Rafter Spacing box to change the spacing between members. Click OK to close the Roof Framing dialog. Select the Support and Details tab in the Roofs properties dialog. Edit the Support parameters by entering values in the Support area. Support Type. Choose Truss or Rafter. Raised Heel. The portion of the rafter that rests on the wall plate. Birds Mouth. The notch cut in the lower end of a rafter to fit it to the top plate of a wall. Seat. The horizontal cut that is made when cutting a bird's mouth in a rafter.
3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
8.
Edit the Fascia parameters by editing and selecting values in the Fascia area. Depth. The thickness of the fascia board. Plumb. The ends of the rafters are cut vertically resulting in a 90 fascia board. Raked. The ends of the rafters have an angled cut. Soffit Plumb. Creates a flat soffit that is parallel with the ground. Raked. Creates a soffit that is angled to match the roof slope.
9.
Edit Gable parameters by selecting and editing values in the Gable area. Type. Choose either Plain, Squared, Full Hip or Half Hip for the gable return. Horizontal. The horizontal distance of the return when looking at the gable end face on. Depth. The depth of the return.
10. Continue setting roof properties, or click OK to close the Roofs properties dialog box.
Applying a Different Roofing Material

You can use the Materials Paintbrush to apply shingles or tiles to a roof. To apply a different material to a roof: 1. 2. Display your model in a 3D view and make sure the roof is visible. Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or click the Materials Paintbrush button on any tabbed toolbar to open the Materials catalog.. Select Roofs from the Filter drop-down list. Select the material to apply. Click anywhere on the roof surface. The material is immediately applied to the entire roof. Right-click and select Finish.
3. 4. 5. 6.
270
Inserting an Opening in a Roof

You can insert a custom opening in a room it of using the Cut Opening feature. You create the opening by picking points to define its outline. To insert an opening in a roof: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click a roof edge to select the roof. Right-click and select Cut Opening, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Cut Opening. Select a start point for the opening. Continue selecting points to define the opening. As you select points, the opening is created. The last point picked is always connected back to the start point to form a closed shape, so you dont have to select the start point again. When you have selected your final point, right-click and select Finish.
5.
Removing a Roof Opening

You can remove an opening that you have created in your roof using the Remove Opening feature. You cant delete a roof using the Delete key. To remove a roof opening: 1. 2. 3. Select the roof. Right-click and select Remove Opening, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Remove Opening. Click a corner grip on the roof opening. The opening is removed.
Inserting Dormers
A dormer is a small structure that projects from a roof slope. Dormers are often used to extend the usable floor area of a second story that is under a moderate to steeply pitched roof. They can be quite effective in opening up cramped rooms under the roof. A typical dormer consists of a roof and three walls. One of the most common dormer types is the gable dormer, characterized by the front gable in the roof.
You can also create a dormer without walls. In this case, the dormer roof sits on top of the main roof. Its purpose is typically to add character to an otherwise plain roof or to make your roof design more complex. For example, you can insert a dormer roof on your main roof and stretch it to create a porch roof or gable extension. When you insert dormers, you can control the width, roof type, wall type, and wall height.
272
To create a dormer: 1. 2. In the building locations drop-down list, select the location containing the roof where you want to add the dormer. Open the Insert menu and select Roofs > Dormer Roof or click the Roofs button on the Building toolbar and select Dormer Roof to open the Dormers dialog.
3. 4.
Specify the desired width for the dormer in the Dormer Width box. Click the Dormer Roof button, and then select the desired roof type for the dormer. By default, the roof will have a gable front, regardless of the roof type. If you dont want it to have a gable front, clear the Gable Front check box.
5.
If you want your dormer to have walls, select the Include Walls check box. Then, click the Dormer Wall button and select the desired wall type from the catalog. If you do not want your dormer to have walls, clear the Include Walls check box. Dormer walls extend only to the surface of the main roof. Plus, an opening is cut in the main roof surface to open the dormer up to the space below.
6.
In the Support height above main roof box, type the height of the dormers front wall, not including the raked portion between the two roof slopes. You can use this option even if you are not inserting walls to control the position of the bottom of the dormer roof.
7. 8.
Click OK. The dormers wall footprint is attached to your pointer. Position the dormer where you want it, and then click to insert it. In most cases you would place the front dormer wall directly on top of the exterior wall.
9.

Note: If you cant seem to insert the dormer, it means that the dormer is too large for the surface you are inserting it on. You might try decreasing the wall height before inserting it.
Moving a Dormer Roof

You can use the Move feature to move a dormer roof to another spot on your roof. To move a dormer roof: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click the edge of the dormer roof to select it. Right-click and select Move, or select Edit > Modify Element > Move. Click anywhere on the screen, then drag to move the dormer roof. When the dormer roof is where you want it, release your mouse button.
Note: If the dormer has walls, you need to move the walls separately. To move the dormer walls, click on one wall, Shift+click to select the remaining walls, right-click and select Move, then click and drag the walls into place.
274
Deleting a Dormer
You can delete a dormer roof in a couple of easy steps. If the dormer has walls, they need to be deleted separately. To delete a dormer: 1. 2. Click on the edge of the dormer roof to select it. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Element > Delete.
If the dormer has walls, select one of the walls, and then hold the Shift key down and click to select the remaining walls. Use the Delete tool to delete the selected walls.
Deleting a Roof
You can delete a roof in a couple of easy steps. To delete a roof: 1. 2. Click on one of the roofs edges to select the roof. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.
Part 4
DESIGNING THE INTERIOR
Kitchen Builder Wizard......................................277 Cabinets ..............................................................283 Appliances..........................................................291 Interior Furniture, Electronics, and Other Accessories ..................................................297 Interior Equipment .............................................303
276
21
KITCHEN BUILDER WIZARD
The Kitchen Builder Wizard creates a kitchen for you in a few easy steps. All you have to do is select the general shape and layout you want. Then, just point and click to insert all of your cupboards and appliances in one shot. It couldnt be easier. After youve inserted the kitchen you can move things around and edit individual elements to create a look thats customized to your taste and needs.
For more tips and inspiration from the experts at HGTV, see the HGTV Videos CD. Youll find how-to videos about building and organizing kitchens, in addition to hints about going green.
Creating a Kitchen with the Kitchen Builder Wizard .......................................... 278
278
Creating a Kitchen with the Kitchen Builder Wizard

Using the Kitchen Builder Wizard you can quickly create a kitchen layout that includes upper and lower cabinets, a sink, refrigerator, and stove. There are a number of layouts and styles to choose from. To create a kitchen with the Kitchen Builder Wizard: 1. Open the Tools menu and select Design Wizards > Kitchen Builder.
2.
Click Next.
CHAPTER 21: KITCHEN BUILDER WIZARD 279
3. 4.
Click the general style of kitchen you want: L-Shape, Galley, or UShape. Click Next.
5. 6.
Select the layout that most closely resembles the layout you want. Remember that you can move and edit things later. Click Next.
280
7.
Select a general style for your kitchen. The selection you make mainly determines the materials and colors used for the cupboards and countertops.
8.
Click Next.
CHAPTER 21: KITCHEN BUILDER WIZARD 281
9.
Select the desired rotation for the kitchen layout by clicking the appropriate graphic. This is how it will be attached to your pointer prior to insertion.
10. Click Next.
11. Click Finish. The kitchen configuration attaches to your pointer.
282
12. Position the kitchen layout in your kitchen area. It automatically snaps to the walls when you get close to them. 13. Click to anchor the kitchen elements. Dynamic dimensions are displayed to show you the size of the layout. If you want you can stretch the layout by moving your pointer in the direction you want to stretch. 14. After the dimensions are correct, click to finish the insertion.
15. Click Yes to finish the task. If you click No you can reposition and reinsert the kitchen.
22
CABINETS
Cabinets are essential for storage and can also contribute to the overall look and feel of a room. The catalog contains a huge selection of cabinet types, styles, and sizes, all customizable to suit your taste and needs. Cabinet types include base cabinets, corner cabinets, upper cabinets, islands, pantry cabinets, and bathroom vanities. You can insert cabinets in any room in your house with just a click of your mouse. Cabinets are designed to snap to walls and other cabinets, making insertion even easier.
Inserting Cabinets ............................................................................................. 284 Moving a Cabinet .............................................................................................. 284 Rotating a Cabinet............................................................................................. 285 Raising or Lowering a Cabinet .......................................................................... 285 Editing Cabinet Properties................................................................................. 286 Applying Different Finishes to Cabinets ............................................................ 289 Inserting a Sink into a Cabinet .......................................................................... 290 Deleting a Cabinet............................................................................................. 290
284
Inserting Cabinets
You can insert a wide variety of cabinets in your design by simply pointing and clicking with your mouse. Cabinets automatically snap to walls and other elements when you get close to them when Collision Control is turned on. To insert a cabinet: 1. 2. 3. 4. Open the Insert menu and select Interiors > Cabinets, or click the Cabinets button on the Interiors toolbar. In the catalog, select the cabinet you want to insert. Position the cabinet where you want it, and then click to insert it. Right-click and select Finish.
Moving a Cabinet
You can move individual or multiple cabinets by clicking and dragging them. To move cabinets: 1. Click the cabinet to select it. To move multiple cabinets, press Shift and click to select the additional cabinets. 2. 3. 4. Hover your mouse pointer over the cabinets center grip to display the Move pointer. Click and drag to move the cabinet. When the cabinet is positioned, release your mouse button.
CHAPTER 22: CABINETS 285
Rotating a Cabinet
You can rotate cabinets by clicking and dragging them. To rotate a cabinet: 1. 2. 3. Click the cabinet to select it. Right-click and select Rotate. Click the center grip to display the Rotate pointer.
Tip: If the triangular grip is in close proximity to the square grab handle, you may want to zoom in on the cabinet to distinguish between the two grips.
4. 5.
Click and drag to rotate the cabinet. When the cabinet is positioned, release your mouse button.
Raising or Lowering a Cabinet

You can raise or lower a cabinet using the Elevate feature. To edit a cabinets elevation: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click the cabinet to select it. Right-click and select Elevate, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Elevate to open the Elevate dialog. Enter the distance between the cabinet bottom and the floor in the Distance box. Click OK.
Tip: You can also change a cabinets elevation by changing the Distance above current location or terrain option on the Behavior tab of the Cabinets properties dialog.
286
Editing Cabinet Properties

Cabinet properties include cabinet type, size, and leaf style, as well as settings for the counter, shelves, toe space, and hardware. To edit cabinet properties: 1. 2. Click the cabinet to select it. Right-click and select Properties, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Properties to open the Cabinets properties dialog. On the Basic tab, you can edit the type and dimensions of a cabinet. To change the cabinet type, click an icon in the Type area. To change the size and shape of a cabinet, edit the dimensions in the Properties list. For example, to change the cabinet width, select Width in the Properties list, and then edit the value in the Width box. When you select a dimension marked with a letter, such as a, b, or c, the corresponding area is highlighted in the diagram to the left of the Properties list.
3.
4.
To change the cabinets leaf style, select the Leaf tab. Leaf properties vary depending on the cabinet and leaf style selected. When you edit cabinet properties, you can see a preview of the cabinet in the image pane of the Cabinets properties dialog. Use the preview to help create the cabinet. To select a leaf style for the door, select Door in the Properties list, and then select Apply to from the Door dropdown list. To select a leaf style for drawers, select Drawer from the Properties list, and then select Apply to from the Drawer drop-down list.
5.
On the Details tab, you can edit the counter, shelving, toe space, and hardware properties. To edit counter properties, begin on the Details tab of the Cabinets properties dialog. All counter properties are set in the Counter area. Select or clear the Show Counter check box. To change the thickness of the counter material, edit the value in the Thickness box. Select or clear the Show Backsplash check box. To change the thickness of the backsplash material, edit the value in the Thickness box. To change the distance from the countertop to the top of the backsplash, edit the value in the Height box. A backsplash is a vertical surface that protects the wall behind a countertop.
To edit counter properties: 1.
2.
3.
4.
Select or clear the Show Nosing check box. To change the thickness of the nosing material, edit the value in the Thickness box. To change the height of the nosing, edit the value in the Height box. To change the radius of the curve for the nosing, edit the value in the Radius box. The nosing is the projecting rounded edge at the front of the counter.
5.
Continue setting properties, or click OK to close the Cabinets properties dialog.
288
To edit cabinet shelves properties: 1. To edit cabinet shelves properties, begin on the Details tab of the Cabinets properties dialog. All shelving properties are set in the Shelves area. Select or clear the Show Shelves check box. Edit the value in the Number of Shelves box to increase or decrease the number of shelves in a cabinet. Continue setting properties, or click OK to close the Cabinets properties dialog. To edit toe space properties, begin on the Details tab of the Cabinets properties dialog. All toe space properties are set in the Toe Space area. Select or clear the Toe Space box. The toe space is a recess at the bottom of a cabinet with a counter, which provides space for your feet, so you can stand closer to the counter. 3. 4. 5. To change the depth of the toe space, edit the value in the Toe Depth box. To change the height of the toe space, edit the value in the Toe Height box. Continue setting properties, or click OK to close the Cabinets properties dialog. To edit hardware properties, begin on the Details tab of the Cabinets properties dialog. All hardware properties are set in the Hardware area. Select or clear the Show Handle check box. Select a handle style from the Handle Style drop-down list. You can select Bow, Cylinder, or Circle.
2. 3. 4.
To edit toe space properties: 1.
2.
To edit cabinet hardware properties: 1.
2. 3.
4.
To change the distance from the bottom of the topmost cabinet to the top of the door handle, edit the value in the a box. Pantry cabinets contain vertical stacked cabinets. The a distance box controls the position of the handle on the top cabinet.
5. 6.
To change the distance from the bottom of the cabinet to the top of the door handle, edit the value in the b box. Continue setting properties, or click OK to close the Cabinets properties dialog.
Applying Different Finishes to Cabinets

You can use the Materials Paintbrush to apply a different finish to a cabinet, including different types of wood. To apply a different finish to a cabinet: 1. 2. Display your model in 3D. Make sure the cabinet is visible. Open the Edit menu and select Materials Paintbrush, or click the Materials Paintbrush button on any tabbed toolbar. In the Materials catalog, select Cabinets from the Filter dropdown list to display only materials that can be applied to cabinets.
Tip: To paint a cabinet, select Paint from the Filter drop-down list.
3.
4. 5.
Select a group from which to select materials, and then select the material to apply. Click the cabinet to apply the selected material. Materials are applied separately to the individual parts of the cabinetthe frame, door, counter, handles, and so on. You must click each of these components to change its appearance.
6.
When you are finished applying materials, right-click and select Finish.
290
Inserting a Sink into a Cabinet

You can insert a kitchen or bathroom sink into a cabinet that you have inserted in your drawing by simply pointing and clicking. The sink automatically snaps itself into place at the center of the cabinet top. To insert a sink into a cabinet: 1. Open the Insert menu and select Interiors > Plumbing Fixtures, or click the Plumbing Fixtures button on the Interiors toolbar. In the Plumbing Fixtures catalog, select the Sinks group, and then select the sink you want to insert. Position the fixture inside the cabinet, and then click to insert it. Right-click and select Finish.
2.
3. 4.
Deleting a Cabinet
You can delete a cabinet. To delete a cabinet: 1. 2. Click the cabinet to select it. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Delete.
23
APPLIANCES
Most home plans typically show the location of appliances in the kitchen and laundry room. Inserting appliances in your project can enhance the design of a room, and can also help identify where electrical outlets are needed. The catalog offers an excellent selection of kitchen and laundry appliances, including refrigerators, dishwashers, ovens, ranges, washers, dryers, and even toasters. Just like everything else, you can customize appliances to create the exact look you want. Inserting appliances is easyjust point and click. Most major appliances are set to snap to walls and other elements when you get close to them. For tips on selecting green appliances for the best energy efficiency, see the HGTV Videos CD.
Inserting Appliances .......................................................................................... 292 Moving Appliances ............................................................................................ 293 Rotating Appliances .......................................................................................... 293 Raising or Lowering Appliances ........................................................................ 294 Editing Appliance Properties ............................................................................. 295 Applying Colors and Materials to Appliances .................................................... 296 Deleting an Appliance ....................................................................................... 296
292
Inserting Appliances
You can insert a wide variety of kitchen and laundry appliances in your design by simply pointing and clicking with your mouse. Appliances automatically snap to walls and other elements when you get close to them when Collision Control is turned on. To insert an appliance: 1. 2. Open the Insert menu and select Interiors > Appliances, or click the Appliances button on the Interiors toolbar. In the Appliances catalog, select the appliance you want to insert.
3. 4.
Position the appliance where you want it, and then click to insert it. Right-click and select Finish.
Note: If you are inserting a built-in oven, just position it where you want it in the wall and it will snap into place correctly with only the oven door and controls protruding from the wall.
CHAPTER 23: APPLIANCES 293
Moving Appliances
You can move individual appliances by clicking and dragging them. To move an appliance: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Click the Select/Edit button on the Interiors toolbar. Click the appliance to select it. Hover your pointer over the appliances center grip to display the Move pointer. Click and drag to move the appliance. When the appliance is positioned, release your mouse button.
Rotating Appliances
You can rotate appliances by clicking and dragging them. To rotate an appliance: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click the Select/Edit button on the Interiors toolbar. Click the appliance to select it. Right-click and select Rotate. Click the center grip to display the Rotate pointer.
Tip: If the triangular grip is in close proximity to the square grab handle, you might want to zoom in on the appliance to distinguish between the two grips.
5. 6.
Click and drag to rotate the appliance. When the appliance is positioned, release your mouse button.
294
Raising or Lowering Appliances

You can raise or lower an appliance using the Elevate feature. To raise or lower an appliance: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click the appliance to select it. Right-click and select Elevate, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Elevate to open the Elevate dialog. Enter the distance between the appliance and the floor in the Distance box. Click OK.
Tip: You can also change an appliances elevation by changing the Distance above current location or terrain option on Behavior tab in the Appliances properties dialog.
CHAPTER 23: APPLIANCES 295
Editing Appliance Properties

You can edit the height, width, and depth of most appliances. Some appliances have additional properties that define their size and style. To edit appliance properties: 1. 2. Click the appliance to select it. Right-click and select Properties, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Properties to open the Appliances properties dialog. On the Basic tab, you can edit the type and dimensions of an appliance. To change the appliance type, click an icon in the Type area. To change the size and shape of an appliance, edit the dimensions in the Properties list. For example, to change the width of a refrigerator, select Width in the Properties list, and then edit the value in the Width box. Appliance styles and size properties vary depending on the appliance. When you select a dimension marked with a letter, such as a, b, or c, the corresponding area is highlighted in the diagram to the left of the Properties list.
3.
296
Applying Colors and Materials to Appliances

You can use the Materials Paintbrush to change the color or finish of an appliance. To apply a color or finish to an appliance: 1. 2. Display your model in 3D. Make sure the appliance is visible. Open the Edit menu and select Materials Paintbrush, or click the Materials Paintbrush button on any tabbed toolbar. In the Materials catalog, select a group from which to select materials, and then select the material to apply. Click the appliance to apply the selected material. Materials are applied separately to the individual parts of an appliance. You can select a different material or color for a knob, handle, and other appliance components. 5. When you are finished applying materials, right-click and select Finish.
3. 4.
Deleting an Appliance
You can delete an appliance. To delete an appliance: 1. 2. Click the appliance to select it. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Delete.
24
INTERIOR FURNITURE, ELECTRONICS, AND OTHER ACCESSORIES
After you have cabinets and appliances in place, you can furnish and decorate your home. The catalog contains many different types of furniture, electronics, and decorative accessories. You can play around with different design ideas and quickly decorate every room in your home, just the way you want it.
Note: For information about inserting exterior furnishings, see Exterior Furniture on page 463 and Exterior Accessories on page 481.
Inserting Interior Furniture ................................................................................. 298 Inserting Electronics .......................................................................................... 298 Inserting Interior Accessories ............................................................................ 299 Moving Furnishing Elements ............................................................................. 299 Rotating Furnishing Elements ........................................................................... 300 Raising or Lowering Furnishing Elements......................................................... 300 Editing the Properties of Furnishing Elements .................................................. 301 Applying Different Colors, Fabrics, and Finishes to Furnishing Elements......... 302 Deleting Furnishing Elements ........................................................................... 302
298
Inserting Interior Furniture

The catalog contains a variety of furnishings for every room in your homeeverything from beds to CD stands. When Collision Control is turned on, furnishings automatically snap to walls and other elements when you get close to them. For more information about Collision Control, see Turning Collision Control On or Off on page 498. To insert furniture: 1. Open the Insert menu and select Interiors > Interior Furniture, or click the Interior Furniture button on the Interiors toolbar. In the Interior Furniture catalog, select the element you want to insert. Position the furnishing, and then click to insert it. Right-click and select Finish.
2. 3. 4.
Inserting Electronics
Electronics include televisions, computers, clocks, and telephones. To insert electronics: 1. 2. 3. 4. Open the Insert menu and select Interiors > Electronics, or click the Electronics button on the Interiors toolbar. In the Electronics catalog, select the element you want to insert. Position the element, and then click to insert it. Right-click and select Finish.
CHAPTER 24: INTERIOR FURNITURE, ELECTRONICS, AND OTHER ACCESSORIES
Inserting Interior Accessories

Accessories are small, personal touches that pull a room together. They include curtains, blinds, towel racks, shower curtains, medicine cabinets, plates, bowls, cups, mirrors, and pictures. To insert accessories: 1. Open the Insert menu and select Interiors > Interior Accessories, or click the Interior Accessories button on the Interiors toolbar. In the Interior Accessories catalog, select the element you want to insert. Position the element, and then click to insert it. Right-click and select Finish.
2. 3. 4.
Moving Furnishing Elements

You can move furniture, electronics and accessories by clicking and dragging them. To move an element: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Click the Select/Edit button on the Interiors toolbar. Click the element to select it. Hover your pointer over the elements center grip to display the Move pointer. Click and drag to move the element. When the element is positioned, release the mouse button.
300
Rotating Furnishing Elements

You can rotate furniture, electronics and accessories by clicking and dragging them. To rotate an element: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click the Select/Edit button on the Interiors toolbar. Click the element to select it. Right-click and select Rotate. Click the center grip to display the Rotate pointer.
Tip: If the triangular grip is in close proximity to the square grab handle, you might want to zoom in on the element to distinguish between the two grips.
5. 6.
Click and drag to rotate the element. When the element is positioned, release your mouse button.
Raising or Lowering Furnishing Elements

You can raise or lower furniture, electronics, and accessories using the Elevate feature. For example, you might want to adjust the height of a picture on the wall. To edit the elevation of a furnishing element: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click the element to select it. Right-click and select Elevate, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Elevate to open the Elevate dialog. Enter the amount of space between the furnishing element and the floor in the Distance box. Click OK.
Tip: You can also change a furnishing elements elevation by changing the Distance above current location or terrain option on the Behavior tab of the Interior Furniture properties dialog.
CHAPTER 24: INTERIOR FURNITURE, ELECTRONICS, AND OTHER ACCESSORIES
Editing the Properties of Furnishing Elements

You can edit the height, width, and depth of most furnishing elements. Some elements have additional properties that define their size and style. To edit the size of furnishing elements: 1. 2. 3. Click the Select/Edit button on the Interiors toolbar. Click the element to select it. Right-click and select Properties, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Properties to open the Interior Furniture properties dialog. The available properties vary greatly based on the type of furnishing element. The Interior Furniture properties dialog includes an image pane in which you can see a preview of the selected element. When you select a dimension marked with a letter, such as a, b, or c, the corresponding area is highlighted in the diagram to the left of the Properties list.
4.
To edit the size of a furnishing element, edit the values in the Properties list on the Basic tab. For example, to change the width of a garbage can, select Width in the Properties list, and then edit the value in the Width box.
5.
When you are finished setting properties, click OK to close the Interior Furniture properties dialog.
302
Applying Different Colors, Fabrics, and Finishes to Furnishing Elements

You can use the Materials Paintbrush to apply a color, fabric, or finish to any furnishing interior element. To apply a material to an interior furnishing element: 1. 2. Display your model in 3D. Make sure the furnishing element is visible. Open the Edit menu and select Materials Paintbrush, or click the Materials Paintbrush button on any tabbed toolbar. In the Materials catalog, select a group from which to select materials, and then select the material to apply.
Tip: To show only materials applicable to furniture, select Furniture from the Filter drop-down list in the Materials catalog.
3.
4.
Click the furnishing to apply the material. Materials are applied separately to the individual parts of an element. For example, you can apply a specific fabric color to the blanket on a bed.
5.
Deleting Furnishing Elements

You can delete furniture, electronics, or accessories. To delete a furnishing element: 1. 2. Select the element. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Delete.
25
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
HGTV Home & Landscape offers a variety of elements that can make your home more functional and enjoyable, such as exercise equipment, satellite dishes, and garbage disposal equipment. All interior equipment can be inserted with a mouse click.
Note: For information about inserting exterior equipment and structures, see Exterior Structures on page 469.
Inserting Equipment .......................................................................................... 304 Moving Equipment............................................................................................. 304 Rotating Equipment........................................................................................... 305 Raising or Lowering Equipment ........................................................................ 305 Editing the Properties of Equipment.................................................................. 306 Applying Different Colors or Materials to Equipment......................................... 307 Deleting Equipment ........................................................................................... 307
304
Inserting Equipment
The Equipment catalog contains a wide range of functional equipment, including exercise equipment, central vac units, utility boxes and meters, satellite dishes, and garbage disposal units. To insert equipment: 1. 2. 3. 4. Open the Insert menu and select Interiors > Equipment, or click the Equipment button on the Interiors toolbar. In the Equipment catalog, select the element you want to insert. Position the element, and then click to insert it. Right-click and select Finish.
Moving Equipment
You can move equipment by clicking and dragging it. To move equipment: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Click the Select/Edit button on the Interiors toolbar. Click the element to select it. Hover your mouse pointer over the elements center grip to display the Move pointer. Click and drag to move the element. When the element is positioned, release your mouse button.
CHAPTER 25: INTERIOR EQUIPMENT 305
Rotating Equipment
You can rotate equipment by clicking and dragging it. To rotate an element: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Click the Select/Edit button on the Interiors toolbar. Click the element to select it. Right-click and select Rotate. Click the center grip to display the Rotate pointer. Click and drag to rotate the element. When the element is positioned, release your mouse button.
Raising or Lowering Equipment

You can edit the elevation of equipment to suit your needs. To edit the elevation of an element: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click the element to select it. Right-click and select Elevate, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Elevate to open the Elevate dialog. Enter the distance between the appliance and the floor in the Distance box. Click OK.
Tip: You can also change an elements elevation by changing the Distance above current location or terrain option on Behavior tab in the Equipment properties dialog.
306
Editing the Properties of Equipment

You can edit the height, width, and depth of most equipment elements. To edit the size of equipment elements: 1. 2. 3. Click the Select/Edit button on the Interiors toolbar. Click the element to select it. Right-click and select Properties, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Properties to open the Equipment properties dialog. Equipment styles and size properties vary depending on the element. When you select a dimension marked with a letter, such as a, b, or c, the corresponding area is highlighted in the diagram to the left of the Properties list.
4.
On the Basic tab, you can edit the size of equipment by editing the dimensions in the Properties list. For example, to change the width of a recycling bin, select Width in the Properties list, and then edit the value in the Width box.
CHAPTER 25: INTERIOR EQUIPMENT 307
Applying Different Colors or Materials to Equipment

You can use the Materials Paintbrush to quickly apply a different color or finish to any element. To apply a material to an element: 1. 2. Display your model in 3D. Make sure the equipment is visible. Open the Edit menu and select Materials Paintbrush, or click the Materials Paintbrush button on any tabbed toolbar. In the Materials catalog, select a group from which to select materials, and then select the material to apply. Click the equipment to apply the selected material. Materials are applied separately to the individual parts of some equipment. 5. When you are finished applying materials, right-click and select Finish.
3. 4.
Deleting Equipment
You can delete equipment. To delete an element: 1. 2. Select the element. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Delete.
308
Part 5
UTILITIES
Interior Lighting ................................................. 311 Electrical .............................................................321 Plumbing.............................................................329 HVAC ...................................................................335
310
26
INTERIOR LIGHTING
Interior lighting can drastically change the look and atmosphere of a room. Light fixtures also play an important part when you create interior 3D Real View renderings. HGTV Home & Landscape provides an excellent selection of ceiling lights, wall lights, track lights, recessed lights, and lamps for you to insert. You can change their bulbs for different lighting effects, and even turn them on and off. Lights are inserted at a logical height in your plan depending on their type for accurate placement. Also, ceiling lights snap to ceilings, and wall lights snap to walls. When working in Rendered or Rendered Outline display mode, real-time lighting effects are displayed as you insert light fixtures in your design, enabling you to see how much light will be produced. For more lighting tips from the HGTV experts, see the HGTV Videos CD.
Note: For information about exterior lighting, see Exterior Lighting on page 475.
Inserting Interior Light Fixtures.......................................................................... 312 Moving a Light Fixture ....................................................................................... 313 Rotating a Light Fixture ..................................................................................... 313 Raising or Lowering a Light Fixture................................................................... 314 Editing a Light Fixtures Light Source................................................................ 317 Applying Different Materials to Light Fixtures.................................................... 319 Deleting a Light Fixture ..................................................................................... 319 Changing the Quality Level of Interactive Lighting ............................................ 320
312
Inserting Interior Light Fixtures

You can insert a variety of light fixtures in your design. Interior light fixtures include ceiling lights, wall lights, track lighting, recessed lights, and lamps. Each lighting fixture includes a light source in its property definition, such as an incandescent light bulb. Lights are particularly important if you plan to create a 3D Real View of your model (see 3D Real View on page 615), because the program uses light to calculate and create the rendered view. With the exception of lamps, light fixtures are set to snap to either ceilings or walls depending on the type of fixture. To change the way a light fixture is inserted, see Changing the Way a Light Snaps Upon Insertion in the online help. To insert a light fixture: 1. Open the Insert menu and select Interiors > Interior Lighting, or click the Interior Lighting button on the Interiors toolbar. In the Interior Lighting catalog, select the light fixture you want to insert.
2.
3. 4.
Position the light, and then click to insert it. Right-click and select Finish.
Tip: If you switch to Rendered or Rendered Outline display mode, you can see lighting effects as you position and insert light fixtures.
CHAPTER 26: INTERIOR LIGHTING 313
Moving a Light Fixture

You can move light fixtures by clicking and dragging them. To move a light fixture: 1. 1. 2. 3. Click the light fixture to select it. Hover your pointer over the fixtures center grip to display the Move cursor. Click and drag to move the light fixture. When the light fixture is positioned, release your mouse button.
Rotating a Light Fixture

You can rotate light fixtures by clicking and dragging them. To rotate a light fixture: 1. 2. 3. Click the light fixture to select it. Right-click and select Rotate. Click the center grip to display the Rotate pointer.
Tip: If the triangular grip is in close proximity to the square grab handle, you might want to zoom in on the fixture to distinguish between the two grips.
4. 5.
Click and drag to rotate the light fixture. When the light fixture is positioned, release your mouse button.
314
Raising or Lowering a Light Fixture

You can raise or lower a light fixture using the Elevate feature. To raise or lower a light fixture: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click the light fixture to select it. Right-click and select Elevate, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Elevate to open the Elevate dialog. Enter the distance from the floor to the light fixture in the Distance box. Click OK.
Tip: You can also change a light fixtures elevation by changing the Distance above current location or terrain option on Behavior tab in the Interior Lighting properties dialog.
Editing Light Fixture Properties

In the Interior Lighting properties dialog, you can edit the type and dimensions of a light fixture, set a light source, and turn a light on or off. 1. 2. 3. Click the Select/Edit button on the Interiors toolbar. Click the light fixture to select it. Right-click and select Properties, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Properties to open the Interior Lighting properties dialog.
Light fixture styles and size properties vary depending on the light fixture.
When you edit light fixture properties, you can see a preview of the light fixture in the image pane of the Interior Lighting properties dialog. 4. On the Basic tab, you can edit the type and dimensions of a light fixture. To change the light fixture type, click an icon in the Type area. To change the size and shape of a light fixture, edit the dimensions in the Properties list. For example, to change the fixture width, select Width in the Properties list, and then edit the value in the Width box. When you select a dimension marked with a letter, such as a, b, or c, the corresponding area is highlighted in the diagram to the left of the Properties list. 5. Continue setting light fixture properties, or click OK to close the Interior Lighting properties dialog.
316
Turning a Light On or Off

By default, lights are on when you insert them. You can turn a light off virtually by disabling its light source. To turn a light on or off: 1. 2. To turn a light on or off, begin on the Lights tab of the Interior Lighting properties dialog. To turn the light on or off, click the eye icon next to the light source name.
Eye Icon
3.
Continue setting light fixture properties, or click OK to close the Interior Lighting properties dialog.
Editing a Light Fixtures Light Source

A light source is a type of light bulb. You can edit a light fixtures light source to achieve a different lighting effect. For example, you can select a bulb with a softer glow, or a bulb with a different wattage or color. To edit a light fixtures light source: 1. 2. To change a light fixtures light source, begin on the Lights tab of the Interior Lighting properties dialog. To replace the currently selected light source with another type, click Edit in the Light Sources area to open the Light Sources dialog.
3.
Select a group and then select the light source from the Light Source list.
Tip: You can double-click a light source in the list to edit its Scale (intensity) and Color.
4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Click OK to close the Light Sources dialog. To add a light source to the fixture, click Add in the Light Sources area to open the Light Sources dialog. Select a group and then select a light source from the Light Source list. Click OK to close the Light Sources dialog. To delete a light source from the light fixture, click Delete in the Light Sources area.
318
9.
To edit the position of the light source in relation to the light fixture, specify the X, Y, and Z coordinates in the Light Position area. Coordinates are measured from the bottom center of the fixture. The small red box in the image pane of the Interior Lighting properties dialog indicates the current position of the light source.
Red Box
Changing the X value moves the light source left or right. Selecting Middle positions the light source in the center of the fixture. Selecting Minimum or Maximum positions the light on the left or right side.
Changing the Y value moves the light source forward or backward. Selecting Middle positions the light source in the center of the fixture. Selecting Minimum brings the light source all the way forward. Selecting Maximum moves it to the back of the fixture.
Changing the Z value moves the light source up or down. Selecting Middle positions the light source in the center of the fixture. Selecting Minimum positions the light source at the bottom of the fixture. Selecting Maximum positions the light source at the top of the fixture.
For all three coordinates, by selecting Custom, you can enter a specific value into the coordinate box. The value in the coordinate box is relative to the center position of the light source. For example, entering -3 moves the light source 3" left from the center. 10. Continue setting light fixture properties, or click OK to close the Interior Lighting properties dialog.
Applying Different Materials to Light Fixtures

You can use the Materials Paintbrush to apply different colors or materials to different parts of a light fixture. For example, you can change the color of a lamp shade. To change the look of a light fixture: 1. 2. Display your model in 3D. Make sure the light fixture is visible. Open the Edit menu and select Materials Paintbrush, or click the Materials Paintbrush button on any tabbed toolbar. In the Materials catalog, select a group from which to select materials, and then select the material to apply. Click the light fixture to apply the material. Materials are applied separately to the individual parts of the light fixture. 5. When you are finished applying materials, right-click and select Finish.
3. 4.
Deleting a Light Fixture

You can delete a light fixture. To delete a light fixture: 1. 2. Select the fixture. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Delete.
320
Changing the Quality Level of Interactive Lighting

As you insert light fixtures in a model, you can see real-time lighting effects when working in Rendered or Rendered Outline display mode. By default, the quality level of interactive lighting is set to Low, which provides an adequate lighting display for the average computer. If your computer has a powerful video card, you can select a higher level of quality for interactive lighting. To change the quality of interactive lighting: 1. Open the Settings menu and select Program Settings or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar to open the Program Settings dialog. Click Graphics in the left column of the Program Settings dialog. In the Lighting area, select Low, Medium, or High. Click OK.
2. 3. 4.
Note: Selecting a higher quality level can slow down the graphics display.
Disabling Interactive Lighting

By default, you can see real-time lighting effects as you insert light fixtures in Rendered or Rendered Outline display mode. If interactive lighting slows down your computer, or you do not want to use it, you can disable it. To disable interactive lighting: 1. Open the Settings menu and select Program Settings or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar to open the Program Settings dialog. Click Graphics in the left column of the Program Settings dialog. Clear the Enable interactive lighting check box. Click OK.
2. 3. 4.
27
ELECTRICAL
You can insert electrical outlets, switches, thermostats, and smoke detectors in your model. Electrical elements automatically snap to walls and are inserted at a logical height depending on their type, to assist in accurate placement. After youve inserted electrical elements you might also want to draw wiring in your 2D plan.
Inserting Outlets and Switches.......................................................................... 322 Inserting Thermostats and Smoke Detectors .................................................... 322 Raising or Lowering an Electrical Element........................................................ 323 Moving an Electrical Element ............................................................................ 323 Editing the Properties of an Electrical Element ................................................. 324 Applying a Different Color or Material to an Electrical Element......................... 325 Deleting an Electrical Element .......................................................................... 325 Inserting Electrical Wiring.................................................................................. 326 Stretching and Reshaping Wiring Segments..................................................... 327 Changing the Line Style of Wiring ..................................................................... 327
322
Inserting Outlets and Switches

You can insert electrical outlets and light switches. The backs of these elements automatically snap to walls and are inserted at a logical height on the wall, for accurate placement. You can move, raise, and lower these elements after you have inserted them. To insert outlets and switches: 1. Open the Insert menu and select Interiors > Electrical > Electrical Elements, or click the Electrical button on the Interiors toolbar and select Electrical Elements. In the Electrical Elements catalog, select the element you want to insert. Position the electrical element, and then click to insert it. Right-click and select Finish.
2. 3. 4.
Inserting Thermostats and Smoke Detectors

Thermostats are set to automatically snap to walls and are inserted at a default height of 5'. Smoke detectors are inserted at a default height of 8'. You can move, raise, or lower thermostats and smoke detectors after inserting them. To insert thermostats and smoke detectors: 1. Open the Insert menu and select Interiors > Electrical > Electrical Elements, or click the Electrical button on the Interiors toolbar and select Electrical Elements. In the Electrical Elements catalog, select Sensors and Controls in the Group list, and then select a thermostat or smoke detector from the Electrical Elements list. Position the thermostat or smoke detector, and then click to insert it. Right-click and select Finish.
2.
3. 4.
CHAPTER 27: ELECTRICAL 323
Raising or Lowering an Electrical Element

You can raise or lower an outlet, switch, thermostat, or smoke detector using the Elevate feature. To raise or lower an electrical element: 1. 2. 3. Click the Select/Edit button on the Interiors toolbar. Click the electrical element to select it. Right-click and select Elevate, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Elevate to open the Elevate dialog. The value shown in the Elevate dialog is the current elevation of the element. 4. 5. Enter the distance of the bottom of the element from the floor in the Distance box. Click OK.
Tip: You can also change an elements elevation by changing the Distance above current location or terrain option on the Behavior tab of the Electrical Elements properties dialog.
Moving an Electrical Element

You can move outlets, switches, thermostats, and smoke detectors by clicking and dragging them. To move an element: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Click the Select/Edit button on the Interiors toolbar. Click the electrical element to select it. Hover your pointer over the electrical elements center grip to display the Move pointer. Click and drag to move the electrical element. When the electrical element is positioned, release the mouse button.
324
Editing the Properties of an Electrical Element

You can edit the height, width, and depth of most electrical elements. Some elements have additional dimensions and properties. To edit the size of an electrical element: 1. 2. 3. Click the Select/Edit button on the Interiors toolbar. Click the electrical element to select it. Right-click and select Properties, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Properties to open the Electrical Elements properties dialog. Electrical element styles and size properties vary depending on the element. The Electrical Elements properties dialog includes an image pane in which you can see a preview of the selected element. When you select a dimension marked with a letter, such as a, b, or c, the corresponding area is highlighted in the diagram to the left of the Properties list.
4.
To change the size of an electrical element, edit the dimensions in the Properties list on the Basic tab. For example, to change the width of an outlet, select Width in the Properties list, and then edit the value in the Width box.
5.
To change the placement of an electrical element, edit the coordinates in the Properties list on the Basics tab. Changing the Y and Z coordinates rotates the element from front to back. Changing the X and Z coordinates rotates the element towards its right or left side in 3D views. Changing the X and Y coordinates rotates the element left or right in 2D views.
6.
Click OK to close the Electrical Elements properties dialog.
Applying a Different Color or Material to an Electrical Element

You can use the Materials Paintbrush to apply a different color or material to an electrical element. To apply a color or material to an electrical element: 1. 2. Display your model in 3D. Make sure the electrical element is visible. Open the Edit menu and select Materials Paintbrush, or click the Materials Paintbrush button on any tabbed toolbar. In the Materials catalog, select a group from which to select materials, and then select the material to apply. Click the electrical element to apply the selected material. When you are finished applying materials, right-click and select Finish.
3. 4. 5.
Deleting an Electrical Element

You can delete an outlet, switch, thermostat, or smoke detector. To delete an electrical element: 1. 2. Click the electrical element to select it. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Delete.
326
Inserting Electrical Wiring

After youve inserted electrical elements, you can use the Wiring feature to indicate the location of electrical wiring in 2D Plan View. By default, wiring lines have arched segments and use a dashed linestyle. You can stretch and reshape individual segments after youve inserted the line. You can also edit the linestyle. Wiring is visible only in 2D Plan View. To add electrical wiring: 1. Open the Insert menu and select Interiors > Electrical > Wiring, or click the Electrical button on the Interiors toolbar and select Wiring. Select a start point for the wiring line. Select the next point for the wiring line. An arched line segment is created between the two points.
1 2 3 4 5
2. 3.
4. 5.
Continue selecting points to add more segments. Right-click and select Finish.
Note: You can change the line style of individual wires (see Changing the Line Style of Wiring on page 327). You can also mark your wiring lines with text (see Adding Text on page 542).
Stretching and Reshaping Wiring Segments

You can stretch individual segments in a wiring line by clicking and dragging their grips. Stretching wiring segments can change their length or shape. To stretch a wiring segment: 1. 2. Click the Select/Edit button on the Interiors toolbar. Select the segment you want to stretch. Grips appear along the segment.
3. 4.
Hover your pointer over the grip you want to grab and stretch. Click and drag to stretch the line, and then release your mouse button.
Changing the Line Style of Wiring

By default, electrical wiring is displayed using the Electrical Power Distribution line style, which is a brown, dashed line. You can select a different line style for selected wiring segments. For example, you might want to select the Telephone line style for telephone lines. To change the line style of wiring: 1. 2. 3. Select one of the line segments you want to change. Press Shift and click to select the remaining segments in the line. Right-click and select Properties, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Properties to open the Line Style properties dialog. Select the line style you want to use. Click OK. The line style is updated in your drawing.
4. 5.
328
Selecting a Default Line Style for Wiring

By default, electrical wiring is drawn using the Electrical Power Distribution line style. You can select a different default line style to use when drawing electrical wiring. To select a default line style for electrical wiring: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Open the Settings menu and choose Drafting Settings to open the Drafting Settings dialog. Select Electrical Wiring and click Modify to open the Line Styles dialog. Select Wiring from the Groups list. Select a default line style from the Line Styles list, and then click OK. Click OK to close the Drafting Settings dialog.
Deleting Wiring
You can delete individual wiring segments or an entire wire. To delete wiring: 1. 2. 3. Click the wiring segment to select it. Press Shift and click to select the remaining segments in the line. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Delete.
28
PLUMBING
HGTV Home & Landscape offers a complete selection of sinks, faucets, tubs, showers, toilets, and bidets to help you properly equip your home. If Collision Control is turned on, plumbing fixtures automatically snap to walls when inserted. You can control which edge of a fixture snaps to the wall, as well as edit the fixtures size, style, and elevation. For more from the experts at HGTV, see the HGTV Videos CD. There youll find inspiration about creating the right bathroom, as well as tips on going green.
Inserting Plumbing Fixtures............................................................................... 330 Moving a Plumbing Fixture................................................................................ 331 Rotating a Plumbing Fixture .............................................................................. 331 Raising or Lowering a Plumbing Fixture............................................................ 332 Editing Plumbing Fixture Properties .................................................................. 332 Applying a Different Color or Finish to a Plumbing Fixture................................ 334 Deleting Plumbing Fixtures ............................................................................... 334
330
Inserting Plumbing Fixtures

To place plumbing fixtures in your model, select the fixture to insert, and then point and click. When Collision Control turned on, fixtures automatically snap to walls when you get close to them. Fixtures are inserted at a logical height. For example, a toilet is automatically inserted on the floor, while a sink is inserted 3 off the floor. You can edit a fixtures size and elevation, as well as move and rotate it.
Note: The first four sinks in the Sinks group can be inserted only into a cabinet. Also, the cabinet must be large enough to house the sink. For more information about inserting sinks in cabinets, see Inserting a Sink into a Cabinet on page 290.
To insert plumbing fixtures: 1. Open the Insert menu and select Interiors > Plumbing Fixtures, or click the Plumbing Fixtures button on the Interiors toolbar. In the Plumbing Fixtures catalog, select the fixture you want to insert. Position the fixture, and then click to insert it. Right-click and select Finish.
2. 3. 4.
CHAPTER 28: PLUMBING 331
Moving a Plumbing Fixture

You can move a plumbing fixture by clicking and dragging it. To move a plumbing fixture: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Click the Select/Edit button on the Interiors toolbar. Click the plumbing fixture to select it. Hover your pointer over the fixtures center grip to display the Move pointer. Click and drag to move the fixture. When the fixture is positioned, release your mouse button.
Rotating a Plumbing Fixture

You can rotate plumbing fixtures by clicking and dragging them. To rotate a plumbing fixture: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click the Select/Edit button on the Interiors toolbar. Click the fixture to select it. Right-click and select Rotate. Click the center grip to display the Rotate pointer.
5. 6.
Click and drag to rotate the fixture. When the fixture is positioned, release your mouse button.
332
Raising or Lowering a Plumbing Fixture

You can raise or lower a plumbing fixture using the Elevate feature. To edit a plumbing fixtures elevation: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click the plumbing fixture to select it. Right-click and select Elevate, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Elevate to open the Elevate dialog. Enter the distance between the plumbing fixture and the floor in the Distance box. Click OK.
Tip: You can also change a plumbing fixtures elevation by changing the Distance above current location or terrain option on Behavior tab in the Plumbing Fixtures properties dialog.
Editing Plumbing Fixture Properties

You can edit properties such as the height, width, and depth of a plumbing fixture. To edit the properties of a plumbing fixture: 1. 2. 3. Click the Select/Edit button on the Interiors toolbar. Click the plumbing fixture to select it. Right-click and select Properties, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Properties to open the Plumbing Fixtures dialog.
CHAPTER 28: PLUMBING 333
Plumbing fixture styles and size properties vary depending on the element. The Plumbing Fixtures properties dialog includes an image pane in which you can see a preview of the selected fixture. When you select a dimension marked with a letter, such as a, b, or c, the corresponding area is highlighted in the diagram to the left of the Properties list.
4.
To change the size of a plumbing fixture, edit the dimensions in the Properties list on the Basic tab. For example, to change the width of a sink, select Width in the Properties list, and then edit the value in the Width box.
5.
To change the placement of an electrical element, edit the coordinates in the Properties list on the Basics tab. Changing the Y and Z coordinates rotates the element from front to back. Changing the X and Z coordinates rotates the element towards its right or left side in 3D views. Changing the X and Y coordinates rotates the element left or right in 2D views.
6.
Click OK to close the Plumbing Fixtures dialog.
334
Applying a Different Color or Finish to a Plumbing Fixture

You can use the Materials Paintbrush to apply different colors or finishes to different parts of a plumbing fixture. To apply a color or finish to a plumbing fixture: 1. 2. Display your model in 3D. Make sure the plumbing fixture is visible. Open the Edit menu and select Materials Paintbrush, or click the Materials Paintbrush button on any tabbed toolbar. In the Materials catalog, select a group from which to select materials, and then select the material to apply. Click the plumbing fixture to apply the selected material. Materials are applied separately to each individual part of a plumbing fixture. For example, you can select a different material for a tap or handle. 5. When you are finished applying materials, right-click and select Finish.
3. 4.
Deleting Plumbing Fixtures

You can delete a plumbing fixture. To delete a light fixture: 1. 2. Select the fixture. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Delete.
29
HVAC
The correct placement of heating and ventilation elements is an important part of the home design process. The HVAC catalog containsfurnaces, fireplaces, wood stoves, chimneys, central air units, water heaters, floor registers, and cold air returns. You can move, rotate, and edit HVAC elements.
Inserting Heating and Cooling Elements ........................................................... 336 Inserting Floor Registers and Cold Air Returns................................................. 336 Inserting a Chimney .......................................................................................... 337 Moving HVAC Elements .................................................................................... 338 Rotating HVAC Elements .................................................................................. 339 Raising or Lowering HVAC Elements ................................................................ 339 Editing the Properties of an HVAC Element ...................................................... 340
336
Inserting Heating and Cooling Elements

You can insert heating and cooling elements, including fireplaces, wood stoves, furnaces, water heaters, and central air units. By default, heating elements are inserted on the floor and snap to walls if Collision Control is turned on. Central air units are inserted on the terrain. To insert a heating element: 1. Open the Insert menu and select Interiors > HVAC Elements, or click the HVAC Elements button on the Interiors toolbar. In the HVAC Elements catalog, select Heating or Cooling from the Groups list. Select the element to insert from the HVAC Elements list. Position the element, and then click to insert it. Right-click and select Finish.
2.
3. 4. 5.
Inserting Floor Registers and Cold Air Returns

Registers and air returns come in a variety of sizes, and you can create a different size if necessary. Wall air returns are inserted directly onto walls. To insert a ventilation element: 1. Open the Insert menu and select Interiors > HVAC Elements, or click the HVAC Elements button on the Interiors toolbar. In the HVAC Elements catalog, select Ventilation from the Groups list. Select the element to insert from the HVAC Elements list. Position the element, and then click to insert it. Right-click and select Finish.
2. 3. 4. 5.
CHAPTER 29: HVAC 337
Inserting a Chimney
HGTV home design contains one chimney selection that can be modified before or after you insert it. To insert a chimney: 1. Check the current location in the Building Location menu to make sure youre on the appropriate level for inserting a chimney. For example, if youre inserting an exterior chimney in a two-story house, you must be on the second floor. Open the Insert menu and select Interiors > HVAC Elements, or click the HVAC Elements button on the Interiors toolbar. In the HVAC Elements catalog, select Ventilation from the Groups list. Select Chimney from the HVAC Elements list. Position the chimney, and then click to insert it. Right-click and select Finish.
2.
3. 4. 5. 6.
Editing the Height of a Chimney

Chimneys are 12' tall by default. You can change the height before or after you insert a chimney to create the correct height for your house. To edit the height of the chimney: 1. 2. Click the chimney to select it. Right-click and select Properties, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Properties to open the HVAC Elements properties dialog. Select Base Height in the Properties list, and enter the new height in the Base Height box. Click OK.
3. 4.
338
Applying Different Materials to a Chimney

By default, a chimney has a brick base and concrete cap. You can edit the appearance of an exterior chimney to match the exterior of your home. To apply different materials to the chimney: 1. 2. Display your model in 3D. Make sure the chimney is visible. Open the Edit menu and select Materials Paintbrush, or click the Materials Paintbrush button on any tabbed toolbar. In the Materials catalog, select a group from which to select materials, and then select the material to apply. Click the chimney to apply the selected material. You can apply different materials to the base, cap, and flue. 5. When you are finished applying materials, right-click and select Finish.
3. 4.
Moving HVAC Elements

You can move HVAC elements by clicking and dragging them. To move an HVAC element: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Click the Select/Edit button on the Interiors toolbar. Click the HVAC element to select it. Hover your pointer over the elements center grip to display the Move pointer. Click and drag to move the element. When the element is positioned, release your mouse button.
CHAPTER 29: HVAC 339
Rotating HVAC Elements

You can rotate HVAC elements by clicking and dragging them. To rotate an HVAC element: 1. 2. 3. Click the element to select it. Right-click and select Rotate. Click the center grip to display the Rotate pointer.
4. 5.
Click and drag to rotate the element. When the element is positioned, release your mouse button.
Raising or Lowering HVAC Elements

You can raise or lower an HVAC element using the Elevate feature. To edit an HVAC elements elevation: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click the element to select it. Right-click and select Elevate, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Elevate to open the Elevate dialog. Enter the distance between the floor and the element in the Distance box. Click OK.
Tip: You can also change an HVAC elements elevation by changing the Distance above current location or terrain option on the Behavior tab of the HVAC Elements properties dialog.
340
Editing the Properties of an HVAC Element

You can edit properties such as the dimensions of an HVAC element. The more complex an element is, the more properties it has. A chimney, for example, has separate properties for the base, cap, and flue, so you can create the exact look and size you want. To edit the properties of an HVAC element: 1. 2. 3. Click the Select/Edit button on the Interiors toolbar. Click the HVAC element to select it. Right-click and select Properties, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Properties to open the HVAC Elements properties dialog. HVAC element styles and size properties vary depending on the element. The HVAC Elements properties dialog includes an image pane in which you can see a preview of the selected element. When you select a dimension marked with a letter, such as a, b, or c, the corresponding area is highlighted in the diagram to the left of the Properties list.
4.
To change the size of an HVAC element, edit the dimensions in the Properties list on the Basic tab. For example, to change the width of a chimney base, select Base Width in the Properties list, and then edit the value in the Base Width box.
5.
Click OK to close the HVAC Elements properties dialog.
Part 6
TERRAIN MODELING
Terrain Modeling ................................................343 Site Boundaries..................................................359
342
30
TERRAIN MODELING
You can re-create the topography of the lot on which your home will be built. By default, a basic 160' x 160' grass terrain is displayed in the drawing area. In 2D views, only the boundary of the terrain is shown, and you might need to zoom out to see it. Contour lines might also be visible depending on the terrains defined properties. In 3D views, the terrain is displayed as a solid, 3D object. You can view it in wireframe, hidden line, or rendered form. You add hills, berms, plateaus, and slopes to your terrain to create a realisticlooking building site.
Defining the Basic Terrain ................................................................................. 344 Creating Hills and Valleys.................................................................................. 346 Creating Berms and Trenches .......................................................................... 348 Creating Plateaus.............................................................................................. 353 Creating Slopes................................................................................................. 356
344
Defining the Basic Terrain

You can control the base level, length and width, mesh spacing, and contour interval of the terrain. You can also select a texture to use when displaying the terrain in rendered view. You can specify whether or not you want the terrain to cut around your building, and select the location that you want the terrain to cut around. To define the terrain: 1. Open the Settings menu and select Program Settings or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar to open the Program Settings dialog.
CHAPTER 30: TERRAIN MODELING 345
2.
Select Terrain in the left column of the Program Settings dialog. To force the terrain to cut around a building, select the Autocut terrain around building check box, and then select the building location that you want the terrain to cut around from the Select Building Location to cut around drop-down list. To change the level at which the base of the terrain sits, type the desired value in the Base Level box. This value is measured from 0. To change the overall size of the terrain, edit the values in the Length and Width boxes. To change the spacing between mesh lines when viewing the terrain in Wireframe, Hidden Line, or Patterned view, edit the value in the Mesh Spacing box. To change the texture used for the terrain in Rendered and Rendered Outline display modes, click the Select button in the Material area to open the Materials dialog. Select Landscape Materials from the Groups list, and then select a material from the Materials list. Click OK to close the Materials dialog. To display contours on the terrain, select the Show Contours check box. In the Start box, enter the elevation of the first contour. In the Interval check box, enter the desired spacing between contours. Contours are visible in 2D Plan View if the terrain contains hills and valleys.
3.
Click OK to close the Program Settings dialog.
346
Creating Hills and Valleys

You can add hills to the terrain, and control the hill height and peak shape. Typically, the diameter of the hill base is the same as the hill height. You can insert multiple hills together to create one larger hill. If you insert hills next to other terrain elements, such as plateaus or slopes, the elements automatically blend together. To create a hill or valley: 1. 2. Check the current location in the Building Location menu to make sure youre on the Ground Floor. Open the Insert menu and select Terrain > Hills / Valleys, or click the Hills / Valleys button on the Terrain toolbar to open the Hills / Valleys dialog.
3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Specify the height of the hill in the Height box. To create a valley, enter a negative value. Drag the Zenith slider to select a peak shape for the hill or valley. Click OK. Click to insert the hill or valley. You can insert multiple hills or valleys. Right-click and select Finish.
Moving a Hill or Valley

You can move a hill or valley by clicking and dragging it. To move a hill or valley: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click the center of the hill or valley to select it. A blue square grip appears. Hover your pointer over the center grip to display the Move pointer. Click and drag to move the hill or valley. When the hill or valley is positioned, release your mouse button.
Editing the Height or Shape of a Hill or Valley

To edit the height or peak shape of a hill or valley: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Click the center of the hill or valley to select it. A blue square grip appears. Right-click and select Properties, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Properties to open the Hills/Valleys dialog. To change the height of a hill or the depth of a valley, edit the value in the Height box. To change the shape of a hill or valley, drag the Zenith slider. Click OK.
Deleting a Hill or Valley

You can delete a hill or valley. To delete a hill: 1. 2. Click the center of the hill or valley to select it. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Delete.
348
Creating Berms and Trenches

A berm is a mound or bank of soil without formal sides. You often see large berms on the sides of highways, to provide noise control. On a reduced scale, a natural berm can provide some interesting benefits in a backyard landscape. These include: Climate control: Berms act as windbreaks, channeling air flow. Berms can create a warmer microclimate or direct cooling breezes. Privacy: A berm can be a friendly fence in the back yard or between your house and a sidewalk. Vertical interest: You can add variety and texture to your gardens with berms, change the view from your outdoor sitting areas, or hide eyesores with them. Noise control: A berm can cut down on traffic noise if you live on a busy street or near a schoolyard.
Berms might be shored with stone, bricks, or timbers, and planted with groundcovers, perennials, annuals, and trees. You can control the height of a berm as well as its peak shape.
To create a berm or trench: 1. 2. Check the current location in the Building Location menu to make sure youre on the Ground Floor. Open the Insert menu and select Terrain > Berms/ Trenches, or click the Berm /Trenches button on the Terrain toolbar to open the Berms/Trenches dialog.
3. 4. 5. 6.
Specify the height of the berm in the Height box. To create a trench, enter a negative value. Drag the Zenith slider to select a peak shape for the berm or trench. Click OK. Select two points to define the length of the top of the berm. The berm will be created downward and outward from this line.
7.
350
Selecting a Berm or Trench

Although berms and trenches are created in the same manner, trenches are more difficult to select than berms. To select a berm, you click the center of the berm. A blue grip appears in the center of the berms central line. The berm can now be moved, rotated, or stretched.
However, you cant select a trench by clicking its center. To select a trench, draw a selection box around it by dragging your mouse over the trench. The central line appears in the trench. Click the central line to display the grips. The trench is selected:
The trench can be moved, rotated, or stretched:
Moving a Berm or Trench

To move a berm or Trench: 1. 2. 3. 4. Select the berm or trench. Grips appear along the central line. Hover your pointer over the center grip to display the Move pointer. Click and drag the central line to move the berm or trench. When the berm or trench is positioned, release your mouse button.
Rotating a Berm or Trench

To rotate a berm or trench: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Select the berm or trench. Grips appear along the central line. Right-click and select Rotate. Click the middle grip to display the Rotate pointer. Click and drag to rotate the berm or trench. When the berm or trench is positioned, release your mouse button.
Stretching a Berm
To stretch a berm or trench: 1. 2. 3. Select the berm or trench. Grips appear along the central line. Click and drag an end grip to stretch the berm or trench. When the berm or trench is positioned, release your mouse button.
352
Editing the Height or Shape of a Berm or Trench

You can edit the height of a berm, or the depth of a trench, as well as the peak shape. To edit a the height or shape of a berm or trench: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Select the berm or trench. Right-click and select Properties, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Properties to open the Berms/Trenches dialog. To change the height of a berm or the depth of a trench, edit the value in the Height box. To change the shape of a berm or trench, drag the Zenith slider. Click OK.
Deleting a Berm or Trench

You can delete a berm or trench. To delete a berm or trench: 1. 2. Select the berm or trench. Open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Delete or rightclick and select Delete. You can also press the Delete key on your keyboard.
Creating Plateaus
A plateau is a relatively large, flat area of land situated above the adjacent land. Adding a plateau to the terrain involves clicking points to define the shape of the plateau. You can control the height of the plateau and its peak shape. If you insert a plateau in close proximity to other terrain elements, such as hills, the elements automatically blend together. To create a plateau: 1. 2. Check the current location in the Building Location menu to make sure youre on the Ground Floor. Open the Insert menu and select Terrain > Plateaus, or click the Plateaus button on the Terrain toolbar to open the Plateaus dialog.
3. 4. 5.
Specify the height of the plateau in the Height box. To create an excavated area, enter a negative value. Drag the Zenith slider to select a general shape for the plateau. The pointier the shape, the steeper the sides will be. Click OK.
354
6.
In the drawing area, select points to define the outline of the top of the plateau. The last point you pick closes at start point, so you need not pick the start point again. The plateau is created downward and outward from your outline.
1 4
2 3
7.
Moving a Plateau
To move a plateau: 1. Click the center of the plateau to select it. A green box with blue grips appears.
2. 3. 4.
Right-click and select Move, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Move. Click and drag the box to move the plateau. When the plateau is positioned, release your mouse button.
Stretching a Plateau
To stretch a plateau: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click the center of the plateau to select it. A green box with blue grips appears. Click the edge of the box that is on the side of the plateau that you want to stretch. Click and drag the edge to stretch the plateau. When the plateau is positioned, release your mouse button.
Editing the Height or Peak Shape of a Plateau

To edit the height or peak shape of a plateau: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Click the center of the plateau to select it. Right-click and select Properties, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Properties to open the Plateaus dialog. To change the height of a plateau, edit the value in the Height box. To change the shape of a plateau, drag the Zenith slider. Click OK.
Deleting a Plateau
To delete a plateau: 1. 2. Click the center of the plateau to select it. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Delete.
356
Creating Slopes
A slope is an area of land with a natural incline. It is often common practice to slope the land away from the sides of a house so that water drains away from it rather than towards it. When you create a slope, you select two points. The first point is the starting point of the slope, and the second point determines the length and direction of the slope. If the slope comes into contact with other terrain elements, like hills and plateaus, the elements automatically blend together. To create a slope in your terrain: 1. 2. Check the current location in the Building Location menu to make sure youre on the Ground Floor. Open the Insert menu and select Terrain > Slopes, or click the Slopes button on the Terrain toolbar to open the Slopes dialog.
3. 4.
Select the Height option. In the Height box, enter the height for the slope. Slopes are built up or down from the top surface of the terrain. A negative value creates a downward slope, while a positive value creates an upward slope.
5. 6. 7. 8.
Select the Angle option. In the Angle box, enter an angle in degrees for the slope. The higher the value, the steeper the slope. Click OK. Select a start point for the slope. The slope inclines or declines from this point, and the sides of the slope extend to the edges of the terrain.
9.
Move your pointer in the direction you want the slope to run. A stretchable arrow appears.
10. When the arrow is pointing in the proper direction and is the desired length, click to insert the slope. The longer the arrow, the more gradual the slope is. A shorter arrow results in a steeper slope.
If the point you pick is not on the edge of the terrain, the land levels off at the top of the slope.
11. Right-click and select Finish.
Note: If you insert another slope, and that slope comes into contact with an existing slope, the new slope is inserted on top of the existing slope.
358
Moving a Slope
To move a slope: 1. Click the center of the slope. The central arrow appears.
2. 3. 4.
Hover your pointer over the center grip to display the Move pointer. Click and drag to move the slope. When the slope is positioned, release your mouse button.
Stretching a Slope
To stretch a slope: 1. 2. 3. Click in the center of the slope. The central arrow appears with grips at either end. Click the end grip that is on the side of the slope that you want to stretch. Click and drag the grip to stretch the slope.
Note: You can rotate the slope by selecting a different position for
it while clicking and dragging. This changes the direction of the slope. 4. When the slope is positioned, release your mouse button.
Deleting a Slope
To delete a slope: 1. 2. Click the center of the slope to select it. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Delete.
31
SITE BOUNDARIES
You might want to know where your property lines are, especially if you are working in a confined or unusually-shaped area. Lot lines and setbacks can be found on a survey plan or surveyors certificate. Using the Site Boundary feature you can draw a custom site boundary, which shows your stakes and property lines, and can show your building setbacks as well.
Defining Your Building Lot ................................................................................. 360 Creating a Site Boundary .................................................................................. 361 Moving a Site Boundary .................................................................................... 366 Stretching a Site Boundary................................................................................ 367 Editing Site Boundary Edge Properties ............................................................. 367 Curving a Site Boundary Edge .......................................................................... 369 Editing a Site Boundarys Line, Text, and Peg Styles........................................ 370 Selecting a Method of Measurement When Drawing a Site Boundary ............. 372 Deleting a Site Boundary................................................................................... 372
360 HGTV HOME DESIGN SOFTWARE USER GUIDE
Defining Your Building Lot

You can use the Site Boundary tool to define your building lot. A site boundary is a closed line that shows the legal property boundary, or lot lines, and is annotated with bearing text, length text, and peg numbers. You can specify setbacks as well, which define your building envelope. The site boundary appears only in 2D Wireframe View.
Peg (stake)
Lot Line
Setback Line
Tip: You can put a fence along your lot lines to show where the lot lines are in 3D. See Inserting a Fence on page 376.
CHAPTER 31: SITE BOUNDARIES 361
Creating a Site Boundary

To create a site boundary you just pick points to define the outline of the lot. The Commander is displayed as you draw, enabling you to enter each bearing precisely. When drawing a site boundary, there are two ways to define segment angles. Using the Reference Angle Method, you define the direction of each segment by specifying an acute angle within a given quadrant (NW, NE, SW, SE). Using the Angle Bearing Method, you specify a forward or back bearing measured clockwise from the North meridian. Once youve drawn a site boundary you can edit each segment individually to create the precise size and shape you need. You can also change the site boundary settings, which include the line, text and peg styles used in the site boundary.
Creating a Site Boundary Using the Reference Angle Method

When creating a site boundary using the Reference Angle Method, angles are measured using compass bearings and a reference angle. Each angle is measured within a given quadrant (NE, NW, SE, or SW). The angle is the acute (less than 90) angle from the North or South meridian as measured to the East or West. For example, the bearing N 90d0000" E can be thought of as 90 east of North. By default, the angle is specified using the degrees/minutes/seconds format, but you can choose to use decimal degrees if you prefer.
To create a site boundary using the Reference Angle Method: 1. In 2D Plan View, open the View menu and select Zoom and Navigate > Zoom to Fit, or click the Zoom to Fit button on the View Control toolbar to bring the entire terrain into view. Open the Insert menu and select Terrain > Site Boundary, or click the Site Boundary button on the Terrain toolbar. Select a point for the first peg or stake. If turned on, the Commander is activated, displaying options for defining the length and direction of line segments.
2. 3.
4.
Drag your pointer to the first point in the boundary line. The boundary determines the quadrant in which you are working, and the compass points used in the bearing.
5. 6. 7. 8.
Click to place the first boundary line. Drag your pointer to the next point in the boundary line, and then click to place it. Continue dragging and clicking until the site boundary has been set. Right-click and select Finish.
You can also select a quadrant (NE, NW, SE, or SW) from the drop-down list in the Commander. If you use this feature, remember to Tab over to the Distance box when youre finished. 1. In 2D Plan View, open the View menu and select Zoom and Navigate > Zoom to Fit, or click the Zoom to Fit button on the View Control toolbar to bring the entire terrain into view. Open the Insert menu and select Terrain > Site Boundary, or click the Site Boundary button on the Terrain toolbar. Select a point for the first peg or stake. Select a quadrant from the direction drop-down list in the Commander.
2. 3. 4.
5. 6. 7.
Type a length for the first boundary line in the Distance box. Press the Tab key to move to the Direction box. Enter the desired angle and press Enter. The angle is measured from the North or South meridian, and must be between 0 and 90 degrees.
N 0 W
o
8. 9.
Continue defining the remaining segments. When you have defined all of the segments, right-click in the drawing and select Finish.
90o
A closing line segment is automatically created between the first and last peg, forming a closed site boundary.
Note: Bearings coincide with the angle of the north arrow specified in the global settings. For more information about global settings, see Defining the Location and Time of Day on page 618.
Creating a Site Boundary Using the Angle Bearing Method

When using the Angle Bearing Method to draw a site boundary, each angle is calculated clockwise from the positive Y axis, or North meridian. By default, each bearing is entered as a forward bearing, but you can enter a back bearing instead. To create a site boundary with the Angle Bearing Method: 1. Set Site Boundaries settings to use the Angle Bearing Method by default. Open the Settings menu and select Program Settings, or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar to open the Program Settings dialog. Click Site Boundaries in the left column of the Program Settings dialog. Select Angle Bearing - displaying in forward and back bearing from the Bearing Format drop-down list. Click OK.
2.
In 2D Plan View, select View > Zoom and Navigate > Zoom to Fit, or click the Zoom to Fit button on the View Control toolbar to bring the entire terrain into view. Open the Insert menu and select Terrain > Site Boundary, or click the Site Boundary button on the Terrain toolbar. Select a point for the first peg, or stake. If turned on, the Commander is activated, displaying options for defining the length and direction of line segments.
3. 4.
5.
To enter a back bearing instead of a forward bearing, select Back bearing from the bearing drop-down list in the Commander.
6.
Drag your pointer to the first point in the boundary line. The boundary determines the quadrant in which you are working, and the compass points used in the bearing.
7. 8. 9.
Click to place the first boundary line. Drag your pointer to the next point in the boundary line, and then click to place it. Continue dragging and clicking until the site boundary has been set.
10. Right-click and select Finish. You can also use the Commander to precisely set the distance and direction of a site boundary. To use the Commander to set a site boundary: 1. In 2D Plan View, open the View menu and select Zoom and Navigate > Zoom to Fit, or click the Zoom to Fit button on the View Control toolbar to bring the entire terrain into view. Open the Insert menu and select Terrain > Site Boundary, or click the Site Boundary button on the Terrain toolbar. Select a point for the first peg or stake. To enter a back bearing instead of a forward bearing, select Back bearing from the bearing drop-down list in the Commander.
2. 3. 4.
5.
Type a length for the first boundary line. The value appears in the Commanders Distance edit box.
6. 7. 8.
Type a length for the first boundary line in the Distance box. Press the Tab key to move to the Direction box. Enter the desired angle and press Enter. Each angle is calculated clockwise from the positive Y axis, or North meridian.
9.
Continue defining the remaining segments.
10. When you have defined all of the segments, right-click in the drawing and select Finish. 11. A closing line segment is automatically created between the first and last peg, forming a closed site boundary.
Moving a Site Boundary

You can move a site boundary using the Move feature. To move a site boundary: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click a property line to select the entire site boundary. Right-click and select Move, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Move. Click and drag to move the boundary. When the boundary is positioned, release your mouse button.
Stretching a Site Boundary

You can resize or reshape a site boundary by clicking and dragging its grips. To stretch a site boundary: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click a property line to select the entire site boundary. Blue grips appear at the corners of the boundary. Click the specific lot line that you want to move. A solid blue grip appears at the center of the line you selected. Click and drag a grip to stretch the boundary. When the boundary is resized, release your mouse button.
Note: You can also edit the length and direction of individual lot lines by editing the Site Boundary Edge properties.
Editing Site Boundary Edge Properties

You can edit the length or direction of a site boundary by editing Site Boundary Edge properties. To edit the length or direction of a site boundary edge: 1. 2. Click the property line to select it. Right-click and select Properties, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Properties to open the Site Boundary Edge dialog.
3. 4.
To edit the length of the current line, change the value in the Length box. To edit the distance of the setback line from the property line, change the distance in the Setback box. By default, setback lines arent included in the site boundary, because all setback distances are set to 0. You can specify a setback distance for each individual site boundary edge.
5.
To edit the angle of the current line, change the options in the Direction area. The available options depend on how you inserted the site boundary, and on the settings defined in the Program Settings dialog. If the Reference Angle Method options are available, you can change the direction of the line by editing the value in the Angle box. You can change the bearing of the line by selecting a new direction from the Bearing drop-down list. If the Angle Bearing Method options are available, you can change the direction of the segment by editing the Forward Bearing and Back Bearing values.
6.
Editing the length or angle of a segment causes a peg to move. Select which peg to move by selecting Adjust Peg No. 1 or Adjust Peg No. 2 in the When Editing area. Click OK.
7.
Curving a Site Boundary Edge

You can curve a site boundary edge using the Curve feature, or by editing site boundary edge properties. To curve a site boundary edge using the Curve tool: 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. Click the site boundary edge to select it. Right-click and select Curve, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Curve. Click and drag the edge to the curve it. When the edge is positioned, release your mouse button. Click on the lot line you want to edit. Right-click and select Properties, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Properties to open the Site Boundary Edge dialog. Select the Arc Radius check box. Enter the radius in the Arc Radius box. The arc radius is the distance from the uncurved property line to the top of the proposed arc. 5. Select the direction of the arc from the Arc Direction drop-down list. Selecting Inside creates the arc toward the inside of the boundary. Selecting Outside pushes the arc outward. 6. Click OK.
To curve a site boundary edge by editing its properties:
3. 4.
Editing a Site Boundarys Line, Text, and Peg Styles

You can edit site boundary settings before or after a site boundary has been created. Settings include line styles for lot lines and setback lines, text styles for bearings, lengths and pegs, and peg size and style. You can also control the text you want to appear. To edit site boundary settings: 1. Open the Settings menu and select Program Settings, or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar to open the Program Settings dialog. Select Site Boundaries in the left column of the Program Settings dialog.
Tip: If you have already drawn a site boundary, you can also open
2.
the Program Settings dialog by clicking the Settings button in the Site Boundary Edge dialog. 3. To edit the line style of the outside boundary line, click the Boundary button in the Lines area to open the Line Styles dialog. Select Light Building Lines, Medium Building Lines, or Heavy Building Lines from the Groups list. Select a style from the Line Styles list. Click OK. To edit the line style of the setback line, click the Setback button in the Lines ares to open the Line Styles dialog. Select Light Building Lines, Medium Building Lines, or Heavy Building Lines from the Groups list. Select a style from the Line Styles list. Click OK. To edit the peg style, select the Circle or Square option in the Pegs area. To edit the size of the peg symbol, change the value in the Width box in the Pegs area. To edit the text style of bearing text, click the Bearing button in the Text area to open the Text Styles dialog. Select a style from the Text Styles list and click OK. If you do not want to include bearing text in the site boundary, clear the Include check box in the Text area.
4.
5. 6. 7.
8.
9.
By default, bearing text appears on the inside of the site boundary. If you want it to appear on the outside, select Outside Line from the Include drop-down list. If you are including both bearing text and length text, one must be set to the outside of the boundary, and one must be set to the inside. They cannot both be on the same side.
10. To edit the text style of length text, click the Length button in the Text area to open the Text Styles dialog. Select a style from the Text Styles list and click OK. 11. If you do not want to include length text in the site boundary, clear Include check box in the Text area. 12. By default, length text appears on the outside of the site boundary line. If you want it to appear on the inside, select Inside Line from the Include drop-down list. 13. To edit the text style of peg text, click the Peg button in the Text area to open the Text Styles dialog. 14. If you do not want to include peg text in the site boundary, disable the adjacent Include check box. Select a style from the Text Styles list and click OK. 15. To edit the distance between text and the site boundary line, change the value in the Distance from line box. This applies to all forms of textbearing, length, and peg text. 16. Click OK to close the Program Settings dialog.
Selecting a Method of Measurement When Drawing a Site Boundary

There are two methods for calculating distances when creating a site boundary. Site units can be Imperial or Metric. You can select the unit of measure you want to use and specify the desired level of precision. To select a method of angle measurement for site boundary entry: 1. Open the Settings menu and select Program Settings, or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar to open the Program Settings dialog. Select Site Boundaries in the left column of the Program Settings dialog. Select the Imperial or Metric option in the Distances area. Select a unit of measure from the Units drop-down list. Select a level of precision for distance measurements from the Precision drop-down list. In the Angles area, select the units to use when specifying site boundary edge angles from the Units drop-down list. You can select either Degrees/Minutes/Seconds or Decimal Degrees. If you select Decimal Degrees, select the desired level of precision from the Precision drop-down list. 7. Click OK to close the Program Settings dialog.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Deleting a Site Boundary

To delete a site boundary: 1. 2. Click a property line to select the entire site boundary. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Delete.
Part 7
ADDING EXTERIOR DESIGN ELEMENTS
Fences and Gates ..............................................375 Decks ..................................................................385 Patios ..................................................................407 Shed Builder Wizard ..........................................413 Retaining Walls ..................................................421 Sidewalks, Pathways, and Driveways..............427
374
32
FENCES AND GATES
Fences can add beauty, privacy, and security to your property. You can point and click to fence off your yard. The catalog contains an assortment of fences in a variety of materials, including concrete, stone, and wood. You can even add a classic white picket fence. After youve drawn your fence, you can place a gate in it. You can choose a style that matches your fence, or choose an entirely different style to create an accent.
Inserting a Fence............................................................................................... 376 Inserting a Gate................................................................................................. 381
376
Inserting a Fence
You insert a fence just as you would a wall, by selecting a start point and end point. You can create a fence of any length. You can continue selecting points in other directions to add on to the fencing.
Tip: If you have inserted a site boundary in your plan, you can draw a fence on top of the lot lines. The fence becomes a visual indicator of the property extents when seen in 3D views.
To insert a fence: 1. Open the Insert menu and select Landscape > Fences/ Gates > Fences, or click the Fences/Gates button on the Landscape toolbar and select Fences. In the Fences catalog, select the type of fence you want to insert. In the project workspace, click to select a start point for the fence. Move the pointer in the direction you want the fence to run. The fence stretches as you move the pointer. 5. Click to select an end point for the fence. To continue adding sections to the fence, select more points in any direction. 6. Right-click and select Finish. Familiarize yourself with the parts of a fence before working with fences.
2. 3. 4.
CHAPTER 32: FENCES AND GATES 377
Stretching a Fence Layout

You can stretch a fence layout by clicking and dragging one of the fence segments. To stretch a fence layout: 1. 2. 3. Click the fence to select it. Blue grips appear along the fence line. Click the center grip and drag to stretch the fence. When the fence is positioned, release your mouse button.
Changing the Length of a Fence

You can lengthen or shorten a fence by clicking and dragging its end points. To change the length of a fence: 1. 2. 3. 4. Select the fence you want to lengthen or shorten. Hover the mouse pointer over the fence end you want to stretch to display the Lengthen pointer. Click and drag the fence end to make it longer or shorter. Release the mouse button.
Creating a Break in a Fence

When you create a break in a fence, you can select the fence segments on either side of the break independently. You may want to insert one or more breaks in a fence so that you can then remove certain segments of it. To create a break in a fence: 1. 2. 3. Click the fence to select it. Right-click and select Break, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Break. Click the fence to break it.
378
Editing the Properties of a Fence

You can change the height of a fence, specify whether or not you want the fence to hug the terrain, edit the size and position of fence posts, and edit the dimensions of the rails and boards. To edit the properties of a fence: 1. 2. Click the fence to select it. Right-click and select Properties or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Properties to open the Fences properties dialog.
When you edit fence properties, you can see a preview of the fence in the image pane of the Fences properties dialog. Selecting a dimension marked with a letter, such as a or b, highlights the corresponding dimension in the door diagram to the left of the Properties list. 3. To change the type of fence, click the appropriate icon in the Type area. Select General, Privacy, Picket or Ranch. The General style is a plain, flat surface. 4. 5. 6. To change the height of the fence, select Fence Height in the Properties list, and then edit the value in the Fence Height box. To cause the bottom of the fence to hug the terrain, select the Hug Terrain? check box. Select either Raked or Stepped from the Slope Type drop-down list.
7.
To change the dimensions or position of the fence posts, edit the Post properties in the Properties list. The secondary post is a post in the middle of a fence that helps support the fence. Selecting Centered from the Secondary Post Position dropdown list starts the spacing of intermediate posts from the middle of the fence to create a balanced look. Selecting From Start from the Secondary Post Position drop-down list starts the spacing of intermediate posts from the first main post. To set the maximum post spacing, select Max. Post Spacing and edit the value in the Max. Post Spacing box. The maximum post spacing is the allowable spacing between posts. If you stretch the fence, the spacing between posts increases. More posts are added to prevent the spacing from exceeding the maximum. To set the post width, select Post Width and edit the value in the Post Width box. The post width is the width and depth of fence posts. To edit the post extension, select Post Extension and edit the value in the Post Extension box. The post extension is the distance that fence posts extend over the top of the fence boards. The post rotation determines the rotation of the connecting post where two fence segments connect. Selecting Half Way from the Post Rotation drop-down list rotates the connecting post half way between the angle. Selecting None from the Post Rotation drop-down list leaves the connecting post aligned to the first fence.
8.
To change the dimensions of the fence rails, edit the Rails properties in the Properties list. To edit the width, depth, and height of rails, select the appropriate property, and then edit the value in its associated box.
380
9.
To change the dimensions of the boards in a privacy or picket fence, edit the Board properties in the Properties list. To change the board style, select Pointed or Squared from the Board Style drop-down list. To change the width, depth, spacing, and offset of fence boards, select the appropriate property, and then edit the value in its associated text box.
10. When you are finished, click OK to close the Fences properties dialog.
Changing the Fencing Material

You can apply a different color or material to the boards, posts or rails of a fence. For example, you can select a different type of wood for a wood fence. To apply different materials to a fence: 1. 2. Display your model in 3D. Make sure the fence is visible. Open the Edit menu and select Materials Paintbrush, or click the Materials Paintbrush button on any tabbed toolbar. Select a group from which to select materials, and then select the material to apply in the Materials catalog. Click the fence to apply the selected material. Materials are applied separately to the individual parts of the fence, such as fence boards, posts, and rails. Clicking one component applies the material to all components of the same type. For example, clicking one post applies the material to all posts. 5. When you are finished applying materials, right-click and select Finish.
3. 4.
Deleting a Fence
To delete a fence: 1. 2. Click the fence to select it. Select multiple fence segments by pressing Shift and clicking. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or open the Edit menu and selecting Modify Elements > Delete.
Inserting a Gate
The catalog contains a variety of gate types, including wood, picket, and ranch style gates. Gates are inserted into fences. When inserting a gate in a fence, choose a gate size that corresponds to the fence size. For example, if the fence is a 6' wood privacy fence, choose a 6' gate, such as a 6' wood privacy gate. Gates are shown slightly open so you can identify them easily in 2D and 3D views. To insert a gate: 1. Open the Insert menu and select Landscape > Fences/ Gates > Gates, or click the Fences/Gates button on the Landscape toolbar and select Gates. In the Gates catalog, select the type of gate you want to insert. Position the gate, and then click to insert it. Right-click and select Finish.
2. 3. 4.
382
Moving a Gate
You can move a gate inside a fence by clicking and dragging it. To move a gate: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click the gate to select it. Hover your mouse pointer over the gates center grip to display the Move pointer. Click and drag to move the gate. When the gate is positioned, release your mouse button.
Flipping a Gate
You can use the Flip Opening feature to flip an entire gate around. If the gate originally opened out, it now opens in, and if it was hinged on the left, it is now hinged on the right. To flip a gate: 1. 2. Click the gate to select it. Right-click and select Flip Opening, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Flip Opening.
Flipping a Gates Swing

Use the Flip Swing feature to flip the swing of a gate. The gate becomes hinged on the opposite side, but it continues open in the same direction. To flip a gate swing: 1. 2. Click the gate to select it. Right-click and select Flip Swing, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Flip Swing.
Editing the Properties of a Gate

You can change the height and width of a gate and the dimensions of the rails and boards. You can also control how far the gate opens in 2D and 3D views. To edit the properties of a gate: 1. 2. Click the gate to select it. Right-click and select Properties, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Properties to open the Gates properties dialog.
When you edit gate properties, you can see a preview of the gate in the image pane of the Gates properties dialog. Selecting a dimension marked with a letter, such as a or b, highlights the corresponding dimension in the door diagram to the left of the Properties list. 3. To change the type of gate, click the appropriate icon in the Type area. You can select General, Privacy, Picket, or Ranch. The General style is a plain, flat door. 4. 5. To change the width of a gate, select Gate Width, and then edit the value in the Gate Width box. To change the height of a gate, select Gate Height, and then edit the value in the Gate Height box.
384
6.
To change the swing type, select either Left or Right from the Swing Type drop-down list. The swing type property determines on which side the gate is hinged.
7. 8. 9.
To change how far the gate is open in 3D views, select 3D Percent Open and edit the value in the 3D Percent Open box. To change how far the gate is open in 2D views, select 2D Percent Open and edit the value in the 2D Percent Open box. To change the dimensions of the gate rails, edit the Rails properties in the Properties list. To edit the width, depth, and height of rails, select the appropriate property, and then edit the value in its associated box.
10. To change the dimensions of the boards in a gate, edit the Boards properties in the Properties list. To change the board style, select Pointed or Squared from the Board Style drop-down list. To change the width, depth, spacing, and offset of gate boards, select the appropriate property, and then edit the value in its associated text box.
11. When you are finished, click OK to close the Gates properties dialog.
Deleting a Gate
You can delete a gate. When you delete a gate, the fence returns to its original state. To delete a gate: 1. 2. Click the gate to select it. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Delete.
33
DECKS
You can add more living space to your home without building an addition by building a deck. The Deck Builder Wizard automates building a deck in your model. Select the material and shape for the deck that you want, and the deck is drawn for you. You can create the precise size and shape of a deck using the Deck feature. For more about building a deck, see the HGTV Videos CD for tips from the experts at HGTV.
Using the Deck Builder Wizard.......................................................................... 386 Building a Deck with the Deck Tool ................................................................... 390 Moving a Deck................................................................................................... 391 Rotating a Deck................................................................................................. 392 Stretching a Deck .............................................................................................. 392 Reshaping a Deck ............................................................................................. 392 Curving a Deck Edge ........................................................................................ 393 Changing the Direction of Deck Boards ............................................................ 393 Editing Deck Properties..................................................................................... 394 Controlling the Display of Deck Railings and Skirting ....................................... 398 Inserting an Opening in a Deck ......................................................................... 400 Adding Stairs to a Deck ..................................................................................... 402 Moving Deck Stairs............................................................................................ 402 Editing the Properties of Deck Stairs................................................................. 403 Deleting Deck Stairs .......................................................................................... 406 Deleting a Deck ................................................................................................. 406
386
Using the Deck Builder Wizard

The Deck Builder Wizard takes draws a deck for you. Select the decking material and deck shape, enter the dimensions, and then point and click to insert the deck. After inserting a deck you can move, stretch, rotate, raise, or lower it if needed, as well as edit its properties, which include settings for posts, railings, and skirting. To build a deck using the Deck Builder Wizard: 1. Check the current location in the Building Location menu to make sure youre on the appropriate level for inserting the deck. Typically, you insert a deck on the Ground Floor. The height of a deck is determined by the Height above current location value in the Deck properties. You can edit this value after you insert the deck. 2. Open the Tools menu and select Design Wizards > Deck Builder to start the Deck Builder Wizard.
3.
Click Next.
CHAPTER 33: DECKS 387
4. 5.
Select the type of deck and decking material to use. Click Next.
6.
In the Shape area, click the shape that most closely resembles the shape you want to create. You can edit the shape after the deck has been inserted. In the Size area, enter the desired dimensions for the deck.
7.
388
8.
Click Next.
9.
In the Deck Rotation area, select the rotation for the deck. This is how the deck will be oriented when it is attached to the mouse pointer.
10. In the Decking Direction area, select the direction you want the deck boards to run. 11. Click Next.
12. Click Finish to close the Deck Builder Wizard. The deck is attached to your pointer. 13. Position the deck, and then click to insert it.
390
Building a Deck with the Deck Tool

You can use the Deck tool to build a deck of virtually any shape and size. After youve inserted a deck you can move, stretch, rotate, raise, or lower it if needed, as well as edit its properties, which include settings for posts, railings, and skirting. To create a deck with the Deck tool: 1. Check the current location in the Building Location menu to make sure youre on the appropriate level for inserting the deck. Typically, you insert a deck on the Ground Floor. The height of a deck is determined by the Height above current location value in the Deck properties. You can edit this value after you insert the deck. 2. Open the Insert menu and select Landscape > Decks > Decks, or click the Decks button on the Landscape toolbar and select Decks. In the Decks catalog, select the type of deck and decking material to use. Select a start point for the deck outline.
3. 4.
5.
Continue selecting points until the outline is defined. Do not select the start point again. The last point you pick is always closed back to the start point.
3 2
6.
Moving a Deck
You can move a deck using the Move feature. To move a deck: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click the deck to select it. Right-click and select Move, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Move. Click and drag the deck to move it. When the deck is positioned, release your mouse button.
392
Rotating a Deck
You can use the Rotate feature to rotate a deck about a selected point. To rotate a deck: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click the deck to select it. Right-click and select Rotate, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Rotate. Click and drag the deck to rotate it. When the deck is positioned, release your mouse button.
Note: When you rotate a deck, the direction of the deck boards does not change. You can change the decking direction, as explained in Changing the Direction of Deck Boards on page 393.
Stretching a Deck
You can stretch a deck in any direction by clicking and dragging one of its edges. To stretch a deck: 1. 2. Click the deck to select it. Three different types of grips appear. Right-click the blue center grip on the edge that you want to stretch. Select Move Edge. Or, hover your pointer over the center grip to display the Move pointer. 3. 4. Click and drag to stretch the deck. When the deck is positioned, release your mouse button.
Reshaping a Deck
You can change the shape of a deck by stretching any of its corners. To reshape a deck: 1. 2. 3. Click the deck to select it. Three different types of grips appear. Click and drag a corner grip to stretch the deck, or, right-click, and select Stretch. When the deck is positioned, release your mouse button.
Curving a Deck Edge

You can curve a deck edge using the Curve feature. You can click and drag the deck edge to curve it, or select a point to which to curve the deck. To curve a deck edge by clicking and dragging: 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. Click the deck edge to select it. Right-click and select Curve, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Curve. Click and drag the deck edge. When the deck edge is positioned, release your mouse button. Click the deck edge to select it. Right-click and select Curve, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Curve. In the project workspace, click a point to be the center of the curve. The deck edge automatically curves to the point.
To curve a deck edge to a selected point:
Changing the Direction of Deck Boards

You can use the Set Decking Direction feature to change the direction of a decks boards. To change the direction of deck boards: 1. 2. 3. Click the deck to select it. Right-click and select Set Decking Direction, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Set Decking Direction. Select two points to define a line that runs in the direction for the deck boards. The deck boards change to match the direction of the line.
394
Editing Deck Properties

You can edit properties for a decks height, posts, beams, footings, decking, railings, skirting, and more. To edit deck properties: 1. 2. Click the deck to select it. Right-click and select Properties, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Properties to open the Decks properties dialog. You can use the Decks properties dialog to complete the following tasks: Edit the height of a deck. Edit deck post properties Edit deck footings Edit the deck frame
3.
When you edit deck properties, you can see a preview of the deck in the image pane of the Decks properties dialog.
Editing the Height of a Deck

By default, decks are inserted at a height that is relative to the current building location. To edit the height of a deck: 1. 2. 3. To change the height of a deck, begin on the Support tab of the Decks properties dialog. Edit the value in the Height above current location box. Continue setting deck properties, or click OK to close the Decks properties dialog box.
Editing Deck Post Properties

You can edit the post type, spacing, and depth. You can also disable posts. To edit deck post properties: 1. 2. To edit deck post properties, begin on the Support tab of the Decks properties dialog. To change the depth of the posts in the ground, edit the value in the Depth below ground level box in the Levels area. This property changes the overall height of the posts, but doesnt affect the portions shown above ground. 3. 4. To remove posts from the deck, clear the Include Posts check box in the Supports area. To select a different member to use for deck posts, click the Select button to the right of the Include Posts box to open the Catalog Access dialog. Select a material type from the Groups list and a member from the Columns list. Click OK. To change the spacing between posts along beams, edit the value in the Spacing along Beam box. Continue setting deck properties, or click OK to close the Decks properties dialog box.
5. 6.
396
Editing Deck Footings

You can control the display of footings under a deck. You can also choose the footing material to use. To create footings under deck posts: 1. 2. 3. 4. To edit deck footings, begin on the Support tab of the Decks properties dialog. To remove footings from the deck, select the Include Footings check box in the Supports area. To include footings on the deck posts, select the Include Footings check box in the Supports area. Click the Select button next to the Include Footings box to open the Catalog Access dialog. Select a material type from the Groups list and a member from the Mono Footings list. Click OK. Continue setting deck properties, or click OK to close the Decks properties dialog box.
5.
Editing the Deck Frame

You can control the manner in which deck is constructed. You can specify how you want beams to be constructed in relation to the posts. You can also select specific materials to use for deck boards and beams and joists, as well as edit the spacing and overhang of deck members. To edit the deck frame: 1. To edit the deck frame, begin on the Frame tab of the Decks properties dialog.
2.
To change the how beams are constructed, click the appropriate icon in the Construction area. Beams are the vertical members that rest on or are attached to the posts, and support the deck joists.
3.
To select a different material for the deck boards, click the Select button in the Decking area to open the Catalog Access dialog. Select a material type from the Groups list and a member from the Decking list.Click OK. To edit the spacing between deck boards, edit the value in the Spacing edit box in the Decking area. To change the amount that the deck boards hang over the deck frame, edit the value in the Overhang box in the Decking area. To adjust the angle of the deck boards in relation to the joists, edit the value in the Angle from Joists box. To select a different material for the deck joists, click the Select button in the Joists area to open the Catalog Access dialog. Select a material type from the Groups list and a member from the Members list.Click OK. To edit the spacing between joists, edit the value in the Spacing box in the Joists area. To change the amount that the joists hang over the beams, edit the value in the Overhang box in the Joists area. Typically, the extension is limited to 1/3 of the joist length.
4. 5. 6. 7.
8. 9.
10. To select a different material for the deck beams, click the Select button in the Beams area, to open the Catalog Access dialog. Select a material type from the Groups list and a member from the Members list.Click OK. 11. To change the amount that the beams extend past one other, edit the value in the Overhang box in the Beams area. 12. Continue setting deck properties, or click OK to close the Decks properties dialog box.
398
Controlling the Display of Deck Railings and Skirting

By default, ground-level and low-level decks dont have railings turned on, while raised-level and second-story decks do. You can control the display of railings for each side of a deck. Skirting is screening along the bottom of a deck that conceals the underside of the deck frame. Deck skirting can also keep out animals and debris. By default, skirting is not displayed. You can control the display of skirting for each deck edge. To control the display of deck railings and skirting: 1. Click the deck to select it. Several grips appear.
2.
Click the red circular grip on the edge you want to edit to open the Deck Edge Properties dialog.
3. 4. 5. 6.
To display the deck railing, select the Railing check box. To display the deck skirting, select the Skirting check box. To apply the same options to all edges, select the Apply to all edges check box. Click OK.
Note: If you add stairs to the deck, an opening in the railing is created automatically.
Changing the Deck Railing and Skirting Style

You can change the style of deck railing and deck skirting by editing the decks properties. 1. 2. Click the deck to select it. Right-click and select Properties, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Properties to open the Decks properties dialog.
3. 4.
Select the Accessories tab in the Decks properties dialog. To change the deck railing style, click the Select button in the Railings area to open the Catalog Access dialog. Select a railing category from the Groups list, and then select a railing style from the Railings list. Click OK. To change the deck skirting style, click the Select button in the Skirting area to open the Catalog Access dialog. Select Deck Skirting from the Groups list, and then select a type of skirting from the Sheathing list. Click OK. Click OK to close the Decks properties dialog.
5.
6.
400
Inserting an Opening in a Deck

After you have created a deck, you can insert a custom opening in it using the Cut Opening feature, by picking points to define the opening outline. To insert an opening in a deck: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click the deck to select it. Right-click and select Cut Opening, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Cut Opening. Click to select a start point for the opening. Continue selecting points to define the opening. As you select points, the opening is created. The last point picked is always connected back to the start point to form a closed shape, so dont select the start point again. 5. When you have selected the final point, right-click and select Finish.
Resizing a Deck Opening

You can resize a deck opening by clicking and dragging one of its edges. To stretch a deck opening: 1. 2. Click the deck opening to select it. Hover your pointer over the center blue grip of the edge that you want to move to display the Move pointer. Or, you can click the opening to select it, right-click, and select Move Edge. 3. 4. Click and drag the opening edge to resize the opening. When the opening is positioned, release the mouse button.
Reshaping a Deck Opening

You can change the shape of a deck opening by stretching its corners while clicking and dragging. To reshape a deck opening by stretching: 1. 2. 3. Click the deck opening to select it. Click and drag a corner grip to reshape the opening. Or, you can right-click the opening and select Stretch. When the opening is resized, release your mouse button.
Curving a Deck Opening Edge

You can curve an opening edge using the Curve feature. You can click and drag the opening edge to curve it, or select a point to which to curve the deck opening. To curve a deck opening edge by clicking and dragging: 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. Click the opening edge to select it. Right-click and select Curve, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Curve. Click and drag the opening edge to the desired curve. When the opening is positioned, release your mouse button. Click the opening edge to select it. Right-click and select Curve, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Curve. Click a point in the project workspace to be the center of the curve. The opening edge automatically curves to the point.
Removing Deck Openings

You can delete an opening from a deck using the Remove Opening feature.
Note: You cannot remove an opening by pressing the Delete key.
To remove a deck opening: 1. 2. 3. Click the edge of the deck opening to select it. Right-click and select Remove Opening, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Remove Opening. Click the edge of the opening. The opening is removed.
402
Adding Stairs to a Deck

You can add a staircase to a deck. Stairs automatically snap to the deck, and the railings on the deck are automatically removed to allow for the stair opening. By default, stairs extend from the deck platform down to the terrain. Deck stairs also have a railing on both sides by default, but you can remove one or both of the railings after the stairs have been inserted. You can choose either pressure treated or cedar stairs, and edit the stair dimensions to get the exact result you want. To add stairs to a deck: 1. Open the Insert menu and select Landscape > Decks > Deck Stairs, or click the Decks button on the Landscape toolbar and select Deck Stairs. In the Decks catalog, select the type of stairs to insert. Move your pointer close to the deck edge. When the stairs are positioned, click to insert them. Right-click and select Finish.
2. 3. 4. 5.
Moving Deck Stairs

You can move a deck staircase by clicking and dragging it along the deck edge. You cant move deck stairs away from the deck, but you can move them to another deck edge. The opening in the deck railing adjusts when deck stairs are moved. To move a staircase by clicking and dragging: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click the staircase to select it. Hover your pointer over the center grip to display the Move pointer. Click and drag the staircase along the deck edge to move it. When the stairs are positioned, release your mouse button.
Editing the Properties of Deck Stairs

You can edit deck stair properties such as the overall height and width of deck stairs, the width of the steps, and the riser height. You can also control deck stairs properties. By default, deck stairs have a railing on both sides. You can choose to have a railing on the left or right side only, or remove the railings. To edit the properties of deck stairs: 1. 2. 3. Click the Select/Edit button on the Landscape toolbar. Click the staircase to select it. Right-click and select Properties, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Properties to open the Deck Stairs properties dialog. When you edit deck stairs properties, you can see a preview of the stairs in the image pane of the Deck Stairs properties dialog.
4. 5.
To remove railings from deck stairs, clear the Include Railings check box in the Railings area. To include railings on deck stairs, select the Include Railings check box in the Railings area.
404
6.
To place the railings on deck stairs, select an option from the Include Railings drop-down list. Select Railing on left side places a railing on only the left side of the stairs. Selecting Railing on right side places a railing on only the right side of the stairs. Selecting Railing on both sides places a railing on both sides of the stairs.
7.
Continue setting deck stairs properties, or click OK to close the Deck Stairs properties dialog.
Editing Stringers, Treads, and Risers on Deck Stairs

You can specify detailed settings for the stringers, risers and treads on deck stairs. A stringer is the board that covers the ends of the steps. A riser is the vertical portion of an individual step. A tread is the horizontal portion of a step. To edit stringer, riser, or tread details: 1. To edit stringer, riser, or tread details, begin on the Details tab of the Deck Stairs dialog.
2.
To change the stringer style, click the appropriate icon in the Stringer area. You can select Notched, Under, or Side.
3.
Edit stringer properties in the Stringer area. To change the spacing between the outside stringers and intermediate stringers, edit the value in the Spacing box. To change the distance from the bottom of the stringer to the underside of the tread/riser intersection, edit the value in the Height box. Specifying a stringer height that is the same as the overall height of the staircase creates a staircase that is completely closed on the sides. The stringers extend to the ground.
4.
To change the thickness of the stringer members, edit the value in the Width box. To inserts riser boards under the steps, select the Closed Riser check box. If the Closed Riser check box is cleared, the staircase is open under the treads.
Edit riser properties in the Riser area.
Click the Select button to open the Catalog Access dialog. Select a material type from the Groups list, and then select a member from the Decking list. Click OK. To set the spacing between two or more riser boards, edit the value in the Spacing box. To edit the tilt of the riser boards, edit the value in the Angle box. A value of 0 sets the board perpendicular to the step, that is, straight up and down. A value above 0 tilts the riser down toward the back of the staircase. The maximum angle allowed is 20.
406
5.
Edit tread properties in the Tread area. Click the Select button to open the Catalog Access dialog. Select a material type from the Groups list, and then select a member from the Decking list. Click OK. To set the spacing between two or more tread boards, edit the value in the Spacing box. To edit the distance the step extends past the riser, edit the value in the Nosing box. To edit the distance that the step extends past the riser, edit the value in the Overhang box.
6.
Continue setting deck stairs properties, or click OK to close the Deck Stairs properties dialog.
Deleting Deck Stairs

You can delete deck stairs. To delete deck stairs: 1. 2. Click the deck stairs to select them. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Delete.
Deleting a Deck
You can remove a deck from your model. To remove a deck: 1. 2. Click the deck to select it. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Delete.
Note: If you added stairs to your deck, you must delete them separately.
34
PATIOS
Building a patio is a great way to add more living space to your home without building an addition. Creating a patio involves clicking some points to define the outline of the slab, or pad. You can choose from concrete or masonry pads, and you can change the pad materials to create a unified look for your model.
Creating a Patio................................................................................................. 408 Moving a Patio................................................................................................... 409 Rotating a Patio................................................................................................. 409 Resizing a Patio ................................................................................................ 409 Reshaping a Patio ............................................................................................. 410 Curving a Patio.................................................................................................. 410 Editing Patio Properties......................................................................................411 Applying a Different Material to a Patio ............................................................. 412 Deleting a Patio ................................................................................................. 412
408
Creating a Patio
You can use the Pads feature to insert a concrete or brick patio directly on the terrain. By drawing the outline of the patio, you control its size and shape. By default, patio slabs hug the terrain on which they are inserted. If the terrain is not flat where you are inserting the patio, turn off the slabs Hug Terrain option. Disabling the Hug Terrain option ensures an element remains flat regardless of any slopes in the terrain. For more information about the Hug Terrain option, see Editing Patio Properties on page 411. To create a patio: 1. 2. 3. 4. Open the Insert menu and select Terrain > Pads, or click the Pads button on the Terrain toolbar. In the Pads catalog, select the type of slab to insert. Click in the project workspace area to select a start point for the slab. Continue selecting points to define the outline of the slab. Dont select the start point twice. The last point picked always closes back at the start point.
5.
CHAPTER 34: PATIOS 409
Moving a Patio
You can move a patio pad using the Move feature. To move an entire patio pad: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click the pad to select it. Right-click and select Move, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Move. Click and drag to move the pad. When the pad is positioned, release your mouse button.
Rotating a Patio
You can rotate a patio pad using the Rotate feature. To rotate a patio pad: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Click the pad to select it. Right-click and select Rotate, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Rotate. Position your pointer over the corner grip around which you want to rotate the pad. Click and drag to rotate the pad. When the pad is positioned, release your mouse button.
Resizing a Patio
You can resize a patio pad by stretching one of its edges. To resize a patio pad by stretching it: 1. 2. Click the pad to select it. Hover your pointer over the center blue grip on the edge you want to move to display the Move cursor. Or, rightclick the edge and select Move Edge. Click and drag to move the pad. When the pad is positioned, release your mouse button.
3. 4.
410
Reshaping a Patio
You can change the shape of a patio pad by clicking and dragging its corners. To reshape a patio pad: 1. 2. 3. Click the pad to select it. A grab appears at each corner. Click and drag a corner grip to stretch the pad. When the pad is positioned, release your mouse button.
Curving a Patio
You can curve the edge of a patio pad using the Curve feature. When the tool is active, you can click and drag the edge to curve it, or select a point to which to curve. To curve a patio pad edge by clicking and dragging: 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. Click on the pad edge to select it. Right-click and select Curve, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Curve. Click and drag the pad to the desired curve. Release the mouse button. Click the pad edge to select it. Right-click in and select Curve, or select open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Curve. In the project workspace, click a point to be the center of the curve.
To curve a patio pad edge to a selected point:
CHAPTER 34: PATIOS 411
Editing Patio Properties

You can set patio properties to disable the Hug Terrain option, and change the type and thickness of a pad. 1. 2. Click the pad to select it. Right-click and select Properties to open the Pads properties dialog.
3. 4.
To change the type of pad, select an icon in the Type area. Disable the Hug Terrain option by clearing the Hug Terrain? check box in the Properties list. By default, patios are inserted directly onto the terrain. However, if the terrain in your model isnt level, then you want turn off the Hug Terrain option. When the Hug Terrain option is disabled, the slab is inserted flat and is positioned at the Terrain Base Level specified in the Terrain Settings.
5. 6.
To edit the thickness of a pad, select Thickness in the Properties list, and then edit the value in the Thickness box. Click OK.
412
Applying a Different Material to a Patio

You can use the Materials Paintbrush to quickly apply a different color or material to a patio pad. For example, you can change a patio to stone. 1. 2. Display your model in 3D. Make sure the pad is visible. Open the Edit menu and select Materials Paintbrush, or click the Materials Paintbrush button on any tabbed toolbar to open the Materials catalog. In the Materials catalog, select a group from which to select materials, and then select the material to apply. Click the pad to apply the material. The material is immediately applied. 5. Right-click and select Finish.
3. 4.
Deleting a Patio
You can delete a patio pad. To delete a pad: 1. 2. Click the pad to select it. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Delete.
35
SHED BUILDER WIZARD
The Shed Builder Wizard leads you through the creation of a custom shed, and then instantly adds it to your drawing. Select the shed style, and then enter its dimensions. Next, define the door and window combination, and then select custom materials for the roof, walls, floor, door, and window. Finally, click to place the new shed where you want it. After inserting the shed, you can edit its individual components.
Note: To insert a pre-made shed from the catalog, use the Exterior Structures feature. You can find sheds in the Storage and Enclosures group of the Catalog Access dialog.
Building a Shed with the Shed Builder Wizard .................................................. 414 Moving a Shed .................................................................................................. 418 Rotating a Shed................................................................................................. 418 Editing a Shed ................................................................................................... 419 Deleting a Shed................................................................................................. 419
414
Building a Shed with the Shed Builder Wizard

The Shed Builder Wizard creates a custom shed in a few steps. Select a shed style, enter the desired dimensions, and specify the door and window placement. You can select the materials you would like to use for the roof, walls, floor, door, and window. After inserting the shed in your drawing, you can edit its individual components to achieve the appearance you want. To build a shed: 1. Open the Tools menu and select Design Wizards > Shed Builder.
2.
On the Welcome screen, click Next.
CHAPTER 35: SHED BUILDER WIZARD 415
3. 4. 5.
On the Select a Building Style and Size screen, click the icon that most closely resembles the style of shed you want to build. Enter the desired dimensions for the shed in the Length and Width boxes. Click Next.
416
6.
On the Door and Window Configuration screen, click the door and window combination that you would like for the front of the shed. To include a window on the left side of the shed, select the Include Window on left side check box. To include a window on the right side of the shed, select the Include Window on right side check box.
7.
Click Next.
8.
On the Shed Elements screen you can select custom materials to use for the sheds roof, walls, floor, door, and window. Click each button to open the Catalog Access dialog, and then select the appropriate material. Click OK. Click Next.
9.
10. On the final screen, click Finish. The shed is attached to your pointer, ready to be inserted. 11. Position the shed, and then click to insert it.
Tip: To insert a pre-made shed from the catalog, use the Exterior Structures feature. You can find sheds in the Storage and Enclosures group of the Catalog Access dialog.
418
Moving a Shed
You can move a shed by drawing a selection window around it, then using the Move feature. To move a shed: 1. 2. In 2D Plan View, drag a selection window around the entire shed. Right-click and select Move, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Move to display the Move pointer. Click and drag to move the shed. When the shed is positioned, release your mouse button.
3. 4.
Rotating a Shed
After you have inserted a shed, you might find that you need to rotate it, which you can do using the Rotate feature. To rotate a shed: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. In 2D Plan View, drag a selection window around the entire shed. Right-click and select Rotate, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Rotate. Click a base point for the rotation, such as a corner of the shed. The Rotate pointer is displayed. Without pressing your mouse button, move the pointer to rotate the shed. When the shed is positioned, click to anchor it.
Editing a Shed
If you have created a shed using the Shed Builder Wizard, you can edit its roof, walls, floor, door, and windows individually. Click the element you want to edit, and then edit it as you would if it were part of a house. For example, you can stretch the walls to make the shed bigger or smaller, or select a different door size.
For more information about resizing walls, see Changing the Length of Walls on page 163. For more information about editing door properties, see Editing Door Properties on page 192. For more information about editing window properties, see Editing Window Properties on page 199. For more information about working with floors, see Inserting Floors on page 210. For more information about editing roof properties, see Editing Roof Properties on page 266.
Deleting a Shed
You can delete a shed by drawing a selection box around it and then pressing the Delete key on your keyboard.
420
36
RETAINING WALLS
A well-built retaining wall system can preserve the natural shape of your land, reinforce hills and slopes, and protect your home from possible landslides or soil erosion. Retaining walls can also be an attractive addition to a garden or the overall landscaping around your home.
Drawing Retaining Walls ................................................................................... 422 Changing the Length of Retaining Walls ........................................................... 423 Curving a Retaining Wall ................................................................................... 423 Breaking a Retaining Wall ................................................................................. 424 Editing the Properties of a Retaining Wall ......................................................... 424 Applying Different Materials to Retaining Walls................................................. 425 Deleting a Retaining Wall .................................................................................. 425
422
Drawing Retaining Walls

You draw retaining walls in the same way that you draw interior and exterior walls. To draw a retaining wall: 1. Open the Insert menu and select Terrain > Retaining Walls, or click the Retaining Walls button on the Terrain toolbar. In the Retaining Walls catalog, select the wall type to insert. In the project workspace, click to select a start point for the wall. Move your pointer in the direction you want your wall to run. The wall length is shown as you draw it. By default, drawing is constrained to 15 angles. To change this constraint, turn off Angle Snap.When the wall is the length you want, click to set its endpoint. 5. 6. 7. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. When the wall is the correct length, click to set its endpoint. Continue selecting points to add to the wall. When the wall layout is complete, right-click and select Finish. Click the Select/Edit button on the Building toolbar. Click the wall to select it. Hover your pointer over the walls center grip to display the Move pointer. Click and drag to move the wall. When the wall is positioned, release your mouse button.
2. 3. 4.
To move a retaining wall:
CHAPTER 36: RETAINING WALLS 423
Changing the Length of Retaining Walls

You can lengthen or shorten an individual wall by clicking and dragging one of the walls ends. To lengthen or shorten a retaining wall: 1. 2. 3. 4. Select the wall. A grip appears at each wall end. Hover the mouse pointer over the wall end you want to stretch to display the Lengthen pointer. Click and drag the wall end to make it longer or shorter. Release the mouse button.
Curving a Retaining Wall

You can curve a wall using the Curve feature. You can click and drag the wall to curve it, or select a point to which to curve the wall. To curve a retaining wall by clicking and dragging: 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. Click the wall to select it. Right-click and select Curve, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Curve. Click and drag the wall to the desired curve. Release the mouse button. Click the wall to select it. Right-click in and select Curve, or select open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Curve. In the project workspace, click a point to be the center of the curve.
To curve a retaining wall to a selected point:
424
Breaking a Retaining Wall

You can break a wall into two or more segments, and those segments can then be edited individually. To break a wall: 1. 2. 3. Click the wall to select it. Right-click in the drawing area and select Break, or open the Edit menu Modify Elements > Break. Click the point where you want to break the wall. The wall is divided into two segments that can be moved, stretched, or manipulated individually.
Editing the Properties of a Retaining Wall

To edit the properties of a wall: 1. 2. 3. Click the wall to select it. Right-click and select Properties to open the Retaining Walls properties dialog. The properties available for retaining walls are identical to those for regular walls. For more information about editing walls properties, see Editing the Properties of a Wall on page 156.
CHAPTER 36: RETAINING WALLS 425
Applying Different Materials to Retaining Walls

You can apply different finishes to retaining walls using the Materials Paintbrush. The Materials catalog contains a selection of brick, concrete, wood, and stone finishes, as well as many other options. To apply a material to a retaining wall: 1. 2. Display your model in 3D. Make sure the wall face to apply the material to is visible. Open the Edit menu and select Materials Paintbrush, or click the Materials Paintbrush button on any tabbed toolbar to open the Materials catalog. In the Materials catalog, select a group from which to select materials, and then select the material to apply. Click the wall face to apply the material. The material is immediately applied. 5. Right-click and select Finish.
3. 4.
Deleting a Retaining Wall

To delete a retaining wall: 1. 2. Click the wall to select it. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, right-click and select Delete, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Delete.
426
37
SIDEWALKS, PATHWAYS, AND DRIVEWAYS
Sidewalks, pathways, and driveways add to the overall aesthetics of your landscape and provide access to different areas of your property. To draw path elements, select a start point, and then point and click in the direction you want the pathway to run. Continue picking points to add segments. The catalog includes a selection of pathway materials including wood, sand, gravel, concrete, brick, and asphalt. You can even create a forest path. A number of different widths are available, and you can create custom widths. For video tips from the experts at HGTV, see the HGTV Videos CD. There youll find more about using materials such as brick and flagstone in outdoor pathways.
Drawing Sidewalks, Pathways, and Driveways................................................. 428 Moving a Sidewalk, Pathway, or Driveway........................................................ 429 Stretching a Sidewalk, Pathway, or Driveway ................................................... 429 Curving a Path Element .................................................................................... 430 Editing Path Element Properties ....................................................................... 431 Applying Different Materials to Sidewalks, Pathways, and Driveways .............. 432 Deleting a Sidewalk, Pathway, or Driveway ...................................................... 432
428
Drawing Sidewalks, Pathways, and Driveways

The catalog contains a wide variety of path types, including boardwalks, sand paths, gravel paths, brick paths, and driveways. The width and thickness of a path is determined by the paths properties. You control the length and direction of the path as you draw it. Dimensions are displayed as you draw each segment. By default, all paths hug the terrain on which they are inserted. If the terrain is not flat where you are inserting the path, turn off the paths Hug Terrain option. Disabling the Hug Terrain option ensures an element remains flat regardless of any slopes in the terrain. For more information about the Hug Terrain option, see To create a path: 1. 2. 3. Open the Insert menu and select Terrain > Paths, or click the Paths button on the Terrain toolbar. In the Paths catalog, select the path type to insert. Click in the project workspace area to select a start point for the path. Your insertion point is on the center line of the path. 4. 5. Move your pointer in the direction you want the path to run. Click to select an endpoint for the path. You can continue selecting points in any direction to add more sections to the path.
Tip: To create a smooth curve in the path, click several points with a short distance between each point.
6.
Double-click to finish, or right-click and select Finish.
CHAPTER 37: SIDEWALKS, PATHWAYS, AND DRIVEWAYS 429
Moving a Sidewalk, Pathway, or Driveway

You can move an entire path using the Move feature. To move a path: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click the path to select it. Right-click and select Move, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Move. Click and drag to move the path. When the path is positioned, release your mouse button.
Stretching a Sidewalk, Pathway, or Driveway

You can lengthen, shorten, or rotate a sidewalk, pathway, or driveway by clicking and dragging its end or corner grips. If a path has multiple segments, you can also stretch the path layout by moving one of those segments. To stretch a path by clicking and dragging: 1. Click the path to select it. If the path has multiple segments and you want to stretch the entire path layout by moving a segment, click the segment you want to move. 2. Click and drag the grips move the path. If you are moving a segment to stretch the entire layout, hover your pointer over the segments center blue handle, and then click and drag to stretch the path. 3. When the path is positioned, release your mouse button.
430
Curving a Path Element

You can curve a path segment using the Curve feature. When the tool is active, you can click and drag the path to curve it, or select a point to which to curve.
Double click after last point
Next point
Next point Start point
To curve a path by clicking and dragging: 1. Click the path to select it. If the path has multiple segments, click the specific segment you want to curve. 2. 3. 4. 1. Right-click and select Curve, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Curve. Click and drag the path to the desired curve. When the path is positioned, release the mouse button. Click the path to select it. If the path has multiple segments, click the specific segment you want to curve. 2. 3. Right-click in and select Curve, or select open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Curve. In the project workspace, click a point to be the center of the curve.
To curve a path to a selected point:
CHAPTER 37: SIDEWALKS, PATHWAYS, AND DRIVEWAYS 431
Editing Path Element Properties

You can edit the thickness of your path material or the paths overall width. To edit the thickness or width of a path: 1. Click the path to select it. If the path has multiple segments, dont select them all. Property changes affect the entire path. 2. Right-click and select Properties, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Properties to open the Paths properties dialog.
3. 4. 5. 6.
To change the type of path, select an icon in the Type area. To edit the thickness of the path, select Thickness from the Properties list, and edit the value in the Thickness box. To edit the width of the path, select Width from the Properties list, and edit the value in the Width box. Disable the Hug Terrain option by clearing the Hug Terrain? check box in the Properties list. By default, paths are inserted directly onto the terrain. However, if the terrain in your model isnt level, then you want turn off the Hug Terrain option. When the Hug Terrain option is disabled, the path is inserted flat and is positioned at the Terrain Base Level specified in the Terrain Settings.
7.
Click OK.
432
Applying Different Materials to Sidewalks, Pathways, and Driveways

You can apply a different material to any path, sidewalk, or driveway using the Materials Paintbrush. To apply a material to a path element: 1. 2. Display your model in 3D. Make sure the path is visible. Open the Edit menu and select Materials Paintbrush, or click the Materials Paintbrush button on any tabbed toolbar to open the Materials catalog. Select Landscape from the Filter drop-down list. Select a group from which to select materials, and then select the material to apply. Click the path to apply the material. Right-click and select Finish.
3. 4. 5. 6.
Deleting a Sidewalk, Pathway, or Driveway

You can delete a sidewalk, pathway, or driveway. To delete a path: 1. 2. Click the path to select it. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Delete.
Part 8
LANDSCAPING
Garden Beds, Ponds, and Other Filled Areas .435 Edging.................................................................441 Trees, Shrubs, and Plants .................................449 Exterior Furniture...............................................463 Exterior Structures ............................................469 Exterior Lighting ................................................475 Exterior Accessories .........................................481 Irrigation .............................................................487
434
38
GARDEN BEDS, PONDS, AND OTHER FILLED AREAS
Unlike gardening in the real world, using HGTV home design software, you can create garden beds instantly by picking points to define the outline of the bed. The bed is then automatically filled with a material of your choice, such as soil or bark. The Fills feature is useful for more than just garden beds. You can choose Water to create a pond, or Sand to create a horseshoe pit, among many other applications. For tips on creating a garden pond, see the HGTV Videos CD for more from the experts at HGTV.
Creating Filled Areas......................................................................................... 436 Moving a Filled Area.......................................................................................... 437 Rotating a Filled Area........................................................................................ 437 Resizing a Filled Area ....................................................................................... 437 Reshaping a Filled Area .................................................................................... 438 Curving a Filled Area......................................................................................... 439 Changing the Fill Material.................................................................................. 439 Deleting a Filled Area ........................................................................................ 440
436
Creating Filled Areas

You can use the Fills feature to define an area filled with soil, sand, gravel, concrete, bark, or water. You define the area by picking points to draw its outline. Filled areas automatically hug the terrain on which they are inserted. To create a filled area: 1. 2. 3. 4. Open the Insert menu and select Landscape > Fills, or click the Fills button in the Landscape toolbar. In the Fills catalog, select the fill material. In the project workspace area, click to select a start point for the filled area. Continue selecting points to define the boundary of the filled area. Dont select the start point twice. The last point picked always closes back at the start point. 5. Right-click and select Finish.
Tip: To create a raised garden, you might want to insert a raised garden box from the catalog. For more information, see Inserting Exterior Structures on page 470. Note: You cannot insert one fill on top of another fill.
CHAPTER 38: GARDEN BEDS, PONDS, AND OTHER FILLED AREAS 437
Moving a Filled Area

You can move a filled area using the Move feature. To move a filled area: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click the filled area to select it. Right-click and select Move, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Move. Click and drag to move the filled area. When the filled area is positioned, release your mouse button.
Rotating a Filled Area

You can rotate a filled area using the Rotate feature. To rotate a filled area: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Click the filled area to select it. Right-click and select Rotate, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Rotate. Click a base point for the rotation, such as a corner of the bed. The Rotate pointer is displayed. Without pressing your mouse button, move the pointer to rotate the filled area. When the filled area is positioned, click to anchor it.
Resizing a Filled Area

You can resize a filled area by stretching one of its edges. To resize a filled area by stretching it: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Click the filled area to select it. Click the edge you want to stretch. Hover your pointer over the solid blue grip, or, right-click and select Move Edge to display the Move pointer. Click and drag to stretch the filled area. When the filled area is positioned, release your mouse button.
438
Reshaping a Filled Area

You can change the shape of a filled area by stretching its corners, or clicking and dragging its grips. To reshape a filled area by stretching: 1. Click the filled area to select it. A grip appears at each corner.
2.
Click and drag a corner grip to stretch the filled area.
3.
When the filled area is positioned, release your mouse button.
CHAPTER 38: GARDEN BEDS, PONDS, AND OTHER FILLED AREAS 439
Curving a Filled Area

You can curve the edge of a fill using the Curve feature. When the feature is active, you can click and drag the edge to curve it, or select a point to which to curve. To curve a fill edge by clicking and dragging: 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. Click the filled area edge to select it. Right-click and select Curve, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Curve. Click and drag the filled area edge. When the filled area edge is positioned, release your mouse button. Click the filled area edge to select it. Right-click and select Curve, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Curve. In the project workspace, click a point to be the center of the curve. The filled area edge automatically curves to the point.
To curve a fill edge to a selected point:
Changing the Fill Material

You can use the Materials Paintbrush to change the look of a fill. To change the fill material: 1. 2. Display your model in 3D. Make sure the filled area is visible. Open the Edit menu and select Materials Paintbrush, or click the Materials Paintbrush button on any tabbed toolbar to open the Materials catalog. Select Landscape from the Filter drop-down list.
Tip: The Landscape Materials category contains fill materials like
3.
water, sand and gravel. 4. 5. 6. In the Materials catalog, select a group from which to select materials, and then select the material to apply. Click filled area surface to apply the material. Right-click and select Finish.
440
Deleting a Filled Area

You can delete a filled area. To delete a filled area: 1. 2. Click the filled area to select it. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, right-click and select Delete, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Delete.
Note: Deleting a fill returns the terrain to its original state.
39
EDGING
Edging can be an attractive accent around gardens, ponds, sidewalks, driveways, and other areas. It can also help retain fill materials and keep weeds out of your garden. You can choose from PVC lawn edging, wood posts, or rails. You draw edging by pointing and clicking to define the start and end point of the edging, and then you continue clicking to add more segments.
Inserting Edging ................................................................................................ 442 Cleaning Up the Corners of Edging................................................................... 443 Moving Edging................................................................................................... 443 Rotating Edging................................................................................................. 444 Changing the Length of Edging......................................................................... 444 Breaking Edging ................................................................................................ 445 Curving Edging.................................................................................................. 445 Editing Edging Properties.................................................................................. 446 Changing the Edging Material ........................................................................... 446 Deleting Edging ................................................................................................. 447
442
Inserting Edging
Use the Edging feature to add PVC lawn edging, wood posts, or wood, brick, or concrete rails to your landscape design. The width and height of the edging is determined in the edging materials properties. You insert edging by picking points to define the end points and direction of the edging. To insert edging: 1. 2. 3. 4. Open the Insert menu and select Landscape > Edging, or click the Edging button on the Landscape toolbar. In the Edging catalog, select the edging material. Click in the project workspace to select a start point for the edging. Move your pointer in the direction you want the edging to run, and then click to select an endpoint for the edging. You can continue selecting points in any direction to add more sections to the edging. 5. Right-click and select Finish.
Tip: You can also insert decorative borders around a garden. See Inserting Exterior Accessories on page 482.
CHAPTER 39: EDGING 443
Cleaning Up the Corners of Edging

If you edged around an area with posts or rails, you will notice that the edging members connect on center at the corners. You might want to lengthen the members to form completely flush intersections.
To clean up the corners of edging: 1. 2. 3. Click the edging member that you want to clean up to select it. appear at the center and ends of the edging. Hover your pointer over the end grip to display the Lengthen pointer. Click and drag the edging so that it overlaps the other side of the edging, and then release your mouse button. Click to select the other edging member. Click and drag the end so that overlaps the inside edge of the member you just lengthened. Release your mouse button.
4. 5. 6.
Moving Edging
You can move a piece of edging by clicking and dragging it. If the edging member is attached to any other edging members, the other members move along with it. To move edging: 1. Click the edging member to select it. To move multiple edging members, press Shift and click to select other members. Blue grips appear at the center and ends of the edging 2. 3. 4. Hover your pointer over the center blue grip to display the Move pointer. Click and drag to move the edging. When the edging is positioned, release your mouse button.
444
Rotating Edging
You can use the Rotate feature to rotate edging about a selected point. To rotate edging: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click the edging to select it. Blue grips appear at the center and ends of the edging. Right-click and select Rotate, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Rotate. Click a base point for the rotation, such as a corner of the bed. The Rotate pointer is displayed. When the edging is positioned, then release your mouse button.
Changing the Length of Edging

You can lengthen or shorten edging by clicking and dragging its end points. To change the length of edging: 1. 2. 3. Click the edging to select it. Blue grips appear at the center and ends of the edging. Hover the mouse pointer over the edging end you want to stretch to display the Lengthen pointer. Click and drag the edging end to make it longer or shorter.
4.
Release the mouse button.
Breaking Edging
When you create a break in edging, you can select and edit the portions on either side of the break independently. To create a break in edging: 1. 2. 3. Click the edging to select it. Right-click and select Break, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Break. Click to break the edging.
Curving Edging
You can curve a section of edging using the Curve feature. You can click and drag the edging to curve it, or select a point to which to curve the edging. To curve edging by clicking and dragging: 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Click the edging to select it. Right-click and select Curve, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Curve. Click and drag the edging to curve it. Release the mouse button. Click the edging to select it. Right-click in and select Curve, or select open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Curve. In the project workspace, click a point to be the center of the curve. Click to finish. The edging automatically curves to the point.
To curve edging to a selected point:
446
Editing Edging Properties

You can edit the type, height, and width of edging by setting edging properties. To edit the height or width of edging: 1. 2. Click the edging to select it. To select multiple segments, press Shift and click. Right-click and select Properties, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Properties to open the Edging Properties dialog. To edit the height of the edging, select Edge Height in the Properties list, and then edit the value in the Edge Height box. To edit the width of the edging, select Edge Width in the Properties list, and then edit the value in the Edge Width box.
Note: You cant edit the width of PVC edging.
3. 4.
5.
If you are editing post edging, you can control the spacing between posts. Select Approx. Edge Spacing in the Properties list, and then edit the value in the Approx. Edge Spacing box. Click OK.
6.
Changing the Edging Material

You can apply a different color or material to edging using the Materials Paintbrush. To apply different materials to edging: 1. 2. Display your model in 3D. Make sure the edging is visible. Open the Edit menu and select Materials Paintbrush, or click the Materials Paintbrush button on any tabbed toolbar to open the Materials catalog. In the Materials catalog, select a group from which to select materials, and then select the material to apply. Click the edging to apply the material. The material is immediately applied. 5. Right-click and select Finish.
3. 4.
Deleting Edging
You can delete edging. To delete edging: 1. 2. Click the edging to select it. To select multiple edging segments press Shift and click. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Delete.
448
40
TREES, SHRUBS, AND PLANTS
Trees, shrubs, plants, and flowers can bring your landscape to life. You can choose from over 7,500 plants to create a beautiful landscape. You insert plants by clicking the mouse button. Once inserted, plants can be dragged and dropped. You can even make them grow. To learn more about a particular species of plant, you can view the plants light, water, temperature, and soil requirements in the plant properties. For even more detailed information you can browse through the comprehensive Plant Encyclopedia. For planting tips from the experts at HGTV, see the HGTV Videos CD.
Inserting Plants.................................................................................................. 450 Moving a Plant................................................................................................... 451 Editing Plant Properties..................................................................................... 451 Seeing Plant Growth Over Time........................................................................ 454 Applying Seasonal Changes to Plants .............................................................. 455 Deleting a Plant ................................................................................................. 455 Using the Plant Encyclopedia............................................................................ 456 Adding Plants to the Catalog from the Encyclopedia ........................................ 462
450
Inserting Plants
Plants are inserted with a mouse click. When inserted, they can be dragged and dropped anywhere in the drawing. To insert a plant: 1. 2. Open the Insert menu and select Landscape > Plants, or click the Plants button on the Landscape toolbar. In the Plants catalog, select the plant to insert.
To view the plants size or requirements before inserting it, rightclick the plant name in the Plants list, and select Properties. 3. 4. Position the plant and then click to insert it. Right-click and select Finish.
Note: Although the catalog contains a wide variety of plants for you to insert, it does not contain all the plants listed in the Plant Encyclopedia. You can insert plants directly from the Encyclopedia. You can also add plants from the Encyclopedia to the current catalog.
CHAPTER 40: TREES, SHRUBS, AND PLANTS 451
Moving a Plant
You can move a plant by clicking and dragging it. To move a plant: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click the plant to select it. Hover your pointer over the plants center grip to display the Move pointer. Click and drag to move the plant. When the plant is positioned, release your mouse button.
Editing Plant Properties

By editing plant properties, you can change the age, appearance, and size of a plant. To edit plant properties: 1. 2. Click the plant to select it. Right-click and select Properties, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Properties to open the Plants properties dialog. Using the Plants properties dialog, you can complete the following tasks: Change the age of a plant. Edit the appearance of a plant. Change the size of a plant.
3.
452
Changing the Age of a Plant

The age of a plant determines its size at planting time. You can increase or decrease the age of a plant. To change the age of a plant: 1. 2. To change the age of a plant, begin on the Plant Info tab of the Plants properties dialog. Drag the Planting Age slider in the Growth area. Planting age is measured in years. Dragging to the right ages the tree, and dragging to the left makes the plant younger.
3.
Continue editing plant properties, or click OK to close the Plant properties dialog.
Editing the Appearance of a Plant in 2D Plan View

By default, plants are represented by circles in 2D Plan View. At the center of the circle is a smaller circle that represents the trunk. You can choose from three 2D plant styles. You can also change the diameter of the trunk in 2D, or hide the trunk altogether. To edit the style of a plant in 2D: 1. To edit the appearance of a plant in 2D Plan View, begin on the Size tab of the Plants properties dialog. Image: Size tab of Plants properties 2. 3. Change the circle type by selecting an icon in the Type area. Edit the values in the Properties list to continue to change appearance of the plant in 2D Plan View. To hide the plant in 2D Plant View, select Show trunk in plan, and then select No from the Show trunk in plan dropdown list. To change the plants size, select Trunk Diameter, and then edit the value in the Trunk Diameter box.
4.
Continue editing plant properties, or click OK to close the Plant properties dialog.
454
Changing the Plant Size

The size of a plant is determined by properties in the Plant Encyclopedia. However, you can specify a custom height and width for a plant. If you do this, the plants size changes in both 2D and 3D regardless of the Planting Age set in the Plants properties.
Note: To see a plant at a different maturity level, change the planting age instead. You can also change all of the ages in your landscape.
To change the size of a plant: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. To change the size of a plant, begin on the Size tab of the Plants properties dialog. Select Size from encyclopedia, and then select No from the Size from encyclopedia drop-down list. To change the width of the plant, select Width and then edit value in the Width box. To change the height of the plant in 3D view, select Height and then edit the value in the Height box. Continue editing plant properties, or click OK to close the Plant properties dialog.
Seeing Plant Growth Over Time

After inserting plants in a landscape plan, you can see how they will look any number of years later by using the Plant Growth Over Time feature. To see plant growth over time: 1. 2. 3. Open the Tools menu and select Gardening > Plant Growth Over Time to open the Plant Growth Over Time dialog. Enter the number of years to add to your landscape in the Number of Years box. Click OK.
Applying Seasonal Changes to Plants

The Plant Seasonal Change feature updates the appearance of plants in your drawing to reflect a particular season. Typically, the change applies to flowering plants and trees that have a certain bloom time. You specify the season by adjusting the time of year on the Global Settings page of the Program Settings dialog. To apply seasonal changes to your plants: 1. Open the Tools menu and select Gardening > Plant Seasonal Change to open the Program Settings dialog. Image: Global Settings tab of Program Settings To change the date, you use the calendar in the Date area. 2. 3. 4. Select a month by clicking the arrows next to the name of the month in the calendar. Select a day by clicking a number on the calendar. Click OK. The plants in your drawing are updated according to the time of year you specified.
Note: Seasonal changes might have different results depending on the plant properties in the Plant Encyclopedia depending on factors such as the climate of the region the plant is in, and the plants world origin.
Deleting a Plant
You can delete a plant. To delete a plant: 1. 2. Click the plant to select it. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, right-click and select Delete, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Delete.
456
Using the Plant Encyclopedia

The Plant Encyclopedia contains comprehensive information on over 7,500 different varieties of plants. The Encyclopedia has many uses related to the selection and care of plants. You can view information about any plant, select plants based on certain criteria, research potential diseases, and learn how to care for your plants. To open the Plant Encyclopedia, open the Tools menu and select Gardening > Plant Encyclopedia. You can also open the Plant Encyclopedia by clicking the Encyclopedia button on a plants Encyclopedia property page. Scroll through the Plant List to select the plant you want to view. To search for a plant, enter the first few letters of its name in the Search Edit box. Click Select Button to insert the plant you are viewing into your drawing.
Usage Window Plant Info Season Color Diagram
Plant Height
Plant List
Select Button
Plant Width
Search Edit Box
Inserting Plants from the Encyclopedia

By default, the Plants catalog contains only a subset of the plants available in the Plant Encyclopedia. You can insert a plant directly from the Plant Encyclopedia. To insert a plant from the Encyclopedia: 1. 2. Open Tools menu and select Gardening > Plant Encyclopedia. Scroll through the plant list to find an appropriate plant. Click the plant name to learn more about the plant. Or, if you know the name of the plant you want to insert, enter the name of the plant in the Search Edit field above the plant list. By default, common plant names are listed in the plant list. You can switch to Latin names by clicking the Latin button. Image: plant_list.gif 3. 4. 5. Click the Select button. The Encyclopedia closes, and the plant is attached to the pointer. Click to insert the plant in your landscape. Right-click and select Finish.
458
Viewing Plant Information

The Plant Encyclopedias main page displays images and basic information about the currently selected plant. Usage. The Usage area lists all possible ways you can use the plant. Click a usage option to open the Plant Usage catalog and see a brief description. Soil/Zone/Lifetime. The Soil/Zone/Lifetime area indicates the following properties: The Soil Preference, for example, alkaline, acidic, or heavy. The Zone, ranging from 1 for Sub-Arctic to 10 for SubTropical. The Lifetime, which is the life expectancy of the plant in years.
Each of the items in the Soil/Zone/Lifetime area has a tool tip. If you hover your pointer over the item, a small pop-up window opens displaying a brief description of the item. For example, if you hover your pointer over the soil preference icon, a window displays the preferred soil type.
Plant Type and Needs. The Plant Type and Needs bar is located to the right of the Usage area. Each icon represents a different property of the plant. These properties include: Each of the icons in this window has a tool tip. If you hover your cursor over the icon, a small pop-up window opens displaying a brief description of the icon.
Season Color Diagram. The Season Color Diagram circle gives you an idea of what you can expect from the chosen plant throughout the year. The outer circle shows the months in which the plant blooms and the color of its flowers. Fruits are also indicated in the Season Color Diagram, showing the period when they ripen and the color of their fruit. The inner circle indicates when the plant has foliage, including autumn leaves, and the color of its leaves. Plant Views Two plant views are shown in the Plant Views area, overhead and profile. The overhead view shows you a textured view of the plant from above. The profile view gives you an idea of the plants height and spread, and shows you what the plant will look like in 3D.
Note: The profile view shows the plants total height. If the plant is a vegetable, this includes the underground portion. If the plant is a water plant, this includes the underwater portion. The width of bushes and flowers can be affected by how they are pruned. A plant will reach optimum size at maturity and under favorable conditions.
460
Filtering the Plant List

Using the Plant Encyclopedias Plant Filter, you can filter out unwanted plants. To use the Plant Filter: 1. In the Plant Encyclopedia, select the Plant Filter tab, located on the left of the dialog. Along the top of the Plant Encyclopedia, there are six tabs. Each tab contains criteria for filtering plants. The total number of plants availablebased on the filters you have appliedis indicated on the leaf in the upper right corner of the window. Image: leaf On the Plant Filter general tab, select plant Type, Watering needs, Lighting requirements, Temperature requirements, Soil type, Zone, height, blooming season, and color of flower, leaf, or fruit. On the Plant Care Calendar tab, select plant Lifetime, Complexity of care required, speed of Growth for both height and spread, and Usage. The Custom area contains two search options. Click Or to search for each property. Click And to search for all properties. For example, if you select Ground cover plant and Nonpoisonous, clicking Or returns the plants that either ground cover or non-poisonous. Clicking And returns plants that are both ground cover and non-poisonous. On the World Map tab, select the region of the world from which the plants originate. For example, to find plants for an Asian-themed water garden, click Asia on the map to exclude any plants that arent indigenous to Asia. On the Notebook tab, you can filter plants by notes that youve previously entered. For example, you could enter the note Front Yard for all plants that you want to use in your front yard. When you are ready to lay out the front yard of your landscape plan you can go back to the Plant Filter and limit the plant list to only the plants you initially selected for your front yard.
On the Picture tab, You can limit the plant list by the part of the plant shown in its photo. For example, if you want to see only cacti, click the picture of the cactus.
The Diseases tab is different from the other tabs. Here you filter the disease list, not the plant list. On the Disease tab, click the image that represents the affected part of the plant or the type of infestation. Select the Encyclopedia tab on the left side of the window to go to the Plant Encyclopedia Diseases page. For example, if you are considering planting lilies or daffodils in your garden, and want to know what type of diseases these bulb plants may encounter, click the picture of the bulb on the Plant Filter Diseases page. Click the Encyclopedia tab and select the Diseases page.
2.
Select the criteria for filtering. If you click an icon and then change your mind about filtering that criteria, click it again to deselect it.
Note: If some of the icons disappear, it is because no such plant is selectable within the current criteria. For example, if you select minimal water, the climber plant type icon will disappear because there are no climbing plants that will accept minimal watering.
If you select more than one icon within a single group, then all plants with any of the checked properties are selected. For example, if you select maximum light and medium light, all plants that flourish under minimal light, or shade, conditions are eliminated. If options of more than one type are selected, then plants that satisfy all of the chosen criteria are selected. For example, if you click on the deciduous tree icon in the Type area, the full sun icon in the Lighting Preference area, and the white square in the Color area, then only hardwood trees that flourish in full sunlight, require minimal watering, and produce white flowers are selected. 3. 4. To restore the complete list of plants, click Reset. When you have finished selecting criteria, close the Plant Encyclopedia.
462
Adding Plants to the Catalog from the Encyclopedia

Although the catalog contains a variety of plants that you can insert, it doesnt contain all of the plants listed in the Plant Encyclopedia. You can add any plant from the Plant Encyclopedia to any catalog. To add a plant from the encyclopedia to the current catalog: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Open the File menu and select Catalogs > Catalog Manager to open the Catalog Manager window. Select Plants from the Elements menu in the Catalog Manager window. Select a group to add the plant to from the Groups list. Open the Edit menu and select Add Element to open the Plants properties dialog. Select the Plant Info tab. Click the Encyclopedia button to open the Plant Encyclopedia. Select the plant from the plant list, and then click Select. The Plants properties dialog contains the selected plants information. You can set other plant properties while the Plants properties dialog is open. The settings on the Appearance tab dont affect the plants appearance. The appearance of a plant is determined by settings in the Encyclopedia. 8. 9. Click OK to close the Plants properties dialog. Click OK to close the Catalog Manager window. The plant is added to the catalog.
41
EXTERIOR FURNITURE
The catalog includes a selection of exterior furniture so you can relax, eat, and entertain outdoors. Furniture types include patio tables, patio chairs, picnic tables, loungers, and benches.
Note: For information about interior furniture, see Inserting Interior Furniture on page 298.
Inserting Exterior Furniture................................................................................ 464 Moving Exterior Furniture .................................................................................. 465 Rotating Exterior Furniture ................................................................................ 465 Editing the Properties of Exterior Furniture ....................................................... 466 Applying Different Materials to Exterior Furniture.............................................. 467 Deleting Exterior Furniture ................................................................................ 467
464
Inserting Exterior Furniture

The catalog contains a variety of outdoor furnishings. When inserting exterior furniture, you have the option of inserting it on the terrain or on a building location. To insert exterior furniture: 1. Open the Insert menu and select Landscape > Exterior Furniture, or click the Exterior Furniture button on the Landscape toolbar. Select either Exterior Furniture on Terrain or Exterior Furniture on Location, depending on where you want to insert the element. Using the Exterior Furniture on Location option, you can insert the furniture on a deck or on anything that is associated with a building location. Using the Exterior Furniture on Terrain option, you can insert furniture only on the grounds of the model. 3. 4. 5. In the Exterior Furniture catalog, select the furnishing to insert. Position the light, and then click to insert it. Right-click and select Finish.
2.
CHAPTER 41: EXTERIOR FURNITURE 465
Moving Exterior Furniture

You can move exterior furniture by clicking and dragging it. To move exterior furniture: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click the furnishing to select it. Hover your pointer over the elements center grip to display the Move pointer. Click and drag to move the light fixture. When the light fixture is positioned, release your mouse button.
Rotating Exterior Furniture

You can rotate exterior furniture by clicking and dragging it. To rotate exterior furniture: 1. 2. 3. Click the furnishing to select it. Right-click and select Rotate. Click the center grip to display the Rotate pointer.
4. 5.
Click and drag to rotate the furnishing. When the furnishing is positioned, release your mouse button.
466
Editing the Properties of Exterior Furniture

You can edit properties such as the height, width, and depth of exterior furniture. To edit the properties of exterior furniture: 1. 2. Click the furnishing to select it. Right-click and select Properties, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Properties to open the Exterior Furniture properties dialog.
The available properties vary based on the type of furnishing element. The Exterior Furniture properties dialog includes an image pane in which you can see a preview of the selected furnishing. When you select a dimension marked with a letter, such as a, b, or c, the corresponding area is highlighted in the diagram to the left of the Properties list. 3. To edit the size of a furnishing element, edit the values in the Properties list on the Basic tab. For example, to change the height of a bench, select Height from the Properties list, and then edit the value in the Height box. The Uniform Scale property ensures that the element resizes proportionally when you change one of its dimensions. 4. When you are finished setting properties, click OK to close the Exterior Furniture properties dialog.
CHAPTER 41: EXTERIOR FURNITURE 467
Applying Different Materials to Exterior Furniture

You can use the Materials Paintbrush to apply a color, fabric, or finish to any exterior furnishing element. To apply a material to an exterior furnishing element: 1. 2. Display your model in 3D. Make sure the furnishing element is visible. Open the Edit menu and select Materials Paintbrush, or click the Materials Paintbrush button on any tabbed toolbar. In the Materials catalog, select a group from which to select materials, and then select the material to apply.
Tip: To show only materials applicable to furniture, select Furniture from the Filter drop-down list in the Materials catalog.
3.
4.
Click the furnishing to apply the material. Materials are applied separately to the individual parts of an element. For example, you can apply a specific paint color to the seat of a bench.
5.
Deleting Exterior Furniture

To delete an exterior furnishing: 1. 2. Click the furnishing to select it. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Delete.
468
42
EXTERIOR STRUCTURES
HGTV Home & Landscape offers a selection of exterior structures to make your outdoor living space more functional. Exterior structures include play gyms, swings, sandboxes, trampolines, tennis and volleyball courts, detached garages, sheds, gazebos, arbors, garden boxes, greenhouses, pools, and hot tubs. If you are creating a landscape plan and do not have a model in your project, you can insert a house template to create your landscape plan around. All structures are inserted by clicking and can be moved, rotated, and edited.
Inserting Exterior Structures .............................................................................. 470 Inserting a House Template............................................................................... 470 Moving Exterior Structures ................................................................................ 472 Rotating Exterior Structures .............................................................................. 472 Editing the Properties of an Exterior Structure .................................................. 473 Applying Different Materials to Exterior Structures............................................ 474 Deleting an Exterior Structure ........................................................................... 474
470
Inserting Exterior Structures

You can exterior structures by pointing and clicking. To insert an exterior structure: 1. Open the Insert menu and select Landscape > Exterior Structures, or click the Exterior Structures button on the Landscape toolbar. In the Exterior Structures catalog, select the structure to insert. Position the structure, and then click to insert it. Right-click and select Finish.
2. 3. 4.
Inserting a House Template

A house template is an exterior shell of a finished home. If you are creating a landscape plan and your project doesnt contain a model, you can insert a house template to serve as the focal point of your plan. Although a house template looks like a real house, it cant be edited like a real model can. It is considered a single-click element, so clicking any part of the template selects the entire house.
CHAPTER 42: EXTERIOR STRUCTURES 471
To insert a house template: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Select Insert > Landscape > Exterior Structures, or click the Exterior Structures button on the Landscape toolbar. Select the House Templates from the Groups list in the Exterior Structures catalog. Select the house template from the Exterior Structures list. Position the template, and then click to insert it. Right-click and select Finish.
When you select a house template, the invisible bounding box is always square or rectangular, and does not necessarily follow the shape of the house outline. This can interfere with the selection of other elements near the house. If you have inserted elements around the house, such as plants, and want to select them, use the View Filter to make the house template non-selectable to edit your landscape plan more easily. For more information about making an element non-selectable, see Making Items Selectable or Non-Selectable on page 129.
The house templates exterior walls are not visible in 2D views. You see only the roof line. To insert elements, such as fills, against the exterior walls of the house, you must either draw them in 3D or draw them in 2D and then move them into place in 3D.
472
Moving Exterior Structures

You can move exterior structures in by clicking and dragging them. To move an exterior structure: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click the structure to select it. Hover your pointer over the elements center grip to display the Move pointer. Click and drag to move the structure. When the structure is positioned, release your mouse button.
Rotating Exterior Structures

You can rotate exterior structures by clicking and dragging them. To rotate an exterior structure: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click the structure to select it. Hover the pointer over the triangular grip to display the Rotate pointer. Click and drag to rotate the structure. When the structure is positioned, release your mouse button.
CHAPTER 42: EXTERIOR STRUCTURES 473
Editing the Properties of an Exterior Structure

You can edit exterior structure properties, including height, width, and depth. To edit the properties of an exterior structure: 1. 2. Click the structure to insert it. Right-click and select Properties, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Properties to open the Exterior Structures properties dialog.
The available properties vary based on the type of furnishing element. The Exterior Structure properties dialog includes an image pane in which you can see a preview of the selected structure. 3. To change the size and shape of a structure, edit the dimensions in the Properties list. For example, to change the structures width, select Width in the Properties list, and then edit the value in the Width box. When you select a dimension marked with a letter, such as a, b, or c, the corresponding area is highlighted in the diagram to the left of the Properties list. 4. Continue setting structure properties, or click OK to close the Exterior Structure properties dialog.
474
Applying Different Materials to Exterior Structures

You can use the Materials Paintbrush to apply a color or finish to any exterior structure. To apply a material to an exterior structure: 1. 2. Display your model in 3D. Make sure the structure is visible. Open the Edit menu and select Materials Paintbrush, or click the Materials Paintbrush button on any tabbed toolbar. In the Materials catalog, select a group from which to select materials, and then select the material to apply. Click the structure to apply the material. Materials might be applied separately to the individual parts of a structure. For example, the roof of a shed can be different from the sheds walls. 5. When you are finished applying materials, right-click and select Finish.
3. 4.
Deleting an Exterior Structure

To delete an exterior structure: 1. 2. Click the structure to select it. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Delete.
43
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
Outdoor lighting can beautify any landscape and offers security and visibility at night. Lighting can also play an important part when you create exterior 3D Real View renderings. HGTV Home & Landscape offers light posts, wall lights, and ground lighting to enhance the exterior design of your home. You can change their bulbs for different lighting effects, and turn them on and off. Exterior lighting can be inserted on the terrain, or on a building location.
Note: For information about interior lighting, see Interior Lighting on page 311.
Inserting Exterior Lighting.................................................................................. 476 Moving an Exterior Light Fixture........................................................................ 477 Editing the Properties of an Exterior Light Fixture............................................. 477 Applying Different Materials to Exterior Light Fixtures ...................................... 478 Deleting an Exterior Light Fixture ...................................................................... 479
476
Inserting Exterior Lighting

You can insert a variety of outdoor lighting fixtures. When inserting an exterior light fixture, you can insert it on the terrain or on a building location. Lights are particularly important if you plan to create a 3D Real View of your model (see 3D Real View on page 615), because the program uses light to calculate and create the rendered view. To insert an exterior light fixture: 1. Open the Insert menu and select Landscape > Exterior Lighting, or click the Exterior Lighting button on the Landscape toolbar. Select either Exterior Lighting on Terrain or Exterior Lighting on Location, depending on where you want to insert the element. Using the Exterior Lighting on Location option, you can insert the light fixture on a deck or on anything that is associated with a building location. Using the Exterior Lighting on Terrain option, you can insert the light fixture only on the grounds of the model. 3. In the Exterior Lighting catalog, select the light to insert.
2.
4. 5.
Position the light where you want it, then click to insert it. Right-click and select Finish.
Note: If you switch to Rendered or Rendered Outline display mode, you can see instant lighting effects as you position and insert light fixtures.
CHAPTER 43: EXTERIOR LIGHTING 477
Moving an Exterior Light Fixture

You can move light fixtures by clicking and dragging them. To move a light fixture: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click the light fixture to select it. Hover your pointer over the light fixtures center grip to display the Move pointer. Click and drag to move the light fixture. When the light fixture is positioned, release your mouse button.
Editing the Properties of an Exterior Light Fixture

You can edit exterior light fixture properties, such as the overall height, width, and depth of light fixtures. To edit the properties of an exterior light fixture: 1. 2. Click the light fixture to select it. Right-click and select Properties, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Properties to open the Exterior Lighting properties dialog.
Light fixture styles and size properties vary depending on the light fixture. When you edit light fixture properties, you can see a preview of the light fixture in the image pane of the Exterior Lighting properties dialog.
478
3.
On the Basic tab, you can edit the type and dimensions of a light fixture. To change the light fixture type, click an icon in the Type area. To change the size and shape of a light fixture, edit the dimensions in the Properties list. For example, to change the fixture width, select Width in the Properties list, and then edit the value in the Width box. When you select a dimension marked with a letter, such as a, b, or c, the corresponding area is highlighted in the diagram to the left of the Properties list.
4.
Continue setting light fixture properties, or click OK to close the Exterior Lighting properties dialog.
To learn how to turn a light fixture on or off, see Turning a Light On or Off on page 316. To learn how to edit a light fixtures light source, see Editing a Light Fixtures Light Source on page 317.
Applying Different Materials to Exterior Light Fixtures

You can use the Materials Paintbrush to apply different colors or materials to different parts of a light fixture. For example, you can change the color of a lamp post. To change the look of an exterior light fixture: 1. 2. Display your model in 3D. Make sure the light fixture is visible. Open the Edit menu and select Materials Paintbrush, or click the Materials Paintbrush button on any tabbed toolbar. In the Materials catalog, select a group from which to select materials, and then select the material to apply. Click the light fixture to apply the material. Materials are applied separately to the individual parts of the light fixture. 5. When you are finished applying materials, right-click and select Finish.
3. 4.
CHAPTER 43: EXTERIOR LIGHTING 479
Deleting an Exterior Light Fixture

You can delete an exterior light fixture. To delete an exterior light fixture: 1. 2. Click the fixture to select it. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Delete.
480
44
EXTERIOR ACCESSORIES
Using HGTV Home & Landscape you can add decorative accents and accessories. Point and click to insert a vast array of items, including fireplaces, fountains, wind chimes, decorative columns, corner accents, garden borders, weather vanes, door mats, patio umbrellas, trellises, bird baths, mailboxes, cars, and planters.
Note: For information about interior accessories, see Inserting Interior Accessories on page 299.
Inserting Exterior Accessories........................................................................... 482 Moving Exterior Accessories ............................................................................. 483 Rotating Exterior Accessories ........................................................................... 483 Raising or Lowering an Exterior Accessory....................................................... 483 Editing the Properties of an Exterior Accessory ................................................ 484 Applying Different Materials to Exterior Accessories......................................... 485 Deleting an Exterior Accessory ......................................................................... 485
482
Inserting Exterior Accessories

Exterior accessories include many options from bird baths to weather vanes. Inserting exterior accessories is easyjust point and click. You can insert exterior accessories on the terrain or on a building location. To insert an exterior accessory: 1. Open the Insert menu and select Landscape > Exterior Accessories, or click the Exterior Accessories button on the Landscape toolbar. Select either Exterior Accessories on Terrain or Exterior Accessories on Location, depending on where you want to insert the element. Using the Exterior Accessories on Location option, you can insert elements on a deck or on anything that is associated with a building location. Using the Exterior Accessories on Terrain option, you can insert elements only on the grounds of the model. 3. 4. 5. In the Exterior Accessories catalog, select the accessory to insert. Position the accessory, and then click to insert it. Right-click and select Finish.
2.
CHAPTER 44: EXTERIOR ACCESSORIES 483
Moving Exterior Accessories

You can move exterior accessories by clicking and dragging them. To move an exterior accessory: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click the accessory to select it. Hover the pointer over the accessorys center grip to display the Move pointer. Click and drag to move the accessory. When the accessory is positioned, release the mouse button.
Rotating Exterior Accessories

You can rotate exterior accessories by clicking and dragging them. To rotate an exterior accessory: 1. 2. 3. Click the accessory to select it. Right-click and select Rotate. Click the center grip to display the Rotate pointer.
4. 5.
Click and drag to rotate the accessory. When the accessory is positioned, release your mouse button.
Raising or Lowering an Exterior Accessory

You can raise or lower an exterior accessory using the Elevate feature. To edit an exterior accessorys elevation: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click the exterior accessory to select it. Right-click and select Elevate, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Elevate to open the Elevate dialog. Enter the distance between the exterior accessory and the ground in the Distance box. Click OK.
484
Editing the Properties of an Exterior Accessory

You can edit exterior accessory properties, including height, width, and depth. To edit the properties of an exterior accessory: 1. 2. 3. Click the Select/Edit button on the Landscape toolbar. Click the exterior accessory to select it. Right-click and select Properties, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Properties to open the Exterior Accessories properties dialog.
The available properties vary based on the type of furnishing element. The Exterior Accessories properties dialog includes an image pane in which you can see a preview of the selected accessory. 4. To change the size and shape of an accessory, edit the dimensions in the Properties list. For example, to change the accessorys width, select Width in the Properties list, and then edit the value in the Width box. When you select a dimension marked with a letter, such as a, b, or c, the corresponding area is highlighted in the diagram to the left of the Properties list. 5. Continue setting structure properties, or click OK to close the Exterior Accessories properties dialog.
CHAPTER 44: EXTERIOR ACCESSORIES 485
Applying Different Materials to Exterior Accessories

You can use the Materials Paintbrush to apply a color or finish to any exterior accessory. To apply a material to an exterior accessory: 1. 2. Display your model in 3D. Make sure the accessory is visible. Open the Edit menu and select Materials Paintbrush, or click the Materials Paintbrush button on any tabbed toolbar. In the Materials catalog, select a group from which to select materials, and then select the material to apply. Click the structure to apply the material. Materials might be applied separately to the individual parts of an accessory. For example, the roof of a shed can be different from the sheds walls. 5. When you are finished applying materials, right-click and select Finish.
3. 4.
Deleting an Exterior Accessory

You can delete an exterior accessory. To delete an exterior accessory: 1. 2. Click the accessory to select it. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Delete.
486
45
IRRIGATION
You can insert pop-up sprinklers in your landscape plan. The catalog contains a wide selection of pop-up sprinklers with varying ranges of spray. When you insert a sprinkler, the coverage of the spray is outlined in a dashed line. For expert advice about landscape drainage and irrigation, see the HGTV Videos CD.
Inserting Irrigation.............................................................................................. 488 Moving Sprinklers .............................................................................................. 488 Rotating Sprinklers ............................................................................................ 489 Editing Sprinkler Properties ............................................................................... 489 Deleting a Sprinkler ........................................................................................... 490
488
Inserting Irrigation
The catalog contains a wide selection of pop-up sprinklers with varying ranges of spray. You insert a sprinkler by pointing and clicking. When you insert a sprinkler, the coverage of the spray is outlined with a dashed line. To insert pop-up sprinklers: 1. 2. 3. Open the Insert menu and select Landscape > Irrigation, or click the Irrigation button on the Landscape toolbar. In the Irrigation catalog, select the sprinkler to insert. Position the sprinkler, and then click to insert it. You can continue to insert more sprinklers. 4. Right-click and select Finish.
Moving Sprinklers
You can move a sprinkler by clicking and dragging it. To move a sprinkler: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click the sprinkler to select it. Hover the pointer over the sprinklers center grip to display the Move pointer. Click and drag to move the sprinkler. When the sprinkler is positioned, release the mouse button.
CHAPTER 45: IRRIGATION 489
Rotating Sprinklers
You can rotate a sprinkler and its spray by clicking and dragging its rotation handle. To rotate a sprinkler: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click the sprinkler to select it. Click the triangular grip to display the Rotate pointer. Click and drag to rotate the sprinkler. When the sprinkler is positioned, release your mouse button.
Editing Sprinkler Properties

You can edit sprinkler properties, including the spray coverage and height. By default, all sprinklers in the catalog are 3 tall. To edit sprinkler properties: 1. 2. Click the sprinkler to select it. Right-click and select Properties, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Properties to open the Irrigation properties dialog. To edit the height of a sprinkler, select Height in the Properties list, and then edit the value in the Height box. To edit the width and depth of a sprinklers spray coverage, edit the values in the Properties list on the Basic tab. For example, to change the width of the spray coverage, select Width from the Properties list, and then edit the value in the Width box. The Uniform Scale property ensures that the sprinkler resizes proportionally when you change one of its dimensions. 5. Click OK.
3. 4.
490
Editing Adjustable Sprinkler Properties

If you inserted the Pop-Up Adjustable sprinkler, then you can specify a custom radius and included angle for the spray. 1. 2. Click the sprinkler to select it. Right-click and select Properties, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Properties to open the Irrigation properties dialog. Image: Irrigation properties dialog for Adjustable sprinkler. 3. 4. 5. 6. Select the type of sprinkler in the Type area. Select the Show In 3D check box to display the sprinkler in 3D views. To edit the height of a sprinkler, select Height in the Properties list, and then edit the value in the Height box. To edit the diameter, radius, and spray angle of the spray coverage, edit the properties in the Properties list. For example, to change the diameter of the sprinklers spray, select Diameter from the Properties list, and then edit the value in the Diameter box. 7. Click OK.
Deleting a Sprinkler
You can delete a sprinkler. To delete a sprinkler: 1. 2. Click the sprinkler to select it. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Delete.
Part 9
DRAWING AND EDITING TOOLS
Drawing Aids ......................................................493 Measurement......................................................499 Commander ........................................................505 Editing Elements ................................................ 511
492
46
DRAWING AIDS
HGTV Home & Landscape offers a variety of drawing aids that help you insert elements precisely where you want them in your drawing. You can display a drawing grid in the project workspace. You can set snap grid so that your pointer snaps to the grid when you are inserting elements. The Object Snap feature automatically snaps your pointer to existing objects, and the Angle Snap feature snaps your pointer to specified angles. The Collision Control feature prevents you from inserting elements where they do not fit. You can set up drawing aids in the program settings, and turn them on and off using the buttons on the Status bar.
Setting Up a Drawing Grid................................................................................. 494 Turning the Drawing Grid On and Off................................................................ 494 Using the Grid Snap .......................................................................................... 495 Turning the Grid Snap On and Off..................................................................... 495 Using the Object Snap ...................................................................................... 496 Using Ortho ....................................................................................................... 497 Using Angle Snap.............................................................................................. 497 Turning Collision Control On or Off ................................................................... 498
494
Setting Up a Drawing Grid

A drawing grid is a set of horizontal and vertical lines that can help you orient objects to one another. By default, the spacing between grid lines is 1", but you can change this if you want. You can also control the color and style of the grid. The drawing grid is a visual aid only, and will not be included in printouts. To set up a drawing grid: 1. Open the Settings menu and select Program Settings, or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar to open the Program Settings dialog. Select Drawing Aids in the left column. In the Grid area, select the Enable (F7) check box. Click the Grid Color swatch, and then select a color for the grid from the Color dialog. Open the Grid Style drop-down list and select a style for the grid, either Dots or Lines. Specify the desired distance between vertical grid lines in the X Spacing box. Specify the desired distance between horizontal grid lines in the Y Spacing box. By default, the grid is 150' x 150', which is the default size of the terrain. To change the overall size of the grid, enter the desired width in the X Limit box, and the desired height in the Y Limit box. 8. Click OK.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Turning the Drawing Grid On and Off

You can switch the drawing grid on and off in one of two ways: Press F7 on your keyboard. Click the GRID button on the Status bar.
CHAPTER 46: DRAWING AIDS 495
Using the Grid Snap

The Grid Snap feature snaps your pointer to an invisible grid when inserting elements. By default, the spacing between the grid lines in the invisible grid is 1", but you can change this if you want. If you select the Match Grid option, the invisible snap grid becomes the same size as the drawing grid. This will make it seem like you are snapping to the drawing grid while drawing. To set up a snap grid: 1. Open the Settings menu and select Program Settings or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar to open the Program Settings dialog. Select Drawing Aids in the left column. 3. To make the snap grid the same size as the drawing grid, check the Match Grid check box in the Grid Snap area. To specify a custom distance between vertical grid lines, enter a value in the X Spacing box. To specify a custom distance between horizontal grid lines, enter a value in the Y Spacing box. To turn the grid snap on, select the Enable (F4) check box.
2.
Click OK.
Turning the Grid Snap On and Off

You can switch the grid snap on and off in one of two ways: Press F4 on your keyboard. Click the GRIDSNAP button on the Status bar.
496
Using the Object Snap

The Object Snap feature makes elements that you are currently inserting automatically snap to existing elements in your drawing. For example, if you are drawing a wall and hover your pointer near an existing wall, your pointer will snap to the existing wall, making it easy to create a wall layout with cleanly intersecting walls. By default, the Object Snap is enabled, but you can turn it off whenever you want. There are three ways to turn the Object Snap on or off. To turn the Object Snap on or off: Press F5 on your keyboard. Click the OBJSNAP button on the Status bar. Open the Settings menu and select Program Settings, select Drawing Aids from the left column, and then select or clear the Enable (F5) check box in the Object Snap area.
To set the pixel search distance: 1. Open the Settings menu and select Program Settings or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar to open the Program Settings dialog. Select Drawing Aids in the left column. In the Object Snap area, type the desired number of pixels in the Pixel Search Distance box, or use the arrows to scroll up or down through a list of values. Click OK.
2. 3.
4.
CHAPTER 46: DRAWING AIDS 497
Using Ortho
The Ortho feature restricts your pointer movement to 90-degree angles when you are inserting elements. This can be especially helpful when drawing elements like walls. By default, Ortho is enabled. You can switch it on and off using one of three methods. To turn Ortho on or off: Press F8 on your keyboard. Click the ORTHO button on the Status bar. Open the Settings menu and select Program Settings, select Drawing Aids from the left column, and then select or clear the Ortho (F8) check box.
Using Angle Snap

When the Angle Snap feature is turned on, your pointer snaps to specific angles when rotating an element. If you set your snap angle to 10, for example, your pointer will snap at 10 intervals as you rotate the element. By default, the Angle Snap is on. You can turn the Angle Snap on and off using one of three methods. To turn the Angle Snap on or off: Press F6 on your keyboard. Click the ANGLESNAP button on the Status bar. Open the Settings menu and select Program Settings, select Drawing Aids from the left column, and then select or clear the Angle Snap (F6) check box.
498
To change the snap angle: 1. Open the Settings menu and select Program Settings or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar to open the Program Settings dialog. Select Drawing Aids in the left column. In the Ortho/Angle Snap area, type the desired snap angle in the Snap Angle box, or use the arrows to scroll up or down through a list of values. Click OK.
2. 3.
4.
Turning Collision Control On or Off

The programs intelligent Collision Control feature prevents objects from being inserted where they do not fit. By default, Collision Control is on, but you can turn it off whenever you like using one of three methods. To turn Collision Control on or off: Press F9 on your keyboard. Click the COLLISION button on the Status bar. Open the Settings menu and select Program Settings, select Building Aids from the left column, and then select or clear the Enable Collision Control (F9) check box.
Note: Collision Control affects building elements on the current building location only. It does not affect landscape elements.
47
MEASUREMENT
You can change the unit of measure used in a drawing or select a different level of precision for your measurements. After youve drawn an element, you can measure it using the Measure feature. You can also use the Area/Perimeter feature to calculate the area of your home.
Changing the Unit of Measure........................................................................... 500 Suppressing Metric Units .................................................................................. 502 Measuring Distances......................................................................................... 502 Calculating Area and Perimeter ........................................................................ 503
500
Changing the Unit of Measure

The units of measure used in your project are determined by a template. By default, the templates specify either a feet/inches template or a millimeters template. After youve opened a new project, you can change the units of measure and levels of precision used in that project by making selections on the Units of Measure page of the Program Settings dialog. To set your units of measure: 1. Open the Settings menu and select Program Settings, or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar to open the Program Settings dialog. Select Units of Measure in the left column of the Program Settings dialog.
2.
CHAPTER 47: MEASUREMENT 501
3. 4.
Select either the Imperial or Metric option. To select a unit for distance measurements, select an option from the Units drop-down list. System Imperial Metric Units Available Feet-Inches Inches Millimeters Centimeters Meters
5.
To select a unit for area measurements, select an option from the Area drop-down list. Area measurements appear in the Area/Perimeter Calculator. System Imperial Metric Units Available Square Feet Square Yards Square Meters
6.
Select a level of precision from the Precision drop-down list. For example, selecting a unit precision of #-# #/16" sets the level of precision to 1/16th of an inch when measuring distances in feet and inches.
7.
Select a level of precision for angle measurements, from the Precision drop-down list in the Angles area. Angle measurements are displayed in decimal degrees. The selection you make determines the number of decimal places used.
8.
Click OK.
502
Suppressing Metric Units

If you have chosen to work in Metric units, you can choose to suppress units for length, distance, volume, and area measurements shown in dimensions and dialogs. For example, 1200 mm would appear as 1200. To suppress metric units: 1. Open the Settings menu and select Program Settings or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar to open the Program Settings dialog. In the Program Settings dialog, click Units of Measure in the left column. Select the Metric Units option, and then select the Suppress display of metric units check box. Click OK.
2. 3. 4.
Measuring Distances
Use the Measure feature to measure the distance between any two points in your 2D plan. To use the Measure feature: 1. 2. 3. Open the Tools menu and select Measure. Click in the project workspace to select the first point. Move the pointer in the direction you want to measure. A ruler appears that stretches as you move your pointer.
4.
Click the second point on the screen. The distance is shown on the ruler as well as on the Status bar at the bottom of the screen. After you have measured your first distance, you can keep selecting points to measure additional distances from the last point selected. A running total is displayed on the Status bar.
5.
When you have finished measuring, right-click and select Finish.
CHAPTER 47: MEASUREMENT 503
Calculating Area and Perimeter

The Area/Perimeter Calculator displays the area, such as square footage, and perimeter length of each location in your model, as well as the total area and total perimeter of all locations. You can use the calculator at any time. The values in the calculator are updated automatically as your model increases or decreases in size. The calculations are taken from the exterior side of the buildings walls. To measure area: 1. Open the Tools menu and select Calculate/Estimate > Area/ Perimeter. Area measurements appear on the Area tab of the Area/ Perimeter Calculator dialog. Perimeter measurements are shown on the Perimeter tab.
504
2.
You can omit selected locations from the total. If a calculation is included in the total, it is highlighted in green. To omit a location from the calculation, select Omit from the drop-down list in the Include column. To add a location that has been omitted back into the calculation, select Add from the drop-down list in the Include column.
3. 4. 5.
To turn the grid lines off, clear the Show Grid check box. To print the calculations, click Print. When you are done viewing the area calculations, click OK.
Note: The units of measure used for the area and perimeter can be changed in the Program Settings dialog. For more information, see Changing the Unit of Measure on page 500.
48
COMMANDER
The Commander is a multi-functional tool you can use enter precise values when inserting or editing elements. Even if you dont need a high level of precision, you might want to display the Commander so you can see lengths and angles as you draw or edit elements. By default, the Commander is not displayed. You can turn the Commander on or off. The Commander is displayed in the lower part of the screen, just above the Status Bar.
Turning the Commander On or Off.................................................................... 506 Using the Commander ...................................................................................... 506 Displaying the Coordinate Icon ......................................................................... 507 Specifying the Insertion Height of an Element Before Inserting It ..................... 507 Selecting a Reference Point When Inserting and Editing Elements.................. 508 Entering Values in the Commander................................................................... 508 Specifying Distance and Direction..................................................................... 509 Defining X and Y Coordinates ........................................................................... 509 Rotating Elements Using the Commander ........................................................ 510 Curving Elements Using the Commander ......................................................... 510
506
Turning the Commander On or Off

The Commander is displayed in the lower part of the screen, just above the Status Bar. Initially the Commander is inactive, so it appears gray. The Commander becomes active when you insert or edit elements. By default, the Commander is not displayed. You can turn the Commander on or off. To turn the Commander on or off: 1. Open the Settings menu and select Program Settings or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar to open the Program Settings dialog Select Workspace in the left column of the Program Settings dialog. Select the Commander check box to turn on the Commander. Clear the Commander check box to turn off the Commander. Click OK.
2. 3. 4.
Using the Commander

The Commander can be a very useful tool when inserting or editing elements. Using the Commander you can complete the following tasks: Specify the insertion height of an element before it is inserted. Select a precise insertion point for an element. Specify precise lengths and directions for elements such as walls and railings. Specify a precise distance and direction when stretching or moving an element. Specify a precise angle when rotating an element. Specify a precise radius or included angle when curving a wall, ceiling, deck, or opening.
You can use the Commander to view measurements as you draw and edit elements. The values in the Commander are linked to the movement of your mouse pointer, and are updated as you go through a task. The Commander becomes active when inserting elements. It is most useful for elements such as walls and railings, because you can enter a precise length for the element.
CHAPTER 48: COMMANDER 507
The Commander also becomes active when you are moving, stretching, or rotating elements. If you have started moving, stretching, or rotating an element using your mouse, the Commander displays the move distance or rotation angle as you move the pointer. You can enter values in the Commander when moving, stretching, or rotating an element. Begin by right-clicking the element that you want to edit, and then select Move, Stretch, Lengthen, or Rotate.
Displaying the Coordinate Icon

The Coordinate Icon marks the current point from which an action will be performed. It identifies the current reference point when using the Commander. By default, this icon is turned off. If you plan to use the Commander while working, turn on the Coordinate Icon. To display the Coordinate Icon: 1. Open the Settings menu and select Program Settings or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar to open the Program Settings dialog Select Workspace in the left column of the Program Settings dialog. Check the Show Coordinate Icon check box in the Visual Aids area. Click OK.
2. 3. 4.
Specifying the Insertion Height of an Element Before Inserting It

If you have the Commander turned on, the Base Height box is displayed when an insertion tool becomes active. The value shown in the Base Height box is the height at which the element will be inserted in your drawing. You can change the insertion height before inserting an element by entering a value in the Base Height box and pressing Enter. If the element is a building element, the height is measured from the floor level of the current building location to the elements insertion point. If the element is a landscape element, the distance is measured from the terrain to the elements insertion point.
508
The insertion point of most elements is found at the bottom of the element. However, the insertion point is located at the top of windows and wall openings. When inserting windows and wall openings, the Head Height box appears.
Selecting a Reference Point When Inserting and Editing Elements

To use the Commander, you must specify a reference point, or base point, from which values can be measured. If you are drawing a wall, for example, the first point you click on the project workspace is considered the reference point. The Commander becomes active, and you can enter a Distance and Direction, or X and Y values, the wall. To use the Commander to edit an element, such as, to move or rotate it, you must select a point from which to measure the move distance or direction, or the rotation angle. Typically, you would select one of the elements grips, which are the small blue squares that appear on the major points of an element when you select it.
Entering Values in the Commander

The Commander changes depending on the tool or feature you are using. For example, if you are drawing walls, the Commander displays the Distance and Direction boxes. If you are curving walls, the boxes are Radius and Included Angle. You can move from one box to the next by pressing the Tab key on your keyboard. Pressing Enter after typing a value finishes the current action. When entering values in the Commander, especially when inserting or moving elements, it is important to be aware of the current coordinate system. The Commander offers two coordinate systems. In the Polar system, you enter a distance and direction. In the Cartesian system, you enter X and Y coordinates. You can switch between the Polar and Cartesian coordinate systems after you have selected a reference point to from which to draw or move. You can switch coordinate systems by selecting an option from the coordinate system drop-down list on the left side of the Commander.
CHAPTER 48: COMMANDER 509
Specifying Distance and Direction

The Polar coordinate system becomes active in the Commander after you have selected a reference point from which to draw or move. Using the Polar coordinate system, you specify a distance and direction, or angle when drawing or moving an element. In the Distance box, enter a positive value to specify the length of the element or the move distance. In the Direction box, enter the direction you want the element to run or the direction in which you want to move an element. Direction in a drawing is specified in degrees of an angle. The angle is calculated counterclockwise from the positive X axis. Although the four primary drawing directions are the ones you will probably work with the most, any angle is possible. If you disable Ortho and Angle Snap, and move an element in your drawing area, there is no restriction on angles at all. Even if Ortho and Angle Snap are enabled, you can enter any angle in the Commander. For more information about Ortho and Angle Snap, see Drawing Aids on page 493.
Defining X and Y Coordinates

By working in the Cartesian coordinate system instead of the Polar coordinate system you can specify a precise reference point from which to draw or move by entering X and Y coordinate values. In the X box, enter an X coordinate to specify a horizontal (left or right) distance in 2D Plan View. In the Y box, enter a Y coordinate to specify a vertical (up or down) distance in 2D Plan View. The coordinates are measured from the current reference point, which is marked by the Coordinate Icon. In the Cartesian system, you can enter both positive and negative values for either of the coordinates.
510
Rotating Elements Using the Commander

When you select the Rotate option, and then select a base point for the rotation, the Commander displays the Rotation Angle box. To specify the angle of rotation for the element, enter the angle in the Rotation Angle box and press Enter.
Curving Elements Using the Commander

When curving an element, such as a wall or floor opening, you can use the Commander to specify a precise curve angle. In the Radius box, enter the distance from the element in its uncurved state to the center point of the curve. In the Included Angle box, enter the angle formed by the curve. The larger the angle, the rounder and larger the curve. An included angle made by the two radius lines extending from the center of the circle implied by the curve out to the endpoints of the arc. You need not enter both the Radius and Included Angle values. If you enter one value, HGTV Home & Landscape automatically supplies the other. If you enter a value and nothing happens when you press Enter, then the value is not valid in relation to the dimensions of the element.
49
EDITING ELEMENTS
After you insert an element, when you double-click or select Finish, activate Selection Mode. You can select and edit elements in the project workspace. Most elements can be moved, rotated, copied, replaced, and deleted. Some elements have additional editing commands available. For example, you can lengthen, break, and curve walls. All elements have properties where you can change the size or appearance of the element. This chapter describes how to select elements, and use general editing commands like Move, Rotate, Elevate, Duplicate, Replace, and Delete. It also describes how to access and edit element properties, and apply materials and colors with the Materials Paintbrush. Chapter 49 at a glance:
Accessing Edit Commands ............................................................................... 512 Viewing Element Properties .............................................................................. 512 Undoing the Previous Action ............................................................................. 514 Reapplying an Action ........................................................................................ 514 Moving Elements............................................................................................... 514 Nudging an Element.......................................................................................... 515 Raising or Lowering an Element ....................................................................... 516 Rotating Elements ............................................................................................. 517 Changing an Elements Orientation................................................................... 520 Copying Elements ............................................................................................. 521 Arraying Elements ............................................................................................. 522 Mirroring Elements ............................................................................................ 523 Replacing Elements .......................................................................................... 523 Editing an Elements Properties ........................................................................ 524 Applying Materials and Colors with the Materials Paintbrush ........................... 536 Deleting Elements ............................................................................................. 538
512
Accessing Edit Commands

When you select an element, you can open a menu of edit commands by right-clicking in the drawing area, or by opening the Edit menu and selecting Modify Elements. Certain functions can be performed without using a menu. For example, you can move and rotate most elements by clicking and dragging grips with your mouse pointer. Menus vary depending on the element selected. Typical commands include Properties, Move, Rotate, Duplicate, and Delete. If two types of elements are selected, such as, a floor and a wall, only commands that are common to both elements are available.
Viewing Element Properties

Every element includes a set of properties that defines the element size, type, and physical appearance. You can edit element properties. The available pages in the Element properties dialog vary depending on the element type, as do the properties available. You can open element properties using the Catalog Manager, the catalog panel, or by selecting an inserted element. You can edit the properties of elements you have already inserted, and you can edit the properties of elements in the catalog. To view element properties using the Catalog Manager: 1. Open the File menu and select Catalogs > Catalog Manager, or right-click an element in the catalog and select Catalog Manager to open the Catalog Manager window. Select a group and an element in the Catalog Manager window. Open the Edit menu and select Edit Element.To view properties without editing them, open the Edit menu and select View Properties to open the Element properties dialog. In the catalog panel, right-click the element and select Edit Element. To view properties without editing them, select View Properties.
2. 3.
To view element properties using the catalog panel:
CHAPTER 49: EDITING ELEMENTS 513
To view the properties of an inserted element: 1. 2. Click the element to select it. Right-click and select Properties, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Properties Element properties dialog.
Simplifying an Element
In the Elements properties dialog, if a block element appears to be too complex in the image pane, you can simplify it by reducing the number of polygons used to display it. Block elements include furniture and appliances. To simplify an imported element: 1. 2. Click the element to select it. Right-click and select Properties, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Properties to open the Elements properties dialog. Click the Simplify button, located in the Imported Element area of the Basic tab, to open the Simplify dialog.
3.
4.
To simplify the element, slide the slider to the left. The Number of vertices in object and Percentage of simplification values update accordingly. To put a limit on how much simplification can take place, enter a value in the Min number of vertices per component box. The larger the number, the more complex an element will become. Click OK to close the Simplify dialog. Click OK to close the Properties dialog.
5.
6. 7.
514
Undoing the Previous Action

The Undo command cancels your most recent action. You can undo as many actions as you have taken since you last saved the project. To undo an action: Open the Edit menu and select Undo. Click the Undo button on the Standard toolbar. Press Ctrl+Z.
Tip: You can use the Redo command to reapply an action you have canceled using the Undo command.
Reapplying an Action
The Redo command reapplies the action that you have reversed using Undo. Selecting Redo only works directly after you have selected Undo. To redo a task: Open the Edit menu and select Redo. Click the Redo button on the Standard toolbar. Press Ctrl+Y.
Moving Elements
When you select an element, you activate Drag and Drop mode. If the element is a single, one-click object, such as a cabinet or a plant, you can move the element by clicking and dragging it. To move an area-drawn element, such as a roof, you must use the Move command before clicking and dragging. Otherwise, you will stretch the element. If you click and drag a wall, all walls attached to that wall move with it. If the Commander is turned on and you want to enter precise values for the move, select the Move command instead of doing a straight drag-and-drop.
Note: Elements associated with walls, such as doors and windows, can only be moved within the wall they are in. You cannot move them to another wall.
Dragging and Dropping Elements

The straight drag-and-drop method is ideal for singular, one-click elements such as cabinets and plants. To move an element using drag-and-drop: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click the element to select it. Hover your pointer over the elements center grip to display the Move pointer. Click and drag to move the element. When the element is positioned, release the mouse button.
Using the Move Command

Use the Move command to be able to specify a precise distance and direction for the move in the Commander. To move an element using the Move option: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Click the element to select it. Right-click and select Move, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Move. Select a base point for the move. The move distance and direction are measured from this point. Without pressing the mouse button, move the mouse to move the element. Click to select the point you want to move the element to, or enter a distance and direction in the Commander and press Enter.
Nudging an Element
You can nudge an element slightly using the arrow keys on your keyboard. By default, the element is nudged 1", or 25mm. To nudge an element: 1. 2. Select the element that you want to nudge. Press the arrow keys on your keyboard to nudge the element up, down, left, or right.
516
Editing the Nudge Distance

You can change the nudge distance in the program settings. To change the nudge distance: 1. Open the Settings menu and select Program Settings or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar to open the Program Settings dialog Select Drawing Aids in the left column of the Program Settings dialog. Edit the value in the Nudge Distance box. Click OK.
2. 3. 4.
Raising or Lowering an Element

Most elements can be raised or lowered using the Elevate command. Some elements, such as roofs, cant be elevated, but must be raised and lowered by editing the element properties. In the case of a roof, you can raise or lower it by changing the Support Height properties. To raise or lower an element using the Elevate command: 1. 2. Click the element to select it. Right-click and select Elevate, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Elevate to open the Elevate dialog. The value shown in the Elevate dialog is the current elevation of the element. 3. Enter the distance between the element and the floor or terrain in the Distance box. The distance you enter is the distance from the floor or terrain to the insertion point of the element. The insertion point of most elements is found at the bottom, or base, of the element. However, the insertion point is located at the top of windows and wall openings. Therefore, if you are raising or lowering a window or wall opening, specify the distance from the floor to the top of the window or opening. 4. Click OK.
To raise or lower an element by editing its properties: 1. 2. Click the element to select it. Right-click and select Properties, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Properties to open the Element properties dialog. Select the Behavior tab. If the Element properties dialog doesnt include a Behavior tab, use the Elevate command to raise or lower the element. 4. 5. Edit the value in the Distance above current location or terrain text box. Click OK.
3.
Rotating Elements
Single, one-click elements, such as cabinets and furniture can be rotated on the spot by clicking and dragging them while in Rotation mode. Railings can be rotated by clicking and dragging their end points. For most other elements such as walls, floors, ceilings, or roofs, you must use the Rotate command. You must also use the Rotate command to be able to enter a precise rotation angle in the Commander, or to rotate the element around a point other than the center point of the element. If Angle Snap is turned on, the element is rotated in increments of the angle that is set for the Angle Snap. If the Angle Snap is turned off, the element rotates in increments of 1.
518
Rotating an Element by Clicking and Dragging

Rotating an element by clicking and dragging is also called an On-the-Spot Rotation. If a triangular grip appears on an element when it is selected, it can be rotated by clicking and dragging. When you click and drag, the element is rotated around its center point.
To rotate an element by clicking and dragging: 1. 2. Click the element to select it. Click the triangular grip to display the Rotate pointer. If an element doesnt contain the triangular grip, it can only be rotated using the Rotate command.
3. 4.
Click and drag to rotate the element. When the element is positioned, release the mouse button.
Using the Rotate Command

Using the Rotate command, you can rotate an element around a selected base point. You must use the Rotate command to be able to enter a precise rotation angle in the Commander. To rotate an element using the Rotate command: 1. 2. 3. Select the element to rotate. Right-click and select Rotate, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Rotate. Click to select a base point for the rotation. The base point can be a point on the element, such as the center point or corner point, or any point in the drawing area. The point you select establishes an automatic baseline that runs through the point at 180. You can rotate full-circle around this baseline.
Tip: To align an element with another element that might be lying at an odd angle, select a base point on the other element, then line up the rotation line with that element.
4.
Without pressing the mouse button, move the mouse to rotate the element. The element rotates from the defined base point in the direction you move the mouse. If the Commander is turned on, you can view the angle of rotation as you rotate, or enter a precise angle. Positive angle values are read in a counter-clockwise direction, while negative values are read in a clockwise direction.
5.
When the element is positioned, click to rotate the element.
520
Changing an Elements Orientation

Some elements, such as furniture and light fixtures, are oriented in a logical fashion when you insert them into your drawing. For example, tables are inserted in a flat, upright position on the floor, and electrical outlets are inserted in a vertical position on the face of walls. You can edit the orientation of most elements. For example, you might want to flip an air register so that you can insert it on the ceiling in your basement. To change an elements orientation: 1. 2. Click the element to select it. Right-click and select Properties, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Properties to open the Element properties dialog. Click the appropriate arrow keys in the Orientation area to rotate the element. 4. Changing the X Axis rotates the element front to back, or from back to front. Changing the Y Axis rotates the element towards its left or right side in 3D. Changing the Z Axis rotates the element left or right in 2D Plan View.
3.
Click OK.
Copying Elements
The Duplicate feature creates a copy of a selected element that you can then position on the current location. To duplicate an element: 1. 2. 3. Click the element to select it. Right-click and select Duplicate, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Duplicate. Click to select a base point for the copied element. Typically, you select one of the elements grips, but you can click anywhere in the drawing. The base point is a reference point used to define the move distance. 4. Click to select the point to which you are copying the element. You can also type a distance and direction in the Commander.
Copying Elements to Other Locations

Using the Duplicate to Locations feature, you can copy existing elements to other locations. This is useful if the elements you have already drawn will have the same layout on another location. For example, you can copy the exterior walls on the Ground Floor to the Second Floor and instantly create another story. To copy elements to other locations: 1. 2. 3. Check the current location in the Building Location menu to make sure youre on the appropriate level to copy the element. Click the element to select it. To select more than one element, press Shift and click, or draw a selection box around the elements. Right-click and select Duplicate to Locations to open the Duplicate to Locations dialog.
Note: If Duplicate to Locations is not an option, then you must copy this element as explained in Copying Elements (see above).
4. 5.
Select the target location or locations to which to copy the elements. Click OK.
522
Arraying Elements
When you array elements, you create multiple copies of an element at the same time. You can create an array in a single row or column, or a layout of rows and columns. You can also control the spacing between elements in the array and the arrays rotation angle. The Array feature is only available for certain elements. If Array is not an option for the selected element, then it cannot be copied by arraying.
To array an element: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Click the element to select it. Right-click and select Array, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Array to open the Array dialog. In the Number of Rows box, enter the number of horizontal rows or use the arrows to select a value. In the Number of Columns box, enter the number of vertical columns or use the arrows to select a value. In the Distance Between Rows box, enter the spacing between rows. The distance between rows determines the distance between elements appearing in columns, also called the vertical spacing. 6. In the Distance Between Columns box, enter the spacing between columns. The distance between columns determines the distance between elements appearing in rows, also called horizontal spacing. 7. 8. In the Array Rotation Angle box, enter the degree of rotation for the array. Click OK. The array is created.
Mirroring Elements
You can create a mirror image of selected elements using the Mirror feature. You mirror the elements by specifying a mirror linean imaginary line about which the elements are flipped.
Tip: You can use the Mirror tool to reverse an entire floor plan.
To mirror elements: 1. 2. 3. Click the element to select it. To select more than one element, press Shift and click. Right-click and select Mirror, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Mirror. Click two points to define a mirror line.
Replacing Elements
You can use the Replace feature to replace an element in your drawing with a different item from the catalog. To replace an element: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click the element to select it. Right-click and select Replace, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Replace to open the Catalog Access dialog. Select the replacement item. Click OK. The element is automatically replaced.
Note: You can only replace an element with another element of the same type. For example, you can replace a window with another window, but you cant replace a window with a door.
524
Editing an Elements Properties

You can edit the physical make-up of an element as well as its dimensions by editing the properties on the Element properties dialog. The Elements properties dialog is tabbed. The tabs and properties vary depending on the element. The most common property pages are Basic, Appearance, Quantity and Behavior. The Notes and Hyperlinks properties are common to all tabs. Some elements contain additional property tabs that control its composition. For example, cabinets contain Leaf and Details property tabs. You can see a preview of the wall in the image pane of the Element properties dialog. By default, the image is displayed in a 3D Rendered View. You can switch between 3D and 2D and select different display modes by right-clicking in the image pane and making a selection from the menu. When the image is in a 3D view, you can rotate it by clicking and dragging with your mouse. When you edit the properties of elements that exist in your drawing, only the selected elements are changed. Other occurrences of the element in your drawing remain unchanged. You can, however, select and edit multiple elements at the same time if they share the same properties. For example, you can select and edit all of the kitchen cabinets at the same time, but you cant select and edit a window and a wall to edit their properties at the same time.
To edit the properties of an inserted element: 1. 2. Click the element to select it. To select multiple elements, press Shift and click. Right-click and select Properties, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Properties to open the Element properties dialog. Adjust the properties. When you edit element properties, you can see a preview of the element in the image pane of the Element properties dialog. Selecting a dimension marked with a letter, such as a or b, highlights the corresponding dimension in the diagram to the left of the Properties list. 4. Click OK. The selected elements are updated in the drawing.
Note: Editing the properties of an element in your drawing doesnt change the definition of the element in the catalog. Editing an element in a catalog affects all future insertions of that element in your drawing. For more information about editing elements in the catalog, see Editing Element Properties in a Catalog in the online help.
3.
526
Editing an Elements Material or Color Settings

When you view your drawing in Rendered, Rendered Outline, or Patterned mode, elements are displayed using materials that are defined in the properties. A material can be a texture, such as brick, or a color. Materials also have a pattern assigned to them, which is what you see in Patterned view. You can often select a different material for each of an elements components. You can edit an elements material settings using its Appearance tab of the Element properties dialog or you can use the Materials Paintbrush. To change an elements material using the Appearance tab: 1. 2. Click the element to select it. To select multiple elements, use Shift+click. Right-click and select Properties, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Properties to open the Element properties dialog. Select the Appearance tab.
3.
4. 5.
Select the component to change from the Components list. Click the Select button in the Material area, to open the Materials dialog.
6.
Select the group folder named with the material you want to use from the Groups list. To choose a solid color, select the Paint group. You can filter the material list according to specific applications by selecting an option from the Filter drop-down list.
7. 8. 9.
Select the material to use from the Materials list. The swatch in the preview window is automatically updated. Click OK to return to the Element properties dialog. To rotate the material on the element, enter an angle in the Rotation box, or use the arrows to scroll through a list of angles. The material rotates clockwise.
10. To shift the material on the element left, right, up, or down, use the Position arrows.
528
11. To change the way the texture is applied is applied, or mapped to the element, select an option from the Texture Mapping dropdown list. The Texture Mapping feature is especially useful to apply custom textures that you have imported. The available options vary from element to element, and include UV, Face, Box, Cylinder, and Auto. Selecting UV defines where the 2D pixels in the texture are placed on the 3D surface. A UV map is a flat, 2D representation of the vertices of the 3D model. With imported elements, selecting UV uses the mapping already applied to the element. Selecting Face applies the texture to every element component. Face is the most common texture mapping option used in HGTV home design. Selecting Box creates a rectangular bounding box around the element, and then applies a texture to each of the boxs six sides. Box is useful for elements such as a sofas that contain many components that should appear the same. Selecting Cylinder creates a cylindrical bounding box around the element. The texture is then mapped to the cylinder. Cylinder is useful for rounded elements, such as round columns.
12. To specify a custom tile size for the material, select the Override tile size check box, and then enter the tile height and width in the Height and Width boxes. Tile height refers to the height of one bitmap tile. HGTV Home & Landscape uses tiled rendering to display images, meaning images are generated in pieces, or tiles, vertically and horizontally. Changing the tile height of a brick material, for example, makes the bricks appear taller. Changing the tile width would make the bricks look wider. Using the Override tile size option, you can customize the tile size for the selected element without creating a new material.
13. Click Select in the to select a different line style for the current component. 14. Select another component in the Components pane and select a material for that component. 15. Continue changing the elements appearance, or click OK to close the Element properties dialog.
Note: Editing the material of an element in your drawing, doesnt change the material definition of the element in the catalog. The change only applies to the selected element. Editing an element in a catalog affects all future insertions of that element in your drawing. For more information about editing materials for elements in the catalog, see Editing Element Properties in a Catalog in the online help.
Editing an Elements Line Style Settings

A line style defines the pattern, color, and thickness of a line in 2D Plan View. Many elements contain line style properties. You can select different line styles to use for each of an elements components. For example, the default line style for a masonry wall is the Medium Continuous-Red. Wall lines of this type are red and have a medium thickness in 2D Plan View. To display blue walls in 2D Plan View, you could apply the Medium Continuous-Blue line style. You can edit an elements line style settings through the Element properties dialog Appearance tab. To edit an elements line style settings: 1. 2. Click the element to select it. Right-click and select Properties, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Properties to open the Element properties dialog. Select the Appearance tab. Click Select in the Linestyle area to open the Line Styles dialog. Select a group from the Groups list, and then select a line style from the Line Styles list. Click OK to close the Line Styles dialog. Continue changing the elements appearance, or click OK to close the Element properties dialog.
3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
530
Editing an Elements Insertion Height

You can change the height at which single-click elements are inserted by editing behavior properties. The Distance above current location or terrain option enables you to control the height at which the element is inserted relative to the floor or terrain. The value you enter is the distance from the floor or terrain to the insertion point of the element. For most elements, the insertion point is at the bottom of the element. For windows and wall openings, the insertion point is at the top of the element. To edit an elements insertion height: 1. 2. Click the element to select it. Right-click and select Properties, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Properties to open the Elements properties dialog. Select the Behavior tab. Edit the value in the Distance above current location or terrain box in the Position area. Click OK.
3. 4. 5.
Editing an Elements Insertion Point

Some elements have a defined insertion point, which is the point on the element that is attached to the pointer when you are inserting the element. For most elements, the insertion point is at the bottom of the element. For windows and wall openings, the insertion point is at the top of the element. When changing the elevation of an element, the distance is measured from the floor or terrain to the elements insertion point. You can change the insertion point of some elements. To edit an elements insertion point: 1. 2. Click the element to select it. Right-click and select Properties, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Properties to open the Elements properties dialog. Select the Behavior tab.
3.
4.
Edit the values in the X Axis, Y Axis. and Z Axis boxes, or use the sliders to the right of those boxes to change the insertion point. An X value moves the insertion point left or right. A Y value moves the insertion point forwards or backwards. A Z value moves the insertion point up or down on the element.
5.
Click OK.
532
Editing an Elements Snap Edge

Some elements have a defined snap edge, which determines which edge of the element will be inserted directly next to the wall when the element is positioned near a wall. To edit an elements snap edge: 1. 2. Click the element to select it. Right-click and select Properties, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Properties to open the Elements properties dialog. Select the Behavior tab. Select an icon in the Snap Edge area. You can select None, Left, Right, Front, or Back. 5. Click OK.
3. 4.
Adding Notes to an Elements Properties

You can enter notes about an element using the Notes property in the Element properties dialog. To add a note to an elements properties: 1. 2. Click the element to select it. Right-click and select Properties, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Properties to open the Element properties dialog. Click the Add Notes button in the bottom left corner of the Properties dialog. The Notes dialog opens. Enter the note in the Notes dialog. Click OK to close the Notes dialog. Continue editing element properties, or click OK to close the Element properties dialog.
3. 4. 5. 6.
Adding a Hyperlink to an Elements Properties

When defining an elements properties, you can create a link to an external file, such as a Microsoft Word document or Web address. You can then open the hyperlink any time you are viewing the elements properties. You can also add multiple hyperlinks to an elements properties. To add a hyperlink to an elements properties: 1. 2. Click the element to select it. Right-click and select Properties, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Properties to open the Element properties dialog. Click the arrow next to the Hyperlinks button in the bottom left corner of the Properties dialog, and then select Manage Hyperlinks to open the Manage Hyperlinks dialog. Click Add to add a new link in the hyperlinks list. When you select a hyperlink, an icon appears to the left of it, indicating that it is the current hyperlink. 5. 6. Select the hyperlink, and then enter a name for it in the Name box. For example, HGTV Home Design Web Site. Press the Tab key to move to the Links box, and then type the web address or the path to the file to which you are linking. If you are linking to a file, click Browse to search the folders on your computer. When you locate the file in the Open dialog, click Open. The path to the file is displayed in the Links box. 7. 8. 9. To view the link, select it in the hyperlink list, and then click Open. To delete a hyperlink, select it in the hyperlink list, and then click Delete. Click OK to close the Manage Hyperlinks dialog.
3.
4.
10. Continue editing element properties, or click OK to close the Element properties dialog.
Note: You can create a link to another HGTV home design (*.bld) file. However, if that file uses the same catalog as the current drawing, you cant access the catalog in the linked file.
534
If you have attached a hyperlink to an element, you can open the hyperlink. To open an elements hyperlink: 1. 2. Click the element to select it. Right-click and select Properties, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Properties to open the Element properties dialog. Click the arrow next to the Hyperlinks button in the bottom left corner of the Element properties dialog, and then select Open Current Link. The hyperlink is opened. If you have attached multiple hyperlinks to the element, the one marked current in the Manager Hyperlinks dialog is opened.
3.
Deleting a Hyperlink
You can delete a hyperlink that you have attached to an element using the Manage Hyperlinks feature. 1. 2. Click the element to select it. Right-click and select Properties, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Properties to open the Element properties dialog. Click the Hyperlinks button in the bottom left corner, then select Manage Hyperlinks to open the Manage Hyperlinks dialog. Select the hyperlink you want to delete. Click Delete. Click OK.
3.
4. 5. 6.
Controlling Which Parts of an Element are Displayed

You can hide certain parts of an element from view by changing the display properties. Display properties are only applicable to some block elements, such as furniture and appliances. To control what parts of an element are displayed: 1. 2. Click the element to select it. Right-click and select Properties, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Properties to open the Element properties dialog. Click the Display button at the bottom of the Basic tab to open the Component Display dialog. You can display or hide components in 2D views, 3D views, or both. 4. To display or hide a component, select the component Name in the list, and then select the appropriate eye icon. Component is displayed Component is not displayed 5. 6. Click OK to close the Component Display dialog. Click OK to close the Element properties dialog.
3.
536
Applying Materials and Colors with the Materials Paintbrush

The Materials Paintbrush can be used to apply different materials, colors, and finishes to elements. The Materials Paintbrush be used only in 3D views, it is not available in 2D Plan View. You can select a material or color in the catalog, and then apply it to all or parts of an element. When you use the Materials Paintbrush, the settings in the Element properties dialog Appliance tab update to match the selections you made. To use the Materials Paintbrush: 1. 2. View your drawing in a 3D view. Open the Edit menu and select Materials Paintbrush, or click the Materials Paintbrush button on any tabbed toolbar. In the Materials catalog, select the material to apply. There is a large selection to choose from, including Wood, Brick, Marble, Concrete, Steel, Carpet, Tile, Roofing, Fabric, and Paint. You can filter the material list according to specific elements by selecting an option from the Filter drop-down list. 4. In 3D view, click the element or element component to apply the material. The material is immediately applied. 5. Right-click and select Finish.
3.
Sampling Materials with the Eyedropper

When the Materials Paintbrush is active, you can use the Eyedropper feature to identify a material applied to an element in your drawing. After you clicked the element, the Materials catalog displays that material. Using the Eyedropper eliminates guesswork and enables you to identify a material that you want to use again without having to search the Materials catalog. To sample a material with the Eyedropper: 1. 2. View your drawing in a 3D view. Open the Edit menu and select Materials Paintbrush, or click the Materials Paintbrush button on any tabbed toolbar. In the Materials catalog, click the Eyedropper button. The pointer becomes an eyedropper.
Eyedropper
3.
4.
Click the element that contains the material you want to sample. The catalog display the material applied to the selected element.
Note: The material isnt added to the materials history list unless you subsequently apply it to an element.
538
Using Recently Used Materials

When you use the Materials Paintbrush, a record is kept of the materials you have used. You can view a list of the most recently used materials by selecting the History tab in the Materials catalog. To use one of the recently used materials, select it from the History list and click an element to apply the material.
Deleting Elements
You can delete any element from your drawing in two steps. To delete an element: 1. 2. Click the element to select it. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Delete.
Part 10
DESIGN TOOLS
Text ......................................................................541 Dimensions.........................................................553 Layout Tools .......................................................569
540
50
TEXT
Using text tools you can add text to any area of your drawing. You might want to add a title to the plan, or label rooms or specific elements. You can choose the fonts and colors you want. This chapter describes the available text tools.
Adding Text........................................................................................................ 542 Adding Text with a Leader ................................................................................. 547 Deleting Text...................................................................................................... 552
542
Adding Text
You can add custom text or pre-defined labels to your drawing. You can select the text style and control the alignment of the text. Like other elements, text can be moved and rotated after it has been inserted. To add text: 1. Open the Tools menu and select Text > Text, or click the Text button on the Notation toolbar to open the Text dialog.
2. 3.
To select a style for the text, click the Text Style button to open the Text Styles library. Select a style from the Text Styles list and click OK. The text style is applied to text that you are about to type, or text that is selected in the editing window.
CHAPTER 50: TEXT 543
4.
Enter text in the editing window using one of the following methods: Type the text in the editing window. Import a text (*.txt) file by clicking Import and then selecting the file to import. Insert a pre-defined label by selecting the label from the Predefined Labels list on the right side of the Text dialog. Drag the label into the editing window. You can also double-click the label or click the Insert Label button to add the label to the editing window. To open the Labels library, where you can add and edit labels, click Library.
5.
By default, text is left aligned. For multi-line text, the text lines up on the left, and is ragged on the right. To change the alignment of the text, click the appropriate alignment button.
Left Aligned Right Aligned
Centered
6. 7. 8.
To automatically return to the Text dialog after you have inserted the current text, select the Multiple text insert check box. Click OK to close the Text dialog and insert the text. The text is attached to your pointer. Position the text, and then click to insert it.
544
Editing Text
You can edit the style or content of text by editing its properties. To edit text: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click the text to select it. Right-click and select Properties, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Properties to open the Text dialog. Edit the text. Click OK.
Moving Text
You can move text by clicking and dragging it. To move text: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click the text to select it. Position your pointer over the blue grip to display the Move pointer. Click and drag to move the text. When the text is positioned, release the mouse button.
Rotating Text
You can change the angle of text using the Rotate feature. To rotate text: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Click the text to select it. Right-click and select Rotate, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Rotate. Click the center grip to display the Rotate pointer. Click and drag to rotate the text. When the text is positioned, release your mouse button.
Changing the Text Style

You can edit the appearance of text by applying a different text style or alignment. Using this procedure, you can change the style of selected text. If you want to globally change the style of text objects, see Updating a Text Style Globally on page 546. To change the style of text: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click the text to select it. Right-click and select Properties, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Properties to open the Text dialog. Click Text Style to open the Text Styles library. Select a new text style from the Text Styles list. You can also create a text style or edit the current text style. Customizing the Text Styles Library in the online help. If you edit an existing text style, the changes are permanently saved in the text styles library to be used with all projects. 5. 6. 7. Click OK to close the Text Styles library. To change the alignment of text, click the appropriate justification button at the top of the Text dialog. Click OK.
546
Updating a Text Style Globally

You can use the Update Style feature to change and update text styles. When you use this procedure, all text that uses the style you update is changed. If you want to change only one instance of a style, see Changing the Text Style on page 545. To update a text style globally: 1. 2. Click a text object that uses the text style you want to change. Right-click and select Update Style, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Update Style to open the Text Style Properties dialog.
3. 4. 5. 6.
To change the style name, enter a new name in the Name box. To change the font, select a font from the Font drop-down list. To change the font style, select a style from the Font Style dropdown list. To change the font size, enter a value in the Height box.
Tip: Font sizes are usually seen in points, for example, 18 pt. One point is equal to 1/72 of an inch. Therefore, a 72 pt font is 1 inch and an 18 pt font is .25 inches.
7.
To change the text color, click the Color box to open the Color dialog. Select a color from the Basic colors palette or create your own color by clicking Define Custom Colors. When you are finished selecting a color, click OK to close the Color dialog. Click OK. All text objects using the selected text style are automatically updated.
8.
Adding Text with a Leader

A leader is an arrow attached to text, which points to a particular element or area in your drawing. The leader has two segments and can be oriented in any way. To add a text with leader: 1. Open the Tools menu and select Text > Text with Leader, or click the Text with Leader button on the Notation toolbar to open the Leader dialog.
2.
To select a dimension style for the leader and text, click the Dimension Style button to open the Dimension Styles library. Select a style for the leader from the Dimension Styles list, and then click OK.
548
3.
Enter text in the editing window using one of the following methods: Type the text in the editing window. Import a text (*.txt) file by clicking Import and then selecting the file to import. Insert a pre-defined label by selecting the label from the Predefined Labels list on the right side of the Leader dialog. Drag it into the editing window. You can also double-click the label or click the Insert Label button to add the label to the editing window. To open the Labels library, where you can add and edit labels, click Library.
4. 5. 6. 7.
To automatically return to the Leader dialog after you have inserted the current text, select the Multiple text insert check box. Click OK to close the Leader dialog and insert the text. In the project workspace, click to select the point where the arrowhead should appear. Click to select the next point of the leader. To insert a two-point leader, right-click and select Finish. Or, click to select a third point for the leader.
8.
When you are finished selecting points, right-click and select Finish. The text and leader are inserted.
Editing Leader Text

If you have inserted text with a leader, you can change the text and text style. To edit leader text: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click the text with leader to select them. Right-click and select Properties, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Properties to open the Leader dialog. Edit the text. Click OK.
Moving Leader Text

If you have inserted text with a leader, you can move the text independently of the leader. To move leader text: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Click the text to select it. Right-click and select Move Text, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Move Text. Position your pointer over the blue grip to display the Move pointer. Click and drag to move the text. When the text is positioned, release the mouse button.
Moving the Text and Leader

You can move the text and leader together by clicking and dragging them. To move text with a leader: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click the text with leader to select them. Position your pointer over the blue grip to display the Move pointer. Click and drag to move the text. When the text is positioned, release the mouse button.
550
Stretching a Leader
You can stretch the leader arrow to make it longer or shorter. 1. 2. 3. 4. Click the text with leader to select them. Position your pointer over one of the blue end grips on the arrow to display the Stretch pointer. Click and drag the leader to make it longer or shorter. When the leader is positioned, release the mouse button.
Changing the Style of Text with a Leader

The text style and leader arrow style are determined by the current dimension style. The default dimension style is Standard. You can change the style of text with a leader by selecting a different dimension style. Using this procedure, you can change the style of selected text and leader. If you want to globally change the style of text and leader objects, see Updating the Style of Text with a Leader Globally on page 550. To select a different style for text with a leader: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click the text with leader to select them. Right-click and select Properties, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Properties to open the Leader dialog. Click the Dimension Style button to open the Dimension Styles library. Select the dimension style from the Dimension Styles list. You can select from the predefined dimension styles or you can create a new dimension style. For more information about creating and editing dimension styles, see Customizing the Dimension Styles Library in the online help. 5. 6. Click OK to close the Dimension Styles library. Click OK in the Leader dialog. The text with leader is updated.
Updating the Style of Text with a Leader Globally

You can use the Update Style feature to change and update text and leader styles. When you use this procedure, all text with leader objects in your drawing that use the same dimension style are changed. If you want to change only one instance of a style, see Changing the Style of Text with a Leader on page 550.
To globally update the style of text with a leader: 1. 2. Click to select a text with leader object that uses the dimension style you want to change. Right-click and select Update Style, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Update Style to open the Dimension Style Properties dialog.
Leader arrow properties are specified on the Leader tab. The text style is specified on the Text tab. 3. To change the leader arrow type, select an icon in the Arrow type area.
Note: Both the Dimension and Leader tabs contain the Arrow type area. If a different arrow type is selected on each tab, the type selected on the Leader tab is used.
The properties in the Properties list vary depending on the arrow type selected. Selecting a dimension marked with a letter, such as a or b, highlights the corresponding dimension in the door diagram to the left of the Properties list. When you edit dimension style properties, you can see a preview of the leader in the image pane of the Dimension Style Properties dialog. 4. To change the appearance of the arrow in the leader, select the Leader tab. The properties in the Properties list vary depending on the arrow type selected.
552
5.
To change the appearance of text, select the Text tab. You can specify the following properties: Text Style, which determines the font, font style, height, and color of text. Vertical text position, which is the vertical position of the text in relation to the arrow. Select Horizontal text to make the text horizontal, even if the leader is vertical. Units of measurement, which determines how dimension style properties are measured. By default, the units of measurement defined in the program settings are used. To change this, select the Override system units check box and edit the Distance and Angles properties.
6.
To change the dimension, extension, or arrow lines, select the Line Styles tab. To assign a different line style, select the dimension component from the Component list, and then click Select to open the Line Styles library. Select a line style and click OK. For more information about line styles, see Customizing the Line Styles Library in the online help.
7.
Click OK.
Deleting Text
You can delete selected text from your drawing. To delete text: 1. 2. Click the text to select it. To select multiple text objects, press Shift and click. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Delete.
51
DIMENSIONS
Dimensions are used to convey precise measurements. You can dimension the exterior of your design, and quickly insert interior dimensions with a few clicks. HGTV Home & Landscape automatically displays on-screen dimensions as you draw, making it easier to draw walls at correct lengths, and to insert elements like doors and windows precisely where you want them. These dimensions are drawing aids that disappear after you insert the element. Using HGTV Home & Landscapes selection of Dimension features, you can add fixed dimensions to your drawing to convey the precise measurements of your floor plan. You can control the style of these dimensions, and move and stretch them.
Setting the Current Dimension Style ................................................................. 554 Creating Automatic Exterior Dimensions........................................................... 554 Creating Automatic Interior Dimensions............................................................ 558 Creating Linear Dimensions .............................................................................. 560 Creating Aligned Dimensions ............................................................................ 561 Moving a Dimension Line .................................................................................. 562 Stretching Dimensions ...................................................................................... 563 Changing the Style of a Dimension ................................................................... 564 Updating a Dimension Style Globally ................................................................ 565 Turning Dimensions Off..................................................................................... 567 Deleting a Dimension ........................................................................................ 567
554
Setting the Current Dimension Style

When you add dimensions to your drawing, they use the current dimension style. The default dimension style Standard. You can select a different current dimension style. To set the current dimension style: 1. 2. 3. Open the Settings menu and select Dimension Settings to open the Dimension Settings dialog. Click the Current Style button to open the Dimension Styles library. Select the dimension style from the Dimension Styles list. You can select from the predefined dimension styles or you can create a new dimension style. For more information about creating and editing dimension styles, see Customizing the Dimension Styles Library in the online help. 4. 5. Click OK to close the Dimension Styles library. Click OK to close the Dimension Settings dialog.
The following image shows the components of a dimension.
Creating Automatic Exterior Dimensions

The Apply Auto Exterior Dimensions feature automatically dimensions the exterior walls of your home. By default, three dimension strings are createdone for openings, one for wall segments, and an overall dimension for each side of the model. Before using the Apply Auto Exterior Dimensions feature to create automatic exterior wall dimensions, specify the settings for the exterior dimensions. These settings control how the walls and wall elements, such as doors, windows, and openings are dimensioned.
CHAPTER 51: DIMENSIONS 555
To specify exterior dimension settings: 1. Open the Settings menu and select Dimension Settings to open the Dimension Settings dialog. Exterior dimensions settings are specified on the Exterior tab. 2. To determine the dimension information to display in your drawing, set the options in the Include Dimension String for area. Select Overall to display the outermost dimensions of each exterior wall.
Select Projections to display the dimensions of all projecting points along exterior walls. For example, if your house has an attached garage, the dimensions of the exterior wall of the house and the exterior wall of the garage are displayed. If a wall doesnt contain any projections, this information is identical to the overall dimension.
Select Openings to display the dimensions of all projecting points and openings along the exterior walls. Openings include doors and windows.
556
Select Interior Walls to display the dimensions of all projecting points, and of each interior wall that connects to an exterior wall.
3.
To change the how dimension lines are displayed, set the options in the Dimension Line Distances area. Select Dim Line Spacing to set the spacing between successive dimension lines when two or more strings are used. Select Dimension Offset to set the distance between the first dimension string and the walls.
4.
If you selected Openings in step 3, select an option in the Openings area. Select the top option to display dimensions from the center of openings. Select the bottom option to display dimensions from the edges of openings.
5.
To change how extension lines are displayed, select an option n the Extension Lines area. Extension lines extend from the dimension line toward the walls being measured. When dimension points are not parallel to one other, you can specify where the extension lines end. Select the top option to extend lines all the way to the dimension points, Select the bottom option to line the extension lines up with the shortest dimension point.
6.
If you selected Interior Walls in step 3, select an option in the Interior walls area. Select the top option to display dimensions from the center of interior walls. Select the bottom option to display dimensions from the edges of interior walls.
7.
Click OK.
Openings Walls
Overall
To create automatic exterior dimensions: Open the Tools menu and select Dimensions > Apply Auto Exterior Dimensions, or click the Apply Auto Exterior Dimensions button on the Notation toolbar.
558
Creating Automatic Interior Dimensions

The Automatic Interior Dimensions feature automatically dimensions interior walls in your model. To create automatic interior wall dimensions, draw a base line through your model. Dimensions are created for walls along that line and running parallel to the line. Before you create automatic interior wall dimensions, specify how you want the walls dimensioned. By default, walls are dimensioned on center. Walls can be dimensioned to one or both sides. To specify the auto interior dimensions setting: 1. 2. Open the Settings menu and select Dimension Settings to open the Dimension Settings dialog. Select the Interior tab and select an option in the Interior Walls area.
3.
Select the first option to dimension walls to the left side. Select the second option to dimension walls to the right side. Select the third option to dimension walls to the center. Select the fourth option to dimension walls to both side.
Click OK.
To create automatic interior dimensions: 1. Open the Tools menu and select Dimensions > Auto Interior Dimensions, or click the Auto Interior Dimensions button on the Notation toolbar. Click outside of the model in the project workspace to select a start point for the base line. Click outside of the model to select an end point for the base line. Dimensions are created along that line.
2. 3.
P1
P2
Dimension
4.
560
Creating Linear Dimensions

A linear dimension is a dimension measured along a straight line. Extension lines run vertically for a horizontal linear dimension and horizontally for a vertical linear dimension. The Linear Dimensions feature is ideal for creating interior dimensions or dimensions on a landscape plan.
To create linear dimensions: 1. Open the Tools menu and select Dimensions > Linear Dimensions, or click the Linear Dimensions button on the Notation toolbar. Click a point in the project workspace to begin the dimension line. Without pressing the mouse button, move the mouse down to a second point and click. A dimension line, including offsets, arrows, and a numerical value is added to your drawing. 4. 5. Move the mouse away from the dimension line to stretch the extension lines. When the extension lines are positioned, right-click and select Finish.
2. 3.
Creating Aligned Dimensions

An aligned dimension is also a dimension measured along a straight line. However, the line is aligned with the element it is measuring. The Create Aligned Dimension feature is ideal for elements that arent horizontal or vertical.
To create aligned dimensions: 1. Open the Tools menu and select Dimensions > Aligned Dimensions, or click the Aligned Dimensions button on the Notation toolbar. Click a point in the project workspace to begin the dimension line. Without pressing the mouse button, move the mouse down to a second point, and click. A dimension line, including offsets, arrows, and a numerical value is added to your drawing. 4. 5. Move your mouse away from the dimension line to stretch the extension lines. When the extension lines are positioned, click to finish the dimension.
2. 3.
562
Moving a Dimension Line

You can move a dimension line using the Move Dimension Line feature. When you move a dimension line, the extension lines stretch to accommodate the move. To move a dimension line: 1. 2. 3. Click the dimension line to select it. Right-click and select Move Dimension Line, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Move Dimension Line. Hover your mouse pointer over one of the grips within the dimension line to display the Move pointer.
Move grip
4. 5.
Click and drag to move the dimension line. When the dimension line is positioned, release the mouse button.
Stretching Dimensions
You can make a dimension longer or shorter, or stretch either of the extension lines. When you stretch the length of a dimension, the dimension value updates automatically to reflect the new length. To adjust the length of a dimension: 1. 2. Click the dimension to select it. Hover your pointer over one of the lower extension grips to display the Stretch pointer.
Stretch grip
3. 4.
Click and drag the stretch the dimension. When the dimension is positioned, release your mouse button.
564
Changing the Style of a Dimension

You can change the appearance of a dimensions line, arrows, and text by applying a different dimension style. Using this procedure, you can change the style of selected dimension. If you want to globally change dimension styles, see Updating a Dimension Style Globally on page 565. To change the style of a dimension: 1. 2. Click the dimension to select it. To select multiple dimensions, press Shift and click. Right-click and select Change Style, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Change Style to open the Dimension Styles library. Select the dimension style from the Dimension Styles list. You can select from the predefined dimension styles or you can create a new dimension style. For more information about creating and editing dimension styles, see Customizing the Dimension Styles Library in the online help. 4. 5. Click OK to close the Dimension Styles library. Click OK in the Leader dialog.
3.
Updating a Dimension Style Globally

You can use the Update Style feature to change and update dimension styles. When you use this procedure, all dimensions in your drawing that use the same dimension style are changed. If you want to change only one instance of a style, see Changing the Style of a Dimension on page 564. 1. 2. Click to select a dimension that uses the dimension style you want to change. Right-click and select Update Style, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Update Style to open the Dimension Style Properties dialog.
3.
To change the dimension arrow type, select an icon in the Arrow type area. The properties in the Properties list vary depending on the arrow type selected. Selecting a dimension marked with a letter, such as a or b, highlights the corresponding dimension in the door diagram to the left of the Properties list. When you edit dimension style properties, you can see a preview of the leader in the image pane of the Dimension Style Properties properties dialog.
566
4.
To change the appearance of dimension text, select the Text tab. You can specify the following properties: Text Style, which determines the font, font style, height, and color of dimension text. Vertical text position, which is the vertical position of the text in relation to the dimension arrows. Selecting Vertically centered places the text inside the dimension line. Select Horizontal text to force the dimension text to be horizontal, even if the dimension line is vertical. Selecting Above dimension line places the text the specified distance above the dimension line. Horizontal text position, which is the horizontal placement of text in relation to the dimension arrows.Selecting Centered centers the text inside the dimension line. Selecting Distance from first end places the text a specified distance from the outer dimension line. Selecting Distance from second end places the text a specified distance from the line that points to the drawing. Units of measurement, which determines how dimension style properties are measured. By default, the units of measurement defined in the program settings are used. To change this, select the Override system units check box. Edit the Distance properties to set the Type of units used to measure distance and the Precision of the measurements, in fractions or decimal points. Edit the Angle properties to set the Type of notation used to measure angles and the Precision of the angles, in decimal points.
5.
To change the dimension, extension, or arrow lines, select the Line Styles tab. To assign a different line style, select the dimension component from the Component list, and then click Select to open the Line Styles library. Select a line style and click OK. For more information about line styles, see Customizing the Line Styles Library in the online help.
6.
Click OK.
Turning Dimensions Off

After you have created automatic dimensions, they cant be removed from your drawing. However, you can choose not to see them. You can use the View Filter to control the visibility of dimensions. 1. Open the View menu and select View Filter, or click the View Filter button on the View Control toolbar to open the View Filter dialog. Select the Notation tab. Click the eye icon in the Display column to turn dimensions on or off. Dimensions are turned on Dimensions are component is turned off 4. Click OK.
2. 3.
Deleting a Dimension
To delete a dimension: 1. 2. Click the dimension you want to remove. You can select multiple dimensions by pressing Shift and clicking. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Delete.
568
52
LAYOUT TOOLS
HGTV Home & Landscape provides a basic set of 2D drafting toolsLine, Arc, Circle, and Rectangle. Objects drawn with these tools arent display in 3D views. You can use these tools to help design your layout. For example, you might want to draw construction lines to help you place walls and other elements.
Note: The options in the Layout menu are only available in 2D Plan View.
Drawing Lines.................................................................................................... 570 Drawing Arcs ..................................................................................................... 574 Drawing Circles ................................................................................................. 580 Drawing Rectangles .......................................................................................... 583 Converting Drafting Objects to 3D Building Elements ....................................... 585 Editing Line Styles ............................................................................................. 585
570
Drawing Lines
You can draw a line with one or more segments by picking points. To draw a line in 2D Plan View: 1. 2. 3. Open the Tools menu and select Layout > Line, or click the Line button on the Layout toolbar. Click to select a start point for the line. Click to select the end point for the line. You can continue adding segments to the line. To join the last line to the first line to create a closed shape, rightclick and select Close. 4. When you are finished drawing the line, right-click and select Finish.
Note: Lines can only be drawn in 2D Plan View.
Moving a Line
You can move a line by clicking and dragging its center grip. To move a line: 1. Click the line to select it. If the line has multiple segments and you want to move those as well, press Shift and click to select the remaining segments. Hover your pointer over the center grip to display the Move pointer. Click and drag the line. When the line is positioned, release your mouse button.
2. 3. 4.
Note: In multi-segment lines, each segment is considered a separate line. Therefore, if you select only one segment and move it, the other segments arent moved with it.
CHAPTER 52: LAYOUT TOOLS 571
Rotating a Line
You can rotate a line using the Rotate feature. To rotate a line: 1. Click the line to select it. If the line has multiple segments and you want to rotate those as well, press Shift and click to select the remaining segments. Right-click and select Rotate, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Rotate. Position the mouse pointer over the point around which to rotate the line. Click and drag to rotate the line, and then release the mouse button.
2. 3. 4.
Note: In multi-segment lines, each segment is considered a separate line. Therefore, if you select only one segment and rotate it, the other segments arent rotated with it.
Stretching a Line
You can stretch a line in any direction by clicking and dragging one of its end points. To stretch a line: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click the line to select it. Hover your pointer over the end of the line to stretch to display the Stretch pointer. Click and drag to stretch the line. When the line is positioned, release your mouse button.
572
Lengthening or Shortening a Line

Using the Lengthen feature, you can shorten or lengthen a line without changing its direction. To lengthen a line: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click the line to select it. Right-click and select Lengthen, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Lengthen. Click and drag one of the end grips to lengthen or shorten the line. When the line is positioned, release your mouse button.
Extending a Line to Another Object

You can use the Extend feature to extend a line to another drafting object in your drawing. To extend a line to another object: 1. Click the object to which to extend the line. The object must be a line, arc, circle, or rectangle, and it must be in the path of the line you want to extend. 2. 3. Right-click and select Extend. Click the end of the line that you want to extend. The line is extended to the object you selected.
Trimming a Line to Another Object

If a line passes through another drafting object, you can use the Trim feature to trim the line to the object it intersects. To trim a line to another object: 1. Click the object to trim to. The object must be a line, arc, circle or rectangle, and the line must intersect the object. In the following example, you would select the circle as the object to trim to.
2. 3.
Right-click and select Trim. Click the end of the line you want to trim.
The line is automatically trimmed to the nearest border.
In the example above, if you had clicked on the center of the line, the portion inside the circle would be trimmed:
574
Breaking a Line
You can break a line into two separate lines using the Break feature. To break a line: 1. 2. 3. Click the line to select it. Right-click and select Break. Click the point on the line where you want to break it. The line is broken at the selected point.
Deleting a Line
To delete a line: 1. 2. Click the line to select it. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Delete.
Drawing Arcs
An arc is a curved line. There are three Arc options available: Start, Center, End: Specify the start and center points to define the arcs radius. Then select the end point to establish the arcs length. 3 Points: Select a start point for the arc, a second point along the arc, and then drag the arc into position as you specify the end point. Start, End, Radius: Select the start and end point of the arc to define its length, and then select a third point to define the arcs radius. With this option, you can only draw the arc in the counterclockwise direction.
Note: Arcs can only be drawn in 2D Plan View.
To draw an arc using the Start, Center, End option: 1. Open the Tools menu, select Layout > Arc > Arc - Start, Center, End, or click the Arc button on the Layout toolbar and select Arc - Start, Center, End. Click to select a start point for the arc. Click to select the arcs center point to define the radius. Click to select the arcs end point to define the arcs length.
2. 3. 4.
5. 1.
Right-click and select Finish. Open the Tools menu and select Layout > Arc > Arc - 3 Points, or click the Arc button on the Layout toolbar and select Arc - 3 Points. Click to select the start point of the arc. Click to select a second point on the arc. Drag the arc to stretch it to the desired length and position, and then select the end point of the arc.
2 1 3
To draw an arc using the 3 Points option:
2. 3. 4.
5.
576
To draw an arc using the Start, End, Radius option: 1. Open the Tools menu and select Layout > Arc > Arc - Start, End, Radius, or click the Arc button on the Layout toolbar and select Arc - Start, End, Radius. Click to select the start point of the arc. Click to select the end point of the arc. The arc can be created only in the counterclockwise direction. 4. Click to select a third point to define the arcs radius.
2. 3.
5.
Moving an Arc
You can move an arc using the Move feature. To move an arc: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click the arc to select it. Right-click and select Move, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Move. Click and drag to move the arc. When the arc is positioned, release your mouse button.
Rotating an Arc
You can rotate an arc around a selected base point using the Rotate feature. To rotate an arc: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click the arc to select it. Right-click and select Rotate, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Rotate. Position the mouse pointer over the point around which to rotate the arc. Click and drag to rotate the arc, and then release the mouse button.
Resizing an Arc
You can stretch an arc in any direction by clicking and dragging its grips. To stretch an arc: 1. 2. Click the arc to select it. Hover your pointer over the grip you want to move to display the Stretch pointer. Moving an end grip changes the length of the arc and can change the curve of the arc. Moving the center grip changes the curve (radius) of the arc. 3. 4. Click and drag the arc. When the arc is positioned, release the mouse button.
578
Editing the Curve of an Arc

You can change how much an arc curves by clicking and dragging its center grip. To edit the curve of an arc: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click on the arc to select it. Hover your pointer over the center grip, display the Stretch pointer. Click and drag the center grip to change the arcs curve. When the arc is positioned, release the mouse button.
Extending an Arc to Another Object

You can use the Extend feature to extend an arc to another drafting object in your drawing. To extend an arc to another object: 1. Select the object to which you want to extend the arc. The object must be a line, arc, circle, or rectangle, and it must be in the path of the arc. 2. 3. Right-click and select Extend. Clicking the end of the arc that you want to extend. The arc is extended to the selected object.
Trimming an Arc to Another Object

If an arc passes through another drafting object, you can use the Trim feature to trim the arc to the object it intersects. To trim an arc to another object: 1. Select the object you want to trim to. The object must be a line, arc, circle, or rectangle, and it must intersect the arc. In the following example, you would select the rectangle as the object to trim to.
2. 3.
Right-click and select Trim. Click the end of the arc you want to trim.
The arc is automatically trimmed to the nearest border.
In the example above, if you had clicked the center of the arc, the portion inside the rectangle would have been trimmed:
Deleting an Arc
To delete an arc: 1. 2. Click the arc to select it. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Delete.
580
Drawing Circles
There are two Circle options available: Using the Circle - Center, Radius option, you draw the circle from the center out by picking two points to define its radius. Using the Circle - 2 Point option, you draw the circle outward from a selected point, defining the circles diameter.
Note: Circles can only be drawn in 2D Plan View.
To draw a circle by specifying its radius: 1. Open the Tools menu and select Layout > Circle > Circle Center, Radius, or click the Circle button on the Layout toolbar and select Circle - Center, Radius. Click the point that is to be the center of the circle. Move the pointer away from the center point. The circle grows as you move farther away from the center. 4. When the circle is the desired size, click to finish.
2 1
2. 3.
5.
To draw a circle by specifying its diameter: 1. Open the Tools menu and select Layout > Circle > Circle 2 Point, or click the Circle button on the Layout toolbar and select Circle - 2 Point. Click a point in the project workspace. The circle grows from this point. 3. Move the pointer away from the selected point. The farther you move away from this point, the larger the circle becomes. 4. When the circle is the desired size, click to finish.
1 2
2.
5.
Moving a Circle
You can move a circle by clicking and dragging its center grip. To move a circle: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click the edge of the circle to select it. Hover your pointer over the center grip to display the Move pointer. Click and drag the circle. When the circle is positioned, release your mouse button.
582
Rotating a Circle
You can rotate a circle in the X,Y-plane using the Rotate feature. To rotate a circle: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Click the edge of the circle to select it. Right-click and select Rotate, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Rotate. Position the mouse pointer over the point around which to rotate the circle. Click and drag to rotate the circle around the selected point. When the circle is positioned, release your mouse button.
Resizing a Circle
You can edit the size of a circle by clicking and dragging one of its exterior grips. To edit the size of a circle: 1. 2. Click the edge of the circle to select it. Hover your pointer over one of the exterior grips on the circles circumference to display the Drafting pointer. Click and drag to resize the circle. When the circle is positioned, release your mouse button.
3. 4.
Note: To define a specific radius using the Commander, right-click the circle and select Edit Radius.
Deleting a Circle
To delete a circle: 1. 2. Click the circle to select it. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Delete.
Drawing Rectangles
You can draw a rectangle by picking two points on the screen. To draw a rectangle: 1. 2. 3. 4. Open the Tools menu and select Layout > Rectangle, or click the Rectangle button on the Layout toolbar. Click a point on the screen. This will become one of the rectangles corners. Move the pointer away from the current point. The rectangle grows as you move farther away. When the rectangle is the desired size, click to finish it.
5.

Note: Rectangles can only be drawn in 2D Plan View.
Moving a Rectangle
You can move a rectangle by clicking and dragging its center grip. To move a rectangle: 1. 2. 3. Click the edge of the rectangle to select it. Hover your pointer over the center grip to display the Move pointer. Click and drag the rectangle to move it where you want it, then release your mouse button.
584
Rotating a Rectangle
You can rotate a rectangle about a selected base point using the Rotate tool. To rotate a rectangle: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click on the edge of the rectangle to select it. Hover your pointer over the center grip to display the Move pointer. Click and drag the rectangle. When the rectangle is positioned, release your mouse button.
Stretching a Rectangle
You can stretch a rectangle by clicking and dragging its corner grab handles. To stretch a rectangle: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click the edge of the rectangle to select it. Grips are displayed at each corner. Hover your pointer over one of the corner grips to display the Stretch pointer. Click and drag to stretch the rectangle. When the rectangle is positioned, release your mouse button.
Deleting a Rectangle
To delete a rectangle: 1. 2. Click the rectangle to select it. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Delete.
Converting Drafting Objects to 3D Building Elements

You can convert lines, arcs, circles, and rectangles to actual 3D building elements. You can choose to convert 2D drafting objects into walls, retaining walls, footings, or edging. To convert drafting objects to 3D building elements: 1. 2. Click the drafting object to select it. Right-click and select Convert To, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Convert To. Then, select Walls, Retaining Walls, Footings, or Edging. In the Catalog Access dialog, select the material you want to use for the element, and then click OK. The object is converted.
3.
Editing Line Styles

Lines, arcs, circles, and rectangles are drawn using the line style specified for Drafting Objects in the Drafting Settings dialog. You can change the line style of a drafting object after you have inserted it, or you can change the default line style for drafting objects. To change the line style of a drafting object that has already been inserted: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Click the object to select it. Right-click and select Properties, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Properties to open the Line Styles library. Select a group from which to choose the line style from the Groups list. Select a new line style from the Line Styles list. Click OK.
586
Selecting a Default Line Style for Drafting Objects

You can select a default line style to use when drawing lines, arcs, circles, and rectangles. To select a default line style for drafting objects: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Open the Settings menu and select Drafting Settings to open the Drafting Settings dialog. Select Drafting Objects from the Element list. Click Modify to open the Line Styles library. Select a group from which to choose the line style from the Groups list. Select a new default line style from the Line Styles list. Click OK to close the Line Styles library. Click OK to close the Drafting Settings dialog.
Part 11
POWER TOOLS
Photo Boards .....................................................589 Project Estimate.................................................599 3D Real View.......................................................615 Animation ...........................................................633
588
53
PHOTO BOARDS
You can import digital photographs or scanned images into your project workspace. The imported image is oriented vertically in 3D view, much like a billboard. For example, you could import a picture of your backyard, so when you look out the model window, you truly feel like youre home. You can also insert pre-defined photo boards from the catalog. A photo board can be stationary or set to rotate with the camera so its always facing you. You can also control the height and width of the photo board. The Photo Board Wizard guides you through the process.
Importing a Photo Board ................................................................................... 590 Saving Imported Photo Boards to the Catalog .................................................. 593 Inserting a Photo Board from the Catalog ......................................................... 594 Moving a Photo Board....................................................................................... 594 Rotating a Photo Board in 2D............................................................................ 595 Changing the Elevation of a Photo Board ......................................................... 595 Editing Photo Board Properties ......................................................................... 596 Deleting a Photo Board ..................................................................................... 597 Creating Transparency in Photo Board Images ................................................ 597
590
Importing a Photo Board

A photo board is a digital image that is oriented vertically in your 3D workspace. You can import any image you want, such as one of your family, pets, or neighbors house. The Photo Board Wizard guides you through the process. To import a photo board: 1. Open the File menu and select Import > Photo Board Wizard.
2.
Click Next.
CHAPTER 53: PHOTO BOARDS 591
3. 4.
Enter a name for your photo board in the Give the Photo Board Object a name box. Click the Select button, and then select the image you want to import. You can import BMP, JPG, and TGA files. The selected image appears in the preview window.
5.
Define the size of the image by entering values in the Height and Width boxes. Typically, you should specify a size that is as close to reality as possible. For example, if the image is of a person who is six feet tall, you should enter a value close to 6 in the Height box.
6.
Click Next.
592
7.
Specify whether you want the photo board to be stationary or active. If Stationary is selected, the board will always remain oriented the same way, regardless of changes in your camera angle. If Billboard is selected, the photo board will rotate toward the camera so it will always face you in 3D.
8.
Click Next.
9.
Click Finish. The photo board is attached to your pointer, ready to be inserted.
10. Position the photo board where you want it, and then click to insert it. 11. Right-click and select Finish.
Saving Imported Photo Boards to the Catalog

If you have imported a photo board using the Photo Board Wizard, you can save it to the catalog so you can insert it again in any project. To save your photo board to the current catalog: 1. 2. 3. 4. Open the File menu and select Catalogs > Save Element to Catalog. Your pointer changes to the Catalog pointer. Click the photo board in your project workspace. Click Yes to save the photo board. The photo board is added to the current catalog.
594
Inserting a Photo Board from the Catalog

The catalog includes a collection of photo boards containing pictures of people, animals, flags, and other objects. If you have saved an imported photo board to the catalog, it is included with the existing photo boards in the catalog. To insert a photo board from the catalog: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Open the Insert menu and select Photo Board. In the Photo Boards catalog, select the photo board to insert. Position the photo board, and then click to insert it. Right-click and select Finish. To rotate the photo board, click and drag it. When the photo board is rotated, release your mouse button.
Moving a Photo Board

You can move a photo board by clicking and dragging it. To move a photo board: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click the photo board to select it. Hover your pointer over the board to display the Move pointer. Click and drag to move the photo board. When the photo board is positioned, release your mouse button.
Rotating a Photo Board in 2D

You can use the Rotate feature to rotate a photo board around a selected point in 2D Plan View. To rotate a photo board: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Make sure you are in 2D Plan View. Click the photo board to select it. Right-click and select Rotate, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Rotate. Click and drag to rotate the photo board. When the photo board is positioned, release your mouse button.
Changing the Elevation of a Photo Board

You can raise or lower a photo board using the Elevate feature. To raise or lower a photo board: 1. 2. Click the photo board to select it. Right-click and select Elevate, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Elevate to open the Elevate dialog. The Distance value in the Elevate dialog is the current elevation of the photo board. 3. 4. Enter the distance between the photo board and the terrain in the Distance box. Click OK.
Tip: You can change a photo boards elevation by changing the Distance above current location or terrain property on the Behavior tab of the Photo Boards properties dialog.
596
Editing Photo Board Properties

You can edit the height and width of a photo board. You can also choose whether a photo board is stationary or rotating. A stationary board keeps the same orientation regardless of changes in the camera angle. A rotating board always rotates towards the camera. To edit photo board properties: 1. 2. Click the photo board to select it. Right-click and select Properties, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Properties to open the Photo Boards properties dialog.
3.
To change the photo board type, select the Stationary or Billboard icon in the Type area. A stationary photo board remains the same regardless of the camera angle. A billboard photo board rotates with the camera angle.
4.
To change the size of the photo board, edit the values in the Properties list. For example, to change the height of the board, select Height from the Properties list, and then edit the value in the Height box. Make sure that the Maintain Aspect Ratio check box is selected to avoid distorting the image. When the aspect ratio is maintained, the height automatically changes when you edit the width, and vice versa.
5.
Click OK.
Deleting a Photo Board

To delete a photo board: 1. 2. Click the photo board to select it. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Delete.
Creating Transparency in Photo Board Images

You might find that you want to make portions of your photo board image transparent for a more realistic effect. Suppose you have a picture of your family in front of your current home. You might want to make the backgroundthe part that shows your current hometransparent and put your family in front of your newly designed model home. When the background of an image is transparent, when you insert the photo board in your drawing, you see just the people in your model. To create transparency in your photo board image, you must use an image editing program such as Microsoft Paint to apply a magenta color to those portions you want to make transparent. The RGB color settings for magenta are: Red: 255 Green: 0 Blue: 255
When you have finished editing the image in the image editing program, you can re-import the image into HGTV Home & Landscape using the Photo Board Wizard.
598
54
PROJECT ESTIMATE
HGTV Home & Landscape keeps track of all the materials you use to build your home as you design it, right down to the very last nail. You can generate a project estimate with a single mouse click. The estimate consists of two reportsthe quantity report and the cut list. The quantity report, or bill of materials, lists all of the materials used to build your house, as well as the quantity, unit price, and total cost of each material. The cut list reports all the timber and steel members in your drawing and calculates the number of members you need to buy using real-world lengths of your choice. Sample unit prices are provided for your convenience, but you can specify custom pricing directly from your suppliers. The grand total is calculated for you automatically.
Generating a Project Estimate .......................................................................... 600 Selecting a Project Estimate Report Template .................................................. 602 Filtering Locations from a Project Estimate....................................................... 602 Saving a Project Estimate ................................................................................. 604 Opening a Quantity Report File in an External Editor ....................................... 605 Opening a Cut List in an External Editor ........................................................... 606 Printing a Project Estimate ................................................................................ 607 Editing Material Pricing...................................................................................... 608 Specifying Cut Lengths for Members ................................................................ 610
600
Generating a Project Estimate

You can generate an accurate project estimate at any time. The estimate is always up-to-date and reflects your project in its current state. The project estimate includes both a quantity report and cut list. The quantity report, or bill of materials, lists all of the materials used to build your house, as well as the quantity, unit price, and total cost of each material. A cut list is an itemized list of the timber and steel structural components, including prices, that you need to build your house. The cut list reports all the timber and steel members in your drawing, and calculates the number of members you need. The cut list uses real-world lengths, which you can choose. The cut list is displayed on the Cut List tab of the Generate Project Estimate dialog. The cut list includes framing members for walls, floors, ceilings, and roofs, as well as deck beams and joists. However, the cut list doesnt include deck boards. If your drawing doesnt contain any members, the Cut List tab remains blank. A member is a structural unit, such as a beam. To generate a project estimate: 1. 2. Open the Tools menu and select Calculate/Estimate > Generate Project Estimate. To view the quantity report, select the Quantity Report tab.
CHAPTER 54: PROJECT ESTIMATE 601
3.
To view the cut list, select the Cut List tab.
If you have not specified cut lengths for one or more members in your drawing, you receive the following error message when you attempt to view a cut list: There are members in your project with no defined cut lengths. If a member doesnt have defined cut lengths, it isnt included in the cut list. When you generate a project estimate, grid lines are displayed in the Generate Project Estimate dialog. You can turn grid lines off and on by selecting Show Grid from the View menu. By default, materials are grouped by location, and landscaping is included in the Terrain location. You can choose to omit selected locations and elements from the quantity report. You can print and save the quantity report and cut list directly from Generate Project Estimate dialog.
602
Selecting a Project Estimate Report Template

The format of a project estimates is based on a report template that determines which information is included and how it is organized and arranged. The report template also determines the file type of the quantity report when you save it. By default, the project estimate uses the Standard Report Form template, which generates a text file. You can select a different report template to use, such as a Microsoft Excel template. To select a project estimate template: In the Generate Project Estimate dialog, select the template you want to use from the Report template drop-down list.
You can also add and edit report templates.
Filtering Locations from a Project Estimate

In a project estimate, materials are grouped by location. You can omit a location from the estimate by filtering that location out. To filter locations from the estimate: 1. Select the Quantity Report or Cut List tab in the Generate Project Estimate dialog. The location filter applies only to the current tab. That is, to filter a location out of both the quantity report and the cut list, you must complete this procedure on each tab. 2. Click the Filter Report button to the right of the Templates drop-down list to open the Current Model Filter dialog. 3. To omit a location and its elements from the report, select the location from the Building Locations list. Omit landscaping elements from the report by selecting 0 - Terrain. 4. Click OK. The estimate is updated.
Excluding Individual Elements from a Quantity Report

You can prevent an element from appearing in the quantity report by changing a setting on the Quantity tab of the Element properties dialog. To prevent an element from appearing in a quantity report: 1. 2. In the project workspace, click the element to select it. Right-click and select Properties, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Element > Properties to open the Element properties dialog. Select the Quantity tab.
3.
4. 5.
Clear the Include Element in Quantities check box. Click OK.
Note: You can exclude elements globally by editing elements in the catalog. The change affects all new insertions of the element.
604
Saving a Project Estimate

The Generate Project Estimate dialog is a window to your estimate. To save the project estimate to a file, you must use the Save and Close feature. By default, reports are saved in the same directory as the project. The project estimate file type and extension depends on the selected report template. Cut lists are always saved to CUT files that use the name of the project, for example MyHouse.CUT. You cant change the cut list filename. To save the current project estimate: In the Generate Project Estimate dialog, open the File menu and select Save and Close, or click the Save and Close button at the bottom of the dialog. Both the quantity report and cut list are saved to the project directory.
Saving a Project Estimate with a Chosen Filename or Location

You can change the name or location of the quantity report file. The cut list filename, however, is always ProjectName.CUT. To save a project estimate using a different file name or save location: 1. Click the Browse button next to the Report File box at the bottom of the Generate Project Estimate dialog to open the Report Filename dialog.
Browse Button
2. 3. 4.
Select the location where you want to save the estimate. In the File name box, type the filename for the quantity report file. Click Save. Both the quantity report and cut list are saved in the specified location. The quantity report is saved with the specified name, while the cut list is saved as ProjectName.CUT.
Opening a Quantity Report File in an External Editor

When you create a quantity report, you can change its format and file type by applying different templates. By default, the Standard Report Form template creates a TXT file. If you select the Excel XLS template, the quantity report is an XLS file. You can open the quantity report file in the editor associated with the file type. You can open the file directly from the Generate Project Estimate dialog, or by using the View Project Estimate feature. To open a quantity report from the Generate Project Estimate dialog: 1. In the Generate Project Estimate dialog, open the File menu and select Open with Associated Editor. You are prompted to save the current report. 2. Click Yes to save the report. The report is opened in the associated editor. For example, if the report was generated with the Standard Report Form template, the file is a .TXT file, and opens in Notepad. To view a saved quantity report: 1. Open the Tools menu and select Calculate/Estimate > View Project Estimate to open the View Project Estimate dialog.
2. 3. 4.
Click the Browse button to open the Report Filename dialog. Locate the report file to open. Click Open. The report opens in the editor associated with the file type.
Tip: If you have already saved a quantity report, you can open the file in Windows Explorer. You can also open the editing program and then open the quantity report file.
606
Opening a Cut List in an External Editor

To open a cut list file in another editor, you must associate the CUT file type with a specific application using Windows Explorer. You can then use HGTV Home & Landscapes Open with Associated Editor and View Project Estimate features to open the cut list. To associate a cut list file with an editor: 1. 2. Open Windows Explorer. Locate the CUT file in the project directory. Typically, the project directory is named HGTV Home & Landscape and is located in the My Documents folder. 3. 4. 5. Right-click the CUT file and select Open. You receive the message Windows cannot open this file. Select the Select a program from a list of installed programs option and click OK to open the Open With dialog. Select the editor to associate with cut list files. Typically, a text editor such as Notepad is used. However, you can select WordPad, Microsoft Word, or your favorite text editor. 6. 7. Select the Always use the selected program to open this kind of file check box. Click OK to open the cut list. The cut list opens in the editor you selected. To open a cut list in an editor from the Generate Project Estimate dialog: 1. 2. Select the Cut List tab in the Generate Project Estimate dialog, Open the File menu and select Open with Associated Editor. You are prompted to save the cut list. Saving a new cut list overwrites an existing cut list file. 3. Click Yes to save the cut list. If you followed the steps in the procedure above, then the cut list is opened in the associated editor.
To open a saved cut list: 1. In HGTV Home & Landscape, open the Tools menu and select Calculate/Estimate > View Project Estimate to open the View Project Estimate dialog.
2. 3. 4.
Click the Browse button to open the Report Filename dialog. Locate the report file to open. Click Open.
Tip: If you have already saved a cut list, you can open the file in Windows Explorer. You can also open the editing program and then open the CUT file.
Printing a Project Estimate

You can print the quantity report or cut list directly from the Generate Project Estimate dialog. To print a project estimate from the Generate Project Estimate dialog: 1. 2. Select the Quantity Report or Cut List tab in the Generate Project Estimate dialog. Open the File menu and select Print to open the Print dialog. You can also click the Print button to the left of the Report template drop-down list. 3. Select the printer to use, and then click Print.
Tip: You can also open the project estimate file in an external editor and print it from that program.
608
Editing Material Pricing

Most elements are associated with a default unit price, which is set in the Elements properties dialog. These prices are used in the project estimate. If you have already created your design, you can edit the prices of inserted elements by selecting them in the drawing, and then editing their properties. You can also generate and save a project estimate, and then edit the pricing in the files associated program, such as Microsoft Excel or Notepad. If you edit the price of any element in the catalog, the price change affects all new insertions of the element. To edit the price of an inserted element: 1. In the project workspace, click the element to select it. Select multiple elements of the same type by pressing Shift and clicking. 2. Right-click and select Properties, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Properties to open the Elements properties dialog. Click the Quantity tab.
3.
4.
Edit the value in the Price box. Prices are unit prices. For a carpet, for example, you would enter the price per square foot, not the price of the entire carpet.
5.
Click OK to close the Element Properties dialog.
To edit material pricing in the catalog: 1. Open the File menu and select Catalogs > Catalog Manager, or right-click an element in the catalog and select Catalog Manager to open the Catalog Manager. Open the Elements menu and select the type of element to edit. Select the folder containing the element you want to edit from the Groups list.
2. 3.
4. 5. 6. 7.
Select the element to edit from the Elements list. Right-click and select Edit Element to open the Element properties dialog. Select the Quantity tab. Edit the value in the Price box. Prices are unit prices. For a carpet, for example, you would enter the price per square foot, not the price of the entire carpet.
8. 9.
Click OK to close the Element Properties dialog. Click OK to close the Catalog Manager.
610
Specifying Cut Lengths for Members

Members can be reported in terms of total linear length, or in cut lengths. Cut lengths are the actual lengths of each member as you would see in a store. For example, one piece of lumber might be 2 x 4 x 8. Linear length is the total measurement of the length of the members. The width isnt included. Instead of specifying the number of each type of member, using linear length reports that you need a total number of feet of that member. To report members in cut lengths, you must specify the lengths to use on the Cut Lengths tab of the Members properties dialog. If the cut lengths are not specified, members are reported in terms of total linear length. For example, you have 1,000 feet of 2 x 6 floor joists in your model. You specified an 8, 10 and 12 cut length for the floor joist members. When you generate a cut list, the list will report a certain number of 8 floor joists, a certain number of 10 floor joists, and so on, whatever is needed to account for 1,000 feet of floor joist material. If you didnt specify cut lengths for 2 x 6 floor joists in your model, then the cut list will report 1000 feet of 2 x 6 floor joists. The Cut Lengths tab of the Members properties dialog has a direct relationship with the Cut Down Long Members option on the Cut List tab of the Generate Project Estimate dialog. When you select Cut Down Long Members, members that exceed the longest cut length are reported using a combination of the cut lengths specified in the Members properties dialog. For example, you have 40 of top plate on one wall, but its not likely that you can buy a 40 member. Instead, you would buy several smaller lengths to make up the 40 of top plate. You can specify cut lengths for members in two different ways. You can update cut lengths using the Catalog Manager. All current and future instances of the edited member are affected. If you set a new cut length for the Southern Yellow Pine (SYP) 2 x 6 member, all current Southern Yellow Pine members are affected, and the properties are applied to Southern Yellow Pine members when you insert them later. You can update cut lengths for individual members in your drawing. Only the selected members are affected.
Specifying Cut Lengths in the Catalog Manager

To specify cut lengths for framing members in the Catalog Manager: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Open the File menu and select Catalogs > Catalog Manager to open the Catalog Manager dialog. Open the Elements menu and select Members. Select the group from the Groups list that contains the member you want to edit. Select the member from the Members list. Right-click the member and select Edit Element to open the Members properties dialog. Select the Cut Lengths tab.
7. 8. 9.
To add a cut length to the list, click Add. A blank entry is added to the list. Select the Length box and enter the new length for the member. Enter the members name, division, price, alternate code and part number. You need not specify all information for each cut length.
10. When you are finished adding to the cut lengths list, click OK to close the Members properties dialog. 11. Continue editing member cut lengths, or click OK to close the Catalog Manager dialog. These lengths will be used the next time that you generate a cut list.
612
Specifying Cut Lengths in Your Drawing

To specify cut lengths for framing members in your drawing: 1. 2. Select the element that contains framing, such as the wall, floor, ceiling, or roof. Right-click and select Properties, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Properties to open the Element properties dialog. Click the Specify Framing button, located under the Properties list, to open the Framing dialog. Select the member that you want to edit, and then click Select to open the Catalog Access dialog. Right-click the selected member in the Members list and select Edit Element to open the Members properties dialog. Select the Cut Lengths tab.
3. 4. 5. 6.
7. 8. 9.
To add a cut length to the list, click Add. A blank entry is added to the list. Select the Length box and enter the new length for the member. Enter the members name, division, price, alternate code and part number. You need not specify all information for each cut length.
10. When you are finished adding to the cut lengths list, click OK to close the Members properties dialog. 11. Click OK to close the Catalog Access dialog. 12. Click OK to close the Framing dialog. 13. Click OK to close the Element properties dialog.
Specifying Cut Lengths for Decks

You can specify cut lengths specifically for decking members. The procedure is different than specifying cut lengths for framing members, such as walls. To specify cut lengths for decking: 1. 2. Click the deck to select it. Right-click and select Properties, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Properties to open the Decks properties dialog. Select the Frame tab.
3.
4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Click the Select button in the Joists area to open the Catalog Access dialog. Select a material type from the Groups list and a member from the Members list. Right-click the member and select Edit Element to open the Members properties dialog. Select the Cut Lengths tab. To add a cut length to the list, click Add. A blank entry is added to the list. Select the Length box and enter the new length for the member.
10. Enter the members name, division, price, alternate code and part number. You need not specify all information for each cut length.
614
11. When you are finished adding to the cut lengths list, click OK to close the Members properties dialog, and then click OK to close the Catalog Access dialog. 12. Repeat steps 5 through 11 by clicking Select in the Joists and Beams areas.
Note: You cant specify cut lengths for deck boards.
13. Click OK to close the Decks properties dialog.\
55
3D REAL VIEW
HGTV Home & Landscape incorporates powerful 3D Real View rendering technology. 3D Real View rendering adds light and shadow to a textured 3D view to achieve photo-realistic images of both the interior and exterior of your home. These images can be printed directly from your computer. You can also choose to save the rendered image to a bitmap (BMP) or JPG file that you can then open in most image editing programs.
How 3D Real View Rendering Works................................................................ 616 Setting the Scene .............................................................................................. 617 Defining the Location and Time of Day ............................................................. 618 Creating a Basic 3D Real View Rendering........................................................ 620 Creating an Advanced 3D Real View Rendering .............................................. 621 Editing 3D Real View Settings........................................................................... 624 Saving a 3D Real View Rendering to a File ...................................................... 629 Creating Multiple 3D Real View Renderings in the Same Project..................... 631
How 3D Real View Rendering Works

A rendered view is a photo realistic 3D view that includes light and shadows. To render a view, two algorithms are usedradiosity and ray tracing. Radiosity is a rendering method that simulates the many reflections of light around a scene, generally resulting in softer, more natural shadows and reflections. The first part of the radiosity process involves finding element surfaces that are visible to direct light and calculating how much light is transferred to each element. Some elements receive more light than others depending on their surface properties, and different surfaces reflect different amounts of light. Still, each element absorbs some light, so the total amount reflected back into the scene is less than the light emitted by the light fixtures. The next part of the radiosity process involves finding the element that reflects the most light, and repeating the first process. The reflective element is considered a secondary light source, so we must calculate how much of its light is transferred to other elements in the scene. This process is repeated, one step at a time, until the amount of light remaining in the scene is negligible in comparison to the light originally emitted by the light fixtures. When radiosity calculations are completed, ray tracing can begin. Ray tracing is a technique for generating an image by tracing the path of light from the camera through the scene, and then calculating the reflection, refraction, or absorption of the ray when it intersects objects in the scene. Material properties define how light reflects off of a surface. Direct and ambient light levels define the light that is reflected. Direct light is light that is emitted from light fixtures. It has a specific color, intensity, and direction. Ambient light is a general level of light that is everywhere in the scene. Every light in a scene contributes to the overall ambient light in that scene. Radiosity and ray tracing are complex operations. Therefore, rendering in 3D Real View does take time and computer memory to complete.
CHAPTER 55: 3D REAL VIEW 617
Setting the Scene

When you create a 3D Real View rendering, your model is captured at the angle currently shown on the screen. In most cases, the best type of view for 3D Real View rendering is a 3D Perspective View, because it is the most realistic. For information about 3D viewing, see 2D and 3D Viewing on page 77.
Note: 3D Real View renderings are always textured, regardless of the display mode.
Consider the following information when setting the scene for 3D Real View rendering: Exterior Shots: In an exterior shot, the most important factor is sunlight. Sunlight is determined by the global position and time of day set in the program settings. By adjusting these settings, you control how much sunlight is in the scene, and the angle from which it shines. See Defining the Location and Time of Day on page 618. Night Shots: Before creating a night shot, you must set the background to a night scene. See Selecting a Background for 3D Views on page 83. After the background is set, set the time of day to a nighttime hour. For best results, you might want to insert some exterior lighting in your model. See Exterior Lighting on page 475. Interior Shots: When creating interior shots, light comes from light fixtures that you have inserted in the room, and through the windows in the daytime. You can turn lights on and off and change their light bulbs for different light intensity and effect. For information about interior light fixtures, see Interior Lighting on page 311. Light Sources: You can achieve different lighting effects by adjusting light sources. You can change the color or intensity of light coming from a light fixture, you can add light bulbs, change a light bulb to a different type, adjust the intensity of the light, or select a different color for the light. For more information about light fixtures, see Editing a Light Fixtures Light Source on page 317.
Turning Lights Off: If you have light fixtures in your scene and want to decrease the amount of light in the scene, you can turn selected light fixtures off. For more information about turning lights on and off, see Turning a Light On or Off on page 316.
Defining the Location and Time of Day

You can define where your model is located in the world, and set the time of day. These settings determine how much daylight there is in the scene. To define your location and time of day: 1. Open the Settings menu and select Program Settings, or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar to open the Program Settings dialog. You can also open the Program Settings dialog by clicking the Options button in the 3D Real View dialog. 2. Select Global Settings in the left column Program Settings dialog.
3. 4.
Select a country from the Country drop-down list. Select a city from the City drop-down list. If your city is not included you can either select a city near you, or add your city to the settings. For more information click the ? button in the Program Settings dialog.
5.
Select a date. To select a month, click the month heading above the calendar to display a list of months. Click a month to select it. To select a year, click the month heading above the calendar, and then click the year heading above the calendar. Click a year to select it. To select a day, click the date in the calendar.
6.
Select the appropriate time options in the Time area. By default, the time used for renderings is the current time set on your computer, rounded to the next smallest 5-minute increment of time. For example, 12:04 becomes 12:00. If you dont want to use the current time, clear the Use current time for rendering check box. To set a specific time for a rendering, enter a specific time into the Time (for renderings) box, or use the arrows to increase and decrease the time. If you select Daylight Savings Time, HGTV Home & Landscape tracks changes in time due to daylight savings.
7.
Set the angle in the North Direction area. Angle from True North. Determines where North is on your screen, and affects the angle of the sun for daylight rendering. The number in degrees that you enter is in relation to the 90 perpendicular orientation of your drawing. A value of 1 makes the top of the screen North. A value of 90 makes the top of the screen East, and the left side of the screen North.
8.
Click OK.
You can also use the Program Settings dialog to select a background for 3D viewing. For more information, see Selecting a Background for 3D Views on page 83.
Creating a Basic 3D Real View Rendering

You can create a basic 3D Real View rendering. Basic rendering uses the ray tracing method, which is a technique for generating an image by tracing the path of light from the camera through the scene, and then calculating the reflection, refraction, or absorption of the ray when it intersects objects in the scene. Ray tracing is less intensive than radiosity, so you can create a rendering relatively quickly. However, ray tracing doesnt create as realistic an image. Rendered views are displayed in the 3D Real View dialog after theyve been calculated. The image is also saved to a BMP or JPG file for later access. For more information, see Saving a 3D Real View Rendering to a File on page 629. To create a basic 3D Real View rendering: 1. 2. Display the 3D view that you want to render. Open the View menu and select Render 3D Real View to open the 3D Real View dialog.
The preview window shows a preview of your scene. 3. Use the buttons under the preview window to change the view.
View Filter Zoom In Zoom Out Zoom Realtime Slide Look Around Fly Around Walk Around
4.
On the Basic tab, click the Render button. The ray tracing progress is indicated on the progress bar. When the rendering is complete, the word Done appears below the progress bar. To change the scene and render it again, select the Modify Viewpoint option, and then use the buttons below the preview window to change the scene. To open the last rendered image, select the Raytrace option.
5.
When you are finished creating renderings, click Close.
Creating an Advanced 3D Real View Rendering

Advanced 3D Real View rendering uses both the radiosity and ray tracing methods. Radiosity is a rendering method that simulates the many reflections of light around a scene, generally resulting in softer, more natural shadows and reflections. Generating an advanced 3D Real View rendering might take considerably longer than basic rendering, but the result is typically more photo realistic. By default, after the radiosity calculations are completed, the scene is automatically ray traced. However, you can prevent this if you want to navigate through the radiosity solution before ray tracing the scene.
To create an advanced 3D Real View rendering: 1. 2. 3. Display the 3D view that you want to render. Open the View menu and select Render 3D Real View to open the 3D Real View dialog. Click the Advanced tab.
The preview window shows a preview of your scene. 4. Use the buttons under the preview window to change the view.
View Filter Zoom In Zoom Out Zoom Realtime Slide Look Around Fly Around Walk Around
5.
If you do not want to ray trace automatically after radiosity is completed, clear the Auto Raytrace check box. By default, ray tracing begin as soon as the radiosity calculations are complete.Disabling automatic raytracing gives you the opportunity to navigate through the scene before ray tracing begins.
6.
Click the Calculate Radiosity Solution button in the Step 1: Radiosity area to begin the Radiosity calculations. Radiosity determines how much light is emitted by the sun and lighting fixtures, and how much light is reflected off the surfaces of elements. The view is updated at regular intervals during these calculations.
If you click the Stop Radiosity Solution button during radiosity calculations, radiosity stops, and the scene is instantly ray traced, unless you have disabled automatic ray tracing. You might want stop the process if it seems to be taking a long time. However, you might not get the result you want. For example, the image might be too dark. If you have disabled automatic ray tracing, you can click the Calculate Radiosity Solution button to resume the radiosity calculations.
To erase the current radiosity calculations, click the Reset Radiosity Solution button. Resetting the calculations frees computer memory. You can then begin a new rendering.
7.
By default, ray tracing begins after the radiosity calculations are complete. Please wait while the rendered image is generated. If you disabled automatic ray tracing, the scene is not automatically raytraced after the radiosity calculations have been performed. Instead, the radiosity solution remains in the preview window. When you are ready to ray trace the rendering, click the Step 2 : Raytrace button. After the rendering is complete, it appears in the preview window.
8.
To change the scene and render it again, select the Modify Viewpoint option, and then use the buttons below the preview window to change the scene. Select the Radiosity option to display the last radiosity solution. Select the Raytrace option to display the last rendered image.
9.
When you are finished viewing the 3D Real View rendering, click Close.
If you selected the Render to File option before rendering, the image is saved to a file. For more information, see Saving a 3D Real View Rendering to a File on page 629.
Editing 3D Real View Settings

There are a number of different settings that you can define to customize the look of a 3D Real View rendering. You can control the quality of the image, add fog or smoke effects, turn daylight off, and set antialiasing properties. These settings must be defined prior to rendering. To edit 3D Real View settings: 1. Open the Settings menu and select Program Settings, or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar to open the Program Settings dialog. You can also open the Program Settings dialog by opening the 3D Real View dialog and clicking Options. 2. Select Rendering in the left column of the Program Settings dialog.
3.
By setting the Rendering program settings, you can complete the following tasks: Disable automatic ray tracing Adjust rendering quality Change the refresh rate during light calculations Adjust the brightness of the rendering Turn daylight on and off Antialias objects Create fog and smoke effects
Disabling Automatic Raytracing

By default, ray tracing begins after the radiosity calculations are complete. You can change this for the each view that you render by clearing the Auto Raytrace option on the Advanced tab of the 3D Real View dialog. However, you can disable automatic ray tracing for all rendered views by changing the Rendering program settings. To disable automatic ray tracing: 1. 2. To disable automatic ray tracing, begin on the Renderings page of the Program Settings dialog. Clear the Raytrace Automatically after Radiosity check box in the Raytracing Options area. The Raytrace Automatically after Radiosity option sets the default state for the Auto Raytrace check box on the Advanced tab of the 3D Real View dialog. 3. Continue editing Rendering settings, or click OK to close the Program Settings dialog. You can enable automatic ray tracing for individual renderings by selecting the Auto Raytrace option on the Advanced tab of the 3D Real View dialog.
Adjusting the Rendering Quality

By default, the lowest, fastest quality level is selected for rendering 3D Real Views. You can adjust the rendering quality by setting the Quality Level option.
Note: The higher the quality level, the longer the rendering process.
To adjust the rendering quality: 1. 2. To adjust the rendering quality, begin on the Renderings page of the Program Settings dialog. Select the quality level from the Quality Level drop-down list. There are 5 levels to choose from. The higher the level of quality you choose, the more steps there are, the longer the rendering process takes. Level 1 involves 100 steps, while Level 5 involves 1,500 steps. The quality level must be set before rendering takes place; it doesnt change the rendering currently seen in the 3D Real View dialog. 3. Continue editing Rendering settings, or click OK to close the Program Settings dialog.
You can also create a custom quality level by editing the Radiosity Options. To create a custom quality level: 1. 2. 3. To create a custom quality level, begin on the Renderings page of the Program Settings dialog. Select a quality level from the Quality Level drop-down list. This serves as a basis for your custom quality level. Edit the value in the Number of Steps box. By default, Level 1 involves 100 steps, while Level 5 involves 1,500 steps. However, you can enter any number of steps. 4. Continue editing Rendering settings, or click OK to close the Program Settings dialog.
Changing the Refresh Rate During Radiosity Calculations

As HGTV Home & Landscape performs radiosity calculations, the view is updated at regular intervals to reflect the current calculations. You can change the interval at which the view refreshes by increasing or decreasing the number of steps between visual updates. To change the refresh rate during radiosity calculations: 1. 2. To change the refresh rate, begin on the Renderings page of the Program Settings dialog. Edit the value in the Update Display Every _ Steps box. By default, no matter which quality level is chosen, the rendering display is updated every 20 steps. When the display is updated more often, the rendering time increases. 3. Continue editing Rendering settings, or click OK to close the Program Settings dialog.
Adjusting the Brightness of the Rendered Image

HGTV Home & Landscape virtual camera works in a manner similar to real-world cameras. The virtual camera automatically calculates the correct exposure for the lighting situation and produces a view with infinite depth of field. That is, everything is in focus. However if, you want to brighten or darken a rendering, you can use the Image Brightness option to override the automatic exposure. Brightness can be increased or decreased. To adjust rendering image brightness: 1. 2. To adjust rendering image brightness, begin on the Renderings page of the Program Settings dialog. Specify the amount by which you want to increase or decrease the brightness by editing the value in the Image Brightness box. You can enter a number, or use the arrow buttons to scroll up or down. A positive value increases the brightness, while a negative values decreases it, making the image darker. 3. Continue editing Rendering settings, or click OK to close the Program Settings dialog.
Turning Daylight Off and On

By default, daylight is included in radiosity calculations, even for indoor scenes, because light can come through a window. You can turn daylight off, omitting daylight from the lighting calculations, and speeding up the rendering process.
Note: The Enable Daylight option should always remain on for exterior shots, even for night shots. To create a night shot, change the time of day settings. For best results with interior shots, enable the Enable Daylight option unless the room has small, covered, or no windows.
To turn daylight off: 1. 2. 3. To turn daylight off, begin on the Renderings page of the Program Settings dialog. Clear the Enable Daylight check box. Continue editing Rendering settings, or click OK to close the Program Settings dialog.
To turn daylight on again, select the Enable Daylight check box.
Using Antialiasing to Reduce Jagged Edges

Computer programs render images in pixels, which are squares. However, these square pixels must depict curved and round surfaces, such as columns. To properly display these objects, pixels are blended together where two colors or two materials meet. This blending process is called antialiasing. By default, antialiasing is disabled to increase rendering speed. However, you can select varying levels of antialiasing. To use antialiasing: 1. 2. To use antialiasing, begin on the Renderings page of the Program Settings dialog. Use the up arrow keys next to the Antialiasing box to increase or decrease the level of antialiasing. The higher the level, the cleaner the image, but the longer the rendering process takes. The lowest level is 0 and the highest level is 4. 3. Continue editing Rendering settings, or click OK to close the Program Settings dialog.
Creating a Fog or Smoke Effect

To create a fog effect in a 3D Real View rendering, turn on the Fog option before rendering the view. To create a fog effect: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. To create a fog effect, begin on the Renderings page of the Program Settings dialog. Select the Enable Effects check box in the Effects area. Select the Fog or Smoke option. Enter the thickness of the fog or smoke in the Density box. The higher the number, the thicker the fog or smoke. Continue editing Rendering settings, or click OK to close the Program Settings dialog.
Saving a 3D Real View Rendering to a File

By default, 3D Real View renderings are saved to a BMP file in your Projects directory when you render a view. The file name and type are specified in the rendering settings. Each time you generate a view, the new rendering overwrites the image saved in the previous rendering. By default, 3D Real View images are saved at the same size as they are shown in the preview window of the 3D Real View dialog. However, you can specify file output settings. To save a 3D Real View rendering to a file and specify file output settings: 1. Open the Settings menu and select Program Settings, or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar to open the Program Settings dialog. You can also open the Program Settings dialog by opening the 3D Real View dialog and clicking Options. 2. 3. Select Rendering in the left column of the Program Settings dialog. Select Render to File in the Output Options area.
By default, rendered images are saved in the same directory as your projects: C:\Documents and Settings\<Current User>\My Documents\HGTV Home & Landscape Platinum Suite\Projects 4. To change the default file name, type, and location, click the Browse button to the right of the Location drop down list to open the Save As dialog.
5. 6. 7. 8.
Enter the new default file name in the File name box. Select Bitmap (*.bmp) or JPEG (*.jpg) from the Save as type drop-down list to set the default file type. Click Browse Folders to specify a new folder in which to save renderings. Click Save to close the Save As dialog.
Note: If you begin editing the Location options, but dont specify a file name, the next time you render a 3D Real View, the rendering might not be generated.
9.
Select the size from the Size drop-down list. The default selection is Current View Size, which saves the image at the size shown in the preview window of the 3D Real View dialog. Pre-defined sizes are 640 x 480, 800 x 600, and 1024 x 768.
10. To define a custom size, selecting the Custom from the Current View Size drop-down list. Enter values in the Width and Height boxes. 11. Click OK to close the Program Settings dialog.
Note: Each time you generate a view, the new rendering overwrites the image saved in the previous rendering. To avoid this, see Creating Multiple 3D Real View Renderings in the Same Project on page 631
Creating Multiple 3D Real View Renderings in the Same Project

When a rendering is created, the image is saved to a BMP or JPG file in your Projects directory. That file has the same name as your project. If you create another rendering in the same project, the file from the previous rendering is overwritten. To create and save more renderings within the same project, you must specify a different output name for each new image before creating the rendering. To create and save an additional 3D Real View rendering: 1. Open the Settings menu and select Program Settings, or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar to open the Program Settings dialog. You can also open the Program Settings dialog by opening the 3D Real View dialog and clicking Options. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Select Rendering in the left column of the Program Settings dialog. In the Output Options area, make sure the Render to File check box is selected. Click the Browse button next to the Location drop-down list to open the Save As dialog. Enter a new, unique name in the File name box. Select Bitmap (*.bmp) or JPEG (*.jpg) from the Save as type drop-down list to set the default file type. Click Save. Click OK to close the Program Settings dialog. The next 3D Real View rendering you create will be saved as the new file name.
56
ANIMATION
An animation is, essentially, a movie. Use HGTV Home & Landscapes animation tools to record an actual tour through your 3D model that you can play back at any time. You can add sounds to your animation, such as a doorbell ringing. You can also choose to ray trace the animation for a photorealistic display that includes light, shadows, and reflection. To create an animation, draw one or more paths for the camera to follow.
Drawing an Animation Path............................................................................... 634 Drawing Separate Camera and Target Paths.................................................... 639 Previewing the Animation.................................................................................. 641 Adding Sounds to an Animation ........................................................................ 642 Editing Path and Animation Properties.............................................................. 643 Saving an Animation to a File............................................................................ 648
Drawing an Animation Path

The first step in creating an animation is defining a path for the camera to follow. You can specify where you want the camera to lookalong the path or at a specific target or target pathas well as the view angle. You draw the path by selecting a camera start point and subsequent control points. The path automatically curves between points to create a smooth motion for the camera. After you have drawn the path, you can add, remove, and elevate control points. You can also draw more than one path. By default, all paths are included in the animation, and they are followed in the order in which they were drawn. However, you can choose which paths to include in an animation, as well as the order of paths for the camera to follow. To draw an animation path: 1. In 2D Plan View, check the current location in the Building Location menu to make sure youre on the appropriate level for creating the animation. Open the Tools menu and select Animation > Insert Path, or click the Insert Path button on the Animation toolbar to open the Path Properties dialog.
2.
3. 4.
Enter a name for the path in the Description box. In the Behavior area, specify what you want the camera to focus on during the animation.
CHAPTER 56: ANIMATION 635
5.
If you select Follow Path, the camera focuses on a different target along the path in each frame. If you select Specify Target, the camera always points towards a target point that you specify.
In the View Angle area, specify how wide you want the view angle to be by either sliding the ruler or entering a value in the box. Higher values produce a wide-angle view, and lower values produce a close-up view.
6. 7.
Click OK to close the Path Properties dialog. Click in the project workspace to select a start point for the camera. For example, if you want to start your animation by walking through the front door, select a point outside the front door.
8. 9.
If you selected the Specify Target option, select the point on which you want to the camera to remain focused during the animation. Click to select the next point of the path. Each point you select is called a control point. The camera moves to each control point and captures an image of the view at that point. Control points are the key to drawing and shaping your path.
Camera Start Point
10. Continue selecting control points until your path is finished. 11. Right-click and select Finish.
Tip: You can simulate the movement from one location to another by drawing your path up or down a staircase. After the path is drawn, you can then edit the elevation of control points on the other location to view elements on that location.
Changing the Path Order in an Animation

If you have drawn more than one path for an animation, the paths are followed in the order in which they were drawn. To change the path order in an animation: 1. Open the Tools menu and select Animation > Animation Properties or click the Animation Properties button on the Animation toolbar to open the Animation Properties dialog. You can also open the properties from the Create Animation dialog.
2. 3.
On the Paths tab, use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to move selected paths up or down in the list. Click OK.
Choosing the Paths to Include in an Animation

By default, all animation paths that are present in your drawing are included in the resulting animation. You can choose which paths to include in an animation. To choose which paths you want to include in the animation: 1. Open the Tools menu and select Animation > Animation Properties, or click the Animation Properties button on the Animation toolbar to open the Animation Properties dialog. You can also open the properties from the Create Animation dialog. 2. 3. Clear the check boxes in the Include column to remove the paths from an animation. Click OK.
Moving an Animation Paths Control Points

After you have drawn an animation path, you can move any control point along the path, including the camera start point. When you move a control point, the path automatically adjusts to maintain a smooth, curved path. To move control points on a path: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click the camera or any point on the path to select the path. Blue grips appear at each control point. Hover your pointer over the control point that you want to move. The Move pointer is displayed. Click and drag to move the control point. When the control point is positioned, release the mouse button.
Adding Control Points to an Animation Path

After you have drawn a path for an animation, you can add control points to that path. Adding control points can help you expand your path, or provide a point to which you can attach a spound. To add a control point to your path: 1. Open the Tools menu and select Animation > Add Control Point, or click the Add Control Point button on the Animation toolbar. Click along the animation path in the project workspace to add the control point. The control point is automatically added to the path.
2.
Removing a Control Point from an Animation Path

You can remove a control point from an animation path using the Remove Control Point feature. To remove a control point from a path: 1. Open the Tools menu and select Animation > Remove Control Point, or click the Remove Control Point button on the Animation toolbar. Click the control point you want to remove.
2.
Note: Removing a control point can change the shape of the path slightly, depending on the location of adjacent control points, to ensure a smooth, curved path.
Editing the Elevation of an Animation Control Point

By default, control points are 5-6 above the floor level of the current building location. You can edit the elevation of a control point on an animation path using the Elevate Control Point feature. Elevating the control point adjusts the path up or down depending on the elevation you specify. For example, if your path is on the ground floor and you have a control point at either end of a staircase, elevating the top control point will make it seem as if youre walking up the stairs. To edit the elevation of a control point: 1. Open the Tools menu and select Animation > Elevate Control Point, or click the Elevate Control Point button on the Animation toolbar. Click the control point to edit. The Elevate dialog opens. The value is the current elevation of the control point. 3. 4. Edit the value in the Distance box. Click OK.
2.
Turning Animation Paths On and Off

You can hide or show all animation paths using the Animation Paths On/ Off feature. To turn animation paths on or off: Open the View menu and select Viewing Aids > Animation Paths On/Off, or click the Viewing Aids button on the View Control toolbar and select Animation Paths On/Off.
Deleting an Animation Path

To delete an animation path: 1. 2. Click the path to select it. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Delete.
Drawing Separate Camera and Target Paths

You can draw two animation pathsone for the camera to move along and a separate one for the camera to focus on. The path along which the camera moves is the camera path. The path on which to focus the camera is the target path. This setup is like watching an airplane from a moving car. To focus a camera on a target path, you must draw the camera path using the Specify Target option. When you have drawn both paths, you then snap the camera paths target point to the target path.
Draw the Target Path

1. Open the Tools menu and select Animation > Insert Path, or click the Insert Path button on the Animation toolbar to open the Path Properties dialog. Enter a name for the path in the Description box. Click OK to close the Path Properties dialog. Click in the project workspace to select a start point for the camera. Click to select the next point of the path. Each point you select is called a control point. The camera moves to each control point and captures an image of the view at that point. 6. 7. When you have finished picking points, right-click and select Finish. Open the Tools menu and select Animation > Animation Properties, or click the Animation Properties button on the Animation toolbar to open the Animation Properties dialog. If you do not want to include the target path in your animation, clear the Include check box to the right of the target paths name. Click OK to close the Animation Properties dialog.
2. 3. 4. 5.
8. 9.
Draw the Camera Path

1. Open the Tools menu and select Animation > Insert Path, or click the Insert Path button on the Animation toolbar to open the Path Properties dialog. Enter a name for the path in the Description box. Select the Specify Target option. Click OK to close the Path Properties dialog. Click in the project workspace to select a start point for the camera. Click again to select a random target point. You will snap the target to the target path later. Select the remaining points of the camera path, and then right-click and select Finish. Click the camera path to select it. The camera appears to be pointing to an area at the end of an arrow. The point at the end of the arrow is the target point.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Connect the Paths

1.
2. 3.
Click and drag the target point to the target path. When the point is positioned, release your mouse button. The target point automatically snaps to the camera of the target path. You can now preview the animation.
When you preview the animation, the camera moves along the camera path and focuses on points along the target path as the animation plays.
Previewing the Animation

After you have drawn one or more paths for an animation, you can preview the resulting animation. You can play the animation automatically, or step through it frame by frame. To preview an animation: 1. Open the Tools menu and select Animation > Create Animation, or click the Create Animation button on the Animation toolbar to open the Create Animation dialog.
2.
Click the Play button to play the animation. To pause the animation, click the Pause button. To play the animation manually by stepping through each frame, click the Next Frame button. You can click and drag the slider to play the animation manually or to skip to specific frames of the animation. To step back to the previous frame, click the Previous Frame button. To return to the start of the animation so you can play it again, click the Restart button.
Note: To save the animation to a file that can be viewed outside of HGTV Home & Landscape, see Saving an Animation to a File on page 648. Note: Ray tracing doesnt appear in the animation preview. Ray tracing is applied when you save the file.
Repeating an Animation During the Preview

By default, an animation is played once when previewed. You can set the animation to repeat during the preview, playing it continuously until you close the preview window. To repeat an animation during the preview: 1. Open the Tools menu and select Animation > Animation Properties, or click the Animation Properties button on the Animation toolbar to open the Animation Properties dialog. You can also open the properties from the Create Animation dialog. 2. 3. Select the Repeat Animation during preview check box. Click OK.
Adding Sounds to an Animation

You can add a variety of sounds to your animation, such as a doorbell ringing or the creak of a door opening. Sound is added to an animation by inserting a sound node at a selected path control point, and selecting the sound file to play at that point. The sound is played when the camera reaches that point during the animation playback. To add a sound to an animation: 1. In 2D Plan View, open the Tools menu and select Animation > Add Sound Node, or click the Add Sound Node button on the Animation toolbar. Click the control point on the animation path that corresponds to where you want to insert the sound. The Open dialog opens. Locate and select the sound file to insert. Sound files must have the .WAV extension. The HGTV Home & Landscape Sounds directory contains several sounds. To hear the selected sound, click the Play Sound button. 4. Click Open. A small node is inserted next to the control point.
Note: Sound nodes can only be placed at control points. You can add control points to your path, as explained in Adding Control Points to an Animation Path on page 637.
2. 3.
Removing Sounds from an Animation

You can remove sounds that you have inserted in an animation by using the Remove Sound Node feature. To remove a sound from an animation: 1. In 2D Plan View, open the Tools menu and select Animation > Remove Sound Node, or click the Remove Sound Node button on the Animation toolbar. Click the control point to which the sound was added. The sound node is removed.
2.
Editing Path and Animation Properties

There are two sets of properties that control animationthe path properties and the animation properties. Path properties are applied individually to each path in your drawing. Animation properties are applied to the animations made up by those paths. Animation properties include settings for creating animation files. Path properties include settings for changing the speed of an animation.
Changing the Speed of an Animation

By default, the speed of an animation is 80 inches per second if working in feet and inches, or 2.032 meters per second if working in metric units. You can speed up or slow down an animation by editing either the duration or velocity setting in the Animation Properties dialog for a path. A different speed can be set for each path in your drawing.
Note: The speed settings affect only the output file. The animation preview isnt affected.
To change the speed of an animation: 1. 2. Click the path to select it. Right-click and select Properties to open the Path Properties dialog.
3.
Edit values in the Duration and Velocity boxes. The duration is based on the velocity and length of the path. Increasing the duration value slows the animation down. Decreasing the duration value speeds it up. The velocity determines the distance covered in one second. Increasing the velocity value increases the animation speed.
4.
Click OK.
Editing the Frame Rate of an Animation

The frame rate is the number of images displayed in an animation per second. The frame rate is also known as the video playback rate. The frame rate is directly related to the perceived smoothness of the animation. The higher the number of frames displayed per second, the smoother the video playback appears. Lower frame rates can result in a choppier playback. To edit the frame rate of an animation: 1. Open the Tools menu and select Animation > Animation Properties, or click the Animation Properties button on the Animation toolbar to open the Animation Properties dialog. You can also open the properties from the Create Animation dialog. 2. Select the Output File tab.
3. 4.
Enter a value between 1 and 32 in the Frame Rate box, or use the arrow buttons to increase or decrease the value. Click OK.
Ray Tracing an Animation

Ray tracing is a technique for generating an image by tracing the path of light from the camera through the scene, and then calculating the reflection, refraction, or absorption of the ray when it intersects objects in the scene. Light comes from lighting fixtures as well as through windows, and is bounced off of surfaces that have reflective properties. By default, animations are not ray traced.To create a ray traced animation, you must enable ray tracing before exporting the animation to a file. You can also set a number of rendering options. Ray tracing can increase the recording time significantly.
Note: Ray tracing occurs only when you record the animation. It is not applied when previewing the animation.
To enable ray tracing in an animation: 1. Open the Tools menu and select Animation > Animation Properties, or click the Animation Properties button on the Animation toolbar to open the Animation Properties dialog. You can also open the properties from the Create Animation dialog. 2. 3. 4. Select the Output File tab. Select the Ray Trace Animation check box. Click Options to open the Program Settings dialog. By default, the Rendering settings are displayed. The Rendering settings are explained in detail in 3D Real View on page 615. This procedure explains only the options that are necessary to enable ray tracing in animations.
5.
Select the Raytrace Automatically after Radiosity option. The Raytrace Automatically after Radiosity option must be selected to ray trace an animation.
6.
Select Global Settings in the left column of the Program Settings dialog. Global settings help determine how much daylight is available in the scene. For more information about global settings see Defining the Location and Time of Day on page 618.
7. 8.
Click OK to close the Program Settings dialog. Click OK to close the Animation Properties dialog.
Saving an Animation to a File

After you have previewed an animation and are satisfied with it, you can record it to an AVI file, which can be played using digital media programs, such as Microsoft Windows Media Player. To save an animation to a file: 1. Open the Tools menu and select Animation > Create Animation, or click the Create Animation button on the Animation toolbar to open the Create Animation dialog. Click Save to open the Save As dialog. Enter a file name in the File name box. Click Browse folders to select a save location for the file. Click Save. The animation begins recording. 6. Wait until the entire animation has been recorded. The progress of the recording is shown on the Overall Progress bar. To stop recording before the animation has finished, click Stop. The file is saved at the stopping point. 7. When the recording is complete, click Close.
2. 3. 4. 5.
Editing the Default Name or Save Location of an Animation Output File

Before saving an animation to a file, you can specify the default name and save location of the resulting AVI file. The name and path you select automatically appear in the Save As dialog when you save the file. To edit the name or save location of an animation output file: 1. Open the Tools menu and select Animation > Animation Properties, or click the Animation Properties button on the Animation toolbar to open the Animation Properties dialog. You can also open the properties from the Create Animation dialog. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Select the Output File tab. Click the browse button to the right of the Filename box. The Save As dialog opens. Enter the new default file name in the File name box. Click Browse Folders to specify a new folder in which to save animations. Click Save to close the Save As dialog. Continue editing animation properties, or click OK to close the Animation Properties dialog.
Compressing an Animation Output File

When you save an animation to a file, you can create a compressed file. Compressing an animation file converts the data into a format that requires less memory, so the file can be stored or transmitted more efficiently. HGTV Home & Landscape offers an extensive list of video compression options. To compress an animation output file: 1. Open the Tools menu and select Animation > Animation Properties, or click the Animation Properties button on the Animation toolbar to open the Animation Properties dialog. Select the Output File tab. Select an option from the Video Compression drop-down list. Click OK.
2. 3. 4.
Editing the Resolution of an Animation Output File

By default, animations are recorded at a size of 640 x 480 pixels. You can select a different predefined size or specify a custom size. To edit the size of an animation output file: 1. Open the Tools menu and select Animation > Animation Properties, or click the Animation Properties button on the Animation toolbar to open the Animation Properties dialog. Select the Output File tab. Select an option from the Size drop-down list. Predefined sizes include 640 x 480, 800 x 600, and 1024 x 768. 4. To define a custom size, selecting the Custom from the Current View Size drop-down list. Enter values in the Width and Height boxes. Click OK.
2. 3.
5.
Part 12
MANAGING PROJECTS
Importing ............................................................653 Opening, Saving, and Printing..........................663 Exporting ............................................................679
652
57
IMPORTING
Using the Project Trace Image feature you can import a BMP, JPG, or TGA file into your drawing space. You can then trace the image using elements from the catalog, creating a true HGTV Home & Landscape model. The Project Trace Image feature is useful if you have sketched out ideas in a drawing program or scanned a floor plan, and want to re-create the plan in HGTV Home & Landscape. You can resize the image before tracing, and delete it after youre done tracing. Using the Object Import Wizard you can quickly import custom 3D objects in DXF or 3DS format directly into your drawing. For information on importing photo boards, see Importing a Photo Board on page 590.
Note: Most floor plans are copyrighted. Make sure you have permission to copy them before importing into HGTV Home & Landscape.
Importing an Image to Trace ............................................................................. 654 Matching the Floor Plans Drawing Scale.......................................................... 655 Displaying and Hiding Project Trace Images .................................................... 656 Deleting a Project Trace Image ......................................................................... 656 Importing Custom Objects into Your Drawing.................................................... 657
654
Importing an Image to Trace

You can import a BMP, JPG, or TGA image, such as a scanned floor plan, and trace it using elements from the catalog. To import an image to trace: 1. 2. In 2D Plan View, open the File menu and select Import > Project Trace Image to open the Open dialog. Select the file type you are importing from the File type drop-down list. You can import BMP, JPG, or TGA files. 3. Locate the file to import, and then click Open.
To reverse the image, that is, flip it left to right, select the Flip Horizontal check box. To flip the image vertically, so it is upside down, select the Flip Vertical check box.
CHAPTER 57: IMPORTING 655
4.
To change the scale of the image, enter the dimensions in the Length and Height boxes. Typically, you would use the overall dimensions shown on the floor plan. For example, if the house is 70' long, enter 70' in the Length box. Keep the Maintain Aspect Ratio check box selected to prevent the image from becoming distorted.
5. 6.
Click OK. A bounding box is attached to your pointer. Position the box in your drawing area, and then click to insert it. The image is displayed.
Note: Most floor plans are copyrighted. Make sure you have permission to copy them before importing them.
Matching the Floor Plans Drawing Scale

If you import a project trace image and it isnt the proper size, you can scale it up or down to match the plans drawing scale. Having a correct drawing scale is important for tracing purposes, as elements can then be created at the correct size. To resize a project trace image: 1. 2. 3. Click the trace image to select it. Right-click and select Resize Image, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Resize Image. In the project workspace, find a wall with a known length, and then click to select a point at each end of the wall. The Resize Image dialog opens. Enter the distance between the two points as shown on the floor plan, and then click OK. The image is scaled.
4.
656
Displaying and Hiding Project Trace Images

If you have used the Project Trace Image feature to import a plan into your project, you can hide the image using the View Filter, as an alternative to deleting the image. To filter project trace images from view: 1. Open the View menu and select View Filter or click the View Filter button on the View Control toolbar to open the View Filter dialog. Select the Notation tab. In the Project Trace Images row, click the eye icon in the Display column to turn project trace images on or off. Project trace image is turned on Project trace image is turned off 4. Click OK.
2. 3.
Deleting a Project Trace Image

Once youre done tracing a floor plan, you can delete the trace image from your drawing, leaving only your model in the project workspace. To delete a project trace image: 1. 2. Click the trace image to select it. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or open the Edit menu and select Modify Elements > Delete.
Note: You can hide the project trace image from view instead of deleting it, as explained in Displaying and Hiding Project Trace Images on page 656.
Importing Custom Objects into Your Drawing

You can import custom 3D objects in 3DS or DXF format into your drawing. Many sites on the Internet offer free downloads of objects, such as furniture and appliances. You can import a custom object directly into your drawing using the Object Import Wizard. After inserting the object, you can edit its properties. To import a custom object into your drawing: 1. Open the File menu and select Import > Object Wizard to start the Object Import Wizard.
2.
Click Next.
658
3. 4. 5.
Enter a name for the imported object in the Give the element a new name box. Select the type of element you are importing from the element dropdown list. If you selected Exterior Furniture or Exterior Accessories, you have the option of inserting the element on the floor of the current building location, or on the terrain, or landscape. Select either Insert on location or Insert on terrain. Click the Select button to open the Open dialog. Locate and select the file to import, and then click Open. You can import DXF and 3DS files. The Block Import Options dialog opens.
6. 7.
8.
Specify how you want the components to be created by selecting an option from the Create Components From drop-down list. For DXF files you can select Colors or Layers. Because 3DS objects are an assembly of materials, you must select Materials.
9.
Click Next.
660
10. If you know what units were used to create the object, select the units from the Which units were used to create the original object? drop-down list. Otherwise, select the unit of measure that will result in a logical Resultant Width, Resultant Depth, and Resultant Height. If you select Custom, you can specify a custom scale in the Custom Scale box. The scale is the multiplication factor of the units used for objects in the block. For example, if youre converting a file that you assume was created in feet and inches, the scale is 25.4. 11. Click Next.
12. To display or hide a component in 2D or 3D views, select the component from the list and then click the appropriate eye icon. If you select the Show only selected component check box, only the currently selected component, as shown in the object preview, will be displayed. 13. Click Next.
14. Click Finish. 15. Click to insert the new element in your drawing. 16. Right-click and select Finish.
662
58
OPENING, SAVING, AND PRINTING
After you have started and saved a project, you can work on it whenever you like. You can open a saved project by opening the File menu and selecting Open. After you have opened a project, you can edit, save, print, and export it. You can open more than one project open at a time. When you have more than one project open, you can switch between projects using the Window menu. The Save feature saves the current project under its current name. You can use Save As to save a project under a different name, and Save All to save all currently open projects. By default, one backup of your drawing is saved along with the drawing.
Opening a Saved Project .................................................................................. 664 Changing the Number of Files on the Recently Used File List.......................... 664 Repairing Damaged Projects ............................................................................ 665 Saving Projects ................................................................................................. 665 Saving a Project as a Template......................................................................... 669 Editing the Print Scale ....................................................................................... 672 Printing Drawings .............................................................................................. 673 Closing Projects ................................................................................................ 678
Opening a Saved Project

You can open a saved project (*.bld file) using the Open feature. To open a saved project: 1. 2. Open the File menu and select Open, or click the Open button on the Standard toolbar the Open dialog. Locate the folder in which you saved the project. By default, projects are saved in the following directory: C:\Documents and Settings\<Current User>\My Documents\HGTV Home & Landscape Platinum Suite\Projects 3. Select the project to open, then click Open.
Tip: If the project you want to open is one that you recently worked on, it might be listed in the recently used file list at the bottom of the File menu. Select the file name to open it.
Changing the Number of Files on the Recently Used File List

By default, a maximum of four projects are listed in the recently used file list at the bottom of the File menu. You can increase or decrease this number. To change the number of files in the recently used file list: 1. Open the Settings menu and select Program Settings or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar to open the Program Settings dialog. Enter the maximum number of files to display in the Recently used file list box, or use the arrows to select a number. You can list up to nine files. 3. Click OK.
2.
CHAPTER 58: OPENING, SAVING, AND PRINTING 665
Repairing Damaged Projects

Occasionally, a project might become damaged. Specifically, when drawing walls, an unexpected event can damage the project. The Repair Project feature scans the project for elements that have caused damage, and either fixes or removes them. To repair a damaged project: 1. 2. Open the damaged project in HGTV Home & Landscape. Open the File menu and select Repair Project. You are alerted that a project might cause corrupt elements to be deleted, and asked if you want to repair the project. 3. Click Yes to repair the project. If the recovery is successful, the Recovery Result message appears. If the recovery is not successful, a dialog opens informing you why it was not successful.
Saving Projects
HGTV Home & Landscape has three save features: Save, Save As, and Save All. They are located on the File menu. To save the current project with the current name, or to save the current project for the first time, open the File menu and select Save, or click the Save button on the Standard toolbar. If you are saving for the first time, you are asked to enter a file name. To save the current project with a different name, creating a copy of it, open the File menu and select Save As. Enter a new name in the Save As dialog. To save all currently open projects, open the File menu and select Save All, or click the Save All button on the Standard toolbar.
Setting the Auto Save Option

The Auto Save option saves a project for you at regular intervals. By saving your changes regularly, you can avoid loss of information if a power failure or system error occurs. To set the Automatic Save option: 1. Open the Settings menu and select Program Settings or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar to open the Program Settings dialog. Select the Auto Save check box in the Saving area. Edit the value in the Save time (min) box by entering a new value, or using the arrows to increase or decrease the time. The value in the Save time (min) box is the number of minutes between saves. 4. Click OK.
Notes: Disabling the Auto Save option applies only to the current project. Auto Save turned on by default for all new projects. If you have not yet saved your project, setting the Auto Save option saves your project to a temporary autosave.bld file.
2. 3.
Setting the Number of Backups

By default, one backup drawing is created each time you save your project. You can choose to save multiple backups. Backup files are saved in the same folder as your project files. The format of the first backup file is ProjectName_1.bkp. If you choose to save additional backup files, the number in the file name increments by one for each backup file, for example, ProjectName_2.bkp. The first backup file is always a copy of the currently saved project. If the number of backups is set to two, the second file is a copy of the previously saved project. If the number of backups is set to three, the third backup file is a copy of the project two saves back, and so on. To set the number of backups: 1. Open the Settings menu and select Program Settings or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar to open the Program Settings dialog. Edit the value in the Number of Backups box in the Saving area. Enter the number of backup files to save, or use the arrow keys to increase or decrease the number. Click OK.
2.
3.
Selecting a Default Save Directory

By default, new, unsaved projects are saved in the following directory: C:\Documents and Settings\<Current User>\My Documents\HGTV Home & Landscape Platinum Suite\Projects You can specify a different default save directory. To specify the default save directory: 1. Open the Settings menu and select Program Settings or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar to open the Program Settings dialog. Select Projects Directory from the File Paths list. Click Modify to open the Browse For Folder dialog. Locate and select the folder you want to use as your default save directory, and then click OK. You can create a new folder in which to save projects by clicking Make New Folder. 5. Click OK to close the Program Settings dialog.
2. 3. 4.
Selecting a Directory for Temporary Files

Certain functions create temporary files, which are stored in a directory on your computer. By default, the path to the temporary directory is the following: C:\Documents and Settings\<Current User>\Local Settings\Temp You can specify a different directory in which to store temporary files. To set a different temporary files directory: 1. Open the Settings menu and select Program Settings or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar to open the Program Settings dialog. Select Temporary Directory from the File Paths list. Click Modify to open the Browse For Folder dialog. Locate and select the folder you want to use as your temporary files directory, and then click OK. You can create a new folder in which to save temporary files by clicking Make New Folder. 5. Click OK to close the Program Settings dialog.
2. 3. 4.
Saving a Project as a Template

By default, every new project you start is based on a template, which determines new project settings, such as the unit of measure and building location. You can create a template and include building elements in that template. You can create a template out of any drawing by saving it in the Templates directory. To use the template in new drawings, select the template in your Startup options. To create a template: 1. Start a new project by opening the File menu and selecting New. If you have already created a project that you want to use as a template, go to step 4. 2. Specify the settings that you want to use in new projects. For more information about settings, see Changing the Unit of Measure on page 500. 3. Draw elements that you want to use in new projects. For example, you might want to create a floor plan to use for future projects. Any element you add to this drawing is saved in the template, and will appear in new projects. 4. 5. Open the File menu and select Save As to open the Save As dialog. Locate and select the Templates folder By default, templates are saved in the following directory: C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Nova Development\HGTV Home & Landscape Platinum Suite\Templates 6. 7. Enter a name for the template in the File name box. Click Save.
Selecting a Default Project Template

By default, new projects are based on a template that is installed with HGTV Home & Landscape. Templates determine the units and settings that are used in new projects. You can select a different template to use as the default template when starting new projects. You can use a the templates that accompany HGTV Home & Landscape, or one that you have created yourself. To select a default project template: 1. Open the Settings menu and select Program Settings or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar to open the Program Settings dialog. Select the Startup using Project Template check box in the Startup area. Click the Browse button to the right of the project template name to open the Open dialog. Locate and select the template from the Templates directory, and then click Open.
Note: Only files with the extension .BLD can be used as templates.
2. 3. 4.
5.
Click OK to close the Program Settings dialog.
Note: The new template will be applied to any future projects. The new template isnt applied to the current project.
Disabling the Use of Templates

By default, new projects are based on a template, which determines the units of measurement and other settings, including a set of default building locations. You can start new projects without using a template. When you start a new project, the project workspace is blank and there arent any predefined settings. To disable the use of templates: 1. Open the Settings menu and select Program Settings or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar to open the Program Settings dialog. Clear the Startup using Project Template check box in the Startup area. Click OK to close the Program Settings dialog.
2. 3.
Setting the Path to the Templates Directory

If you move the Templates directory, or if you choose to store templates in a different directory, you must reset the path to the template directory in the Program Settings dialog. The path you set determines the default directory when you browse for templates. By default, templates are stored in the following location: C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Nova Development\HGTV Home & Landscape Platinum Suite\Templates To set the path to your templates directory: 1. Open the Settings menu and select Program Settings or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar to open the Program Settings dialog. Select Templates Directory from the File Paths list. Click Modify to open the Browse For Folder dialog. Locate and select the folder you want to use as your templates directory, and then click OK. You can create a new folder in which to save templates by clicking Make New Folder. 5. Click OK to close the Program Settings dialog.
2. 3. 4.
Editing the Print Scale

The print scale is the ratio of units on paper to real-world units. If the scale is set to 1:1 (12" = 1'- 0"), twelve inches on paper represents one foot of your model. This creates a large printout. A scale of 1:12 (1" = 1'- 0"), however, results in a smaller-scale view when the drawing is printed, because every foot is represented by only one inch on paper. To edit the current windows print scale: 1. 2. 3. 1. 2. 3. 4. Open the View menu and select View Properties, or right-click in the project workspace and select View Properties. In the View Properties dialog, enter the scale in the Scale box, or select a scale from the Scale drop-down list. Click OK. Open the View menu and select View Manager, or click the View Manager button on the View Control toolbar. Select the view to edit and click the Properties button. In the View Properties dialog, enter the scale in the Scale box, or select a scale from the Scale drop-down list. Click OK.
To edit a view windows print scale in the View Manager:
If you change the print scale, your 2D plan doesnt scale on the screen. It is scaled on paper when you print the drawing. The scale you specify in a view windows properties has a direct link to the Print to Scale option in the Print dialog. Changing the print scale has no effect in 3D views, neither on the screen nor in printouts, unless it is an elevation view. A model being viewed in 3D doesnt have concrete measurements as a flat, 2D view does. Elements such as text and dimensions do scale on the screen when you change the scale because they are specified in real-world units. The model on your screen is created using units that are only proportional to realworld units. Regardless of a views print scale, elements such as text and dimensions will always print out at the size that was assigned to them at the time of insertion. For example, if you inserted text that had a 1/2" text height setting, the text will be 1/2" on paper, regardless of the views print scale or what the text looks like on the screen.
Printing Drawings
HGTV Home & Landscape uses the standard Microsoft Windows Print dialog with a few added features, such as a print preview, print area selection, scaling options, and paper placement. To print a drawing: 1. Open the File menu and select Print, or click the Print button on the Standard toolbar to open the Print dialog.
2. 3.
Select a printer from the Name drop-down list. Click Properties to open the printer Properties dialog and specify general printer properties, such as orientation and paper size. When you have finished setting printer properties, click OK to close the printer Properties dialog.
4.
Select the Print to file check box, to save the project to a print file on your computer, rather than print the file on a printer. You might want to print to a file to create a PDF document, for example.
Note: The Preview area shows how the drawing will fit on the paper. If a drawing is too large for the selected paper size, it is automatically tiled across multiple sheets of paper. Separation marks appear in the preview, indicating where the drawing will be divided.
5.
Select the appropriate Print Area option. Select All to print the project extents, which is the portion of your drawing that currently contains elements. As you add new elements, the extents update automatically. Select Display to print what is on-screen in the current view. If only part of your drawing is currently visible, only that part appears in the printout. Select Window to print a specific area of your drawing. You define that area by drawing a bounding window around it. Click the Window button. The Print dialog closes and your pointer is in the project workspace. Click two points in the drawing to define a rectangular window. The Print dialog opens, and the Preview area displays what appears in the printout.
6.
Enter the number of copies to print in the Number of copies box in the Page Setup area, or use the arrows to increase or decrease the numbers.
7.
Select a Print Scaling option in the Page Setup area. Select Print to Scale in the Page Setup area to print the current view according to the scale defined in the View Properties dialog. To see the defined scale, in the project workspace, open the View menu and select View Properties, or right-click in the drawing area and select View Properties. The Print to Scale option is not available when printing most 3D views because 3D views cant be scaled. Elevation views can be scaled, so the Print to Scale option is available for those views.
Note: If you are printing to scale, and the scale of the drawing is too large for the selected paper size, the drawing is automatically tiled across multiple sheets of paper.
Select Fit To Page to scale the drawing to fit the selected paper size. Fit to Page is the default option for 3D views, because 3D views cant be scaled.
8.
Select a Placement option in the Page Setup area. Select Lower left in the Page Setup area, to position the image in the lower left corner of the paper. Select Center on paper to center the image on the paper.
9.
Select an option from the Print Quality drop-down list to set the resolution of the printed image. You can select 150, 300, or 600 dpi. A higher resolution produces images that are sharper and show finer detail, while a lower resolution permits faster printing but shows less detail.
10. Select the Print Line Weights check box to print the lines in your drawing using the weight, or thickness, assigned to them. Clear the Print Line Weights to print all lines with the same thickness. 11. Click OK to print the file.
Printing Across Multiple Sheets of Paper

Most printers cant print documents larger than 11 x 17. However, you might want to print your drawing on a large scale. In this case you can print the drawing in sections onto smaller sheets of paper, and then attach the sheets after printing. To print across multiple sheets of paper: 1. 2. 3. Open the File menu and select Print, or click the Print button on the Standard toolbar to open the Print dialog. Click Properties to open the printer Properties dialog. Select the paper size to use, and then click OK to close the printer Properties dialog. The location of the paper size options vary based on the printer that you use. If you cant find the paper size options, consult the documentation that accompanied your printer. 4. Click the Print to Scale check box. The Preview area displays separation marks representing the individual sheets of paper. You can adjust the print scale as necessary. For more information about print scale, see Editing the Print Scale on page 672. 5. Click OK to print the drawing. The drawing is printed on multiple sheets of paper.
Printing to a File
When you print to a file, you must determine the printer on which the file will be printed. For example, if you are taking your file to a commercial copy location, the file will probably be printed on a PostScript printer. Therefore, you want to print your drawing to a PostScript, or .PS, file. By printing to a file, others can print your HGTV home design drawing, even if HGTV home design software is not installed on their computers. They must have a printer that prints the specified file type. To print to a file: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Open the File menu and select Print, or click the Print button on the Standard toolbar to open the Print dialog. Select the Print to file check box. Click OK to open the Save As dialog. Locate and select the folder where you want to save the print file. Enter a name and extension for the print file in the File name box. For example, MyHouse.ps.
Note: It is important to specify the file extension, because you cant select a file type from the Save as type drop-down list.
6.
Click Save. The drawing is saved to the print file.
Closing Projects
Projects remain open until you close them or exit HGTV Home & Landscape. You can close the active project without exiting. If you have multiple projects open, the drawing that you want to close must be active. To close a drawing: 1. 2. 3. 4. If you have multiple drawings open, open the Window menu and select the drawing that you want to close. Open the File menu and select Close, or click the Close button on the Standard toolbar. If you are asked to save changes, click Yes or No. If you havent yet named the project, and you clicked Yes in step 3, the Save As dialog opens. Enter a name for the project in the File name box, and then click Save.
59
EXPORTING
HGTV Home & Landscape offers three Export features: 2D Image, 2D Drawing, and 3D Model. Using the 2D Image feature, you can export the image on the screen to a BMP, JPG, or TGA file, which can then be opened in an image editing program. Using the 2D Drawing feature, you can export your 2D plan to an AutoCAD DXF file. Using the 3D Model feature, you can export your 3D model to a DXF, 3DS (3D Studio), or WRL (VRML) file. When you open the file in its associated program, you see the actual 3D model in that program.
Exporting the Current View to a 2D Image File ................................................. 680 Exporting the 2D Drawing to a DXF File ........................................................... 681 Exporting the 3D Model..................................................................................... 681
680
Exporting the Current View to a 2D Image File

Using the 2D Image export feature, you can you save the current view to a BMP, JPG, or TGA file, which can then be opened in most image editing programs. To export the current view to an image file: 1. 2. Open the File menu and select Export > 2D Image to open the Save As dialog. Select format of the file you want to export to from the Save as type drop-down list. You can select Bitmap (*.bmp), JPEG (*.jpg), or TARGA (*.tga). 3. 4. 5. Locate the directory where you want to save the exported file. Enter a file name in the File name box. Click Save to open the Export View dialog.
6.
Select the color setting from the Color drop-down list. Choose from Grayscale, 256 Color, High Color (16-bit), High Color (24-bit), or True Color (32-bit), depending on the file type.
7.
Select the output size from the Size drop-down list. By default, Current View is selected, which saves the image at the size currently shown on the screen. You can choose from three preset sizes, or select Custom and enter values in the Width and Height boxes.
8.
Click Save. The view is exported.
CHAPTER 59: EXPORTING 681
Exporting the 2D Drawing to a DXF File

Using the 2D Drawing export feature saves your 2D plan in a 2D, vector drawing format that can be opened in AutoCAD or any program that opens DXF files. To export your 2D drawing to a DXF file: 1. 2. 3. 4. Open the File menu and select Export > 2D Drawing. Locate the directory where you want to save the exported file. Enter a file name in the File name box. Click Save. A message is displayed, confirming that the model has been exported successfully. 5. Click OK.
Exporting the 3D Model

Using the 3D Model export feature, you can save your 3D model in the following 3D file formats: AutoCAD DXF (*.dxf) Autodesk 3D Studio (*.3ds) VRML (*.wrl)
When you open the file in its associated program, you will see the actual 3D model in that program.
682
To export your 3D model: 1. 2. Open the File menu and select Export > 3D Model to open the Save As dialog. Select format of the file you want to export to from the Save as type drop-down list. You can choose from AutoCAD DXF (*.dxf), Autodesk 3D Studio (*.3ds), and VRML (*.wrl). 3. 4. 5. Locate the directory where you want to save the exported file. Enter a file name in the File name box. Click Save. A message is displayed, confirming that the model has been exported successfully. 6. Click OK.
Index
INDEX
Numerics
2D Designers View 79 2D Drawing export 681 2D Image export 680 2D Plan View 78 3D Camera Views changing 82 changing the display mode 93 creating 81 displaying 80 flying around in 89 resetting the camera 91 sliding in 90 spinning the view 91 walking around in 88 3D Model export 681 3D Real View about 615 advanced 621 basic 620 editing settings 624 save location 629 save name 629 saving multiple renderings 631 saving to file 629 setting the viewpoint 617 setting up the scene 617 3D Studio files exporting to 681 importing 657 3DS export 681 3DS import 657
A
Above-ground pools 470 Accessories editing properties 301 inserting 299, 482 moving 299 rotating 300 Add Location 67 Add Sound Node 642 Advanced 3D Real View 621 Air conditioner central 336 Air returns 336 Aligned Dimensions 561 Angle measurements precision 500 Angle Snap 497 Animation adding sounds 642 drawing a path 634 previewing 641 saving to .avi file 648 Annotation Dimensions 553 Text 542 Text with Leader 547 Antialiasing 624 Appearance elements 526 Appliances editing properties 295 inserting 292 moving 293 rotating 293
684
Apply Auto Exterior Dimensions 554 Aquariums 299 Arbors 482 Arcs drawing 574 Area/Perimeter Calculator 503 Auto Exterior Dimensions 554 Auto Interior Dimensions 558 Auto Raytrace 622 AutoCAD exporting 2D plan to 681 exporting 3D model to 681 Auto-cut terrain around building 344 AVI file export 648
Bookshelves 298 Borders garden 482 Bowls 299 Box planters 482 Boxes, garden 482 Building Locations adding 67 current 69 defining 66 deleting 69 filtering from view 126 making selectable/non-selectable Building lot 360, 368 Building Wizard 144 Buildsoft Estimating Export 602 Bulbs changing 317
126
B
Background in 3D views 83 Badminton courts 470 Balustrades 248 Barstools 298 Basic 3D Real View 620 Basketball courts 470 Bathtubs 330 Beds 298 garden 436 Benches 464 Berms creating 348 Bill of Materials 600 Billboard setting 590 Billboards 590 Billiards table 298 Bird baths 482 Bird feeders 482 Bird houses 482 Bitmaps importing for tracing 654 Blank Project 18 Blinds 299 BMP exporting to 680 importing for tracing 654
C
Cabanas 470 Cabinets editing properties 286 inserting 284 inserting sinks into 290 inserting with Kitchen Builder Wizard 278 moving 284 Cable service box 304 CAD objects drawing 570 Camera Views changing 82 creating 81 displaying 80 resetting the camera 91 sliding in 90 spinning the view 91 walking around in 88 Cameras orbiting around targets 89 placing new 81
685 resetting 91 Cars 482 Cathedral ceilings 226 Ceiling fans 312 Ceiling Height 66 Ceiling lights 312 Ceiling Openings creating 230 Ceilings by Perimeter 222 by Room 223 cathedral 226 cutting openings in 230 displaying framing 116 vaulted 226 Center on wall doors 180 opening 184 windows 181 Centimeters working in 500 Central Air Unit 336 Central Vac 304 Central Vac Outlet 322 Chairs 298 patio 464 Change Style dimension 564 Chests 298 Chimneys applying materials to 338 editing height 337 inserting 337 Circle 2 Point 581 Circle Center Radius 580 Circles drawing 580 Cleaning equipment 304 Coffee tables 298 Cold air returns 336 Collision Control 498 Color applying to the terrain 344 applying with Materials Paintbrush changing an elements 526 grid 494 light bulbs 317 Columns attaching footings to 176 decorative 482 inserting 170 Compost box 304 Computer desks 298 Computers 298 Concrete slabs creating 408 Context-sensitive menus 74, 512 Contours showing 344 Copies (print) 673 Copying elements on same location 521 walls to create a new story 154 Cribs 298 Cross-section creating 104 Curtains 299 Curving edging 445 fills 439 paths 430 retaining walls 423 Custom elements importing 657 Cut List printing 607 saving 604 viewing 600 Cut Opening ceiling 230 floors 218 Cutaway dynamic 92
536
686
D
Daylight enabling 624 Decimal precision for angle measurements 500 Deck Builder Wizard 386 Deck Stairs editing properties 403 inserting 402 Deck tool 390 Decks building with Deck Builder Wizard
386
building with Deck tool 390 editing 394 inserting a deck floor 390 inserting stairs 402 Deleting building locations 69 elements 538 walls 152, 425 Deselecting elements 74 Designers View 79 Dimension Styles changing 564 setting current 554 Dimensions about 553 aligned 561 auto exterior 554 auto interior 558 changing style 564 editing an elements 524 linear 560 setting current style 554 Dishwasher 292 Display All But Framing 116 Display Filter 121 Display Mode 93 Display settings adjusting 14 Displaying
elements 124 framing 116 locations 126 Distance measuring 502 Diving board, 470 Doghouses 470 Door mats 482 Doors automatically centering 180 flipping around 190 flipping swing 190 inserting 180 moving 189 Drafting arcs 574 circles 580 lines 570 rectangles 583 Drawing 72 Drawing Grid displaying 494 setting up 494 turning on and off 494 Dressers 298 Driveways 428 Dryer 292 Dumpsters 304 Duplicate 521 Duplicate to Locations 154 DXF export 681 DXF import 657 Dynamic Cutaway 92
E
Edge Shape 226 Edging changing length 444 curving 445 inserting 442 Edit menu 74 Editing about 511
687 accessing edit commands 512 accessing editing tools 74, 512 appliances 295 building locations 66 cabinets 286 deck stairs 403 decks 394 electrical elements 324 element properties 524 equipment 304 exterior accessories 483 exterior furniture 465 exterior structures 472 fills 437 furnishing elements 299 HVAC elements 340 light fixtures 477 nudging elements 515 plumbing fixtures 332 railings 251 ramps 236 stairs 236 walls 151, 156, 422 Editing Mode 72 Effects rendering 624 Electrical Elements editing size 324 lowering 323 moving 323 raising 323 wiring 326 Electrical Junction Box 304 Electrical Wiring changing line style 327 inserting 326 reshaping/stretching 327 Electronics editing properties 301 inserting 298 moving 299 rotating 300 Elements changing elevation 516 deleting 538 editing properties 524 importing external files 657 inserting 72 moving 514 rotating 517 Elevate tool 516 Elevation editing an elements 516 electrical elements 323 Elevations viewing 98 Enable Collision Control 498 Enable Daylight 624 Enable Effects 624 Encyclopedia plant 456 Equipment editing size 306 inserting 304 moving 304 rotating 305 Estimate changing report format 602 generating 600 printing cut list 607 printing quantity report 607 saving cut list 604 saving quantity report 604 specifying name 604 specifying save location 604 Example projects 19 Excavated areas 353 Excel XLS template 607 Exercise equipment 304 Exporting animations to .avi files 648 to 3DS (3D Studio) file 681 to BMP file 680 to DXF file 681 to JPG file 680 to TGA file 680
688
to WRL (VRML) file 681 Extending edging 444 retaining walls, 423 Exterior Accessories editing size 484 inserting 482 moving 483 rotating 483 Exterior Furniture editing size 466 inserting 464 moving 465 rotating 465 Exterior Lighting editing size 477 inserting 476 moving 477 Exterior Structures editing 473 inserting 470 inserting house templates 470 moving 472 rotating 472 Eyedropper 537
F
Faucets 330 Feet/Inches working in 500 Fences editing properties 378 inserting 376 Filing cabinets 298 Fills creating 436 curving 439 reshaping 438 resizing 437 Filtering display 121 elements for selection 124 elements from view 124
landscape elements 124 locations for selection 126 locations from view 126 notation objects 124 Finishing commands 72 Fireplaces indoor 336 outdoor 482 Fit To Page 673 Flip Horizontal 654 Flip Opening 190 Flip Swing 190 Flip Vertical 654 Floor Level 66 Floor Locations adding 67 current 69 defining 66 deleting 69 Floor Openings creating in automatic floors 218 creating in manual floors 218 Floor plan tracing 654 Floor registers 336 Floor to Ceiling Height 145 Floors about 210 cutting openings in 218 deck 390 displaying framing 116 inserting by perimeter 211 inserting by room 212 Flowers 450 Fly Around tool 89 Fog adding to rendering 624 Follow Path 634 Footings attaching strip footings to walls
172
inserting mono footings 176 Format project estimate 602
689 Fountains 482 Framing displaying 116 hiding 116 locking visibility 123 Freezer 292 Furnaces 336 Furniture editing properties 301 interior 298 moving 299 outdoor 464 rotating 300
H
Handicap ramp 234 Handrails 248 Hanging planters 482 Head Height 66 Heater propane 482 Heating elements 336 Height ceiling 66 floor 66 head 66 wall 66 window 66 Height (elevation) editing an elements 516 electrical elements 323 Hidden Line mode 93 Hiding elements 124 framing 116 Hills creating 346 Hot tubs 470 House Builder Wizard canceling, 18 using 144 House Templates 470 HVAC Elements editing properties 340 inserting 336 moving 338 Hydro meter 304
G
Garages 470 Garbage bins 299 Garbage disposals 304 Garden beds 436 Garden borders 482 Garden boxes, raised 482 Garden sheds 414 Gardens 450 Gas Meter 304 Gates editing properties 383 inserting 381 Gazebos 470 Generate Project Estimate 600 Geometry editing 524 Global Settings 618 Golf Holes 470 Greenhouse 470 Grid drawing 494 snap 495 Grid Color 494 Grid Snap 495 Ground Floor Height above Terrain Guardrails 248
I
Image Brightness rendering 624 Importing 3D Studio Files 657 DXF files 657 objects 657 photo boards 590
145
690
text files 542, 547 importing 657 Inches working in 500 In-ground pools 470 Inserting about inserting elements 72 accessories 299 air returns 336 appliances 292 cabinets 284 columns 170 decks 386 doors 180 driveways 428 edging 442 electrical elements 322 electronics 298 equipment 304 exterior accessories 482 exterior furniture 464 exterior structures 470 fences 376 fills 436 floor registers 336 floors 211 gates 381 HVAC elements 336 interior furniture 298 irrigation 488 light fixtures 312, 476 mono footings 176 paths 428 patios 408 photo boards 590, 594 plants 450 plumbing fixtures 330 property lines 360, 368 ramps 234 retaining walls 422 scanned home plan 654 sidewalks 428 site boundary 360, 368
sprinklers 488 stairs 234 text 542 vents 336 walls 150 windows 181 Installing the software 13 Interior dimensions auto 558 Interior Lighting 312 Irrigation editing spray 489 inserting 488 moving 488 rotating 489 ISS Construction Manager template
602
J
Jacks 322 JPG exporting to 680 importing for tracing 654 Jungle Gyms 470
L
Labels inserting 542 Lamps 312 Landscape Lighting editing size 477 inserting 476 moving 477 Landscaping decks 386 edging 442 fences 376 fills 436 filtering elements from view 124 garden beds 436 gates 381 hills and valleys 346 inserting furniture 464
691 inserting house templates 470 inserting structures 470 irrigation 488 paths 428 plants 450 plateaus 353 ponds 436 retaining walls 422 sidewalks 428 slopes 356 terrain 344 Lawn edging 442 Leader with text 547 Lengthening edging 444 retaining walls 423 Levels adding 153 defining locations for 66 Light fixtures editing light source 317 editing size 477 inserting indoors 312 inserting outdoors 476 moving 477 turning on and off 316 Light posts 476 Light switches 322 Lights changing bulbs 317 interior 312 outdoor 476 path 476 Line Style, electrical wiring 327 Line weights printing 673 Linear Dimensions 560 Lines Close option 570 drawing 570 Locations adding 67 current 69 defining 66 deleting 69 filtering 126 selection 126 selection filtering 126 Lock Framing 123 Lock Framing, 126 Look Around tool 91 Lot lines 360, 368 Lounges 464 Lowering electrical elements 323 elements 516
M
Mailboxes 482 Maintain Aspect Ratio 654 Materials applying to terrain 344 applying with Materials Paintbrush
536
changing an elements 526 estimate 600 sampling with the Eyedropper 537 Materials Paintbrush 526, 536 sampling materials with the Eyedropper 537 Mats door 482 Measure tool 502 Measuring area 503 perimeter 503 Medicine cabinets 299 Menus for editing 74, 512 Mesh Spacing 344 Meters utility 304 working in 500 Microwave 292 Millimeters working in 500 Mirrors 299
692
Modify Elements 74, 512 Modify Viewpoint 620, 622 Mono Footings Attached to Columns Mouse scroll zooming 111 Moving accessories 299 appliances 293 cabinets 284 doors 189 electrical elements 323 electronics 299 elements 514 elements vertically 516 equipment 304 exterior accessories 483 exterior furniture 465 exterior lighting 477 exterior structures 472 furniture 299 HVAC elements 338 irrigation 488 nudging elements 515 openings 189 plants 451 plumbing fixtures 331 sprinklers 488 walls 151, 422 windows 189 Mugs 299 Mulched beds 436 Multiple text insert 542, 547
Number of copies 673 Number of Floors 145
176
O
Obelisks 482 Object Import Wizard 657 Object Snap using 496 OBJSNAP 496 Office furniture 298 Open 664 Open Samples 19 Opening sample projects 19 saved projects 664 Openings automatically centering on walls
184
creating in ceilings 230 creating in floors 218 inserting in walls 184 moving 189 Ortho 497 Outdoor accessories 482 Outdoor fireplaces 482 Outdoor furniture 464 Outdoor structures 470 Outlets 322 Oven 292
P
Pad footings inserting 176 Pads inserting 408 Paintbrush materials 526, 536 Panning 112 Pans 299 Paper size 673 Path lights 476 Paths curving 430
N
Name building location 66 New Project 18 Nightstands 298 North arrows 482 Notation filtering 124 Nudging elements 515 Number location 66
693 drawing 428 drawing for animations 634 editing thickness 431 editing width 431 Patio furniture 464 Patio umbrellas 482 Patios creating 408 Patterned mode 95 Patterns editing on elements 526 Perimeter calculator 503 Phone jacks 322 Photo Boards importing 590 inserting 594 Photo realistic images 615 Pianos 298 Picnic tables 464 Pictures 299 Piers inserting 170 Place New Camera 81 Placement 673 Plan view rendered 79 wireframe 78 Plans importing for tracing 654 Plant Encyclopedia 456 Plant Growth Over Time 454 Plant Seasonal Change 455 Planters 482 Planting age 452 Plants applying seasonal change 455 changing age 452 editing size 452 Encyclopedia 456 inserting 450 moving 451 seeing growth over time 454 Plateaus creating 353 editing height 356 editing peak shape 356 Plates 299 Playgrounds 470 Playhouses 470 Plumbing Fixtures editing size 332 inserting 330 moving 331 rotating 331 Pointer tool 72, 512 Ponds 436 Pool slide 470 Pool table 298 Pools Post edging 442 Posts inserting 170 Pot lights 312 Pots 299 Precision angle measurements 500 for units of measure 500 Pre-defined labels inserting 542 Preview print 673 Preview Animation 641 Pricing editing 608 Print 673 Print Line Weights 673 Print Preview 673 Print Quality 673 Print to file 673 Print to Scale 673 Printing all 673 cut list 607 display 673 drawings 673
470
694
project estimate 607 quantity report 607 to file 673 window 673 Project Estimate changing report format 602 generating 600 printing 607 printing cut list 607 printing quantity report 607 saving cut list 604 saving quantity report 604 selecting report template 607 specifying name 604 specifying save location 604 Project Trace Image importing 654 Projects opening 664 sample 19 saving 665 Propane heater 482 Properties element 524 Property lines 360, 368
by Picking Points 250 by picking points 250 editing properties 251 horizontal 250 inserting 248 inserting on a floor 250 inserting on stairs automatically
248
on stair center 250 on stair left 249 on stair right 249 Rails (edging) 442 Raised garden boxes 482 Raising electrical elements 323 elements 516 Ramps editing 236 editing size properties 236 inserting 234 Range 292 Raytrace Automatically after Radiosity 624 Raytrace option 620, 622 Raytracing automatically 622 basic 620 Recording animations 648 Rectangles drawing 583 Recycling box 304 Redo 514 Refrigerator 292 Registers 336 Render 3D Real View 620, 621 Render to File 629, 631 Render to File, 624 Rendered 2D plan view 79 Rendered mode 94 Rendered Outline mode 94 Rendering about 615 advanced 621
Q
Quality Level rendering 624 Quantity Report generating 600 printing 607 saving 604
R
Radiosity 621 Radiosity option 622 Radiosity Solution calculating 622 continuing 622 resetting 622 Rail edging 442 Railings
695 basic 620 saving multiple image files 631 saving to file 629 setting the viewpoint 617 setting up scene 617 Replacing elements 523 walls 155 Report material 600 Report format estimate 602 Reset Camera 91 Reset Radiosity Solution 622 Reshaping filled areas 438 wiring segments 327 Resizing exterior wall layout 151, 152 fills 437 Resolution setting 14 Retaining Walls curving 423 drawing 422 lengthening 423 shortening 423 Right-click menus accessing 74, 512 Roofs displaying framing 116 Room Division 218 Rotating accessories 300 appliances 293 electronics 300 elements 517 equipment 305 exterior accessories 483 exterior furniture 465 exterior structures 472 furniture 300 irrigation 489 plumbing fixtures 331 sprinklers 489 Rugs 299
S
Sample projects 19 Sampling materials 537 Sandboxes 470 Satellite dishes 304 Save 665 Save All 665 Save As 665 Save location 3D Real View image 629 project estimate 604 Saved Project 664 Saving 3D Real View renderings 629 animations 648 cut list 604 multiple rendered images in same project 631 project estimate 604 projects 665 quantity report 604 to 3DS (3D Studio) file 681 to BMP file 680 to DXF file 681 to JPG file 680 to TGA file 680 to WRL (VRML) file 681 Scaling, in printing 673 Scanned floor plans importing 654 Scene setup for rendering 617 Sconces 312 Screen area size setting 14 Screened rooms 470 Scroll wheel mouse zooming with 111 Season Change 455 Second Floor
696
adding 153 Section Views creating 104 Select All 73, 124 Select None 124 Select Previous 73 Select/Edit 72, 512 Selectability of elements 124 Selecting elements 73 Selection Filter building locations 126 elements 124 Selection mode 72, 512 Setbacks, defining 361 Shed Builder Wizard 414 Sheds building with Shed Builder Wizard editing 419 inserting pre-made 470 Shelves 298 Shortcut menus 74, 512 Shortening edging 444 retaining walls 423 Show contours 344 Show Grid, 503 Shower curtains 299 Showers 330 Shrubs 450 Shutters 299 Sidewalks 428 Sinks 290, 330 Site Boundary defining setback distances 361 inserting 360, 368 Size editing an elements 524 Skirt Width 226 Slabs creating 408
414
Slide tool 90 Slopes creating 356 Sloping ceilings 226 Smoke adding to rendering 624 Smoke detectors 322 Snap Angle 497 Snapping at defined angles 497 orthogonal 497 to drawing grid 495 to objects 496 Sofas 298 Soil beds 436 Sounds adding to animation 642 Specify Target 634 Spinning in 3D view 91 Spray properties sprinkler 489 Sprinklers editing spray properties 489 inserting 488 moving 488 rotating 489 Square footage measuring 503 Stairs adding to deck 402 cutting opening in floor 218 editing 236 editing size properties 236 inserting 234 inserting railings on 248 Standard Report Form template 607 Start a New Project 18 Stationary photo board 590 Stepped footings 172 Stop Radiosity Solution 622 Storage sheds 470 Stories adding 153
697 defining locations for 66 Stretching edging 444 exterior wall layout 151 fills 437 retaining walls, 423 walls 151, 152 wiring segments 327 Strip footings inserting 172 Structures exterior 470 Sundials 482 Survey site 360, 368 Swing flipping 190 Swings 470 Switches 322 Textures applying different textures to elements 526 applying to the terrain 344 TGA exporting to 680 importing for tracing 654 Thermostats 322 Timberline Precision Estimating template 602 Toaster 292 Toilet paper dispenser 299 Toilets 330 Tool sheds 414 Topography recreating 343 Towel accessories 299 Tracing imported floor plans 654 Trampolines 470 Transformer Box 304 Trash cans 304 Trash Compactor 292 Trees 450 Trellises 482 Trenches creating 348 Tubs 330
T
Tables 298 patio 464 picnic 464 TakeOff Plus template 602 Telephone service box 304 Telephones 298 Television outlets 322 Televisions 298 Template estimate 607 house 470 Tennis courts 470 Terrain applying a texture and color 344 settings 344 Text adding 542 editing 544 importing text files 542, 547 with leader 547 Text with Leader adding 547
U
Umbrella patio 482 Undo 514 Units of Measure for angles 500 general 500 Update display every x steps 624 Utility meters 304
V
Valleys inserting 346 Vaulted ceilings 226 Vegetable garden boxes 482
698
Vents 336 View Angle animation 634 View Filter about 121 filtering elements for selection 124 filtering elements from view 124 filtering locations 126 filtering notation objects 124 Viewing 2D Designers View 79 displaying/hiding items 121 dynamic cutaway 92 elevations 98 framing 116 in 3D 80 section views 104 Viewpoint in 3D Real View renderings 617 Volleyball courts 470 VRML export 681
W
Walk Around tool 88 Wall air returns 336 Wall Height 66 Wall lights 312 Wall Openings automatically centering 184 inserting 184 Walls attaching strip footings to 172 deleting 152, 425 displayed framing 116 drawing 150 editing 156 inserting openings in 184 moving 151, 422 replacing 155 retaining 422 second floor 154 stretching 151, 152 stretching the layout 151
Washer 292 Water heaters 336 Wattage light bulb 317 Weather vanes 482 Windchimes 482 Windmills 482 Window treatments 299 Windows automatically centering, 181 flipping around 190 inserting 181 moving 189 WinEstimator template 602 Wireframe mode 93 Wiring changing line style 327 inserting 326 reshaping 327 stretching 327 Wizards Deck Builder 386 House Builder 144 Object Import 657 Photo Board 590 Shed Builder 414 Wood stoves 336 WRL export 681
Y
you 512
Z
Zoom In 110 Zoom Out 110 Zoom Previous 113 Zoom Realtime 110 Zoom to Fit 112 Zoom Window 111 Zooming with scroll wheel mouse
111

HGTV User Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

HGTV User Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

User Guide

HGTV HOME DESIGN SOFTWARE USER GUIDE

END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT

HGTV HOME DESIGN SOFTWARE USER GUIDE

CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION .......................................................... 3

CHAPTER 2: INSTALLING HGTV HOME DESIGN SOFTWARE ... 11

CHAPTER 3: USING HGTV HOME DESIGN SOFTWARE ............. 17

HGTV HOME DESIGN SOFTWARE USER GUIDE

CHAPTER 4: LEARNING HGTV HOME DESIGN SOFTWARE ...... 29

CHAPTER 5: BUILDING LOCATIONS............................................. 65

CHAPTER 6: DRAWING AND EDITING BASICS............................ 71

CONTROLLING THE VIEW

CHAPTER 7: 2D AND 3D VIEWING................................................. 77

CHAPTER 8: ELEVATIONS AND SECTIONS................................. 97

CHAPTER 9: ZOOMING AND PANNING ...................................... 109

CHAPTER 10: FRAMING ............................................................... 115

CHAPTER 11: VIEW FILTER ......................................................... 121

CHAPTER 12: VIEW MANAGEMENT............................................ 131

BUILDING YOUR HOME

CHAPTER 13: HOUSE BUILDER WIZARD................................... 143

HGTV HOME DESIGN SOFTWARE USER GUIDE

CHAPTER 14: WALLS ................................................................... 149

CHAPTER 15: COLUMNS AND FOOTINGS ................................. 169

CHAPTER 16: DOORS, WINDOWS, AND OPENINGS ................. 179

CHAPTER 17: FLOORS ................................................................. 209

CHAPTER 18: CEILINGS ............................................................... 221

CHAPTER 19: STAIRS, RAMPS, AND RAILINGS........................ 233

HGTV HOME DESIGN SOFTWARE USER GUIDE

CHAPTER 20: ROOFS ................................................................... 257

DESIGNING THE INTERIOR

CHAPTER 21: KITCHEN BUILDER WIZARD................................ 277

CHAPTER 22: CABINETS.............................................................. 283

CHAPTER 23: APPLIANCES ......................................................... 291

CHAPTER 24: INTERIOR FURNITURE, ELECTRONICS, AND OTHER ACCESSORIES.......................................................... 297

CHAPTER 25: INTERIOR EQUIPMENT ........................................ 303

CHAPTER 26: INTERIOR LIGHTING............................................. 311

HGTV HOME DESIGN SOFTWARE USER GUIDE

CHAPTER 27: ELECTRICAL ......................................................... 321

CHAPTER 28: PLUMBING ............................................................. 329

CHAPTER 29: HVAC ...................................................................... 335

CHAPTER 30: TERRAIN MODELING............................................ 343

CHAPTER 31: SITE BOUNDARIES............................................... 359

ADDING EXTERIOR DESIGN ELEMENTS

CHAPTER 32: FENCES AND GATES ........................................... 375

CHAPTER 33: DECKS ................................................................... 385

HGTV HOME DESIGN SOFTWARE USER GUIDE

CHAPTER 34: PATIOS................................................................... 407

CHAPTER 35: SHED BUILDER WIZARD...................................... 413

CHAPTER 36: RETAINING WALLS............................................... 421

CHAPTER 37: SIDEWALKS, PATHWAYS, AND DRIVEWAYS ... 427

CHAPTER 39: EDGING.................................................................. 441

CHAPTER 40: TREES, SHRUBS, AND PLANTS.......................... 449

HGTV HOME DESIGN SOFTWARE USER GUIDE

CHAPTER 41: EXTERIOR FURNITURE ........................................ 463

CHAPTER 42: EXTERIOR STRUCTURES .................................... 469

CHAPTER 43: EXTERIOR LIGHTING............................................ 475

CHAPTER 44: EXTERIOR ACCESSORIES................................... 481

CHAPTER 45: IRRIGATION ........................................................... 487

DRAWING AND EDITING TOOLS

CHAPTER 46: DRAWING AIDS..................................................... 493

CHAPTER 47: MEASUREMENT.................................................... 499

CHAPTER 48: COMMANDER........................................................ 505

HGTV HOME DESIGN SOFTWARE USER GUIDE